all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 1.29 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 10 | Users Manual | 3.98 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 11 | Users Manual | 2.57 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 5.70 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 13 | Users Manual | 5.75 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 14 | Users Manual | 3.74 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 15 | Users Manual | 5.56 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 16 | Users Manual | 5.80 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 17 | Users Manual | 5.81 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.95 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 5.56 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 5.26 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 3.14 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 5.67 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 4.99 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 2.42 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 9 | Users Manual | 4.60 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 1 | Internal Photos | 2.19 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 2 | Internal Photos | 2.99 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 939.06 KiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
Label | ID Label/Location Info | 232.26 KiB | May 21 2021 / May 24 2021 | |||
1 2 |
|
C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 82.44 KiB | June 26 2023 | |||
1 2 |
|
Covered Equipment Attestation | Attestation Statements | 161.68 KiB | June 26 2023 | |||
1 2 |
|
RF Exposure | RF Exposure Info | 40.40 KiB | June 26 2023 | |||
1 2 |
|
Test Report | Test Report | 314.73 KiB | June 26 2023 | |||
1 2 |
|
Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 125.30 KiB | June 26 2023 | |||
1 2 |
|
US Agent of Process Attestation | Attestation Statements | 154.39 KiB | June 26 2023 | |||
1 2 |
|
Agents Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 147.64 KiB | May 21 2021 / May 24 2021 | |||
1 2 | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | May 21 2021 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | BoM | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 21 2021 | confidential | ||||
1 2 |
|
Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 29.83 KiB | May 21 2021 / May 24 2021 | |||
1 2 | Operating Description | Operational Description | May 21 2021 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Schematics | Schematics | May 21 2021 | confidential |
1 2 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 1.29 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
Installation Manual MARINE RADAR Model FAR-2218(-BB)/2228(-BB/-NXT/-NXT-BB)/
FAR-2318/2328(-NXT)/FAR-2238S(-BB/-NXT/-NXT-BB)/
FAR-2338S(-NXT)/2328W/2338SW/2258/2268DS 3.1 How to Open the Radar Installation Menu ..3-3 3.2 How to Align the Heading ...................3-3 3.3 How to Adjust the Sweep Timing ........3-4 3.4 How to Suppress Main Bang ..............3-5 3.5 Other Settings .....................................3-5 3.6 How to Control Charts.......................3-26 INPUT/OUTPUT DATA ...................4-1 4. 4.1 Processor Unit ....................................4-1 4.2 Sub Monitor.........................................4-3 APPENDIX 1 JIS CABLE GUIDE.....AP-1 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE..AP-2 PACKING LISTS ................................. A-1 OUTLINE DRAWINGS ........................ D-1 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..... S-1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................i SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ..................iv EQUIPMENT LISTS..............................xiv 1. INSTALLATION...............................1-1 1.1 Antenna Unit (X-band Radar) .............1-1 1.2 Antenna Unit (S-band Radar) ...........1-10 1.3 Monitor Unit.......................................1-18 1.4 Control Unit .......................................1-19 1.5 Power Supply Unit ............................1-25 1.6 Processor Unit ..................................1-27 1.7 Transceiver Unit................................1-28 1.8 Intelligent Hub (option)......................1-29 1.9 Switching Hub (option)......................1-30 1.10 Junction Box (option) ........................1-30 2. WIRING............................................2-1 2.1 Overview .............................................2-1 2.2 Antenna Unit for X-band, TR-UP Radar......................................2-6 2.3 Antenna Unit for X-band, TR-DOWN Radar .............................2-19 2.4 Antenna Unit for S-band, TR-UP Radar....................................2-25 2.5 Antenna Unit for S-band, TR-DOWN Radar .............................2-37 2.6 Power Supply Unit ............................2-43 2.7 Transceiver Unit................................2-50 2.8 Processor Unit ..................................2-56 2.9 Monitor Unit.......................................2-63 2.10 LAN Signal Converter .......................2-64 2.11 Junction Box (option) ........................2-68 2.12 Intelligent HUB (option).....................2-69 2.13 VDR Connection ...............................2-69 3. ADJUSTMENTS ..............................3-1 All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders. www.furuno.com The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free. 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer All rights reserved. Printed in Japan Pub. No. IME-36520-N21
(AKMU ) FAR-2xx8 series A : NOV. 2017 N21 : MAR. 25, 2021 0 0 0 1 9 8 1 0 4 1 2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The installer must read the applicable safety instructions before attempting to operate or install the equipment. DANGER Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury. Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action DANGER Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the antenna unit. Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast. WARNING WARNING Do not open the equipment. This equipment uses high voltage electricity which can shock, burn or cause serious injury. Only qualified personnel can work inside the equipment. Construct a suitable service platform from which to install the antenna unit. Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast. Turn off the power at the mains switchboard before beginning the installation. Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result if the power is left on or is applied while the equipment is being installed. Be sure that the power supply is compatible with the voltage rating of the equipment. Connection of an incorrect power supply can cause fire or damage the equipment. Use only the specified power cable. Fire or damage to the equipment can result if a different cable is used. Do not install the units (other than the antenna unit) in a dusty environment, or one where the units may get wet from rain or water splash. Dust or water in the units can result in fire, electrical shock, or damage to the equipment. Attach protective earth securely to the ship's body. The protective earth (grounding) is required for the AC power supply to prevent electrical shock. i SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table below. If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution. See the installation manual for how to manage blind sectors. Model Transceiver Magnetron Magnetron radar FAR-2218(-BB) FAR-2318 RTR-105 (12 kW) FNE1201 FAR-2228(-BB) FAR-2328 RTR-106 (25 kW) MG5436 FAR-2328W RTR-108 (25 kW) FAR-2238S(-BB) FAR-2338S RTR-107 (30 kW) MG5223F FAR-2338SW RTR-109 (30 kW) FAR-2258 RTR-122 (50 kW) 9M31 FAR-2268DS RTR-144 (60 kW) MG5240F Solid state radar FAR-2228-NXT(-BB) FAR-2328-NXT RTR-123 (600 W) FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB) FAR-2338S-NXT RTR-111 (250 W) Antenna* 100 W/m2 50 W/m2 XN12CF 1.4 m 0.6 m XN20CF 0.9 m 0.4 m XN24CF 0.6 m 0.3 m 2.7 m 1.3 m XN12CF 1.7 m 1.0 m XN20CF 1.3 m 0.7 m XN24CF 0.5 m XN20CF 1.2 m 0.3 m XN24CF 0.9 m 1.7 m 2.4 m SN24CF**
1.4 m 2.1 m SN30CF**
N/A 0.5 m SN36CF 0.26 m N/A SN36CF XN24AF**
4.5 m 2.3 m XN30AF**
4.3 m 2.3 m SN30AF**
3.15 m 1.42 m SN36AF**
3.0 m 1.3 m SN30DF**
3.3 m 1.65 m XN12CF 0.3 m 0.7 m XN20CF 0.24 m 0.32 m XN24CF 0.19 m 0.29 m N/A N/A SN24CF**
N/A N/A SN30CF**
N/A N/A SN36CF 10 W/m2 4.4 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 9.5 m 6.8 m 5.5 m 5.5 m 4.0 m 3.8 m 3.4 m 4.6 m 2.3 m 13.9 m 13.9 m 15 m 16 m 15.6 m 3.3 m 1.9 m 1.6 m N/A N/A 1.0 m
*: The following numerical values, shown in the antenna types, indicate antenna length.
[12]: 4 ft, [20]: 6.5 ft, [24]: 8 ft, [30]: 10 ft, [36]: 12 ft
**: Unavailable on IMO-type radars CAUTION CAUTION Follow the instructions in this manual to ensure correct installation and connection with all related equipment. For FAR-2258/2268DS radars, turn the Processor Unit and the Power Supply Unit off before maintenance. Install the antenna in a location accessible only to authorized technicians, such as a radar mast, etc. ii SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION Observe the following compass safe distances to prevent deviation of a magnetic compass:
Unit Antenna Unit
(X-band, TR-UP, 12 kW, magnetron radar ) Antenna Unit
(X-band, TR-UP, 25 kW, magnetron radar) Antenna Unit
(X-band, TR-UP, 50 kW, magnetron radar) Standard compass Steering compass 2.15 m 1.40 m 2.45 m 1.60 m Unit Standard compass Steering compass Processor Unit (RPU-025) 2.85 m 1.80 m Power Supply Unit (PSU-019) 1.30 m 0.80 m Monitor Unit (MU-190) 1.65 m 1.05 m 4.05 m 2.65 m Monitor Unit (MU-231) 0.85 m 0.55 m Antenna Unit
(X-band, TR-UP, solid state radar) 1.15 m 0.70 m Monitor Unit (MU-270W) 0.90 m 0.55 m Antenna Unit
(S-band, TR-UP, magnetron radar) 3.05 m 1.90 m Antenna Unit
(S-band, TR-UP, 60 kW, magnetron radar) 4.65 m 3.05 m Monitor Unit (MU-190HD) 1.05 m 0.65 m Control Unit (RCU-014) 0.50 m 0.30 m Control Unit (RCU-015) 0.95 m 0.60 m Antenna Unit
(S-band, TR-UP, solid state radar) 1.90 m 1.20 m Control Unit (RCU-016) 0.95 m 0.60 m Antenna Unit
(X-band, TR-DOWN) Antenna Unit
(S-band, TR-DOWN) 1.90 m 1.20 m 1.55 m 0.95 m Control Unit (RCU-031) 0.30 m 0.30 m Transceiver Unit (RTR-108) 2.00 m 1.25 m Transceiver Unit (RTR-109) 4.50 m 2.90 m Intelligent HUB (HUB-3000) 1.20 m 0.75 m Switching HUB (HUB-100) 1.00 m 0.60 m Junction Box (RJB-001) 1.10 m 0.70 m Note: For more information, please refer to IMO SN/Circ.271 Guidelines for the installation of shipborne radar equipment. iii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NOTICE IMO-type radar(s) must be interconnected to the following type approved sensors. For other radar types, it is recommended to connect the following type approved sensors:
EPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
Gyrocompass (or equivalent devices) meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution A.424(XI).
SDME meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72). The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing units having approved LAN ports. Standard connection Basic configuration is shown with solid line. For footnotes, see "Notes" on page x. X-band (TR-UP), 12 kW/25 kW/600 W
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply for FAR-2228-NXT(-BB)/2328-NXT, 600 W
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32B*7) XN12CF-RSB128-123 XN20CF-RSB128-123 XN24CF-RSB128-123 Sub monitor 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 or RCU-031*11 Antenna Unit Antenna Cable*10 for FAR-2218(-BB)/2318, 12 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A*7) XN12CF-RSB128-105 XN20CF-RSB128-105 XN24CF-RSB128-105 for FAR-2228(-BB)/2328, 25 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A*7) XN12CF-RSB128-106 XN20CF-RSB128-106 XN24CF-RSB128-106 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Control Unit RCU-016 Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) 100-230 VAC 12-24 VDC Monitor Unit*3 MU-190/MU-231/MU-270W or Monitor Unit*3 MU-190HD*11 100-230 VAC Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Switching Hub HUB-100 OR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*6 AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Processor Unit RPU-025 VDR (Analog RGB) Sub monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Transformer 24 VDC 100/110/120 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Rectifier PR-850A For AC power For DC power Sub monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 USB Mouse USB Device*9 iv X-band (TR-UP), 50 kW
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Antenna Unit for FAR-2258, 50kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A*7) XN24AF-RSB139-122*11 XN30AF-RSB139-122*11 Antenna Cable Motor Cable Power Supply Unit PSU-019 Antenna Cable External radar Sub monitor 1 Sub monitor 2 Sub monitor 3 Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*11 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Control Unit RCU-016 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*11 USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Switching Hub HUB-100*6 OR Intelligent Hub-
HUB-3000 Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(Analog RGB) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Processor Unit RPU-025 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Transformer Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 v SYSTEM CONFIGURATION S-band (TR-UP), 30 kW/250W) Antenna Unit for FAR-2238S(-BB)/2338S, 30 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-52A*7 SN24CF-RSB129-107*11 SN30CF-RSB129-107*11 SN36CF-RSB129-107 Sub monitor 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer) Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 or RCU-031*11 Control Unit RCU-016 USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Switching Hub HUB-100 OR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*6 VDR
(Analog RGB) Transformer 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Antenna Unit for FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT, 250 W
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-52B*7) SN24CF-RSB133-111*11 SN30CF-RSB133-111*11 SN36CF-RSB133-111 Antenna Cable
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) Processor Unit RPU-025 AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Sub monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 vi S-band (TR-UP), 60 kW SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Antenna Unit for FAR-2268DS, 60 kW SN30AF-RSB144-129*11 SN36AF-RSB144-129*11 SN30DF-RSB144-129*11 Antenna Cable Motor Cable Power Supply Unit PSU-019 Antenna Cable External radar Sub monitor 1 Sub monitor 2 Sub monitor 3 Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*11 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Control Unit RCU-016 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*11 USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Switching Hub HUB-100*6 OR Intelligent Hub-
HUB-3000 Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(Analog RGB) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Processor Unit RPU-025 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Transformer Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 vii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION X-band (TR-DOWN) 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer) Antenna Unit for FAR-2328W, 25 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A) XN20CF-RSB130 XN24CF-RSB130 Signal cable Wave guide Sub monitor Transceiver Unit RTR-108 Antenna Cable
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 Control Unit RCU-016 USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Switching Hub HUB-100 OR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*6 VDR
(Analog RGB) Transformer 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Processor Unit RPU-025 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Sub monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 viii S-band (TR-DOWN) Antenna Unit for FAR-2338SW, 30 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-52A) SN36CF-RSB131 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Signal cable Coaxial cable Sub monitor Transceiver Unit RTR-109 Antenna Cable Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 Control Unit RCU-016 USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Switching Hub HUB-100 OR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*6 VDR
(Analog RGB) Transformer 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Processor Unit RPU-025 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Sub monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 ix SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Category of units Antenna Unit: Exposed to weather Other units: Protected from the weather Notes 1) The gyrocompass must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution A.424(XI) (and/
or resolution A.821(19) for installation on HSC). The gyrocompass must also have an update rate that is adequate for the ships rate of turn. The update rate must be better than 40 Hz
(HSC) or 20 Hz (conventional vessel). 2) The EPFS must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution MSC.112(73). 3) These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190/MU-190HD for CAT 2 and CAT 2H, MU-231/MU-270W for CAT 1 and CAT 1H. If a different monitor is to be used on IMO vessels, its effective diameter must meet the Category requirements:
CAT 1 and CAT 1H: effective diameter 320 mm or higher CAT 2 and CAT 2H: effective diameter 250 mm or higher For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see its manuals. For BB type, a monitor unit is prepared by user. 4) Characteristics of contact output for Alarm:
(Load current) 250 mA
(Polarity) Normally Open: 2 ports, Normally Close: 2 ports Serial I/O for alarm is also possible, which complies with IEC 61162-1. 5) For configurations with 3 or more radars/ECDIS (FMD-3100/FMD-3200/FMD-3300) connect-
ed, connect via the HUB-3000. For 2 radars, HUB-100 can be used. Connection to a FMD (EC-
DIS) is not available for C-type radars. 6) For configurations with a VDR connected, connect via the HUB-3000. Connection to a VDR is not available for C-type radars. 7) Some antenna configurations do not have an in-built Performance Monitor. This type of anten-
na is not usable for IMO-type radars. 8) For connecting non-FURUNO ECDIS only. For connection of radars or plotters, the connection must be done at the radar antenna (or the transceiver unit) via the sub monitor connector. 9) Available on C-type and A/B/W-type radars with Radar Plotter functionality 10) Junction boxes are required for antenna cable length greater than 100 m (only for TR-UP radar of X-band). Max. cable length is 400 m. 11) Unavailable on IMO-type radars. x SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Interswitch connection When multiple radars are used, connect units as shown in the figure below. This configuration lets each radar function as a standalone radar in case of HUB malfunction. Note: This interswitch connection is NOT available between the different softwares (01.xx version and 50.xx version) even the connections between FAR-2xx8 radars. Solid lines indicate standard supply equipment. Dashed lines indicate optional or local supply equipment. 100-115/220-230 VAC
(for de-icer) Sub Monitor ANTENNA UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT ANTENNA UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT 100-115/220-230 VAC
(for de-icer) Sub Monitor Select one LAN Serial LAN Serial Select one Control Unit RCU-014/RCU-015/RCU-031 Control Unit RCU-016 Select one Control Unit RCU-014 Control Unit RCU-015 Control Unit RCU-016
(Max. 2) HDG, AIS (IEC 61162-2) GPS, LOG, AMS, ECDIS
(IEC 61162-1)
- Digital Out6
(Power fail/system fail/NO2.NC2)
- Digital in (ACK in) Monitor Unit MU-190/MU-231/
MU-270W/MU-190HD
(or equivalent for -BB model) LAN1 Intelligent HUB HUB-3000*1 or Switching HUB HUB-100*2 LAN1 RPU-025 PROCESSOR UNIT Gateway network equipment
(Radar, ECDIS, etc.) RPU-025 PROCESSOR UNIT
*1: Connect HUB-3000 when more than three radars or an ECDIS
(FMD) are connected in the network.
*2: When more than two radars are connected, the HUB-100 is available. Control Unit RCU-014/RCU-015/RCU-031 Control Unit RCU-016 Select one Control Unit RCU-014 Control Unit RCU-015 Control Unit RCU-016
(Max. 2) HDG, AIS (IEC 61162-2) GPS, LOG, AMS, ECDIS
(IEC 61162-1)
- Digital Out6
(Power fail/system fail/NO2.NC2)
- Digital in (ACK in) Monitor Unit MU-190/MU-231/
MU-270W/MU-190HD
(or equivalent for -BB model) VDR LAN2 LAN2 VDR 100-230 VAC or 24 VDC Switching HUB HUB-100 100-230 VAC or 24 VDC Sensor Network (IEC-61162-450) xi SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Radar Component Combinations TRANSCEIVER UNIT ANTENNA UNIT Remarks Band TR-
UP/DN TR-UP X RADAR MODEL FAR-2218(-BB), FAR-2318 FAR-2228(-BB), FAR-2328 FAR-2228-NXT(-BB), FAR-2328-NXT FAR-2258 RTR-105 RTR-106 RTR-123 RTR-122 TR-DN FAR-2328W RTR-108 FAR-2238S(-BB), FAR-2338S RTR-107 TR-UP S FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB), FAR-2338S-NXT RTR-111 FAR-2268DS RTR-144 TR-DN FAR-2338SW RTR-109 Radar Type and Function Availability XN12CF-RSB128 XN20CF-RSB128 XN24CF-RSB128 XN24AF-RSB139 XN30AF-RSB139 XN20CF-RSB130 XN24CF-RSB130 SN24CF-RSB129 SN30CF-RSB129 SN36CF-RSB129 SN24CF-RSB133 SN30CF-RSB133 SN36CF-RSB133 SN30AF-RSB144 SN36AF-RSB144 SN30DF-RSB144 SN36CF-RSB131 NOT available on IMO-type radars SN24CF/SN30CF are NOT available on IMO-type ra-
dars. SN24CF/SN30CF are NOT available on IMO-type ra-
dars. NOT available on IMO-type radars This radar series is available in six specification types to meet the requirements of Authorities, and function availability depends on specification type. IMO: IMO compliant A: Near-IMO specifications B: Standard fishing specifications C: Advanced fishing specifications R: Russian specifications W: Washington Ferry specifications Also, the software version has two main versions as shown below. Radar type availability depends on the software version (Available: , Not available: ). Software version 01.**
50.**
Available type IMO A B C R W Note 1: IMO-type radars with software version 01.** are different from those with software version 50.**. Note 2: For FAR-2258 and 2268DS radars, the software version is with 50.** and the RP board is installed in the processor unit at factory in advance. Note 3: If the software with version 01.** is changed to the software with version 50.**, the RP board in the processor unit is required and the software update of the RP board required as well. xii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The table below shows those functions which are limited to a specific radar type (Available: , Not available: ). The menus which are not mentioned in the table below are available for all types. This manual provides descriptions for all functions in this radar series. Specification type and function availability in [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu Function (Menu items) SCANNER INSTALLA-
TION DUAL RADAR SETTINGS RANGE UNIT ICE MODE SETTINGS TT PRESET TT NO. ALERT I/F SETTINGS ALERT OUT 1/2/3/4 DESTINATION LEAVE INTRUSION BAN WATER TEMP ALERT CURRENT RIP DEPTH ALERT TARGET ALARM AIS CAPACITY FULL(A) AIS CAPACITY FULL(C) EPFS EPFS1 INPUT DTM SEL. EPFS2 INPUT DTM SEL. VDR SETTINGS OVERLAY1/2 RP UPDATE SHUTTLE FERRY SWITCH INPUT PORT SETTINGS NETWORK SETTINGS OTHER SETTINGS A B IMO Type C R Remarks for software ver. For 01.xx ver. W For 01.xx ver. For 50.xx ver. For 50.xx ver. For 01.xx ver. For 01.xx ver. For 50.xx ver.
*: For A/B-type radars with Radar Plotter functionality xiii EQUIPMENT LISTS Standard supply
< X-band TR-UP >
Magnetron radar: FAR-2218(-BB)/2228(-BB)/2318/2328 Solid state radar: FAR-2228-NXT(-BB)/2328-NXT Name Antenna Unit
(Magnetron radar) Type XN12CF-RSB128-105 XN12CF-RSB128-106 XN20CF-RSB128-105 XN20CF-RSB128-106 XN24CF-RSB128-105 XN24CF-RSB128-106 XN12CF-RSB128-123 XN20CF-RSB128-123 XN24CF-RSB128-123 Antenna Unit
(Solid state radar) Processor Unit Monitor Unit MU-190 RPU-025 MU-190HD MU-231 MU-270W RCU-014 RCU-015 RCU-031 CP03-35201 CP03-35401 CP03-35403 CP03-35500 [15M]
CP03-35510 [30M]
CP03-35520 [40M]
CP03-35530 [50M]
CP03-37801 CP03-37803 CP03-25604 FP03-09880 FP03-09860 SP03-17641 Control Unit Installation Materials Accessories Spare Parts Code No.
001-249-860 001-254-980 001-270-070 000-024-096 000-024-097 000-024-098 000-024-099 001-489-150 001-558-550 001-418-420 001-574-480 001-419-140 001-249-740 SP03-17681 001-558-560 SP03-19701 001-531-630 xiv Qty Remarks w/ PM-32A*
w/ PM-32B*
4 ft, 12 kW 4 ft, 25 kW 6.5 ft, 12 kW 6.5 ft, 25 kW 8 ft, 12 kW 8 ft, 25 kW 4 ft, 25 kW 6.5 ft, 25 kW 8 ft, 12 kW For AC power/DC power 19-inch monitor, for AC power 19-inch monitor, for DC power 23.1-inch monitor 27-inch monitor Standard type Trackball type For BB type of C-type radars For radiator For RSB (no de-icer) For RSB (w/de-icer) For Antenna Unit, 15 m For Antenna Unit, 30 m For Antenna Unit, 40 m For Antenna Unit, 50 m For RPU-025, AC power For RPU-025, DC power For RCU-014/015 For RCU-014 For RCU-015 Fuse for RPU-025 of AC power FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-178-084-10) Fuse for RPU-025 of DC power FGBO 125V 20A, 2 pcs.
(000-155-780-10) Fuse for Antenna Unit w/de-icer FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 4 pcs.
(000-155-841-10) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*: Some antenna configurations do not have a built-in Performance Monitor. The Performance Monitor (PM-32A or PM-32B) is mandatory for IMO-type radars. EQUIPMENT LISTS
< X-band TR-UP (Fishing specification) >
Magnetron radar: FAR-2258 Name Antenna Unit Type XN24AF-RSB139-122 XN30AF-RSB139-122 Code No.
Qty 1 Remarks 8 ft, 50 kW w/PM-32A*
10 ft, 50 kW Unavailable on IMO-type ra-
dars. Processor Unit Power Supply Unit Control Unit Installation Materials Accessories Spare Parts RPU-025 PSU-019 RCU-014 RCU-015 RCU-031 CP03-19101 CP03-38700 CP03-33300 [15M]
CP03-33310 [20M]
CP03-33320 [30M]
CP03-33340 [50M]
CP03-33350 [70M]
CP03-38900 [5M]
CP03-38910 [10M]
CP03-38920 [15M]
CP03-38930 [30M]
CP03-38940 [40M]
CP03-38950 [50M]
CP03-38960 [1.5M]
CP03-37801 CP03-25604 CP10-09600 CP03-38801 FP03-09880 FP03-09860 SP03-17641
001-510-420 000-036-619 000-017-041 000-017-042 000-017-043 000-036-639 000-036-640 000-036-633 000-036-634 000-036-635 000-036-636 000-036-637 000-036-638 000-036-786 001-489-150 001-418-420 000-036-274 001-547-980 001-574-480 001-419-140 001-249-740 SP03-15501 008-572-730 SP03-15502 008-572-740 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard type Trackball type Compact type For radiator For RSB For Antenna Unit, 15 m For Antenna Unit, 20 m For Antenna Unit, 30 m For Antenna Unit, 50 m For Antenna Unit, 70 m Cable for RPU-025, 5 m Cable for RPU-025, 10 m Cable for RPU-025, 15 m Cable for RPU-025, 30 m Cable for RPU-025, 40 m Cable for RPU-025, 50 m Cable for RPU-025, 1.5 m For RPU-025 For RCU-014/015 For RCU-031 For PSU-019 For RCU-014 For RCU-015 Fuse for RPU-025 FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs. (000-178-084-10) For PSU, 100 VAC FGBO-A 250V 5A PBF, 2 pcs. (000-155-840-10) For PSU, 220 VAC FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 2 pcs. (000-155-841-10)
*: Some antenna configurations do not have a built-in Performance Monitor. xv Type SN24CF-RSB129-107 Code No.
Qty Remarks EQUIPMENT LISTS
< S-band TR-UP >
Magnetron radar: FAR-2238S(-BB)/2338S Solid state radar: FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT Name Antenna Unit
(Magnetron radar) Antenna Unit
(Solid state radar) SN30CF-RSB129-107 SN36CF-RSB129-107 SN24CF-RSB133-111 SN30CF-RSB133-111 SN36CF-RSB133-111 RPU-025 Control Unit Installation Materials Processor Unit Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W RCU-014 RCU-015 RCU-031 CP03-35202 CP03-35402 CP03-35404 CP03-35500 [15M]
CP03-35510 [30M]
CP03-35520 [40M]
CP03-35530 [50M]
CP03-37801 CP03-25604 FP03-09880 FP03-09860 SP03-17641 Accessories Spare Parts
001-249-880 001-255-430 001-270-080 000-024-096 000-024-097 000-024-098 000-024-099 001-489-150 001-418-420 001-574-480 001-419-140 001-249-740 SP03-17651 001-249-750 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 ft, 30 kW 10 ft, 30 kW 12 ft, 30 kW 8 ft, 250 W 10 ft, 250 W 12 ft, 250 W Unavailable on IMO-
type radars. w/PM-52A*
w/ PM-52A*
Unavailable on IMO-
type radars. w/PM-52B*
w/PM-52B*
19-inch monitor 23.1-inch monitor 27-inch mnnitor Standard type Trackball type For BB type of C-type radars For radiator For RSB (no de-icer) For RSB (w/de-icer) For Antenna Unit, 15 m For Antenna Unit, 30 m For Antenna Unit, 40 m For Antenna Unit, 50 m For RPU-025 For RCU-014/015 For RCU-014 For RCU-015 Fuse for RPU-025 of 24 rpm radar FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-178-084-10) Fuse for RPU-025 of 42 rpm radar FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-155-841-10) FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-178-084-10) Fuse for Antenna Unit w/de-icer FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 4 pcs.
(000-155-841-10) SP03-19701 001-531-630 1
*: Some antenna configurations do not have a built-in Performance Monitor. The Performance Monitor (PM-52A or PM-52B) is mandatory for IMO-type radars xvi
< S-band TR-UP (Fishing specification)>
Magnetron radar: FAR-2268DS Name Antenna Unit Type SN30AF-RSB144-129 SN36AF-RSB144-129 SN30DF-RSB144-129 RPU-025 Processor Unit Control Unit RCU-014 RCU-015 RCU-031 PSU-019 Power Supply Unit Installation Materials CP03-40201 CP03-33300 [15M]
CP03-33310 [20M]
CP03-33320 [30M]
CP03-33340 [50M]
CP03-33350 [70M]
CP03-38900 [5M]
CP03-38910 [10M]
CP03-38920 [15M]
CP03-38930 [30M]
CP03-38940 [40M]
CP03-38950 [50M]
CP03-38960 [1.5M]
CP03-37801 CP03-25604 CP10-09600 CP03-38801 Accessories FP03-09880 FP03-09860 Spare Parts SP03-17641 Code No.
001-599-560 000-017-041 000-017-042 000-017-043 000-036-639 000-036-640 000-036-633 000-036-634 000-036-635 000-036-636 000-036-637 000-036-638 000-036-786 001-489-150 001-418-420 000-036-274 001-547-980 001-574-480 001-419-140 001-249-740 SP03-15501 008-572-730 SP03-15502 008-572-740 EQUIPMENT LISTS Qty Remarks 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 ft, 60 kW 12 ft, 60 kW 10 ft, 60 kW, High gain Unavailable on IMO-type radars. Standard type Trackball type For BB type of C-type radars 220 VAC For RSB For Antenna Unit, 15 m For Antenna Unit, 20 m For Antenna Unit, 30 m For Antenna Unit, 50 m For Antenna Unit, 70 m Cable for RPU-025, 5 m Cable for RPU-025, 10 m Cable for RPU-025, 15 m Cable for RPU-025, 30 m Cable for RPU-025, 40 m Cable for RPU-025, 50 m Cable for RPU-025, 1.5 m For RPU-025 For RCU-014/015 For RCU-031 For PSU-019 For RCU-014 For RCU-015 Fuse for RPU-025 of 24 rpm radar FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs. (000-
178-084-10) For PSU, 100 VAC FGBO-A 250V 5A PBF, 2 pcs. (000-155-840-10) For PSU, 220 VAC FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 2 pcs. (000-155-841-10) xvii EQUIPMENT LISTS
< X-band TR-DOWN >
Magnetron radar: FAR-2328W Name Antenna Unit Transceiver Unit Processor Unit Monitor Unit Control Unit Installation Materials Type XN20CF-RSB130 XN24CF-RSB130 RTR-108 RPU-025 MU-231 MU-270W RCU-014 RCU-015 CP03-35201 CP03-35901 CP03-35902 CP03-35500[15M]
CP03-35510[30M]
CP03-35520[40M]
CP03-35530[50M]
CP03-37801 CP03-25604 CP03-16400 CP03-16410 Code No.
001-249-860 001-300-540 001-300-550 000-024-096 000-024-097 000-024-098 000-024-099 001-489-150 001-418-420 000-086-743 000-086-744 CP03-16420 000-086-745 CP03-16430 000-086-746 Accessories Spare Parts FP03-09880 FP03-09860 SP03-17641 001-574-480 001-419-140 001-249-740 SP03-19701 001-531-630 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remarks w/PM-32A*
6.5 ft 8 ft 23.1-inch monitor 27-inch monitor Standard type Trackball type For radiator For RSB (no de-icer) For RSB (w/de-icer) For Antenna Unit, 15 m For Antenna Unit, 30 m For Antenna Unit, 40 m For Antenna Unit, 50 m For RPU-025 For RCU-014/015 w/CP03-16401 Flexible waveguide, 20 m w/CP03-16411 Flexible waveguide, 30 m w/CP03-16411 Flexible waveguide, 50 m w/CP03-16411 For RCU-014 For RCU-015 Fuse for RPU-025 FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-178-084-10) Fuse for Antenna Unit w/de-icer FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 4 pcs.
(000-155-841-10)
*: The Performance Monitor PM-32A is mandatory for IMO-type radars xviii
< S-band TR-DOWN >
Magnetron radar: FAR-2338SW Name Type SN36CF-RSB131 Antenna Unit Transceiver Unit RTR-109 RPU-025 Processor Unit Monitor Unit Control Unit Installation Materials Accessories Spare Parts MU-231 MU-270W RCU-014 RCU-015 CP03-35202 CP03-36101 CP03-36102 CP03-35500[15M]
CP03-35510[30M]
CP03-35520[40M]
CP03-35530[50M]
CP03-37801 CP03-25604 CP03-36300 CP03-36310 FP03-09880 FP03-09860 SP03-17641
001-249-880 001-301-200 001-301-360 000-024-096 000-024-097 000-024-098 000-024-099 001-489-150 001-418-420 000-025-573 000-025-574 001-574-480 001-419-140 001-249-740 SP03-17651 001-249-750 EQUIPMENT LISTS Code No.
Qty 1 1 1 Remarks 12 ft, w/PM-52A*
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 23.1-inch monitor 27-inch monitor Standard type Trackball type For radiator For RSB (no de-icer) For RSB (w/de-icer) For Antenna Unit, 15 m For Antenna Unit, 30 m For Antenna Unit, 40 m For Antenna Unit, 50 m For RPU-025 For RCU-014/015 Coax cable, 20 m Coax cable, 30 m For RCU-014 For RCU-015 Fuse for RPU-025 of 24 rpm ra-
dar FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-178-084-10) Fuse for RPU-025 of 42 rpm ra-
dar FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-155-841-10) FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF, 2 pcs.
(000-178-084-10) Fuse for Antenna Unit w/de-icer FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF, 4 pcs.
(000-155-841-10) SP03-19701 001-531-630 1
*: The Performance Monitor PM-52A is mandatory for IMO-type radars xix EQUIPMENT LISTS Console type (RCN-319/323/327/305/306) Name Standard Console Spare Parts Type RCN-319 RCN-323 RCN-327 SP03-19200 Qty. 1 Code No.
000-034-305 SP03-19210 000-034-306 SP03-19220 000-034-307 SP03-19230 000-034-308 SP03-19240 000-034-309 1 SP03-19250 000-034-310 SP03-19260 000-034-311 Installation Materials Accessories SP03-19270 000-034-312 CP03-38000 000-034-321 FP03-12700 FP03-12800 000-034-322 000-036-847 1 1 1 Optional supply Remarks For 19-inch monitor For 23.1-inch monitor For 27-inch monitor For X-band radar, S-band
(24rpm) radar, without HUBs. For S-band (42rpm) radar, without HUBs. For X-band radar, S-band
(24rpm) radar, w/ HUB-100. For S-band (42rpm) radar, w/
HUB-100. For X-band radar, S-band
(24rpm) radar, w/ HUB-3000. For S-band (42rpm) radar, w/
HUB-3000. For X-band radar, S-band
(24rpm) radar, w/ HUB-100 and HUB-3000. For S-band (42rpm) radar, w/
HUB-100 and HUB-3000. For RCN-319/323/327 For RCN-305/306 Name Control Unit Type RCU-014 RCU-015 RCU-016 RCU-031 RJB-001 AD-100-E Junction Box AD Converter Signal Cable Assy. S03-9-5 (8-8P) Code No.
000-083-355
008-206-640 S03-9-10 (8-8P) 008-206-650 S03-9-15 (8-8P) 008-209-160 HUB-100 HUB-3000 OP03-226 OP03-227 OP03-231 OP03-232 CP03-28900(10M) CP03-28910(20M) CP03-28920(30M)
001-254-320 001-254-330 001-305-060 001-305-070 000-082-658 000-082-659 000-082-660 Switching HUB Intelligent HUB Deicer Kit Installation Materials xx Remarks Standard type Trackball type Trackball type Compact type For sub monitor of ECDIS, 5 m, RW-4864 w/VH8 connector For sub monitor of ECDIS, 10 m, RW-4864 w/VH8 connector For sub monitor of ECDIS, 15 m, RW-4864 w/VH8 connector For X-band, TR-UP radar For S-band, TR-UP radar For X-band, TR-DOWN radar For S-band, TR-DOWN radar LAN cable for sensor network EQUIPMENT LISTS Type MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W OP26-6 OP26-16 OP26-32 OP26-33 OP26-12 OP26-17 OP26-31 Code No.
001-080-930 001-116-740-01 001-439-090 Remarks 19-inch monitor 23.1- inch monitor 27-inch wide monitor For MU-190/190HD For MU-231 For MU-270W 001-439-110 For MU-270W 001-116-280 001-116-750 001-439-070 For MU-190/190HD For MU-231 For MU-270W Name Monitor Unit Hood Assembly Hood Assembly
(Front) Hood Assembly
(Rear) Flush Mount Kit Flush Mount As-
sembly (Rear) Flushmount Kit FP03-09870 008-535-630 OP03-245 OP03-183 Flush Mount Kit Connection Stand
(20) Connection Stand
(23) Connector Signal Cable Assy. S03-92-15(8P) CP03-28901 OP03-184 001-489-470 008-535-640 008-535-650 008-542-460 001-259-890 S03-92-30(8P) 001-259-900 S03-92-40(8P) 001-259-910 S03-92-50(8P) 001-259-920 S03-92-70(8P) 001-559-440 Bracket Assembly OP26-21 OP26-20 Connection stand
(19) Clamp Assembly Cable Assy. OP03-182 DVI-D/D S-LINK 5M 001-139-310 001-139-300 008-535-620 001-133-960-10 DVI-D/D S-LINK 10M 001-133-980-10 LAN Cable Assembly MOD-Z072-020+
001-167-880-10 MOD-Z072-050+
001-167-890-10 Cable Assy. DSUB9P-X2-A-L5M 001-252-580 DSUB9P-X2-A-L10M 001-252-590 Cable Assembly XH10P-W-6P L=20M 001-437-540 XH10P-W-6P L=30M 001-437-550 For RCU-014/015/016, fixing at rear For RCU-014, using with panel LAN modular plug For sub monitor, 15 m, RW-00136 w/VH8 connector For sub monitor, 30 m, RW-00136 w/VH8 connector For sub monitor, 40 m, RW-00136 w/VH8 connector For sub monitor, 50 m, RW-00136 w/VH8 connector For sub monitor, 70 m, RW-00136 w/VH8 connector For MU-190 connection For MU-190 connection For RCU-014 Between Processor Unit and mon-
itor unit, 5 m Between Processor Unit and mon-
itor unit, 10 m For LAN cable between RPU-025 and HUB-100, 2 m For LAN cable between RPU-025 and HUB-100, 5 m Brilliance control cable for Hat-
teland monitor, 5 m Brilliance control cable for Hat-
teland monitor, 10 m Processor Unit-Control Unit, 20 m Processor Unit-Control Unit, 30 m xxi EQUIPMENT LISTS Name Cable Assembly Connection Stand
(23) Connection Stand
(27) Hood (19) Assem-
bly Hood (23) Assem-
bly Glass Fixing Kit Glass Fixing Kit
(Front) Dust Cover Unit Mounting Base Cable Assembly Hub-Fan Kit Back Cover (19) Back Cover (23) Back Cover (27) Console Kit LAN Signal Converter Cable Extension Kit Bracket Assembly OP26-5 OP03-246 OP24-53 OP24-54 OP24-55 RCN319N RCN323/327N OP26-15 OP26-30 OP03-247-1 OP03-247-2 OP03-247-3 OP03-247-4 OP03-251-1 OP03-251-2 OP03-251-3 OP03-251-4 OP03-248 High Speed Kit PM Installation Kit OP03-254-1 OP03-254-2 OP03-254-3 OP03-254-4 OP03-255-1 OP03-255-3 Standard Cable Kit OP03-256-1 OP03-256-3 Retrofit Cable Kit xxii Type XH10P-W-5P-A L=10M XH10P-W-5P-A L=20M XH10P-W-5P-A L=30M XH10P-W-5P-A L=1.5M OP03-243 Code No. 001-247-690 Remarks For Control Unit (RCU-016), 10 m 001-247-700 For Control Unit (RCU-016), 20 m 001-247-710 For Control Unit (RCU-016), 30 m 001-489-240 For Control Unit (RCU-016), 1.5 m 001-489-370 For MU-231 connection OP03-244 001-489-420 For MU-270W connection OP26-24 OP26-25 OP26-39 OP26-40 001-139-370 MU-190 for RCN-319 001-139-380-01 MU-190 for RCN-323 001-567-000 001-567-010 For MU-190/190HD For MU-190 03-193-7019 OP24-51 001-489-520 001-461-600 For RCN-319/323/327 For RCN-319/323/327 IOK-V0024-2 001-460-210 001-490-320 001-490-580 001-490-590 001-490-600
000-016-270 001-116-730 001-439-060 001-496-560 001-496-570 001-496-580 001-568-890 001-496-600 001-496-610 001-496-620 001-568-950 001-496-640 001-505-240 001-505-250 001-505-290 001-568-860 001-505-320 001-505-350 001-508-020 001-508-030 For LAN cable between RPU-025 and HUB-3000 For RCN-319/323/327 For RCN-319 For RCN-323 For RCN-327 For MU-190/190HD For MU-231 For MU-270W For RSB-133 For RSB-129 For RSB-128, magnetron radar For RSB-128, solid state radar For RSB-133 For RSB-129 For RSB-128, magnetron radar For RSB-128, solid state radar For S-band radar For RSB-133 For RSB-129 For RSB-128, magnetron radar For RSB-128, solid state radar For RSB-129/133 For RSB-128 For RSB-129/133 For RSB-128 EQUIPMENT LISTS Code No. 001-508-160 001-508-170 001-523-270 001-546-980 001-208-050 001-208-060 001-208-070 001-496-900 Remarks For FAR-2xx7 console, w/ AD-100 For FAR-2xx7 console, no AD-100 For software version 01.**
For software version 50.**
LAN cable for HUB-3000 LAN cable for HUB-3000 LAN cable for HUB-3000 For connecting a VDR 000-193-878-**
000-193-877-**
001-461-510 001-304-660 English Japanese For S-band, TR-DOWN radar For X-band, TR-DOWN radar Name Console Replace-
ment Kit RP Board Installation Kit Installation Materials Type OP03-253-1 OP03-253-2 OP03-258-1 OP03-258-4 CP24-02900(10M) CP24-02910(20M) CP24-02920(30M) OP03-252 DVI-BNC Cable Kit Operators Manual OME-36520-*
OMJ-36520-*
BSH-15279 RWA-1050 C-109 Waveguide Tool Waveguide Twisted Waveguide H-Bend Waveguide E-Bend Bracket For Rectguide FR-9 (Less Flex. Wave Guide) Drain Waveguide Waveguide Clamp CP03-00600-W RWA-1040 B-108 RWA-1030 B-107 03-009-0360 OP03-148 FR-9-00 001-304-650 001-304-640 008-477-540 001-102-740 001-351-950 008-198-420 H-type. For X-band, TR-DOWN radar For S-band, TR-DOWN radar CP03-00702 008-197-350 03-011-3228 001-074-670-10 PR-850A 000-025-159 E32-01306-*
J32-01306-*
WV-100 WV-100ST OP03-263 000-178-278-**
000-178-277-**
English, For FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 Japanese, For FAR-2x18/2x28/
2x38 001-562-500 001-562-510 001-576-900 w/ SEA-TRIAL mode OP03-265 001-585-810 OMC-36181-*
000-196-578-**
For Wave Analyzer Deck-Thru Cable Gland Cable Clamping Fixture AC-DC Power Supply Unit Magnetron Re-
placement Instruc-
tion Manual Wave Analyzer SSD Replace-
ment Kit PM Modification Kit Operators Manual (JP/EN) About the category sticker This radar meets the requirements in IEC62388 (Marine naviga-
tion and radiocommunication equipment and systems-Ship-
borne radar-Performance requirements, method of testing and required test results). Check the appropriate box on the sticker which is pre-attached to the Processor Unit, according to your Sticker for category xxiii
1 2 | User Manual 10 | Users Manual | 3.98 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
D-10 D-11 D-12 D-13 D-14 D-15 D-16 D-17 D-18 D-19 D-20 D-21 D-22 D-23 D-24 D-25 D-26 D-27 D-28 D-29 D-30 D-31 D-32 D-33 D-34
1 2 | User Manual 11 | Users Manual | 2.57 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
D-35 D-36 D-37 D-38 D-39 D-40 D-41 D-42
3 3 2 4 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
i k a M a s a m o r i H
0 0 9 0
i k a M a s a m o r i H
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-1
i k a M a s a m o r i H
5 2 5 4 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
0 0 9 0
a s a m o r i H i k a M
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-2
i k a M a s a m o r i H
0 0 9 0
1 3 4 4 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
i k a M a s a m o r i H
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-3
i k a M a s a m o r i H
0 0 9 0
3 2 7 5 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
i k a M a s a m o r i H
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-4
i k a M a s a m o r i H
3 2 7 4 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
0 0 9 0
i k a M a s a m o r i H
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-5
i k a M a s a m o r i H
0 0 9 0
3 2 3 5 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
i k a M a s a m o r i H
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-6
i k a M a s a m o r i H
. 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
0 0 9 0
1 2 9 4 6 1
a s a m o r i H i k a M
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-7
2 2 1 5 6 1 5 2 2 1 0 2 0 2
i k a M a s a m o r i H
0 0 9 0
i k a M a s a m o r i H
I
. K A M H 0 2 0 2
c e D
5 2
S-8
S-9
S-10
u o
o
n c
N D P J
c
, p j
. i o c o n u r u f
k a m a s a m o r i h
. l i a m e
0 0 9 0
9 3 1 2 7 1 5 1 9 0 7 1 0 2
I
. K A M H 7 1 0 2 p e S
5 1
S-11
u o
o
n c
N D P J
c
, p j
. i o c o n u r u f
k a m a s a m o r i h
. l i a m e
0 0 9 0
0 3 3 0 7 1 7 0 1 1 9 1 0 2
I
. K A M H 9 1 0 2
v o N
7
S-12
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 5.70 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
OPERATOR'S MANUAL MARINE RADAR FAR-2218 FAR-2218-BB FAR-2228 FAR-2228-BB FAR-2238S FAR-2238S-BB FAR-2238S-NXT FAR-2238S-NXT-BB FAR-2258 FAR-2268DS FAR-2318 FAR-2328 FAR-2338S FAR-2338S-NXT
(FISHING SPECIFICATION) www.furuno.com Model The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free. 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer All rights reserved. Printed in Japan Pub. No. OME-36521-D21
(REFU ) FAR-2218F A : OCT. 2018 D21 : MAR. 25, 2021 0 0 0 1 9 5 6 2 2 1 3 IMPORTANT NOTICES General This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users. The operator of this equipment must read and follow the instructions in this manual. Wrong operation or maintenance can void the warranty or cause injury. Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO. If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement. The contents of this manual and the equipment specifications can change without notice. The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings. Save this manual for future reference. Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will void the warranty. The following concern acts as our importer in Europe, as defined in DECISION No 768/2008/EC.
- Name: FURUNO EUROPE B.V.
- Address: Ridderhaven 19B, 2984 BT Ridderkerk, The Netherlands The following concern acts as our importer in UK, as defined in SI 2016/1025 as amended SI 2019/
470.
- Name: FURUNO (UK) LTD.
- Address: West Building Penner Road Havant Hampshire PO9 1QY, U.K. InstantAccess bar is a registered trademark of FURUNO Electric co., Ltd. SDHC is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All brand, product names, trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks belong to their respective holders. How to discard this product Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal. How to discard a used battery Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of bat-
tery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit. In the European Union The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. In the USA The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws. Cd Ni-Cd Pb In the other countries There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can in-
crease when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future. i SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The operator must read the applicable safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment. DANGER WARNING CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action WARNING Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy that can be harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table below. Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your admin-
istration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution. This is possible. Ask your FURUNO representative or dealer to provide this feature. Model Transceiver Magnetron Antenna* 100 W/m2 50 W/m2 10 W/m2 Magnetron radar FAR-2218(-BB) FAR-2318 FAR-2228(-BB) FAR-2328 FAR-2238S(-BB) FAR-2338S RTR-105 (12 kW) FNE1201 RTR-106 (25 kW) MG5436 RTR-107 (30 kW) MG5223F FAR-2258 RTR-122 (50 kW) 9M31 FAR-2268DS RTR-129 (60 kW) MG5240F Solid state radar FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB) FAR-2338S-NXT RTR-111 (250 W) XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF SN24CF**
SN30CF**
SN36CF XN24AF XN30AF SN30AF**
SN36AF**
SN30DF**
SN24CF**
SN30CF**
SN36CF 4.4 m 1.4 m 0.6 m 3.0 m 0.9 m 0.4 m 2.5 m 0.6 m 0.3 m 9.5 m 2.7 m 1.3 m 6.8 m 1.7 m 1.0 m 5.5 m 1.3 m 0.7 m 1.7 m 3.8 m 2.4 m 1.4 m 3.4 m 2.1 m N/A 4.6 m 0.5 m 2.3 m 4.5 m 13.9 m 2.3 m 4.3 m 13.9 m 1.42 m 3.15 m 15 m 16 m 1.3 m 3.0 m 1.65 m 3.3 m 15.6 m N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1.0 m N/A N/A N/A
*: The following numerical values, shown in the antenna types, indicate antenna length.
[12]: 4 ft, [20]: 6.5 ft, [24]: 8 ft, [30]: 10 ft, [36]: 12 ft
**: Unavailable on IMO-type radars ii SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. Do not open the equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment. Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit. Post a warning sign near the switch indicating it should not be turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced. If the antenna rotates while there is personnel nearby or servicing the antenna, injury or death may result. Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result. Immediately turn off the power at the ships mains switchboard if water leaks into the equip-
ment or the equipment is emit-
ting smoke or fire. Continued use can cause fatal damage to the equipment. Keep the area around the antenna free of ropes and other items that may get tangled. If the antenna becomes tangled, damage to the equipment or injury to personnel may occur. Make sure no rain or water splash leaks into the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if water leaks into the equipment. Use the proper fuse. Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment or cause fire. Keep heater away from equipment. Heat can alter equipment shape and melt the power cord, which can cause fire or electical shock. Do not place liquid-filled con-
tainers near the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid spills into the equipment. Do not operate the equipment with wet hands. Electrical shock can result. Before servicing the radar, turn off the appropriate external breaker. Power is not removed from the radar simply by turning off its power switch. This equipment has a valid latitude range of 85N to 85S. Operation outside of this range can result in a larger margin of error when calculating position, heading, bearing, etc. iii CAUTION CAUTION The plotting accuracy and response of this TT meets IMO standards. Tracking accuracy is affected by the following:
Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is required to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change. (The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications.) The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the target. Delay is on the order of 15 - 30 seconds for high relative speed; 30 - 60 seconds for low relative speed. The target tracking and pertinent vector calculation accuracy is influenced by the following:
- Echo intensity
- The range measurement accuracy;
characterized by both random and biased measurement errors.
- The angular measurement accuracy;
characterized by beam shape, target glint and bias errors.
- Radar transmission pulsewidth
- Gyrocompass heading error
- Speed log error
- Curent and wind (set & drift)
- Course change (own ship and target) The data generated by TT, AIS and video plotter are intended for reference only. Refer to official nautical charts for detailed and up-to-date information. Do not depend on one navigation device for the navigation of the vessel. Always check your position against all available aids to navigation, for the safety of the vessel and crew. This equipment is not suitable for use in locations where children are likely to be present. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING WARNIN No one navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew. The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position. Electronic aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense. This TT automatically tracks automatically or manually acquired radar targets and calculates their courses and speeds, indicating them by vectors. Since the data generated by the auto plotter are based on what radar targets are selected, the radar must always be optimally tuned for use with the auto plotter, to ensure required targets will not be lost or unwanted targets such as sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked. A target does not always mean a land-mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels but can imply returns from sea surface and clutter. As the level of clutter changes with environment, the operator should properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls to be sure target echoes are not eliminated from the radar screen. WARNING LABEL Warning labels are attached to the equipment. Do not remove any label. If a label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement. WARNING To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside. DISPLAY UNIT, POWER SUPPLY UNIT &
PROCESSOR UNIT Name: Warning Label 1 Type: 86-003-1011-3 Code No.: 100-236-233-10 DANGER Electrical shock hazard. Turn off power before servicing. TRANSCEIVER UNIT
(RTR-105/106/107/108/109) Name: Warning Label Type: 03-160-1042-0 Code No.: 100-302-750-10 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS FOREWORD ................................................................................................................. xiv SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... xx 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................1-1 1.1 Controls Overview ......................................................................................................1-1 1.1.1 Control Unit RCU-014 ....................................................................................1-1 1.1.2 Control Unit RCU-031 (C-types only) .............................................................1-4 1.1.3 Control Unit RCU-015/RCU-016 ....................................................................1-7 1.2 How to Turn the Radar On/Off....................................................................................1-8 1.3 How to Adjust the Brilliance........................................................................................1-9 1.4 Display Overview........................................................................................................1-9 1.4.1 Display examples ...........................................................................................1-9 InstantAccess bar ......................................................................................1-15 1.4.2 1.5 Menu Operations ......................................................................................................1-17 1.5.1 How to open and close the main menu ........................................................1-17 1.5.2 How to operate the menus ...........................................................................1-18 1.5.3 Alphanumeric input.......................................................................................1-19 1.6 How to Use the On-screen Box Menus ....................................................................1-20 1.7 [CURSOR] Menu and Cursor Operations.................................................................1-21 1.7.1 How to show/hide the cursor (C-type only) ..................................................1-21 1.7.2 Cursor data box ............................................................................................1-21 1.7.3 How to Use the [CURSOR] Menu ................................................................1-22 1.7.4 How to change the cursor data attributes (C-type only) ...............................1-23 1.8 Function Keys...........................................................................................................1-24 1.8.1 How to set the function key mode (C-types only) .........................................1-24 1.8.2 How to use the function keys .......................................................................1-25 1.8.3 How to change the function(s) assigned to a key.........................................1-26 1.9 How to Customize Operation....................................................................................1-27 1.10 Heading Input ...........................................................................................................1-30 1.10.1 How to select the data source for heading input ..........................................1-30 1.10.2 How to adjust for magnetic correction (C-types only)...................................1-30 1.11 How to Set Own Ships Speed .................................................................................1-31 1.11.1 Automatic speed input (log or EPFS navigator) ...........................................1-31 1.11.2 Manual speed input ......................................................................................1-32 1.12 Own Ship Position ....................................................................................................1-33 1.12.1 How to set the Own Ship position ................................................................1-33 1.12.2 How to set the display format for position data (C-types only) .....................1-34 1.12.3 How to select the datum to use for positioning (C-types only) .....................1-34 1.13 Date and Time ..........................................................................................................1-35 1.13.1 How to switch between UTC and local date/time .........................................1-35 1.13.2 How to adjust the local time .........................................................................1-35 1.13.3 How to change the date/time display format (C-types only) .........................1-36 1.14 User Settings (IMO-types only) ................................................................................1-36 1.14.1 How to reset the user settings ......................................................................1-38 1.14.2 How to save/load user settings ....................................................................1-38 1.15 How to Start/Stop Transmission ...............................................................................1-39 1.16 How to Tune the Receiver (Magnetron Radars Only) ..............................................1-40 1.16.1 How to select the tuning method ..................................................................1-40 1.16.2 How to initialize tuning..................................................................................1-40 1.16.3 How to tune the receiver manually ...............................................................1-41 v TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.17 How to Select a Pulselength .................................................................................... 1-41 1.17.1 How to select a pulselength ......................................................................... 1-41 1.17.2 How to change the preset pulselength......................................................... 1-42 1.18 MOB Mark ................................................................................................................ 1-42 1.19 How to Adjust Sensitivity.......................................................................................... 1-43 1.20 How to Reduce Sea Clutter...................................................................................... 1-44 1.20.1 How to select the method of clutter adjustment ........................................... 1-44 1.20.2 How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction.......................................................... 1-44 1.20.3 How to manually reduce sea clutter ............................................................. 1-45 1.20.4 How to use the BERTHING STC function.................................................... 1-45 1.21 How to Reduce Rain Clutter..................................................................................... 1-46 1.21.1 How to select the method of rain clutter reduction ....................................... 1-46 1.21.2 How to manually reduce the rain clutter....................................................... 1-46 1.22 Interference Rejector................................................................................................ 1-48 1.23 Echo Stretch............................................................................................................. 1-49 1.24 Echo Averaging........................................................................................................ 1-50 1.25 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function ......................................................... 1-52 1.25.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on/off ........... 1-52 1.25.2 How to adjust the gain in Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) mode.......... 1-52 1.25.3 How to get high sensitivity............................................................................ 1-53 1.25.4 How to suppress false echoes ..................................................................... 1-53 1.26 Noise Rejector.......................................................................................................... 1-54 1.27 Wiper........................................................................................................................ 1-54 1.28 How to Preset Controls for a Specific Navigation Purpose ...................................... 1-55 1.28.1 How to select a customized echo................................................................. 1-61 1.28.2 How to edit a customized echo .................................................................... 1-62 1.28.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings..................... 1-63 1.28.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default settings........ 1-63 1.28.5 How to edit the available customized echoes .............................................. 1-64 1.28.6 How to change the name of a customization (C-types only)........................ 1-64 1.28.7 How to link the customization with a range (C-types only)........................... 1-65 1.29 How to Reject Second-trace Echoes ....................................................................... 1-66 1.30 Orientation Modes.................................................................................................... 1-67 1.30.1 How to select an presentation mode............................................................ 1-67 1.30.2 Description of presentation modes............................................................... 1-67 1.31 How to Select a Range Scale .................................................................................. 1-69 1.32 How to Measure Range ........................................................................................... 1-70 1.32.1 How to show/hide the range rings................................................................ 1-70 1.32.2 How to measure range with the variable range marker (VRM) .................... 1-70 1.32.3 How to set the VRM unit of measurement (C-types only) ............................ 1-72 1.32.4 How to set the short distance measurement unit (C-types only).................. 1-72 1.32.5 How to show TTG to VRM ........................................................................... 1-73 1.33 How to Measure Bearing.......................................................................................... 1-73 1.33.1 Methods to measure bearing ....................................................................... 1-74 1.33.2 True or relative bearing ................................................................................ 1-75 1.34 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL........................................................................ 1-76 1.34.1 How to assess risk of collision using the offset EBL .................................... 1-76 1.34.2 How to set the origin point reference for EBL OFFSET ............................... 1-77 1.35 How to Measure Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ................................... 1-78 1.36 How to Off-Center the Display ................................................................................. 1-81 1.36.1 How to off-center the display from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) .... 1-81 1.36.2 How to off-center the display from the on-screen menu .............................. 1-82 1.37 Target Trails ............................................................................................................. 1-82 1.37.1 True or relative trails .................................................................................... 1-82 1.37.2 Trail time ...................................................................................................... 1-84 1.37.3 Trail gradation .............................................................................................. 1-85 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.37.4 Trail level ......................................................................................................1-85 1.37.5 Narrow trails (C-type only)............................................................................1-86 1.37.6 How to hide the trails temporarily .................................................................1-86 1.37.7 Trail stabilization in true motion ....................................................................1-86 1.37.8 How to erase/restart trails ............................................................................1-87 1.37.9 How to prevent sea clutter in true trails ........................................................1-87 1.37.10How to show/hide OS trails ..........................................................................1-88 1.37.11How to show/hide land trails (C-type only) ...................................................1-88 1.37.12How to set the trail length (C-type only) .......................................................1-89 1.37.13How to set the trail color (C-type only) .........................................................1-89 1.37.14How to remove the colors from a section of a multicolor trail (C-type only) .1-90 1.37.15How to offset the colors for multicolored trail (C-type only) ..........................1-91 1.38 Target Analyzer (C-type only)...................................................................................1-92 1.38.1 How to activate/deactivate the target analyzer.............................................1-93 1.39 Target Alarm.............................................................................................................1-94 1.39.1 How to set a target alarm .............................................................................1-94 1.39.2 How to mute the target alarm .......................................................................1-95 1.39.3 How to deactivate a target alarm..................................................................1-95 1.39.4 How to change target alarm attributes .........................................................1-95 1.40 PI (Parallel Index) Lines ...........................................................................................1-96 1.40.1 How to show/hide the PI lines ......................................................................1-96 1.40.2 How to set the maximum number of lines to display ....................................1-96 1.40.3 How to change PI line bearing and interval ..................................................1-97 1.40.4 How to change the PI line bearing reference (C-type only)..........................1-97 1.40.5 How to change the PI line orientation...........................................................1-98 1.40.6 How to reset the PI lines to default (ships heading) ....................................1-98 1.40.7 How to change PI line length........................................................................1-99 1.40.8 How to change the PI line color (C-types only) ............................................1-99 1.41 How to Use the Net (Diamond) Cursor (C-type only) .............................................1-100 1.41.1 How to activate the net cursor....................................................................1-100 1.41.2 How to set the net cursor dimensions and orientation ...............................1-101 1.42 Circle Cursor (C-types only) ...................................................................................1-102 1.43 Zoom ......................................................................................................................1-103 1.44 How to Use Marks ..................................................................................................1-104 1.44.1 Heading line mark ......................................................................................1-104 1.44.2 How to hide/show the stern mark ...............................................................1-105 1.44.3 North mark..................................................................................................1-105 1.44.4 Bearing ring ................................................................................................1-106 1.44.5 How to set up the own ship mark ...............................................................1-107 1.44.6 How to set the barge marker ......................................................................1-107 1.44.7 Antenna mark .............................................................................................1-108 1.45 Drop Mark...............................................................................................................1-108 1.45.1 How to inscribe a drop mark.......................................................................1-109 1.45.2 How to erase drop marks ...........................................................................1-109 1.46 Brilliance and Color Schemes ................................................................................1-109 1.46.1 How to select a brilliance and color scheme ..............................................1-109 1.46.2 How to change the color schemes settings ................................................1-110 1.46.3 How to change the color schemes settings ................................................1-111 1.47 How to Display and Set Up Navigational Data .......................................................1-112 1.47.1 How to set up the navigational data ...........................................................1-112 1.47.2 How to display navigational data................................................................1-113 1.48 How to Use the Information Box.............................................................................1-113 1.49 Interswitch ..............................................................................................................1-116 1.49.1 How to display antenna information ...........................................................1-116 1.49.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations ......................................1-117 1.49.3 How to clear the interswitch .......................................................................1-119 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.50 Performance Monitor.............................................................................................. 1-119 1.50.1 How to activate/deactivate the performance monitor ................................. 1-119 1.50.2 How to check the radars performance ...................................................... 1-121 1.51 How to Change the Reference Position ................................................................. 1-122 1.52 Anchor Watch......................................................................................................... 1-123 1.53 Alerts ...................................................................................................................... 1-124 1.53.1 What is an alert? ........................................................................................ 1-124 1.53.2 Alert box overview...................................................................................... 1-125 1.53.3 How to silence the buzzer .......................................................................... 1-125 1.53.4 How to acknowledge an alert ..................................................................... 1-125 1.53.5 Alert list ...................................................................................................... 1-126 1.53.6 Alert icons and their meanings................................................................... 1-127 1.54 Icing Prevention ..................................................................................................... 1-128 1.55 How to Select an Echo Display Area (C-type Only) ............................................... 1-129 1.56 How to Use the Watch Alert ................................................................................... 1-129 1.57 Loran Decca Setup (C-types Only) ........................................................................ 1-130 1.58 How to Manage SD Card Data............................................................................... 1-132 1.58.1 Formatting the SD card .............................................................................. 1-132 1.58.2 Cautionary notes on handling SD cards..................................................... 1-132 1.58.3 Compatible SD cards ................................................................................. 1-132 1.58.4 How to insert SD cards .............................................................................. 1-133 1.58.5 How to remove SD cards ........................................................................... 1-133 1.58.6 How to save data to an SD card (IMO-types only)..................................... 1-134 1.58.7 How to read (load) data from an SD card (IMO-types only)....................... 1-134 1.58.8 How to delete data from an SD card (IMO-types only) .............................. 1-134 1.59 Internal Memory (C-types only).............................................................................. 1-135 1.59.1 How to save data to the internal memory................................................... 1-135 1.59.2 How to view the contents of the internal memory ...................................... 1-137 1.59.3 How to load the contents of the internal memory....................................... 1-138 1.59.4 How to delete the contents of the internal memory.................................... 1-139 1.59.5 How to backup data in the internal memory............................................... 1-140 1.59.6 How to load backup data from the internal memory................................... 1-141 1.60 USB Flash Memory (C-types only)......................................................................... 1-142 1.60.1 USB Flash memory connection.................................................................. 1-142 1.60.2 How to remove the USB flash memory safely............................................ 1-142 1.60.3 How to save data to the USB flash memory .............................................. 1-143 1.60.4 How to load data from the USB memory.................................................... 1-144 1.60.5 How to transfer USB data to the internal memory...................................... 1-146 1.60.6 How to save the backup data to the USB flash memory............................ 1-147 1.60.7 How to load backup data from the USB flash memory .............................. 1-148 1.60.8 How to import data from other equipment.................................................. 1-148 1.61 How to Take a Screenshot..................................................................................... 1-150 2. RADAR OBSERVATION .......................................................................................2-1 2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Minimum range .............................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Maximum range ............................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.3 X-band and S-band ........................................................................................ 2-2 2.1.4 Radar resolution............................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.5 Bearing accuracy ........................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.6 Range measurement...................................................................................... 2-3 2.2 False Echoes ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ................................................................. 2-5 2.3.1 SART description ........................................................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 How to show SART marks on the radar display............................................. 2-6 2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs............................................................ 2-6 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.4 RACON.......................................................................................................................2-7 2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) ...................................................................................2-7 2.6 Solid state radar .........................................................................................................2-8 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) .....................................................................................3-1 3.1 Precautions when Using Target Tracking...................................................................3-1 3.2 TT Controls.................................................................................................................3-2 3.3 How to Show/Hide the TT Symbols............................................................................3-2 3.4 How to Select the TT mode ........................................................................................3-3 3.4.1 How to setup the acquisition method .............................................................3-3 3.4.2 How to manually acquire targets ....................................................................3-4 3.4.3 How to automatically acquire targets .............................................................3-4 3.5 How to Enter Own Ship Speed...................................................................................3-5 3.5.1 Echo-referenced speed input .........................................................................3-5 3.6 How to Cancel Target Tracking ..................................................................................3-7 3.6.1 How to cancel tracking for individual TT targets.............................................3-7 3.6.2 How to cancel tracking for all TT targets ........................................................3-7 3.7 Lost Target .................................................................................................................3-8 3.7.1 How to set the lost target filter........................................................................3-8 3.7.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert .....................................................3-8 3.8 TT Symbols and Attributes .........................................................................................3-9 3.8.1 How to adjust symbol brilliance ......................................................................3-9 3.8.2 How to set the symbol color ...........................................................................3-9 3.8.3 How to set the symbol size (C-types only) ...................................................3-10 3.8.4 How to select a TT symbol (C-type only) .....................................................3-10 3.8.5 How to change the attributes for a TT symbol preset...................................3-11 3.9 How to Display/Remove Target Data .......................................................................3-13 3.9.1 TT pop up information ..................................................................................3-13 3.9.2 How to show target data in the data display area ........................................3-14 3.9.3 How to display, hide and sort the target list..................................................3-15 3.10 Vector Modes ...........................................................................................................3-17 3.10.1 Description of vectors ...................................................................................3-17 3.10.2 Vector mode and vector length ....................................................................3-19 3.10.3 How to change the vector appearance (C-types only) .................................3-19 3.11 Past Position Display................................................................................................3-20 3.11.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting interval..............3-20 3.11.2 How to select the number of past position points to be displayed................3-20 3.11.3 How to change the color of TT tracks (C-types only) ...................................3-21 3.12 Set and Drift..............................................................................................................3-21 3.13 Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) ...................................................................................3-22 3.13.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA ranges ........................................................3-22 3.13.2 How to acknowledge the TT collision alarm .................................................3-23 3.14 Acquisition Zone .......................................................................................................3-23 3.14.1 How to enable the acquisition zones ............................................................3-23 3.14.2 How to activate the first acquisition zone (AZ1) ...........................................3-24 3.14.3 How to set a polygon acquisition zone (AZ2) ...............................................3-24 3.14.4 How to sleep/deactivate an acquisition zone ...............................................3-25 3.14.5 How to acknowledge the acquisition zone alert ...........................................3-25 3.14.6 How to select the target type to acquire (C-types only)................................3-25 3.14.7 How to change the acquisition zone reference ............................................3-25 3.14.8 How to set acquisition zone shape and stabilization ....................................3-26 3.15 Trial Maneuvers (IMO-types only) ............................................................................3-27 3.15.1 Types of trial maneuvers ..............................................................................3-27 3.15.2 How to perform a trial maneuver ..................................................................3-28 3.15.3 How to stop the trial maneuver.....................................................................3-30 3.16 TT System Messages...............................................................................................3-31 ix TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.17 TT Simulation Mode ................................................................................................. 3-32 3.18 Criteria for Tracking Target Selection ...................................................................... 3-33 3.19 Factors Affecting Target Tracking ............................................................................ 3-34 4. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Controls for AIS.......................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2 How to Select the AIS Display Mode ......................................................................... 4-3 4.3 AIS Symbols and Their Meanings.............................................................................. 4-3 4.4 How to Use the AIS Display Filter .............................................................................. 4-4 4.5 How to Activate AIS Targets ...................................................................................... 4-5 4.5.1 How to activate specific targets manually ...................................................... 4-5 4.5.2 How to set the AIS auto activate function ...................................................... 4-6 4.6 How to Sleep AIS Targets.......................................................................................... 4-7 4.6.1 How to sleep individual AIS targets................................................................ 4-7 4.6.2 How to sleep all AIS targets ........................................................................... 4-8 4.7 How to Set Up For a Voyage ..................................................................................... 4-8 4.7.1 How to access the [VOYAGE DATA] menu ................................................... 4-8 4.8 How to Display AIS Target Data .............................................................................. 4-10 4.8.1 AIS pop-up information ................................................................................ 4-10 4.8.2 How to display basic AIS target data ........................................................... 4-11 4.8.3 How to display expanded AIS target data .................................................... 4-12 4.8.4 How to remove target data from the display area ........................................ 4-12 4.9 How to Change AIS Symbol Attributes .................................................................... 4-13 4.9.1 How to adjust the AIS symbol brilliance ....................................................... 4-13 4.9.2 How to change the color of the AIS symbol ................................................. 4-13 4.9.3 How to change the color of the ATON symbol ............................................. 4-14 4.9.4 How to change the size of the AIS symbol................................................... 4-14 4.9.5 How to customize the AIS symbol display (C-types only) ............................ 4-14 4.9.6 How to edit or remove AIS customizations (C-types only) ........................... 4-15 4.9.7 How to show/hide the customized AIS name (C-types only) ....................... 4-16 4.10 Past Position Display ............................................................................................... 4-16 4.10.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting interval ............. 4-16 4.10.2 How to select the number of past position points to be displayed ............... 4-17 4.10.3 Past position display orientation................................................................... 4-17 4.10.4 Stabilization in true motion ........................................................................... 4-17 4.10.5 How to set the AIS track color (C-types only) .............................................. 4-17 4.11 Lost Target ............................................................................................................... 4-18 4.11.1 How to set the lost target filter...................................................................... 4-18 4.11.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert ................................................... 4-19 4.12 ROT Setting ............................................................................................................. 4-19 4.13 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) ............................................................................ 4-20 4.13.1 How to set CPA and TCPA .......................................................................... 4-20 4.14 How to Associate TT and AIS Targets ..................................................................... 4-21 4.15 How to View Own Ship Data .................................................................................... 4-23 4.16 How to Use AIS Messages ...................................................................................... 4-24 4.16.1 How to create and save messages .............................................................. 4-24 4.16.2 How to transmit messages........................................................................... 4-25 4.16.3 How to view messages ................................................................................ 4-26 4.16.4 How to set up the AIS message notification................................................. 4-26 4.16.5 How to display AIS alert messages.............................................................. 4-27 4.17 AIS System Messages ............................................................................................. 4-27 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) .................................................................5-1 5.1 Orientation Modes...................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 How to Select a Mark Type ........................................................................................ 5-1 5.3 How to Select the Mark Inscription Position............................................................... 5-2 x TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.4 Radar Map..................................................................................................................5-3 5.4.1 How to show/hide the radar map....................................................................5-3 5.4.2 How to inscribe marks ....................................................................................5-3 5.4.3 How to delete marks.......................................................................................5-5 5.4.4 How to align the radar map ............................................................................5-6 5.5 Origin Mark .................................................................................................................5-7 5.5.1 How to inscribe origin marks ..........................................................................5-7 5.5.2 How to set origin mark stabilization ................................................................5-8 5.5.3 How to delete origin marks .............................................................................5-8 5.6 How to Change the Shape of the Own Ship Mark......................................................5-9 5.7 How to Use ECDIS Chart Marks ..............................................................................5-10 5.8 Own Ship Track ........................................................................................................5-11 5.8.1 How to show/hide tracks ..............................................................................5-11 5.8.2 How to set the plotting interval .....................................................................5-12 5.8.3 How to delete tracks.....................................................................................5-12 5.9 How to Use Waypoints .............................................................................................5-13 5.9.1 How to set the data source for waypoints ....................................................5-13 5.9.2 How to enter waypoints ................................................................................5-13 5.9.3 How to edit waypoints ..................................................................................5-14 5.9.4 How to erase waypoints ...............................................................................5-15 5.9.5 How to display the waypoint list ...................................................................5-16 5.9.6 How to show/hide the waypoint name/number.............................................5-16 5.10 Routes ......................................................................................................................5-17 5.10.1 How to set/edit an internal route...................................................................5-17 5.10.2 How to display routes ...................................................................................5-18 5.10.3 How to skip a waypoint.................................................................................5-18 5.10.4 How to set the route width............................................................................5-19 5.10.5 How to show/hide the turning line ................................................................5-19 5.10.6 How to use the waypoint arrival distance function .......................................5-20 5.10.7 How to delete internal routes........................................................................5-20 5.10.8 How to view the routes list............................................................................5-21 5.11 How to Show/Hide Grid Lines...................................................................................5-21 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) .....................................................................6-1 6.1 Tracks.........................................................................................................................6-1 6.1.1 Symbols..........................................................................................................6-1 6.1.2 How to show/hide ships tracks ......................................................................6-3 6.1.3 How to set own ship track recording ..............................................................6-5 6.1.4 How to stop and re-start tracks ......................................................................6-6 6.1.5 How to change track color..............................................................................6-6 6.1.6 How to show/hide own track based on color ................................................6-11 6.1.7 How to change the track line ........................................................................6-12 6.1.8 How to set tracks recording method and interval .........................................6-13 6.1.9 How to delete own ship tracks......................................................................6-14 6.1.10 How to edit own ships tracks .......................................................................6-16 6.1.11 How to view information for consorts and GPS buoys .................................6-17 6.1.12 How to delete other ships tracks .................................................................6-19 6.2 Marks........................................................................................................................6-20 6.2.1 How to set up marks.....................................................................................6-20 6.2.2 How to enter marks and lines .......................................................................6-22 6.2.3 How to delete marks and lines .....................................................................6-26 6.2.4 How to edit marks and lines .........................................................................6-28 6.2.5 How to view mark and line information.........................................................6-29 6.2.6 Mark filter......................................................................................................6-31 6.3 Origin Marks .............................................................................................................6-36 6.3.1 How to set up an origin mark........................................................................6-36 xi TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.3.2 How to enter an origin mark ......................................................................... 6-37 6.3.3 How to delete origin marks........................................................................... 6-38 6.3.4 How to set a comment for origin marks........................................................ 6-38 6.4 Waypoints ................................................................................................................ 6-39 6.4.1 How to create a waypoint............................................................................. 6-39 6.4.2 How to edit a waypoint ................................................................................. 6-45 6.4.3 How to delete a waypoint ............................................................................. 6-45 6.4.4 How to search for a waypoint....................................................................... 6-46 6.4.5 How to set the voyage speed for calculations.............................................. 6-47 6.4.6 How to view waypoint information................................................................ 6-47 6.4.7 How to change the on-screen size of waypoint indications.......................... 6-48 6.4.8 How to change the way waypoint names are displayed .............................. 6-48 6.4.9 How to use external waypoints .................................................................... 6-49 6.5 Routes...................................................................................................................... 6-50 6.5.1 How to create a route................................................................................... 6-50 6.5.2 How to edit a route ....................................................................................... 6-54 6.5.3 How to delete a route ................................................................................... 6-55 6.5.4 How to search for a route............................................................................. 6-55 6.5.5 How to set the voyage speed for calculations.............................................. 6-56 6.5.6 How to use external routes .......................................................................... 6-56 6.6 Destinations ............................................................................................................. 6-57 6.6.1 How to set up GOTO points ......................................................................... 6-57 6.6.2 How to set a waypoint as a destination........................................................ 6-59 6.6.3 How to set a route as a destination.............................................................. 6-61 6.6.4 How to set up the waypoint data display...................................................... 6-64 6.6.5 How to stop navigation to a destination ....................................................... 6-65 6.7 Plotter-related alerts................................................................................................. 6-65 6.7.1 How to set waypoint arrival/departure alerts ................................................ 6-65 6.7.2 How to set mid-route alerts .......................................................................... 6-66 6.7.3 How to set XTE/border route alerts.............................................................. 6-67 6.7.4 How to active/deactivate intrusion alerts...................................................... 6-68 6.7.5 How to set temperature alerts ...................................................................... 6-68 6.7.6 How to set sheer alerts ................................................................................ 6-69 6.7.7 How to set depth alerts ................................................................................ 6-69 6.8 Chart Functions........................................................................................................ 6-70 6.8.1 How to show/hide the chart.......................................................................... 6-70 6.8.2 How to align the chart position ..................................................................... 6-71 6.8.3 How to select the chart type......................................................................... 6-72 6.8.4 Chart settings menu ..................................................................................... 6-73 6.8.5 How to show/hide land mass emphasis ....................................................... 6-74 6.8.6 How to set up depth lines............................................................................. 6-75 6.8.7 How to display detailed depth lines.............................................................. 6-76 6.8.8 How to check your charts/symbol versions .................................................. 6-77 6.9 Grid Lines................................................................................................................. 6-77 7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................7-1 7.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule................................................................................. 7-2 7.2 How to Replace the Fuse........................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Life Expectancy of Major Parts .................................................................................. 7-4 7.4 Trackball Maintenance ............................................................................................... 7-4 7.5 Easy Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 7-5 7.6 Advanced-level Troubleshooting................................................................................ 7-6 7.7 Diagnostics................................................................................................................. 7-8 7.8 Sentence Monitor ..................................................................................................... 7-13 7.9 Fallback Arrangements ............................................................................................ 7-15 xii TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1 APPENDIX 2 LONGITUDE ERROR TABLE (96 NM SCALE) ...............................AP-15 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ..................................AP-17 APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING........................................................AP-26 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS.............................................................................AP-27 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................AP-32 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION ..........................................................................AP-37 APPENDIX 8 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION ..........................................AP-47 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1 INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1 xiii FOREWORD A Word to the Owner of FAR-22x8/23x8 Series Marine Radar Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-22x8/FAR-23x8 series of radars. We are confident you will see why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and reliability. Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our ex-
tensive global network of agents and dealers. Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation and main-
tenance.We would appreciate hearing from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our goal. Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment. Features The FAR-2xx8 series consists of the following models and configurations:
Magnetron radar Model FAR-2218 FAR-2218-BB FAR-2318 FAR-2228 FAR-2228-BB FAR-2328 FAR-2258 FAR-2238S FAR-2238S-BB FAR-2338S FAR-2268DS Solid state radar Model FAR-2238S-NXT FAR-2238S-NXT-BB FAR-2338S-NXT Frequency band X-band S-band Size of monitor unit*
19.0 Local supply 23.1/27 19.0 Local supply 23.1/27 Local supply 19.0 Local supply 23.1/27 Local supply Output power 12 kW 12 kW 12 kW 25 kW 25 kW 12 kW 50 kW 30 kW 30 kW 30 kW 60 kW Transceiver location Antenna unit Antenna unit Frequency band S-band Size of monitor unit*
19.0 Local supply 23.1/27 Output power 250 W 250 W 250 W Transceiver location Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit
*: Viewing distances are as follows: MU-190/MU-270W: 1020 mm; MU-231: 1200 mm. Two methods of operation are available: RCU-014/RCU-031 (standard supply control unit) and RCU-015/RCU-016 (optional trackball unit). The ergonomically designed palm rest on the RCU-
015/RCU-016 makes them easy to use. Simple operation with point-and-click menu functionality. All functions can be accessed using only the trackball unit. xiv FOREWORD TT, AIS*, Radar Map and Interswitch are supplied as standard.
*: Requires connection to a compatible AIS transponder. FURUNOs unique Target Analyzer function helps to find targets in high noise areas (rain/
snow), or where there is interference from surface reflections (C-types only). The Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function detects sea and rain clutter from received echoes and automatically reduces sea and rain clutter accordingly. Targets activate the user-set alarm/acquisition zone when entering or exiting the zone. CPA/TCPA alarms. Radar screen can be overlaid with the chart display (C-types only). Full plotter functionality (C-types only). The FAR-2xx8 series complies with MED 2014/90/EU* and also the following directives:
IEC62388, IEC 62288, IMO MSC. 192(79)*.
*: Excludes FAR-2258 and FAR-2268DS. Radar Type and Function Availability The software for advanced fishing specifications is available in two specification types, and func-
tion availability depends on specification type. The table below shows the function that have lim-
ited availability. This manual provides descriptions for all functions of this radar series, and we have endeavored to denote in the text those functions that have limited availability. For detailed information on the function availability, see the menu tree at the back of this manual. Type abbreviations and their meanings IMO: Meets the IMO requirements and is compliant with IMO regulations C: Advanced fishing specifications Function availability and specification type Function Echo area configuration Target Analyzer Customized echo - assign name Trails - 5-step gradation Trail Eraser Trails - Long Trails - Hide Trails - Narrow Trails - Color Echo Average level 4 True view Marks - No. available Area Marks ECDIS marks Marks filter Mark information display Mark comment display Own track - Points Own track - Edit IMO No No No No No No No No No No No Max. 20,000 No Yes No No No Max. 20,000 No Type C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max. 30,000 Max. 50 No Yes Yes Yes Memory capacity: Max. 30,000 Display capacity: Max. 10,000 Yes xv FOREWORD Function Own track - Color Own track - Stop/start plotting Own track - Save intervals IMO No No Type C Yes Yes
[OFF], [DRAW ONLY]
with intervals of 10s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 3min, 6min, 15min
[OFF], [TRACK INTERVAL 1],
[TRACK INTERVAL 2] with time intervals of 0s to 59m59s or dis-
tance intervals of 0NM to 9.99NM. TT targets:
Memory capacity: Max. 100,000 Display capacity: Max. 10,000 AIS targets:
Memory capacity: Max. 10,000 Display capacity: Max. 10,000 Consort vessels:
Memory capacity: Max. 10,000 Display capacity: Max. 1,000 GPS buoys:
Memory capacity: Max. 10,000 Display capacity: Max. 1,000 Yes Yes
[OFF], [TRACK INTERVAL 1],
[TRACK INTERVAL 2] with time intervals of 0s to 59m59s or dis-
tance intervals of 0NM to 9.99NM. Yes Yes Max. 3,500 (+100 external) Max. 11 Yes Yes Yes
[0.025]*1, [0.05]*1, [0.075]*1,
[0.1m]*1, [0.125]*2, [0.25], [0.5],
[0.75], [1], [1.5], [2], [3], [4], [6], [8],
[12], [16], [24], [32], [48], [96],
[120]*3
[NM], [SM], [km], [kyd]
Max. 6 rings Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Other tracks - Points No Other tracks - Edit Other tracks - Stop/start plotting Other tracks - Save intervals No No No Chart Display Individual contour line display WPT - No. of marks PI lines - No. of lines PI lines - Mode PI lines - Linked to EBL/VRM PI lines - Color Range No No Max. 200 (+1 external) Max. 6 No No No
[0.125], [0.25], [0.5],
[0.75], [1.5], [3], [6], [12],
[24], [48], [96]
Range unit Range rings - No. available Range rings - 32 point display VRM - Unit selection VRM - Close distance unit Cursor - Range unit selection Cursor - Size Cursor - Enlarged information box Cursor - Color Net Cursor Circle Cursor Plotter-related alerts
(XTE, arrival, departure, intrusion, temp., sheer, depth) xvi
[NM] only Fixed No No No No No No No No No No Function Acquisition zone - Check area around ship TT - Symbol selection, symbol color, individual settings for symbols TT - Vector line type TT - Acquisition by target type TT - Lat./Long. data display TT - Display up to 5 targets data in information area AIS - Symbol color GPS buoy display Consort vessel - display Trial Maneuver Data import from other equipment Magnetic bearing input and display Alternative positioning systems (LO-
RAN, DECCA, TOKYO datum) Date/time display format selection Echoes in multi-color Echoes in amber color Chart/Plotter brilliance adjustment User settings, Pilot settings Shuttle Ferry mode Simplified screen layout Display Scroll Customizable [CURSOR] menu Function keys - [CURSOR CENTER/
DISPLAY MODE] function Show/hide the cursor Function keys - Assign multiple func-
tions Origin marks FOREWORD Type IMO No No No No No No No No No Yes No
(File conversion required) No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max. 20 Max. 40
*1: Available only when radar is transmitting.
*2: Not available if using [km/kyd] range units and radar is transmitting.
*3: Available only when the range unit is set to [NM] or [SM]. xvii FOREWORD Signal processing functions This radar has the signal processing functions listed in the table below. Function Interference rejector Echo stretch Echo averaging Description Suppresses interference by other radars. Interference received simultaneously from multiple radars may be difficult to reduce. Enlarges target echoes, especially small echoes. Suppress interference, sea clutter and rain clutter be-
fore using echo stretch, to prevent enlargement of unwanted echoes. The radar samples echoes with each scan. Targets that show a large change with each scan are judged as clutter and are reduced to display only echoes from legitimate targets. Automatic clutter elimination Discriminates clutter from the radar echo, then reduc-
Noise rejector es the clutter automatically. Reduces white noise then improves the on-screen S/N ratio by processing the weighted moving aver-
age filter for the received echoes in the range direc-
tion. Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the screen or the range resolution may worsen. Program numbers Please access the following URL if you need software information:
http://www.furuno.com/en/merchant/radar/FAR-22x8_23x8/#SoftwareVersion System Program no. Version no. Remarks Reference See section 1.22 See section 1.23 See section 1.24 See section 1.25 See section 1.26 For magnetron radar
(other than FAR-2258 and FAR-2268DS) For solid state radar For solid state radar RCU-014/RCU-015/RCU-016 RCU-031 Antenna unit (common to all antennas) SPU 0359281 01.xx 01.xx 01.xx 01.xx 01.xx 0359286 SPU 0359293 MTR-DRV 0359296 PM RF-Converter 0359302 Processor Unit: RPU-025 0359377 MAIN 0359380 SUB Control Unit KEY KEY Power Supply Unit (FAR-2258/FAR-2268DS only) SPU 0359385 0359464 50.xx 50.xx 01.xx 01.xx 0359472 01.xx xx: Denotes minor changes to the software. xviii FOREWORD About the programs used in C-type radars Ubiquitous QuickBoot Copyright 2015. Ubiquitous Corp. All right reserved. Portions of this software are copyright 2016. The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All right reserved. This equipment includes GPL2.0, LGPL2.0, Apache, BSD, MIT or other licensed softwares. For further software information, please access the following URL:
https://www.furuno.co.jp/en/contact/cnt_oss_e01.html Terminology standards used in this manual This manual uses the following terminology standards:
Terminology Select Meaning or usage example Use the trackball or scrollwheel on the control unit to move the cursor over the item to be selected, then left-click. With a menu open: Press the appropriate menu number. With the setting/value/menu selected: Spin the scrollwheel to highlight the item to be selected, then left-click Left-click Right-click Control Unit Open the menu. Close the menu. Press the left mouse button. Press the right mouse button. Refers to the RCU-014 Control Unit, unless otherwise specified. Press the MENU key to show the [MENU]. Press the MENU key to close the [MENU]. For the sake of brevity, all procedures in this manual use the terms Open the menu. and Close the menu. Unless otherwise stated, operations in this manual use the scrollwheel for procedures which re-
quire menu selection, or settings changed. CE Declaration With regards to CE declarations, please refer to our website (www.furuno.com) for further infor-
mation about RoHS conformity declarations. xix SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NOTICE For IMO-type radars, interconnected sensors must meet the following type approval requirements. For C-type radars, it is recommended that the interconnected sensors meet these requirements:
Gyrocompass (or equivalent devices) meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution A.424(XI).
EPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
SDME meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72). The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing units having approved LAN ports. X-band: FAR-2218(-BB)/FAR-2228(-BB)/FAR-2328 Note: The footnotes for *1 to *11 are listed in "Notes" on page xxiv. Antenna Unit for FAR-2218(-BB)/2318, 12 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A*9) XN12CF-RSB128-105 XN20CF-RSB128-105 XN24CF-RSB128-105 Sub monitor 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) Antenna Unit for FAR-2228(-BB)/2328, 25 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A*9) XN12CF-RSB128-106 XN20CF-RSB128-106 XN24CF-RSB128-106 Antenna Cable*5
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 or RCU-031*11 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Control Unit RCU-016 Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Switching Hub HUB-100 OR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*6 AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Processor Unit RPU-025 VDR (Analog RGB) Sub monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Transformer 24 VDC 100/110/120 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Rectifier PR-850A For AC power or For DC power Sub monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 USB Mouse USB Device*9 xx X-band: FAR-2258 Note: The footnotes for *1 to *11 are listed in "Notes" on page xxiv. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Antenna Unit for FAR-2258, 50kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A*7) XN24AF-RSB139-122*11 XN30AF-RSB139-122*11 Antenna Cable Motor Cable Power Supply Unit PSU-019 Antenna Cable External radar Sub monitor 1 Sub monitor 2 Sub monitor 3 Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*
100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Control Unit RCU-016 Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*
USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Processor Unit RPU-025 Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(Analog RGB) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Switching Hub HUB-100*6 OR Intelligent Hub-
HUB-3000 Transformer Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 xxi SYSTEM CONFIGURATION S-band: FAR-2238S(-BB)/FAR-2338S/FAR2238S-NXT(-BB)/
FAR-2338-NXT Note: The footnotes for *1 to *11 are listed in "Notes" on page xxiv. Antenna Unit for FAR-2238S(-BB)/2338S, 30 kW
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-52A*7 SN24CF-RSB129-107*11 SN30CF-RSB129-107*11 SN36CF-RSB129-107 Sub monitor 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer) Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 or RCU-031*11 Control Unit RCU-016 USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Switching Hub HUB-100 OR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*6 VDR
(Analog RGB) Transformer 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Antenna Unit for FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT, 250 W
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-52B*7) SN24CF-RSB133-111*11 SN30CF-RSB133-111*11 SN36CF-RSB133-111 Antenna Cable
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) Processor Unit RPU-025 AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Sub monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 xxii S-band: FAR-2268DS Note: The footnotes for *1 to *11 are listed in "Notes" on page xxiv. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Antenna Unit for FAR-2268DS, 60 kW SN30AF-RSB144-129*11 SN36AF-RSB144-129*11 SN30DF-RSB144-129*11 Antenna Cable Motor Cable Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*
100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Control Unit RCU-016 Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031*
USB Mouse USB Device*9 Monitor Unit*3 MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Intelligent Hub HUB-3000*5 Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz VDR
(Analog RGB) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz Switching Hub HUB-100*6 OR Intelligent Hub-
HUB-3000 Transformer Power Supply Unit PSU-019 Antenna Cable External radar Sub monitor 1 Sub monitor 2 Sub monitor 3 Processor Unit RPU-025 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format) Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder EPFS*2 (GPS) SDME (Speed log) AMS (IEC61162 format) ECDIS AMS (Contact)*4 Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS*8 Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS*8 xxiii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Category of units Antenna units: Exposed to the weather. Other units: Protected from the weather. Notes 1) The gyrocompass must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution A.424(XI) (and/
or resolution A.821(19) for installation on HSC). The gyrocompass must also have an update rate that is adequate for the ships rate of turn. The update rate must be better than 40 Hz
(HSC) or 20 Hz (conventional vessel). 2) The EPFS must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution MSC.112(73). 3) These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190 for CAT 2 and CAT 2H, MU-231/
MU-270W for CAT 1 and CAT 1H. If a different monitor is to be used on IMO vessels, its ef-
fective diameter must meet the applicable Category requirements:
CAT 1 and CAT 1H: effective diameter 320 mm or higher;
CAT 2 and CAT 2H: effective diameter 250 mm or higher. For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see its manuals. For BB type, a monitor unit is prepared by user. 4) Characteristics of contact output for Alarm:
(Load current) 250 mA;
(Polarity) Normally Open: 2 ports, Normally Close: 2 ports;
Serial I/O for alarm is also possible, which complies with IEC 61162-1. 5) For configurations with 3 or more radars/ECDIS (FMD-3100/FMD-3200/FMD-3300) connect-
ed, connect via the HUB-3000. For 2 radars, HUB-100 can be used. (Connection to ECDIS is not available for C-types.) 6) For configurations with a VDR connected, connect via the HUB-3000. (Connection to VDR is not available for C-types.) 7) Some antenna configurations do not have an in-built Performance Monitor. This type of anten-
na is not usable for IMO-type radars. 8) For connection of non-FURUNO ECDIS only. For connection of radars or plotters, the connec-
tion must be done at the radar antenna via the sub monitor connector. 9) Available for C-types only. 10) For X-Band TR-UP radars only, a junction box is required for antenna cable extension to lengths greater than 100 m. The maximum cable length is 400 m. 11) Unavailable on IMO-type radars. xxiv 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.1 Controls Overview Two types of control units are available for your FAR-2xx8: a full keyboard (RCU-014/
RCU-031) or palm control (RCU-015/RCU-016). Most operations can be done with either type of Control Unit. Throughout the manual, procedures are outlined using the RCU-014, unless otherwise specified. 1.1.1 Control Unit RCU-014 You can control almost all aspects of your radar from the RCU-014. The figure and table below show an overview of the control unit with a brief description of the controls. BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN OFF ON EBL F1 F3 F2 F4 ALARM ACK STBY TX 1 HL OFF 4 OFF CENTER 7 VECTOR TIME CANCEL TRAILS 2 EBL OFFSET 5 CU/TM RESET 8 VECTOR MODE 0 BRILL 3 MODE 6 INDEX LINE 9 TARGET LIST ENTER MARK OFF ON VRM MENU ACQ
RANGE
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL No. 1 Control Name Power button EBL controls Description Turn the power on or off. See section 1.2. EBL keys: Turn the EBLs on or off. EBL knob:
2 3 BRILL knob A/C RAIN knob A/C SEA knob GAIN knob For IMO-types Move the selected EBL. See section 1.33. For C-types with the cursor shown: adjust the direction (bearing) of EBLs, PI lines and the diamond cursor; moves the cursor up/
downwards. when entering marks in normal display mode: moves the chart up/downwards. Adjust echo brilliance and screen brilliance. See section 1.3. Adjust auto/manual clutter reduction for rain. See section 1.21. Adjust auto/manual clutter reduction for rough seas. See section 1.20. Adjust the gain (sensitivity). See section 1.19. 1-1 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. Control Name VRM controls Description VRM keys: Turn the VRMs on or off. VRM knob:
For IMO-types Move the selected VRM. See section 1.32. For C-types with the cursor shown: adjust the distance (range) of VRMs or PI line intervals; moves the cursor left/rightwards. when entering marks in normal display mode: moves the chart left/rightwards. Functions keys (F1 to F4) Perform a pre-registered function. See section 1.8. with pop up window shown: preform the operation shown in ALARM ACK key STBY TX key 1, HL OFF key the window. Acknowledge active alerts. See section 1.53. Toggle the radar operation between transmit (TX) and standby
(STBY). See section 1.15. With the menu open: Select menu item "1". Press and hold to hide the heading line. Release to re-show the heading line. See section 1.44.1. 2, EBL OFFSET key With the menu open: Select menu item "2". Sets the positive/negative value to +. See section 1.13 and 3, MODE key 4, OFF CENTER key section 1.9. Offset or reset the EBL. See section 1.34. For IMO-types With the menu open: Select menu item "3". Change the orientation mode. See section 1.30. For C-types When the MODE key is set to ORIENTATION:
Same operation as IMO-types. When the MODE key is set to CURSOR/DISPLAY:
With the menu open: Select menu item 3. Show/hide the cursor. With the menu open: Select menu item "4". With the cursor shown: enable or disable off-center. See section 1.36. With the cursor hidden (C-types only): move the screen cen-
ter (OS position). 5, CU/TM RESET key With the menu open: Select menu item "5". Course Up mode: Reset the heading line to 000. See 6, INDEX LINE key section 1.30. True Motion mode: Move Own Ship position 75% of the radius in opposite direction of the current heading. See section 1.30. With the menu open: Select menu item "6". Short press: Select a PI line. See section 1.40. Long press: Show or hide the selected PI line. See section 1.40. 7, VECTOR TIME key 8, VECTOR MODE key With the menu open: Select menu item "7". Change the vector time. See section 3.10.2. With the menu open: Select menu item "8". Sets the positive/negative value to -. See section 1.13 and 9, TARGET LIST key section 1.9. Toggle between true and relative vectors. See section 3.10. With the menu open: Select menu item "9". Show or hide the TT/AIS target list. See section 3.9.3. 4 5 6 1-2 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. Control Name Description CANCEL TRAILS key Without the menu open (see section 1.37.2):
Short press: Change the trail display time. Long press: Erase displayed trails. With the menu open (see section 1.5):
Go back one level in the menu. Closes the menu if the top level 6 7 0, BRILL key ENTER MARK key MENU key RANGE controls ACQ key TARGET DATA key TARGET CANCEL key 8 Trackball controls is displayed. Cancel changes made to a menu setting. With the menu open: Select menu item "0". Change the color scheme. See section 1.46. Inside the Operational Display Area (ODA):
Inscribe a mark. See section 1.44. With the menu open:
Confirm changes, open the selected menu. See section 1.5 Open or close the menu the menu. See section 1.5. Note: The MENU key will not open/close the menu in the following situations:
VRM or EBL is being set. DROP MARK or MARK is being inscribed. Alarm Zone (AZ) or TARGET ALARM is being set. Increase or decrease the range. See section 1.31. Manually acquire the cursor-highlighted target for Target Track-
ing (TT). Show the information for the cursor-highlighted target. Activate a sleeping AIS target. See section 3.2. Cancel tracking for the selected target. Sleep the selected AIS target. Long press: Cancel tracking for all TT targets. See section 3.2. Delete marks/waypoints*. Cancel character input*.
*: C-type only. See section 1.1.3. 1-3 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.1.2 Control Unit RCU-031 (C-types only) The figure and table below show an overview of the control unit with a brief description of the controls. PUSH AUTO PUSH AUTO PUSH AUTO EBL OFF EBL ON A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN VRM OFF VRM ON STBY TX F1 F3 F2 F4 PUSH-PLOTTER
HL OFF
EBL OFFSET
MODE MENU ACQ
OFF CENTER
CU/TM RESET INDEX LINE
TRACK ON/OFF VECTOR TIME
VECTOR MODE
CURSOR ON/OFF
RANGE BRILL TRACK COLOR WPT GOTO CANCEL TRAILS MARK SELECT
ENTER MARK
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL ALERT ACK No. 1 Control Name Power button EBL controls Description Turn the power on or off. See section 1.2. EBL keys: Turn the EBLs on or off. EBL knob:
with the cursor shown: adjust the direction (bearing) of EBLs, PI lines and the diamond cursor; moves the cursor up/
downwards. when entering marks in normal display mode, or in standby: moves the chart up/downwards. A/C RAIN knob Turn: Adjust auto/manual clutter reduction for rain. See A/C SEA knob GAIN knob VRM controls STBY TX key BRILL knob Functions keys (F1 to F4) section 1.21. Press: Toggle the A/C RAIN function on/off. Turn: Adjust auto/manual clutter reduction for rough seas. See section 1.20. Press: Toggle the A/C SEA function on/off. Turn: Adjust the gain (sensitivity). See section 1.19. Press: Toggle the ACE (Automatic Clutter Elimination) function on/off. VRM keys: Turn the VRMs on or off. VRM knob:
with the cursor shown: adjust the distance (range) of VRMs or PI line intervals; moves the cursor left/rightwards. when entering marks in normal display mode, or in standby: moves the chart left/rightwards. Toggle the radar operation between transmit (TX) and standby
(STBY). See section 1.15. Adjust echo brilliance and screen brilliance. See section 1.3. Perform a pre-registered function. See section 1.8. with pop up window shown: preform the operation shown in the window. TRACK COLOR key TRACK ON/OFF key Opens the [CHANGE TRACK COLOR] window. Starts/stops own ship track recording. 2 3 4 5 1-4 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. Control Name WPT key 5 GOTO key 1, HL OFF key Description Opens the [WAYPOINT ENTRY] window.
(Requires [ROUTE DATA SOURCE] in the [ROUTESWAY-
POINTS] to be set as [INTERNAL DATA].) Set/remove a GOTO destination. With the menu open: Select menu item "1". Press and hold to hide the heading line. Release to re-show the heading line. See section 1.44.1. 2, EBL OFFSET key With the menu open: Select menu item "2". Sets the positive/negative value to +. See section 1.13 and 3, MODE key 4, OFF CENTER key section 1.9. Offset or reset the EBL. See section 1.34. When the MODE key is set to ORIENTATION:
With the menu open: Select menu item "3". Change the orientation mode. See section 1.30. When the MODE key is set to CURSOR/DISPLAY:
With the menu open: Select menu item 3. Show/hide the cursor. With the menu open: Select menu item "4". With the cursor shown: enable or disable off-center. See section 1.36. With the cursor hidden: move the screen center (OS posi-
tion). 5, CU/TM RESET key With the menu open: Select menu item "5". Course Up mode: Reset the heading line to 000. See 6, INDEX LINE key 6 section 1.30. True Motion mode: Move Own Ship position 75% of the radius in opposite direction of the current heading. See section 1.30. With the menu open: Select menu item "6". Short press: Select a PI line. See section 1.40. Long press: Show or hide the selected PI line. See section 1.40. 7, VECTOR TIME key 8, VECTOR MODE key With the menu open: Select menu item "7". Change the vector time. See section 3.10.2. With the menu open: Select menu item "8". Sets the positive/negative value to -. See section 1.13 and 9, TARGET LIST key section 1.9. Toggle between true and relative vectors. See section 3.10. With the menu open: Select menu item "9". Show or hide the TT/AIS target list. See section 3.9.3. CANCEL TRAILS key Without the menu open (see section 1.37.2):
Short press: Change the trail display time. Long press: Erase displayed trails. With the menu open (see section 1.5):
Go back one level in the menu. Closes the menu if the top level 0, BRILL key ENTER MARK key is displayed. Cancel changes made to a menu setting. With the menu open: Select menu item "0". Change the color scheme. See section 1.46. Inside the Operational Display Area (ODA):
Inscribe a mark. See section 1.44. With the menu open:
Confirm changes, open the selected menu. See section 1.5 1-5 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. Control Name MENU key RANGE controls ACQ key Description Open or close the menu the menu. See section 1.5. Note: The MENU key will not open/close the menu in the following situations:
VRM or EBL is being set. DROP MARK or MARK is being inscribed. Alarm Zone (AZ) or TARGET ALARM is being set. Increase or decrease the range. See section 1.31. Manually acquire the cursor-highlighted target for Target Track-
7 ing (TT). TARGET DATA key TARGET CANCEL key ALARM ACK key Trackball controls 8 Show the information for the cursor-highlighted target. Activate a sleeping AIS target. See section 3.2. Cancel tracking for the selected target. Sleep the selected AIS target. Long press: Cancel tracking for all TT targets. See section 3.2. Delete marks/waypoints. Cancel character input. Acknowledge active alerts. See section 1.53. See section 1.1.3. 1-6 1.1.3 Control Unit RCU-015/RCU-016 The RCU-015 and RCU-016 offer an easy to use mouse-like control interface, without the bulkiness of the RCU-014. You can access all your radar functions from the RCU-
015/RCU-016, however, only the function keys are available as short-cut keys. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW F1 F2 F3 F4 No. 1 2 3 Control Name Power button*
Functions keys (F1 to F4) Right mouse button 4 Scrollwheel 5 6 Left mouse button Trackball Description Turn the power on or off. See section 1.2. Perform a pre-registered function. See section 1.8. Short press:
Show the pop up menu for the highlighted item. Cancel changes to the currently selected setting. With TT target or mark symbol highlighted: Open the ed-
iting window (C-types only). With pop up menus shown: Hide pop up menus. Long press:
Change the screen brilliance to [50]. Change settings. Highlight a menu item. With TT target selected: Change the TT targets symbol
(C-types only). Select a highlighted object or menu item. For IMO-types Moves the cursor. Highlight an object or menu item. For C-types Moves the cursor (when the cursor is shown). Moves the chart (when the cursor is hidden). Highlight an object or menu item.
*: The RCU-016 Control Unit has no power button. To turn the power on or off when using a RCU-
016 Control Unit, use the power button on the RCU-014/RCU-015/RCU-031 Control Unit. About the terminology used in this manual Unless otherwise started, the terms click and left-click mean use the trackball to place the cursor on the specified item, then press the left mouse button. The term right-click means use the trackball to place the cursor on the specified item, then press the right mouse button. 1-7 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.2 How to Turn the Radar On/Off The power button (
RCU-031 Control Units.
) is located at the top-left corner of the RCU-014, RCU-015 and To turn the power on, open the power switch cover, then press the power button. The LED to the left of the power button lights up (green color) and the system begins the startup process. The indication "Initializing......" appears at the center of the screen. C-types also display two messages regarding charts, after the startup process is com-
plete. 312502 When the startup process is complete, the system begins warm-up procedures to pre-
pare the magnetron for transmission. The warm-up can take up to three minutes. During the warm-up, indications for total on-time (magnetron on-time since installa-
tion) and total transmission time (since installation) appear below the warm-up count-
down timer. These indications are also displayed when the radar is in standby mode. When the warm-up process is complete, the radar goes into standby (STBY) mode and the indication "RADAR STBY" (IMO-types) or "STBY" (C-types) appears. This in-
dication also appears whenever the equipment is in STBY mode. Note 1: For C-types, the STBY indication appears only once, when the equipment is turned on. Further, the numerals on the heading dial (outer-most range ring) are not shown and the AIS function is active, however the TT function is inactive while in standby (STBY) mode. Note 2: Do not turn on the power directly after it has been turned off. Wait several sec-
onds before you reapply the power, to be sure the radar starts up properly. Note 3: The RCU-016 Control Unit has no power button. To turn the power on or off when using a RCU-016 Control Unit, use the power button on the RCU-014/RCU-015/
RCU-031 Control Unit. Note 4: Solid state radars do not have a magnetron, therefore they have no warming period. To turn the power off, open the power switch cover, then press the power button. 1-8 1.3 How to Adjust the Brilliance 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The screen brilliance (brightness) for monitors can be adjusted as shown below. Note: The following procedure applies only to monitors supplied by FURUNO for this system. For other monitors, see the monitor operators manual to adjust the brilliance. Brilliance adjustment from the Control Unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Rotate the BRILL knob clockwise to increase the brilliance (brighter), or rotate the BRILL knob counter-clockwise to reduce the brilliance (darker). Brilliance adjustment from the on-screen box Select the brilliance indication in the lower half of the
[BRILL] box, the spin the scrollwheel on the Control Unit upwards to reduce the brilliance (darker) or downwards to increase the brilliance (brighter).
[BRILL] box Note: The above scrollwheel operation is based on default settings for [2 MOUSE WHEEL DIR]. See section 1.9. 1.4 Display Overview 1.4.1 Display examples C-type radars have two display formats, [NORMAL] and [SIMPLE]. IMO-types have one standard display format. The information shown on-screen changes depending on the radar type and the display format selected. You can change the display format for C-types from [6 DISPLAY MODE] (located in
[9 INTIAL SETTINGS] [5 OPERATION] menu; see section 1.9). Note 1: The example screen below may differ slightly from your display, depending on the monitor used in your configuration. The overall information however, is the same. Note 2: Unless otherwise indicated, the example figures for C-type radars used in this manual are taken using the [NORMAL] display. Display specifications Nominal viewing distance Text height (min. font) Text width (min. font) MU-190 1.02 m 3.53 mm 2.36 mm MU-231 1.20 m 4.23 mm 2.97 mm MU-270W 1.02 m 3.64 mm 2.43 mm 1-9 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Standard display IMO-type standard display REV SART C-type standard display SART XXXXX xxxxxxxxx XXXXX xxxxxxxxx 1-10 No. 1 Name InstantAccess bar 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
[RANGE] box
[REF POINT] box Indications
[WATCH] box
[ECHO ADJUST] box Cursor position details
[MAP ALIGN] indication
[MENU] box Date/Time 11 Own Ship information 12 Information box 13 TT/AIS settings 14 15 16 17 Alert box Guidance box
[TGT LIST] box
[ACQUISITION ZONE] box 18
[VRM] box 19
[DROP MARK] box 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Description Contains functions and features which are used regularly and allows easy access/activation. For descriptions of each button on the bar, see section 1.4.2 Shows/changes the current range in use. Shows/changes the point of reference. Shows indications for SART, shuttle ferry mode (IMO-type only) etc. Shows the watch alert countdown timer. Resets the watch alert countdown. Place the cursor on a box to adjust the setting.
[GAIN] bar: Shows the level of gain in use.
[SEA] bar: Shows the level and mode of sea clutter re-
duction.
[RAIN] bar: Shows the level and mode of rain clutter re-
duction. Shows the location (coordinates) of the cursor with the es-
timated TTG to the cursor position. Shows/hides the map alignment status. Opens/closes the menu. Shows date and time (with offset indication). Working indication (blue circle) indicates that the system is working correctly. Stops rotating when the system is frozen or malfunctioning. Shows heading, speed, water tracking speed*1, COG, SOG*2, coordinates and sensor used for data input.
*1: Drift speed and direction (port/starboard) is indicated with arrows and numerals.
*2: When connected with a speed log, the indication chang-
es to read "SLOG". Shows information for selected TT or AIS targets. Shows the currently selected menu. Shows navigational data. Shows the performance monitor graph. Shows the zoomed area. Adjust TT/AIS vector settings. Adjust CPA/TCPA settings. Activate/sleep AIS targets. Adjust lost target alert settings. Adjust track plotting intervals. Adjust trail times. Shows active alerts and contains the buzzer silence button and a shortcut to the alert list. Shows operational guidance for the Control Units left but-
ton and right button. Shows the target details list for tracked TTs and active AIS targets. Adjust acquisition zone settings for target alarms. Toggle between sentry zone and acquisition zone alert modes. Activate/deactivate the VRM (Variable Range Marker). Adjust the active (selected) VRM. Shows VRM range and TTG. Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark(s). 1-11 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. 20
[EBL] box Name 21
[MARK] box 22
[PI Lines] box 23 Screenshot button Description Activate/deactivate the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line). Adjust the active (selected) EBL. Shows EBL bearing. Selects a map mark to use. Inscribes the selected map mark. Right-click: opens the [RADAR MAP] menu (IMO-
types); opens the [MARK] menu (C-types). Selects PI line set to use. Shows/hides the selected PI lines. Shows the angle, reference and range interval for the PI lines. Saves a screenshot of the entire displayed area. Note: Requires SD card to be inserted in the Processor Unit. Shown in gray and not selectable if no SD card is in-
serted. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
[PRESENTATION MODE] box Change the presentation (orientation) mode for the radar images. Selects the antenna to use for radar images.
[ANTENNA SELECTION] box
[PICTURE] box Customize the way in which echoes are displayed.
[NOISE REJECTOR] indication Shows the noise rejector functions ON/OFF status.
[TUNING LEVEL] bar Shows the level of tuning in use. See section 1.16. Adjusts the tuning (manual only). See section 1.16.3. Note 1: The [TUNING LEVEL] bar is not shown for solid state radars. Note 2: The [TUNING LEVEL] bar is not shown on FAR-
2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as
[SUB] at installation. User settings box*
[TRIAL MANEUVERS] box*
Loads pilot settings. Opens the [USER SET] menu. Activates/deactivates trial maneuvers. Sets up trial maneuver parameters.
*: Shown only for IMO-types. 1-12 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Simple display (C-types only) Note: TT/AIS settings are not available in the simple display. To change or adjust TT/
AIS settings, make the changes/adjustments at the standard display, then switch to the simple display. Not shown in [SIMPLE]
display mode. SART No. 1 Name InstantAccess bar
[RANGE] box
[REF POINT] box Indications
[WATCH] box
[ECHO ADJUST] box 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Contains functions and features which are used regularly and allows easy access/activation. For descriptions of each button on the bar, see section 1.4.2 Shows/changes the current range in use. Shows/changes the point of reference. Shows indications for SART, etc. Shows the watch alert countdown timer. Resets the watch alert countdown. Place the cursor on a box to adjust the setting.
[GAIN] bar: Shows the level of gain in use.
[SEA] bar: Shows the level and mode of sea clutter reduc-
tion.
[RAIN] bar: Shows the level and mode of rain clutter re-
duction. Cursor position details
[MAP ALIGN] indication Date/Time Shows the location (coordinates) of the cursor with the esti-
mated TTG to the cursor position. Shows/hides the map alignment status. Shows date and time (with offset indication). 1-13 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. 10 Own Ship information Name 11 Information box 12
[TGT LIST] box 13
[ACQUISITION ZONE] box 14 Alert box 15 Guidance box 16
[VRM] box
[DROP MARK] box 17 18 Vector/Trail box 19
[EBL] box 20
[MARK] box 21
[PI Lines] box 22 Screenshot button Description Shows heading, speed, water tracking speed*1, COG, SOG*2, coordinates and sensor used for data input.
*1: Drift speed and direction (port/starboard) is indicated with arrows and numerals.
*2: When connected with a speed log, the indication changes to read "SLOG". Click [MENU] to show the menu. Click [DATA] to show the data box; the following informa-
tion can be displayed. Shows information for selected TT or AIS targets. Shows navigational data. Shows the performance monitor graph. Shows the target details list for tracked TTs and active AIS targets. Adjust acquisition zone settings for target alarms. Toggle between sentry zone and acquisition zone alert modes. Shows active alerts and contains the buzzer silence button and a shortcut to the alert list. Shows operational guidance for the Control Units left but-
ton and right button. Activate/deactivate the VRM (Variable Range Marker). Adjust the active (selected) VRM. Shows VRM range and TTG. Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark(s). Set vector/trail times for TT/AIS targets. Switch between true/relative trails and vectors. Activate/deactivate the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line). Adjust the active (selected) EBL. Shows EBL bearing. Selects a map mark to use. Inscribes the selected map mark. Right-click: opens the [MARK] menu. Selects PI line set to use. Shows/hides the selected PI lines. Shows the angle, reference and range interval for the PI lines. Saves a screenshot of the entire displayed area. Note: Requires SD card to be inserted in the Processor Unit. Shown in gray and not selectable if no SD card is inserted. 23
[PRESENTATION MODE] box Change the presentation (orientation) mode for the radar im-
ages. Selects the antenna to use for radar images.
[ANTENNA SELECTION] box
[PICTURE] box Customize the way in which echoes are displayed.
[NOISE REJECTOR] indication Shows the noise rejector functions ON/OFF status.
[TUNING LEVEL] bar Shows the level of tuning in use. See section 1.16. Adjusts the tuning (manual only). See section 1.16.3. Note 1: The [TUNING LEVEL] bar is not shown for solid state radars. Note 2: The [TUNING LEVEL] bar is not shown on FAR-
2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as
[SUB] at installation. 24 25 26 27 1-14 1.4.2 InstantAccess bar The InstantAccess bar contains functions and features which are used regularly and allows easy access/activation. For descriptions of each button on the bar, see the ta-
ble in this section. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Upper half of the InstantAccess bar is comprised of functions which are available for both IMO and C-types. Lower half of the InstantAccess bar contains type-specific functions. IMO-type C-type Button Upper Half - Common functions/features for both IMO and C-types Description
[Standby/Transmit] button. Toggle between standby (STBY) and transmit (TX). PULSE L TUNE MAN IR OFF ES OFF
[Pulselength] button. Selects the pulselength. Note: The [Pulselength] button is not shown on FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation; instead the button is replaced with the indica-
tion "SUB".
[Tune] button. Toggles between automatic and manual tuning. (See section 1.16.1.) Note 1: For SSD antennas, this button appears as "TX CH x" (x denotes the channel used for transmission). If your radar is receiving interference from another radar operating at the same frequency, use the [TX CH] button to change the TX frequency. Note 2: The [Tune] button is grayed out and inoperable on FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation.
[Interference Rejector] button. Activates/deactivates the interference rejector feature. Echo Stretch button. Activates/deactivates the echo stretch function. Note: This item is grayed out under the following conditions:
ACE function is active. No position data is input (excludes Dead Reckoning). 1-15 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Button EAV OFF ACE OFF
[Echo Average] button. Activates/deactivates the echo average function. Description
[ACE] button. Activates/deactivates the ACE (Auto Clutter Elimination) function. Lower Half - IMO-types MAP OFF HL OFF CU/TM RESET OWN AIS AIS PLT1 100
[Radar Map] button. Shows/hides the radar map marks.
[HEADING LINE] button. Left-click and hold to hide the heading line.
[CU/TM RESET] button Puts the ships heading at the top of the screen in course-up mode the moment this but-
ton is pressed. Resets the ship's position to a point of 75% radius opposite to the extension of the head-
ing line passing through the display center in true motion modes.
[Own Ship AIS] button. Shows the AIS VOYAGE DATA for AIS data setup.
[AIS Message] button. Displays received AIS messages. Opens the [AIS Message] menu.
[Brilliance] button. Adjusts the screen brilliance Opens the [BRILLIANCE] menu. Selects the color palette. See section 1.46.3. Lower Half - C-types (Standard and Simple display modes)
[Chart] button. Shows/hides the chart. Opens the [CHART] menu.
[Radar Map] button. Shows/hides the radar map marks.
[HEADING LINE] button. Left-click and hold to hide the heading line.
[MOB] button Inserts an MOB mark at the current OS location.
[WPT MARK] button. (Icon shown to the left changes depending on your selection.) Left-click/Spin the scrollwheel to select a waypoint (WPT) mark icon to use. Right-click to show the [ROUTESWAYPOINTS] menu.
[AIS Message] button. Displays received AIS messages. Opens the [AIS Message] menu.
[Brilliance] button. Adjusts the screen brilliance Opens the [BRILLIANCE] menu. Selects the color palette. See section 1.46.3. CHART ON MAP OFF HL OFF MOB AIS PLT1 100 1-16 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.5 Menu Operations 1.5.1 How to open and close the main menu The main menu can be accessed from the control unit or from the on-screen box. The
[MAIN MENU] appears in the information box at the right side of the screen. From the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Press the MENU key on the control panel. From the on-screen box Select the [MENU] box, then press the left button. IMO-types Main Menu C-types Main Menu Note 1: For the sake of abbreviation in procedures, the above methods are written col-
lectively as Open the menu. and Close the menu. Note 2: Unless otherwise stated, this manual uses display and menu examples from the C-type. 1-17 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.5.2 How to operate the menus 1. Open the menu. 2. Roll the scrollwheel to select a menu item, then left-click. The menu item currently selected is highlighted and shown in reverse video. You can also select a menu item by pressing the corresponding numeric key on the control unit. Menu selection is highlighted and in reverse video. Select menu items with arrows ( ) to access the next menu layer. In this example, the [ECHO] menu is accessed, then the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu is accessed. The next menu layer appears. Menu items with arrows, as shown in the above ex-
ample figure, have their own menu layer. You can select these items to show the respective menu. 3. Roll the scrollwheel to select a menu item, then left-click. You can also select a menu item by pressing the corresponding numeric key. When required. repeat this step to access the next menu. In the example, [1 ECHO] is selected, which opens the [ECHO (1/2)] menu. Next,
[2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO] is selected, which opens the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO (1/
2)] menu. Finally, [3 ECHO STRETCH] is selected, in order to change settings. Menus such as the [ECHO] menu and [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu have more than one page. In this case, the currently displayed page is indicated in brackets to the right of the menu title. To view the next page of a menu, select [0 NEXT]. To go back one layer (or page) in the menu, left-click [1 BACK], or right-click. 4. Roll the scrollwheel to select the desired setting, then left-click. The selected set-
ting is highlighted and displayed in reverse video. In the above example, the selected setting at [3 ECHO STRETCH] is [1]. 5. Close the menu. Note 1: Unless otherwise stated, operations in this manual use the scrollwheel for pro-
cedures which require menu selection, or settings changed. Note 2: The term Select has the following meanings in this manual:
Use the trackball to place the cursor on the indicated item, then left-click. Roll the scrollwheel to select the indicated menu option/setting. 1-18 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.5.3 Alphanumeric input When alphanumeric input is required, the software keyboard (shown in the figure be-
low) or the alphanumeric input window (C-types only) appears. Operating the software keyboard Select the number/character desired with the cursor, then left-click. When you finish entering the desired numbers/characters, left-click the [END] button on the software keyboard. Alphanumeric input window The data-input cursor appears as a box over the current selection. Press F3 to toggle between upper and lower case characters. The data-selection cursor appears as a filled square over the current selection. 1. Using the trackball or the scrollwheel, select the character/numeral you want to input, then left-click. The selected character/numeral appears at the location of the data-input cursor, then the data-input cursor moves to the next character/numeral. 2. Repeat step 1 as required. To move the data-input cursor, select [] or [] as required. To delete a character/numeral, move the data-input cursor to the character/nu-
meral that you want to delete, then left-click [Delete]. To clear the input area of all characters/numerals, press and hold F1. 3. Select [ENTER] to complete alphanumeric input and close the window. Note: You can store up to five input shortcuts. These shortcuts appear in the [SE-
LECTIONS] column of the window. To create/edit a shortcut, press the appropriate key, as listed below.
[SELECTION 1]: 1 HL OFF
[SELECTION 2]: 2 EBL OFFSET
[SELECTION 3]: 3 MODE
[SELECTION 4]: 4 OFF CENTER
[SELECTION 5]: 5 CU/TM RESET If no shortcuts are registered by the user, the system stores the 5 most frequently used items to each of the shortcuts. 1-19 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.6 How to Use the On-screen Box Menus Some radar functions can be accessed using the on-screen box as a shortcut to the respective menus. A at the right side of an on-screen box indicates that there is a menu shortcut available. Note: The cursor changes shape according to its location. When placed outside the operational display area the cursor is an arrow (
) shape. When placed inside the operational display area, it is a cross (
). Select the palette indication, then right-click. For the purpose of this example, place the cursor on the palette indication (displayed as "PLTx", where x is the currently selected palette number), inside the brilliance set-
tings box at the bottom-left of the screen. The selected item appears highlighted with a light-blue colored box. Right-click to show the brilliance menu. Shortcuts are available from the following on-screen boxes/indications/buttons:
[PICTURE] box.
[AIS] box.*
[TT] box.*
[HDG] indication.
[SPD] indication.
[POSN] indication.
[PLT] indication.
*: Not shown on C-type simple display.
**: Shown only on IMO-types.
***: Shown only on C-types.
[ANTENNA SELECTION] box. User settings box.**
[MARK] box. Time indication ("UTC" or "Local").
[TRAIL] indication.
[CHART] button.***
[WPT MARK] button.***
1-20 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.7
[CURSOR] Menu and Cursor Operations 1.7.1 How to show/hide the cursor (C-type only) You can show/hide the cursor with one of the following methods:
Press the 9 CURSOR ON/OFF key. Press the 3 MODE key. This method requires [5 MODE KEY FUNCTION] set to
[CURSOR ON-OFF] (located in [9 INITIAL SETTINGS] page 2 of [5 OPERA-
TIONS] menu; see section 1.9). Press the function key assigned with [CURSOR ON-OFF] (see section 1.8). Select [CURSOR ON-OFF] from the [CURSOR] menu (see section 1.7.3). 1.7.2 Cursor data box Place the cursor on a target/echo to show information for that location in the cursor data box, located at the top-right of the display (see example figure below). Cursor data display area 1 Cursor data display area 2 TTG (Time to go) to cursor location The following data can be shown in the cursor data box. Radar type IMO-type Cursor data display area 1 Cursor data display area 2 C-type Range and bearing to the cursor location. X/Y coordinates for the cursor location. Latitude/longitude for the cursor location. Latitude/longitude for the cursor location. Range and bearing to the cursor location. X/Y coordinates for the cursor location. Difference between cursor location and Loran/Decca data.*
*: Requires [8 LORAN/DECCA] set to [ON] in the [4 CURSOR] menu (located in the [3 CURSOREBLVRM] menu) Place the cursor on the cursor data area (1 or 2) in the cursor data box, then press the left button to change the displayed information. For IMO-types, data area 1 is fixed at latitude/longitude and cannot be changed. Note 1: For the X-Y co-ordinates display, the Y-axis is the upper/lower half of the screen, the upper half of the screen is plus and the lower part of the screen is mi-
nus. The X-axis is the left/right-side of the screen, right is plus, left is minus. Note 2: Cursor data reads "- - -.-" when the cursor is placed outside the operational display area. 1-21 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.7.3 How to Use the [CURSOR] Menu Functions that require the use of the cursor, such as EBL offset and zoom, can be activated directly from the [CURSOR] menu. Below is the procedure for choosing cursor-related functions from the [CURSOR] menu. 1. Select the operational display area, then press the right button. The [CURSOR] menu appears. 2. Select the desired function, then left-click. 3. The guidance box shows "XX / EXIT" (XX
= function selected). Use the trackball to place the cursor where desired. Note: You can also select the cursor func-
tion, when the cursor is inside the opera-
tional display area, by spinning the scrollwheel. 4. Left-click to execute the function selected at step 3. 5. To quit the selected function, right-click when the guidance box shows "XX / EXIT"
(XX = function selected). The table below list the contents of the cursor context menu with a brief descrip-
tion. Menu Item Page 1
[TARGET DATA / ACQ]
[TARGET CANCEL]
[TT TGT DATA / ACQ]
[REF MARK]*1
[EBL OFFSET]
[OFFCENTER]
[ZOOM]
[MARK DELETE]
[OWN TRACK DELETE]
[MAP ALIGN]
[TRAIL ERASER]*2
[MARK SELECT]*2
[MOVE MARKWPT]*2
[WPT]*2
[GO TO]*2 Description TT: Acquires target; displays data for selected tracked target. AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; displays data for selected AIS target. TT: Cancels tracking on selected tracked target. AIS: Sleeps selected AIS target. Acquires selected echo as tracked target. Inscribes reference mark, for target-based speed input. Offsets EBL to measure range and bearing be-
tween two targets. Shifts screen center to selected location. Zooms selected location. Deletes selected mark (plotter mark, origin mark or waypoint mark). Deletes own ship's tracks. Aligns charts (maps) with the radar picture. Erases trails. Opens the [MARK COLOR/SHAPE] window. Moves the selected mark or waypoint. Inserts a waypoint. Selects/deselect a destination. 1-22 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Menu Item Description Opens the [CHANGE TRACK COLOR] window. Show/hide the cursor. Start/stop track recording.
[TRACK COLOR]*2
[TRACK ON/OFF]*2
[CURSOR ON/OFF]*2 Page 2
[TARGET DATA / ACQ SETTING] Change target tracking settings.
[TARGET CANCEL SETTING]
[CIRCLE CURSOR]*2
*1: For C-types, this menu item appears on page 2 of the [CURSOR] menu.
*2: These menu items only appear for C-types. Change target cancel settings. Insert/remove the circle cursor. Note 1: Menu items set to [OFF] at [CURSOR MENU SELECT] (located in [9 INITIAL SETTINGS] page 2 of the [5 OPERATION] menu) are not shown in the [CURSOR]
menu. Note 2: The following [CURSOR] menu items appear for C-types when the cursor is shown.
[TARGET CANCEL]
[EBL OFFSET]
[MAP ALIGN]
[TT TGT DATA / ACQ]
[ZOOM]
[TRAIL ERASER]
[REF MARK]
[MARK DELETE]
[MOVE MARKWPT]
Note 3: The following items are not shown in the CURSOR menu when the radar is transmitting.
[TT TGT DATA / ACQ]
[ZOOM]
[REF MARK]
[MAP ALIGN]
[EBL OFFSET]
[TRAIL ERASER]
1.7.4 How to change the cursor data attributes (C-type only) You can change the cursor bearing reference, cursor range unit, cursor size and also align the cursor by latitude/longitude. Changing some of these settings affects the in-
dications in the cursor data display. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 EBLVRMCURSOR SET]. 3. Select [4 CURSOR]. The [CURSOR] menu appears. 1-23 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 4. Select the item you want to change, referring to the list below.
[2 CURSOR BEARING]: Sets the bearing reference.
[3 CURSOR RANGE]: Sets the unit of measurement for cursor range. Note: If a different measurement unit is used for short distances, adjust the setting
(see section 1.32.4).
[4 CURSOR SIZE]: Sets the cursor size.
[5 CURSOR L/L ALIGN]*: Sets whether to align the cursor with latitude/longitude. Appears when
[CURSOR L/L]
ALIGN] is set to
[ON].
[6 ENLARGED CURSOR INFO]: Sets whether to show enlarged cursor data box contents in a separate window. You can move the enlarged data box with the fol-
lowing procedure:
1) Place the cursor on the enlarged data box, then left-click. 2) Use the trackball to move the data box to the desired location. 3) Left-click to anchor the box at the new location.
[7 CURSOR COLOR]: Sets the color for the cursor.
[8 LORAN/DECCA]: Sets whether to show LORAN/DECCA data in the cursor data box.
*: For IMO-types, this menu item is located in [MAIN MENU] [3 NAV TOOLS]
[3 EBLVRMCURSOR SET]. 5. Close the menu. 1.8 Function Keys Some menu functions and menus can be assigned to a function key. This allows one-
touch access to the assigned function or menu. 1.8.1 How to set the function key mode (C-types only) You can set the function keys to have on of the following modes:
SINGLE: One function per function key, activated when the key is pressed. MULTI: Multiple functions per function key. A function selection window appears when the key is pressed. To set the function mode, do the following:
1. Open the [MAIN MENU]. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [6 FUNCTION KEY SETUP]. 4.
[0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 5. Select the appropriate function key whose mode you want to change. 6. Select [SINGLE] or [MULTI], as required. 7. Close the menu. 1-24 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.8.2 How to use the function keys To activate an assigned function, press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3 or F4). The pre-assigned (default) functions differ, depending on your radar type (C-
types or IMO-type) and the selected mode (C-types only). Default functions for C-types using [SINGLE] mode and IMO-types Function key F1 F2 F3 F4 IMO-type default C-type default IR (Interference Rejector) ES (Echo Stretch) AUTO-SEA AUTO-RAIN TRK COLOR SEL TRK INTVL MARK SELECT TLL Default function for C-types using [MULTI] mode F1 F2 2 TRK COLOR SEL 2 TRK INTVL 3 IR 4 ES 5 EAV F4 F3 2 MARK SELECT 2 TLL 3 MOB 4 GO TO 4 DISPLAY MODE 5 TRK COLOR SEL 5 SCREEN SHOT 3 CHART DISPLAY 3 WPT 4 NAV AIDS 5 OWN TRACK DISPLAY 6 TT-DISP 7 AIS-DISP 6 ACE 7 AUTO-SEA 6 TRK INTVL 7 CURSOR ON-
OFF 8 (Not assigned) 9 (Not assigned) 6 (Not assigned) 7 (Not assigned) 8 (Not assigned) 9 (Not assigned) 8 AUTO-RAIN 9 (Not assigned) 8 ((Not assigned)) 9 (Not assigned) To activate an assigned function [MULTI] mode, do the following:
1. Press the function key that contains the function you want to use. The corresponding menu appears. (F4 is pressed in the following example.) 2. Select the appropriate function. Note: You can select [9 Fx FUNCTION KEY] (where x is the number of the selected function key) to access the function key setup menu. 1-25 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.8.3 How to change the function(s) assigned to a key You can change the function assigned to each key using the following procedure. 1. Open the [MAIN MENU]. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [6 FUNCTION KEY SETUP]. The function key setup menu appears. When [SINGLE] is selected as the key mode, the current setting for the function key is shown here. Function keys with [MULTI] selected as their mode are hidden. 4. Select the function key to set up. Note: If the selected keys mode is set to [MULTI], the function selection menu ap-
pears after you select the function key. 5. Referring to the table of available functions below, select a function category, then left-click. You can check the currently assigned functions in the bottom half of the menu. Function category
[2 ECHO]
[3 STD KEY]
[4 TTAIS]
[5 DELETE DA-
TA]
Available functions CUSTOM SELECT, IR, ES, EAV, NOISE REJ, ANT SELECT, PULSE LENGTH, AUTO-SEA, AUTO-RAIN, TUNE SELECT*4, TX CHANNEL*3, 2ND ECHO REJ, STC CURVE, STC RANGE, PM, SART, ECHO TRAIL, TRAIL T/R, WIPER*1, ACE, ACE HIGH SENSITIVITY, TARGET ANALYZER ALERT ACK, STBY TX, HL OFF, EBL OFFSET, ORIENTATION-MODE, OFF CENTER, CU-TM RESET, PI LINE, VECTOR TIME, VECTOR MODE, TARGET LIST, BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE UP, RANGE DOWN, ACQ, TARGET DA-
TA, TARGET CANCEL TT-DISP, AIS-DISP, TARGET DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN INTERVAL, REF MARK, CPA LIMIT, CPA, TCPA, AZ1, AZ2, TARGET LIST SORT, TRIAL MA-
NEUVER*2, TRIAL MODE CHANGE*2, ASSOCIATION, AIS MESSAGE, AIS SCALED SYMBOL, CONSORT-DISP*1, GPS BUOY-DISP*1, CONSORT LIST*1, GPS BUOY LIST*1, CONSORT MESSAGES*1 MARK DELETE, MARK ALL DELETE, OWN TRK DELETE, OWN TRK ALL DE-
LETE, TGT TRK DELETE*1, TGT TRK ALL DELETE*1
[6 OPERATION] BUZZER STOP, ECHO AREA*1, ECHO COLOR, PALETTE, RING(ON/OFF), ZOOM, MOB*2, ALARM1, ALARM2, WATCH ALERT RESET, TLL*1, MAP ALIGN, ANCHOR WATCH, DROP MARK, SCREEN SHOT, CHART DISPLAY*1, NAV AIDS*1, CURSOR ON-OFF*1, CURSOR CENTER/DISPLAY MODE*1 1-26 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Function category Available functions
[7 PLOTTER]*1 WPT, GO TO, WAYPOINT LIST, MARK SELECT, TRK COLOR SEL, TRK INT-
VL, PLOTTER, EDIT TRACK, MARK SIZE, WAYPOINT MARK, OWN TRACK DISPLAY, TRK ROUTE CONVERSION, GRID, ENLARGED CURSOR INFO, TRK TEMP DATA DISP, TRK DEPTH DATA DISP PICTURE1 through PICTURE12
[8 PICTURE]*1
*1: C-types only; *2: IMO-types only; *3: Used for SSD radars only; *4: Used for magnetron radars only. 6. Repeat the procedure as necessary to set up other function keys. 7. Close the menu. 1.9 How to Customize Operation Several operation items can be customized to suit your needs. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTING]. 3. Select [5 OPERATION]. The [OPERATION]
menu appears. 4. Referring to the table below, press the menu item number to select the appropriate menu item to customize. Menu items Page 1
[2 MOUSE WHEEL DIR]
[3 KEY BEEP]
[4 OWN SHIP VEC-
TOR]
[5 STERN UP RM]*1
[6 DISPLAY MODE]*1 Description Sets the direction of the wheel drive (scrollwheel).
[NORMAL]: Scroll downwards to increase, or upwards to decrease the value.
[REVERSE]: Scroll directions are reverse of [NORMAL]. Changes the key beep volume. Select [OFF] to silence the key beeps. Select [LOW], [MID], [HIGH] to ad-
just the volume for key beeps. Select how the own ship vector is displayed.
[OFF]; Own ship vector is not displayed.
[HDG]: Vector is displayed in heading direction.
[COURSE]: Vector is displayed in course direction. Select [ON] to show [STERN UP RM] orientation in the selection cycle
(see section 1.30). Switch between [SIMPLE] and [NORMAL] display mode. See section 1.4.1 for display examples. Note: TT/AIS settings are not available in the simple display. To change or adjust TT/AIS settings, make the changes/adjustments at the standard display, then switch to the simple display. Continued on following page Continued from previous page 1-27 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Menu items Description
[6 SHUTTLE FERRY]*2 Sets the shuttle ferry mode to use.
[OFF]: Shuttle ferry mode is deactivated.
[MODE1]: Shuttle ferry mode is activated. See "Shuttle ferry mode
(IMO-types only)" on next page.
[MODE2]: Shuttle ferry mode is activated. See "Shuttle ferry mode
(IMO-types only)" on next page. Note: Shuttle ferry mode requires an external switch.
[7 ICING PREVEN-
TION]
[8 HDG FINE ADJUST] Adjusts the heading line location. 0.0, the default setting, shows the Select [ON] to rotate the antenna without transmission, to prevent ice buildup. See section 1.54.
[9 USB MOUSE SPEED]
Page 2
[2 AUTO COURSE UP RESET]
[3 DISPLAY SCROLL]*1
[4 CURSOR MENU SELECT]*1 heading line pointing towards the top of the screen. Adjust the USB mouse sensitivity. A higher value increase the mouse cur-
sors movement speed. Select [ON] to enable, or [OFF] to disable the automatic reset of the screen when using COURSE UP orientation and your course is more than 22.5 to either side the center of the screen. Select [ON] to enable, [OFF] to disable display scrolling. When set to
[ON], move the cursor to the edge of the screen in the direction you want to scroll. Open the [CURSOR MENU SELECT] menu. You can show/hide menu items which appear in the [CURSOR] menu. Select [OFF] to hide, [ON] to show the menu item.
[5 MODE KEY FUNC-
TION]*1
[6 TRAIL TIME LINK]*1 Set the behavior of the [3 MODE] key.
[ORIENTATION]: change the orientation mode with each press.
[CURSOR ON-OFF]: Show/hide the cursor with each press.
[NO LINK]: Trail time is not linked with changes in range.
[LINK RANGE]: Link [TRAIL TIME] with the range. As the range chang-
es, the trail time is also automatically regulated to show a constant trail. When linked, the trail time indication appears in yellow color. Note 1: When using a range that is valid only when in stand-by mode, the trail time is automatically adjusted to match either the maximum or minimum range available in transmit mode. Note 2: Linking is only applied when [TRAIL TIME] is set to [NORMAL]
(see section 1.37.2). 1-28
1 2 | User Manual 13 | Users Manual | 5.75 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The reference for the past position displays for AIS and TT is also switched whenever the trail reference is switched. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. Note: You can also right-click the [TRAIL] box to access this menu. Right-click the
[TRAIL] box to show the [TRAILS] menu.
[TRAIL] box Trail time Trail mode indication 5. Select [TRAIL MODE]. 6. Select the appropriate trail mode, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[REL]: Relative target trails. Targets move relative to own ship and stationary targets appear smeared.
[TRUE]: True target trails. Targets true movements are shown, stationary tar-
gets are not smeared. 7. Close the menu. You can also click the trail mode indication to toggle between relative and true trails. 1-83 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.37.2 Trail time Trail time is the interval at which the trail is plotted on-screen. Note: If the trail time is linked with the range (see section 1.9), the trail time is also automatically regulated to show a constant trail. Further, the trail time indication ap-
pears in yellow color. To link the trail time with the range, select [NORMAL] in the fol-
lowing procedures; range link is not available if a setting other than [NORMAL] is selected. Also, when using a range that is valid only when in stand-by mode, the trail time is automatically adjusted to match either the maximum or minimum range avail-
able in transmit mode. You can change the trail time as follows:
Using the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) 1. Press the CANCEL TRAILS key to cycle through and select the desired setting. For IMO-types, the cyclic order is as follows:
[OFF] [15 sec] [30 sec] [1 min] [3 min] [6min] [15 min] [30 min]
[CONT] [OFF]... For C-types, the available options depend on the setting for [TRAIL LENGTH] in the [TRAILS] section of [ECHO] menu. To set the [TRAIL LENGTH] time, see section 1.37.12.
[TRAIL LENGTH]
setting
[NORMAL]
[12H]
[24H]
[48H]
Available options
[OFF], [15 sec], [30 sec], [1 min], [3 min], [6 min], [15 min], [30 min],
[CONT].
[OFF], [30 min], [1 hr], [3 hr], [6 hr], [12 hr], [CONT].
[OFF], [1 hr], [2 hr], [3 hr], [6 hr], [12 hr], [18 hr], [24 h], [CONT].
[OFF], [2 hr], [4 hr], [8 hr], [16 hr], [24 hr], [36 hr], [48 h], [CONT]. Using the on-screen box 1. Place the cursor on the trail time setting inside the [TRAIL] box, at the bottom-right of the screen. 2. Left-click the [TRAIL] box to change the trail time. For IMO-types, the cyclic order is as follows: [OFF] [15 sec] [30 sec] [1 min] [3 min] [6min] [15 min] [30 min] [CONT] [OFF]... For C-types, the available options depend on the setting for [TRAIL LENGTH] in the [TRAILS] section of [ECHO] menu. To set the [TRAIL LENGTH] time, see section 1.37.12. 00:00 Trail time Trail time setting Trail mode and stabilization. Displayed as: TRUE-S, TRUE-G or REL. S: Sea stablized, G: Ground stabilized, REL: Relative Spin the scrollwheel to change the trail time. The options for each [TRAIL LENGTH] setting are listed the following table.
[TRAIL LENGTH]
setting
[NORMAL]
[12H]
[24H]
[48H]
Available options
[OFF], [15 sec], [30 sec], [1 min] to [30 min] at 30-second inter-
vals, [CONT].
[OFF], [00:30] to [12:00] at 30 minute intervals, [CONT].
[OFF], [00:30] to [24:00] at one hour intervals, [CONT].
[OFF], [00:30] to [48:00] at two hour intervals, [CONT]. 1-84 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Note 1: The timer displays the elapsed time of the selected trail. Use caution when using this feature, as the displayed time is not the overall trail time. Also, when the trail timer is displayed, the trail accuracy of other ships echoes may be lowered. When the trail time reaches the preset interval, the timer disappears. Note 2: The [CONT] option sets the trail time plotting as continuous. When the plotting time reaches 29:59, the timer is hidden. The timer reappears when [TRAIL ALL CLEAR] is selected, or when the range is changed. 1.37.3 Trail gradation The trail afterglow can be displayed in a single tone or gradual time-based shading. Single
(Monotone shading) Multiple
(Gradual shading) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [3 TRAIL GRADATION]. 6. Select the appropriate setting, referring to the following list.
[SINGLE]: Trails are displayed in monotone.
[MULTI]: Trails are displayed in multiple colors, based on time.
[5STEP]*: Trails are colored in 5 shades, brightest color for new trails, dullest color for old trails.
*: C-types only. 7. Close the menu. 1.37.4 Trail level The level, or intensity, of the afterglow that extends from radar targets can be selected as below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [5 TRAIL LEVEL]. 6. Select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key. The higher the number, the greater the intensity of the afterglow. 7. Close the menu. 1-85 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.37.5 Narrow trails (C-type only) Target trails can be painted with thinner lines if desired. This csection 1.37.2an be useful when there are a lot of targets on the screen and it is hard to distinguish one from another. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [8 NARROW TRAIL]. 6. Select the appropriate setting from [OFF], [1] or [2], then press the ENTER MARK key. A trail with a setting of [2] is thinner than a trail with a setting of [1]. 7. Close the menu. 1.37.6 How to hide the trails temporarily Following the procedure outlined in section 1.37.2, set the trail time to [OFF]. The trails are hidden from view, but are continued. To show the trails again, repeat the proce-
dure, setting the trail time to any interval other than [OFF]. 1.37.7 Trail stabilization in true motion True motion trails can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The [TRAIL] box shows current stabilization as "TRUE-G" or "TRUE-S". You can change the stabilization mode with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [3 SPEED]. The [SPEED] menu appears. Note: You can also access the [SPEED] menu from the on-screen box. Place the cursor on the [SPD ] indication in the speed box at the top-right of the screen, then right-click. 5. Select [2 SHIP SPEED]. 6. Select [LOG(BT)] (ground stabilization) or [LOG(WT)] (sea stabilization) as re-
quired. 7. Close the menu. Note: The stabilization mode is applied to own ship speed and TT trails. 1-86 1.37.8 How to erase/restart trails 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW All trails can be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted to start fresh trails. There are three methods you can use to erase trails. To erase all trails displayed in the operational display area:
Select the [TRAIL] box, then press and hold the left button on the trackball; or Press and hold CANCEL TRAILS key. To erase a section of a trail (C-types only):
1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] menu. 2. Select [TRAIL ERASER]. The cursor is now displayed with a red surround and a dashed circle, indicating that [TRAIL ERASER] mode is active. 3. Press the left button to change the diameter of the dashed circle, as shown in the figure below. 4. Place the cursor on the trail whose section you want to erase, then press and hold the left button. 5. With the left button pressed, drag the cursor over the section of the trail you want to erase. The section of trail covered by the dashed circle is erased. 6. Release the left button. 7. Right-click to deactivate the [TRAIL ERASER] function. The cursor is no longer highlighted and the dashed circle disappears. 1.37.9 How to prevent sea clutter in true trails You can prevent the display of sea clutter in true trails about your ship to clear the ra-
dar picture. Your ship's trails can also be shown or hidden. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [7 SUPPRESS AROUND OS]. 6. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate. Note: For IMO-types, when [6 OS TRAIL] is set to [ON], [7 SUPPRESS TRAILS]
is automatically fixed at [ON]. To disable the sea clutter suppression feature, change [6 OS TRAIL] to [OFF], then change the setting for [7 SUPPRESS TRAILS]. 7. Close the menu. 1-87 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.37.10 How to show/hide OS trails To show or hide the OS trail at any time, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [6 OS TRAIL]. 6. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate. Note: For IMO-types, when [6 OS TRAIL] is set to [ON], [7 SUPPRESS AROUND OS] is automatically fixed at [ON]. To disable the sea clutter suppres-
sion feature, change [6 OS TRAIL] to [OFF], then change the setting for [7 SUP-
PRESS AROUND OS]. 7. Close the menu. 1.37.11 How to show/hide land trails (C-type only) You can improve the on-screen display visibility by hiding trails generated by land-
masses and non-moving objects. Hiding the trails has the following possible benefits:
Land-masses have no trail, allowing you to use relative trails near coastlines. Only moving echoes create a trail, improving target identification. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 6. Select [2 HIDE LAND TRAILS(T)] or [3 HIDE LAND TRAILS(R)] as appropriate. 7. Referring to the table below, select the appropri-
ate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key. Setting
[OFF]
[1]
[2]
Trails for non-moving objects Large objects Small objects Trails for moving objects Trails are shown Trails are hidden Trails are hidden Trails are shown Trails are shown Trails are hidden Trails are shown Trails are shown Trails are shown 8. Close the menu. Note: When option [1] or [2] is selected trails for echoes outside the displayed area are not generated. It is important to note that, where the displayed area is moved by functions such as off-centering or true motion, newly displayed echoes do not have trails. 1-88 1.37.12 How to set the trail length (C-type only) You can save up to 48 hours of trails. the [TRAIL LENGTH] can be set to one of the following lengths: [NORMAL], [12H], [24H] or [48H]. To set the trail length, follow the procedure below. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 6. Select [4 TRAIL LENGTH]. 7. Select the desired length.
[NORMAL]: Trails are displayed in a single, continuous line with a single color.
[12H], [24H] or [48H]: Trails appear in segments. The interval for each segment change depends on your selection, as shown below. 12H: One hour intervals. 24H: Two hour intervals. 48H: Four hour intervals. Note: When a length other than [NORMAL] is selected, set [3 TRAIL GRADA-
TION] to [SINGLE]. If you select [MULTI], the interval between each colored seg-
ment may be difficult to see clearly. 8. Close the menu. 1.37.13 How to set the trail color (C-type only) The setting for trail coloration depends on the setting for [3 TRAIL GRADATION] and
[4 TRAIL LENGTH], as shown in the following table. Length Gradation NORMAL SINGLE MULTI
[12H], [24H], [48H] MULTI Setting location
[MAIN] [2 ECHO] [0 NEXT] [4 TRAILS]
[4 TRAIL COLOR]
SINGLE
[MAIN] [2 ECHO] [0 NEXT] [4 TRAILS]
[0 NEXT] [6 LONG TRAIL COLOR]
Where [TRAIL LENGTH] is set to [NORMAL]
You can assign one of six colors when [4 TRAIL LENGTH] is set to [NORMAL]. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAILS] menu appears. 5. Select [4 TRAIL COLOR]. 6. Select the required color. The available colors are: [GRN] (green), [BLU] (blue),
[CYA] (cyan), [MAG] (magenta), [WHT] (white) and [YEL] (yellow). 7. Close the menu. 1-89 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Where [TRAIL LENGTH] is set to other than [NORMAL]
When [4 TRAIL LENGTH] is set to [12H], [24H] or [48H], you can color the trails with one of two methods: one continuous color, or multicolor. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAILS] menu appears. 5. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 6. Select [6 LONG TRAIL COLOR]. The [LONG TRAIL COLOR MENU] appears (see figure to the right). 7. Select [3 LONG TRAIL COLORS]. 8. Set the colors as desired. Left-click to move the cursor through the colors, spin the scrollwheel to change the highlighted color. The menu shows 12 colors, numbered accordingly from [1]
to [12]. The first segment of the trails is assigned the color for number [1]. 9. Close the menu. 1.37.14 How to remove the colors from a section of a multicolor trail
(C-type only) You can remove the color(s) from a section of a multicolor trail, leaving the selected section as a gray trail. To remove the color(s), follow the procedure below. Note: This function is only available when [4 TRAIL LENGTH] is set to other than
[NORMAL]. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 6. Select [5 TRAIL GRAY-OUT TIME]. 7. Select the start and end times for the period you want to gray-out. 8. Close the menu. 1-90 1.37.15 How to offset the colors for multicolored trail (C-type only) You can shift the order of the trail colors. When this function is active, the first color used to paint the trail is changed. For example if you had selected [FUSCHIA] before activating the offset feature, the start color would be [MAROON]. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW To offset the colors, follow the procedure below. Echo trail Target echo Fuschia Maroon Red Magenta Yellow Echo trail Maroon Red Magenta Yellow Lime Fuschia coloration starts here Trail coloration before offset is applied Trail coloration after offset is applied 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [4 TRAILS]. The [TRAIL MENU] appears. 5. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 6. Select [6 LONG TRAIL COLOR]. 7. Select [2 OFFSET TRAIL COLOR]. 8. To offset the color by one, select [ON]. To leave the colors in their original order, select [OFF]. 9. Close the menu. 1-91 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.38 Target Analyzer (C-type only) The target analyzer function analyzes echoes and assists the operator to determine dangerous targets. This function is particularly useful under heavy rain/snow or where there is surface reflection, which can cause interference and noise. The target analyzer function can also place hatching over heavy rain areas, reducing the visible interference and allowing a clearer view of potential targets. Echoes are displayed in five different colors to assist the operator in identifying tar-
gets. The colors and their respective echoes change depending on the echo color se-
lected from the [BRILL] menu (see section 1.46) are shown in the table below. Echo Surface reflection Rain Moving target Approaching target Other echoes Selected echo color YEL Green Gray Red Pink Yellow GRN Green Gray Red Pink Green WHT Green Gray Red Pink White AMB Green Gray Red Pink Amber M-GRN Green Gray Pink White M-CYA Green Gray Pink White Red to green Red to blue The following example figures show the manner in which this function affects dis-
played echoes. No echo adjustment
(Target analyzer off, EAV off, hatching off) Rain, moving targets and surface reflections are all displayed with no filtering. Minimal echo adjustment
(Target analyzer on, EAV off, hatching off) Echoes are colored, surface reflections are filtered, rain is displayed. Moderate echo adjustment
(Target analyzer on, EAV on, hatching off) Echoes are colored, surface reflections and rain are filtered. Maximum echo adjustment
(Target analyzer on, EAV on, hatching on) Echoes are colored, surface reflections are filtered, rain is displayed in gray colored hatching. 1-92 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Note 1: This function works best when the settings for [GAIN], [STC], [RAIN], [NOISE REJECT] and [VIDEO CONTRAST] are properly adjusted (surface reflections are dis-
played in green and rain is displayed in gray). Note 2: This function recognizes moving targets as approaching targets. Buoys and other stationary objects are not recognized as approaching targets by this function. Note 3: The target analyzer function requires a short period of time to analyze echoes and display them on-screen. If your antenna revolves at more than 40 rpm, moving targets may not be displayed correctly. For this reason, caution is advised when using the target analyzer function. Note 4: The target analyzer functions performance may be affected by factors such as target size, weather and sea conditions, physical equipment configuration, offset settings and other factors. What is hatching?
Where echo averaging may hide light rain on the display, the hatching feature, when activated, places a gray veil over the areas where rain is detected. This allows the operator to see where the rain is without affecting the quality of the displayed echoes. 1.38.1 How to activate/deactivate the target analyzer 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [5 TARGET ANALYZER]. 5. Select [OFF] to deactivate the function, or [ON] to activate the function. 6. Select [HATCHING]. 7. Select [OFF] to deactivate the function, or [ON] to activate the function. 8. Close the menu. 1-93 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.39 Target Alarm The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets (ships, landmasses, etc.) en-
tering a specific area, with audiovisual alerts. The operator can set the alarm zones at any location, with any size, however, the zones must be inside the operational display area. CAUTION CAUTION The alarm should not be relied upon as the sole means for detecting possible collision situations. Note: The target alarm boxes are not displayed when the setting for [AZ/ALR SELECT] in the [TTAIS] menu is set to the default setting [AQUISITION ZONE]. To enable this function, set [AZ/
ALR SELECT] in the [TTAIS] menu to [TARGET ALARM ZONE]. A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls should be properly adjusted to be sure the alarm system does not overlook target echoes. 1.39.1 How to set a target alarm The procedure below shows how to set a target alarm using the figure below as an example. The alarm boxes are labeled [1:] and [2:], and are located at the bottom-right of the screen, near the VRM boxes. TGT ALR TT / AIS 1:MUTE 2:WORK Alarm zone 1 is selected
(highlighted) and inactive. Alarm zone 2 is set and active. 1. Select the appropriate alarm box, then left-click. The cursor jumps into the opera-
tional display area and the indication "SET" appears inside the target alarm box selected. 2. Using the trackball, move the cursor to Point A, then left-click. 3. Using the trackball, move the cursor to Point B, then left-click. The indication SET is replaced with WORK in the box. The target alarm zones lines are shown as dashed lines. Target alarm zone 340 330 320 350 000 010 020 030 040 050 A B 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 310 300 280290 270 260 250 240 230 220 130 140 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 Other alarm zone examples Point B X Point A X X Point A X Point B Note 1: To create a 360 alarm zone, set Point B at the same location as Point A. Note 2: Two alarm zones can be set simultaneously. The second alarm zone is only available when the first alarm zone is active, however. Note 3: When the target alarm zone is not within the range in use the indication "UP RNG" appears to the right of the target alarm box. In this case select a range that will display the target alarm zone. 1-94 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.39.2 How to mute the target alarm A target in the target alarm zone produces both visual (flashing) and audible (beep) alarms. To silence the audio alarm select the appropriate target alarm box then left-
click. The target alarm box indication shows "MUTE". This will deactivate the audio alarm but will not stop the flashing of the offending target. You can also stop the alarm by deactivating the target alarm zone (see section 1.39.3). To reactivate the audio alarm, select the target alarm box then left-click to show
"WORK" in the box. 1.39.3 How to deactivate a target alarm Select the target box to be deactivated, then press and hold the left button on the Control Unit. Note: When both alarm zones are active, the second ([2:]) alarm zone must be deac-
tivated before the first ([1:]) can be deactivated. If both zones are active when you try to deactivate zone [1:], the system releases two audible beeps and shows the message "DELETE ALR2 FIRST". 1.39.4 How to change target alarm attributes You can select the echo strength level that triggers the alarm, the condition that gen-
erates the alarm and the volume of the audio alarm as follows:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [4 ALERTS]. 3. Select [6 TARGET ALARM]. 4. Select [2 ALR1 MODE] or [3 ALR2 MODE] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Select [IN] or [OUT] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[IN]: Targets entering the alarm zone trigger the alarm.
[OUT]: Targets leaving the alarm zone trigger the alarm. 6. Select [4 LEVEL]. 7. Select the appropriate level of echo strength to trigger the alarm, then press the ENTER MARK key. [1]: weak echoes can trigger the alarm, [4]:
only strong echoes trigger the alarm. 8. Select [1 BACK] to return to the [ALERT] menu. 9. Select [3 ALERT VOLUME]. 10. Select [OFF], [LOW], [MID] or [HIGH] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. Note 1: This setting is applied to all alarms output from this radar system. Note 2: The [OFF] options is not shown for IMO-type radars. 11. Close the menu. 1-95 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.40 PI (Parallel Index) Lines PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. You can control the presentation and interval of the PI lines from the [PI Line] box, which is at the lower-left corner of the screen (see example figure below). PI lines PI line number PI line status PI line interval PI line bearing and reference 1.40.1 How to show/hide the PI lines You can show or hide the PI lines as required with one of the following procedures. Using the on-screen box 1. Place the cursor on the PI line number or PI line status in the PI line box. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the PI line (PI1 to PI6) you want to show or hide. Note: PI5 and PI6 are only available when [SET MAXIMUM PI LINES] is set to [1]. 3. Left-click to toggle between [ON] (PI line is shown) or [OFF] (PI line is hidden). Using the control unit (RCU-031 only) 1. Press 6 INDEX LINE to select the PI line you want to use (PI1 to PI6). Note: PI5 and PI6 are only available when [SET MAXIMUM PI LINES] is set to [1]. 2. Press and hold 6 INDEX LINE to toggle the selected PI line on or off. 1.40.2 How to set the maximum number of lines to display You can select the maximum number of PI lines to display. The actual number of lines visible depends on the line interval (see section 1.40.3). 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu ap-
pears. 4. Select [3 SET MAXIMUM PI LINES]. 5. Select the appropriate option. For IMO-types, the maximum number of PI lines available is 6. For C-types, the maximum number of PI lines available is 11. If you set [1] as the maximum, PI1 through PI6 are available for use. For all other options, only PI1 through PI4 are available for use. This set-
ting is applied to all PI lines. 6. Close the menu. 1-96 1.40.3 How to change PI line bearing and interval 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. If not already displayed, show a PI line, referring to section 1.40.2. 2. Place the arrow on the PI line bearing and reference indication in the [PI Line] box. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line bearing, between 000.0 to 359.9. 4. Place the cursor on the PI line interval. 5. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line interval. A negative interval value moves to the PI line to one side of the line which inter-
sects the own ship position. A positive interval value moves the line to the other side of the own ship position. How to link PI lines with the EBL and VRM (C-types only) You can link the PI line bearing with the EBLs bearing and the PI line interval with the VRM distance; this allows you to adjust the PI lines with the EBL and VRM controls. To link the PI lines with the EBL/VRMs, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu appears. 4. Select [8 LINK PI WITH EBL VRM]. 5. Select [ON] to link the PI lines with the EBL/VRMs, select [OFF] to disable the fea-
ture. If you selected [ON], the PI line bearing and interval indications, in the PI line box, are hidden. To adjust the PI line bearing or interval, adjust the EBL or VRM ac-
cordingly. 6. Close the menu. 1.40.4 How to change the PI line bearing reference (C-type only) PI line bearing reference can be relative to own ships heading (Relative) or refer-
enced to North (True) as below. Note: For IMO-types, PI line bearing reference is fixed to North (True). 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu appears. 4. Select [2 PI LINE BEARING]. 5. Select [REL] or [TRUE] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Close the menu. 1-97 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.40.5 How to change the PI line orientation PI lines orientation can be selected from parallel or perpendicular. This function is available when [SET MAXIMUM PI LINES] is set for other than [1]. 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu appears. 4. Select [4 PI LINE MODE]. 5. Select [PARALLEL], [PERPENDIC], or [BOTH]* as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[PARALLEL]: when the PI line bearing is set to 0, the lines are parallel with the heading line.
[PERPENDIC]: when the PI line bearing is set to 0, the lines are perpendicular with the heading line.
[BOTH]: shows PI lines on both sides of the heading line. When the PI line bear-
ing is set to 0, the lines are perpendicular with the heading line.
*: Not available for IMO-types. 6. Close the menu. 1.40.6 How to reset the PI lines to default (ships heading) You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation. The PI lines are reset in the following manner:
[PARALLEL] or [BOTH] set as PI line orientation: parallel with the heading line.
[PERPENDIC] set as PI line orientation: perpendicular with the heading line. From the PI line box 1. Place the cursor on the PI line number or PI line status in the PI line box. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the PI line (PI1 to PI6) whose default orientation you want to reset. 3. Press and hold the left button. PI lines which are displayed on-screen are re-
stored to their default orientation. From the menu 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu appears. 4. Select [5 RESET PI LINES]. All PI lines are reset. 5. Close the menu. 1-98 1.40.7 How to change PI line length You can change the length of the PI lines. This function is only available when [SET MAXIMUM PI LINES] is set to [1]. If not already displayed, you can show PI lines for which you wish to change the length by referring to section 1.40.2. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu appears. 4. Select [6 TRUNC RANGE 1]. 5. Select [ON]. 6. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the front PI line length. The available range is 0.000 NM to 24.000 NM. All PI lines beyond this mark will be hidden. 7. Left-click to confirm the setting. 8. Select [7 TRUNC RANGE 2]. 9. Select [ON]. 10. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the front PI line length. The available range is 0.000 NM to 24.000 NM. All PI lines beyond this mark will be hidden. 11. To change the length of other PI lines, activate the line you wish to adjust, then repeat steps 1 through 10. 12. Close the menu. Heading line PI line OS location TRUNC RANGE 1 length setting TRUNC RANGE 1 length setting TRUNC RANGE 2 length setting TRUNC RANGE 2 length setting 1.40.8 How to change the PI line color (C-types only) You can change the PI line color with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [2 PI LINES]. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 5. Select [2 PI LINE COLOR]. 6. Select the desired color from the menu. The options are: [RED] (red), [GRN]
(green), [BLU] (blue), [YEL] (yellow), [CYA] (cyan), [MAG] (magenta), [WHT]
(white), [ORG] (orange, default). 7. Close the menu. 1-99 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.41 How to Use the Net (Diamond) Cursor (C-type only) The net cursor is used to depict your fishing net on the ra-
dar display. It is especially useful for bottom trawlers for knowing where the net is located. Enter the dimensions of your net in the menu to show the net in scale on the dis-
play. EBL2 1.41.1 How to activate the net cursor Net cursor Net cursor
(Diamond cursor)
(Diamond cursor) To activate the net cursor, do the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [5 NET CURSOR]. The [NET CURSOR] menu appears. 4. Select [2 NET CURSOR DISPLAY]. 5. Select [ON] to activate, or [OFF] to deactivate the net cursor. 6. Close the menu. 1-100 1.41.2 How to set the net cursor dimensions and orientation 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [5 NET CURSOR]. 4.
[3 FRONT HALF LENGTH]. 5. Rotate the scrollwheel, then left-click to set the length of selected net section. Note: The length appears in the [WARP LENGTH]
indication. Adjust the values so that the total length for front and rear is equal to, or less than 3000m. 6. Select [4 REAR HALF LENGTH]. 7. Rotate the scrollwheel, then left-click to set the a b Net width Forward Forward length of length of net net Rear Rear length length of net of net length of selected net section. Note: The length appears in the [WARP LENGTH] indication. Adjust the values so that the total length for front and rear is equal to, or less than 3000m. 8. Select [5 NET WIDTH]. Select [360] or [32 POINTS], then left-click. The net cursor moves in the same manner as EBL2 moves. Select [360] to move with 0.1 steps, or select [32 POINTS] to move with 11.25 steps. 9. Rotate the scrollwheel, then left-click to set the net width. 10. Select [6 ROTATE STEP]. Select [360] or [32 POINTS], then left-click. The net cursor moves in the same manner as EBL2 moves. Select [360] to move with 0.1 steps, or select [32 POINTS] to move with 11.25 steps. 11. Close the menu. 12. Insert the net cursor at the location of the net with the EBL offset function. 1) Press the EBL OFFSET key. 2) Move the cursor onto the net location, then left-click. 13. Rotate the EBL knob to adjust the orientation the net cursor until the cursor is in line with, or against, the tide direction. 1-101 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.42 Circle Cursor (C-types only) The CIRCLE cursor is a handy measuring tool which works similar to a VRM, in that the circle itself can be used to measure distance. However, where the VRM is fixed to a location on the screen, the circle cursor can be fixed to a geographical location or even another vessels echo. Note: Before using this feature, make sure the [MAP ON/OFF] button on the Instant-
Access bar is set to [ON]. This feature is not available when the map is turned off. 1. If the cursor is hidden, show the cursor. For how to show the cursor, see section 1.7.1. 2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] menu. 3. Select [0 NEXT], then select [4 CIRCLE CURSOR]. The cursor now appears with a large white circle, as shown in the following exam-
ple. Circle cursor Circle cursor Cursor Cursor Range from center of the Range from center of the cursor to the circle. cursor to the circle. 4. Move the cursor to the location where you want to start measuring from. 5. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the size (distance) of the circle cursor. The radius
(distance from the cursor to the circle cursor) appears at the left-center of the screen. Note: The size of the circle cursor is directly related to the range at the time it was inserted. If you increase/decrease the range after inserting the circle cursor, the on-screen size of the cursor also changes accordingly. 6. Left-click to fix the circle cursor to that location/echo. To remove the circle cursor, repeat steps 2 and 3, then right-click. 1-102 1.43 Zoom 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The zoom function enlarges an area of interest as large as twice the normal viewing size, in the [INFORMATION BOX]. Zoom can be selected using the control unit or from a preset function key (see section 1.8 for how to assign functions to the function keys). Zoom is not available when the [INFORMATION BOX] setting for [TARGET DATA] is
[LARGE]. To enable/disable the zoom magnification, select the appropriate zoom setting
([2TIMES]: Enables magnification at 2, or [3TIMES]: Enables magnification at 3) from the [ZOOM] option in the [INFORMATION BOX] menu. (See section 1.48.) Note: The zoom function is not available when the [TRUE VIEW] located on the sec-
ond page of the [ECHO] menu) is set to [ON]. 1. Select the operational display area, then right-click to show the [CURSOR] con-
text menu. 2. Select [ZOOM]. 3. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then left-click. The cursor is now displayed with a zoom box. 4. Place the cursor and zoom box at the location you wish to zoom, then left-click to anchor the box. If the zoom box is not placed where you intended to place it, left-click twice, then move the box to the correct place. Left-click to anchor the box. 5. Right-click to complete the procedure. The selected area is displayed on the right-
side of the screen and the cursor returns to normal shape. Zoom box is placed at the location to be zoomed and the cursor returns to its normal shape. Cursor with zoom box To disable the zoom function, repeat steps 1 to 3. At step 3, the zoom box is removed from the display. Note 1: Where the zoom function is assigned to a function key, press the function key to cycle through the zoom settings in the following order: [OFF] [2TIMES] (2 mag-
nification) [3TIMES] (3 magnification) [OFF]... This operation works in direct relation with the settings selected from the [ZOOM] op-
tion in the [INFORMATION BOX] menu. To use the zoom function on a different area, do the procedure (step 1 to step 5) listed above. Note 2: For C-types only, some marks can be inserted from the zoom window. Marks inserted in this manner appear on the main screen and are not shown in the zoom win-
dow. See the list below for mark availability with this feature. Available: TT, map mark, waypoints, GOTO point (requires [SET GOTO METHOD]
to be set as [1POINT]) Not available: Nav line, drop mark, origin mark, area mark, MOB, GOTO point
(when [SET GOTO METHOD] is set as [100POINTS]), mark received from an ex-
ternal source. 1-103 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.44 How to Use Marks 1.44.1 Heading line mark The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar dis-
play area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in HEAD UP mode. The orientation of the line changes depending on the ship orientation in NORTH UP and True Motion modes. Heading line How to hide the heading line temporarily To temporarily extinguish the heading line to look at targets existing dead ahead of own ship, press and hold the HL OFF key, or place the cursor on the [HL OFF] box in the InstantAccess bar then left-click and hold. In addition to the heading line, the stern marker and all graphics within the operational display area are also erased. To redisplay the heading line, etc., release the key or the left button. How to change the heading line thickness (C-types only) You can change the thickness of the heading with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER], then select [0 NEXT]. 3. Select [2 HEADING LINE WIDTH]. 4. Select the desired thickness.
[NORMAL]: the heading line appears at stan-
dard width.
[X3]: the heading appears three times thicker than at [NORMAL].
[X5]: the heading appears five times thicker than at [NORMAL].
[X7]: the heading appears seven times thicker than at [NORMAL]. 5. Close the menu. How to change the color of the heading line (C-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER], then select [0 NEXT]. 3. Select [3 HEADING LINE COLOR]. 4. Select the desired color. 5. Close the menu. 1-104 1.44.2 How to hide/show the stern mark The stern marker, which is a dotted line, appears opposite to the heading line. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Stern line To display or erase this marker do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [2 MARKS]
For C-types, select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. For IMO-types, select [3 STERN MARK]. For C-types, select [7 STERN MARK]. 4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. 5. Close the menu. 1.44.3 North mark North mark The north mark is displayed as a short dotted line on the in-
side edge of the operational display area. In HEAD UP mode, the north mark moves according to the own ship bearing. The north mark is hidden when the radar is in standby mode. How to change the mark thickness (C-types only) If your radar is a C-type, you can change the thickness of the north mark with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER], then select [0 NEXT]. 3. Select [5 NORTH MARK WIDTH]. 4. Select the desired width. NORMAL: North mark is display with the normal width. X3: Increase width to three times the size of normal. X5: Increase width to five times the size of normal. X7: Increase width to seven times the size of normal. 5. Close the menu. 1-105 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.44.4 Bearing ring The bearing ring appears on the outer edge of the operational display area and is used to estimate the bearing of echoes on the screen.
360
32 point For IMO-types, the display format for the bearing ring is fixed at [360] and cannot be changed. For C-types, you can select either [360] or [32 POINTS], however, when using HEAD UP or STERN UP orientation mode, this setting is fixed at [360]. Changing the display format of the bearing ring (C-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [7 BEARING CURSOR]. 4. Select [360] or [32 POINTS] as desired. 5. Close the menu. Changing the color of the bearing ring (C-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM], then select [0 NEXT]. 3. Select [2 BEARING CURSOR COLOR]. 4. Select the desired color. If you select [OFF], the cursor color is determined by the selected color scheme in use (see section 1.46). 5. Close the menu. 1-106 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.44.5 How to set up the own ship mark The own ship mark indicates own position on the display. It can be turned on or off and its configuration selected from the [MARK] menu. Two configurations are available:
minimized symbol and scaled symbol. If the largest dimension of the symbol gets smaller than 6 mm, the scaled symbol will disappear and the own ship mark will be shown as a minimized symbol. The scaled symbol is scaled to indicate the length and beam of the vessel. Ships dimensions should be entered at installation to use the scaled ship symbol. Antenna position X Heading line Beam line Heading line Beam line Scaled symbol Minimized symbol 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [2 MARKS]
For C-types, select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. For IMO-types, select [2 OWN SHIP MARK]. For C-types, select [6 OWN SHIP MARK]. 4. Select [MINIMIZED] or [SCALED] as appropriate. 5. Close the menu. 1.44.6 How to set the barge marker You can mark the locations of barges on the display with icons. Note: For IMO-types, this function is not available if [ECDIS] is set to [SERIAL] or
[LAN] at installation. Consult your dealer for details. Set up barge information as follows:
1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [2 MARKS]. For C-types, select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. For IMO-types, select [6 BARGE MARK]. For C-types, select [9 BARGE MARK]. 4. Select [2 BARGE MARK DISPLAY]. 5. Select [ON] to display barge marks, [OFF] to hide barge marks, as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 1-107 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 6. Select [3 BARGE SIZE]. Spin the scrollwheel, then left-click to enter the
[LENGTH] and [WIDTH] of the barge. 7. Select [4 BARGE ARRANGEMENT]. This item lets you set a single barge or a barge chain. Spin the scrollwheel to select a value, then left click to move the cur-
sor to the next line. Select number of barges (max. 9) to display. As you spin the scrollwheel the squares light or extinguish and the number of barges selected ap-
pears at the right side. First row of barge [ARRANGEMENT] is displayed as the right side of the barge icon on-screen. X Own ship icon 4 9 9 9 4 You can also use the number keys on the Control Unit to select the number of barges. 8. Close the menu. The barge mark is now displayed as shown in the example figure on the previous page. 1.44.7 Antenna mark When the own ship mark menu is set to [SCALED], the antenna location is shown as a blue cross. The location of the antenna, and therefore the antenna mark, is set at installation. Antenna mark X 1.45 Drop Mark The operator can inscribe a drop mark at a selected lo-
cation to find the range and bearing from own ship to the mark. This can be useful for marking a point to avoid while navigating to a destination. To active the drop mark feature, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [2 MARKS]. For C-types, select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 DROP MARK]. For C-types, select [8 DROP MARK]. Drop mark 4. Select [ON] to enable [DROP MARK]. Two indications appear at the bottom of the screen. Drop mark boxes show the mark number, bearing and range to the mark. 5. Close the menu. 1-108 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.45.1 How to inscribe a drop mark 1. Select a drop mark box, then left-click. 2. Place the cursor at the location to inscribe the drop mark, then left-click. The drop mark box shows the range and bearing to the marked location. 1.45.2 How to erase drop marks Select the drop mark to be erased, then press and hold the left button. The mark is erased and the range/bearing indications are no longer shown. 1.46 Brilliance and Color Schemes Brilliance and color schemes are preset palettes that let you change the brilliance and color of on-screen data together. 1.46.1 How to select a brilliance and color scheme The system has four presets of brilliance and color settings to choose from. Each pre-
set is customizable (see section 1.46.3). The following list shows each preset along with their default settings.
[PLT1] (default [DAY-GRY]): preset for use in daylight with a gray background.
[PLT2] (default [DAY-BLU]): preset for use in daylight with a blue background.
[PLT3] (default [DUSK-BLU]): preset for use at dusk with a blue background.
[PLT4] (default [NIGHT-GRY]): preset for use at night with a gray background. To change the current scheme, do the following:
1. Place the cursor on the [PLT] indication, inside the brilliance settings box at the bottom-left of the screen. Place cursor here, then left-click to change brilliance preset, right-click to open the [BRILL] menu. PLT1 100 2. Spin the scrollwheel to show the scheme you want to use, then left-click. You can also left-click the indication to cycle through the schemes. 1-109 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.46.2 How to change the color schemes settings 1. Referring to section 1.46.1, select the scheme whose settings you want to change. 2. Open the menu. 3. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 4. Select [2 BRILL]. The [BRILL] menu appears. 5. Select the appropriate item to adjust. Menu item Page 1
[2 ECHO COLOR]
[3 PALETTE]
[4 CONTROL PANEL]
[5 CHARACTERS]
[6 CURSOR]
[7 ECHOES]
[8 TRAILS]
[9 HL]
Page 2
[2 RANGE RINGS]
[3 BEARING CURSOR]
[4 EBL]
[5 VRM]
[6 PI LINES]
[7 TT SYMBOLS]
[8 AIS SYMBOLS]
[9 L/L GRID]
Description Changes the color used to display echoes. The available colors are: [YEL] (yellow), [GRN] (green), [WHT] (white),
[AMB] (amber), [M-GRN]* (mutli-green), [M-CYA]* (multi-cy-
an).
*: [M-GRN] and [M-CYA] are not shown on IMO-types. If you select [M-GRN] or [M-CYA], the echo color changes depending on the echo strength.
[M-GRN]: red for strong echoes, ranging through to green for weak echoes.
[M-CYA]: red for strong echoes, ranging through to green for weak echoes. Changes the color scheme (see subsection 1.46.3). Adjusts control panel back-light brilliance. Adjusts on-screen text brilliance. Adjusts cursor brilliance. Adjusts the echo brilliance. Adjusts echo trail brilliance. Adjusts heading line brilliance. Adjusts range ring brilliance. Adjusts bearing cursor brilliance. Adjusts EBL line brilliance. Adjusts VRM line brilliance. Adjusts PI line brilliance. Adjusts target trail symbol brilliance. Adjusts AIS symbol brilliance. Adjusts latitude/longitude grid brilliance. Table continued on the following page. 1-110 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Menu item Description Table continued from the previous page. Page 3
[2 PLOTTER]
[3 CHART]
[4 DEPTHLINE]
Adjusts latitude/longitude grid brilliance. Adjusts chart brilliance. (C-types only.) Adjusts depth line (bathymetry) brilliance. (C-types only.) 6. Spin the scrollwheel, or press the appropriate menu number to change or adjust the settings, then left-click, or press the ENTER MARK key to confirm the setting. 7. Close the menu. 1.46.3 How to change the color schemes settings This radar provides eight sets of color and brilliance schemes to match any ambient lighting condition and can be assigned to a [BRILL] box preset. 1. Place the cursor on the [PLT] indication, inside the brilliance settings box at the bottom-left of the screen. The indication appears highlighted with a light-blue colored box. Right-click to show the [BRILL1] box menu. 2. Select [3 PALETTE]. 3. Select the appropriate palette, then press the ENTER MARK key. The default set-
tings for each palette are shown in the following table. Display item Screen brilliance Panel brilliance Character brilliance Cursor brilliance Echo brilliance Trail brilliance Heading Line brilliance Stern Line brilliance Bearing ring brilliance EBL brilliance VRM brilliance PI Line brilliance TT symbol brilliance AIS symbol brilliance LL Grid brilliance Mark brilliance Chart brilliance*1 Depth line brilliance*1 Character color*2 DAY-
GRY 100 15 8 15 15 9 15 DAY-
BLU 100 15 8 15 15 9 15 DAY-
GRN 100 15 8 15 15 9 15 Palette DUSK-
GRY 40 7 8 12 12 9 15 DUSK-
BLU 40 7 8 12 12 9 15 DUSK-
GRN 40 7 8 12 12 9 15 NIGHT-
GRY 4 3 8 12 12 9 15 NIGHT-
BLU 4 3 8 12 12 9 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7 7 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7 7 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7 7 7 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 7 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 7 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 15 15 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 15 15 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 White White Green White White Green Orange White Table continued on the following page. 1-111 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Palette Display item DAY-
GRY DAY-
BLU DAY-
GRN DUSK-
GRY DUSK-
BLU DUSK-
GRN NIGHT-
GRY NIGHT-
BLU Background color*2 ODA color*2 Table continued from the previous page. Gray/
black Black Blue/
dark blue Dark blue Gray/
black Black Dark gray/
dark blue Dark blue Dark blue/
blue Dark gray/
black Dark gray/
black Dark blue/
blue Blue Black Black Blue
*1: Available for C-types only
*2: This setting is fixed and cannot be changed. 4. Close the menu. 1.47 How to Display and Set Up Navigational Data Wind, depth, ocean current, water temperature, date and time and waypoint data can be displayed on this radar, however appropriate sensors are required. 1.47.1 How to set up the navigational data 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [4 NAV DATA SETTINGS]. 1-112 4. Referring to the table below, set the appropriate menu item(s). Menu item Available settings 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
[DEPTH]
[DEPTH GRAPH SCALE]*1
[DEPTH MARK]*1
[CURRENT]
[WIND]
[WIND REFERENCE]
[TEMPERATURE]
[WPT DATA]*1
[MOB DATA]*2
[HIRO SETTING]*2
*1: IMO-types only; *2: C-types only.
[OFF], [ON]; [m], [ft]
[10], [20], [50], [100], [200], [500] (m)
[000] to [500] (m)
[OFF], [ON]
[OFF], [ON]; [kn], [m/s]
[APPARENT], [NORTH], [THEORETICAL]
[OFF], [ON]; [C], [F]
[OFF], [REL], [TRUE]
[OFF], [ON]
[1.0000] to [1.9999]
5. Close the menu. 1.47.2 How to display navigational data 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [3 DISPLAY NAV DATA]. 4. Select [ON] to display navigational data, [OFF] to hide navigational data, then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Close the menu. 1.48 How to Use the Information Box The information box shows target data, navigational data and zoomed areas of the ra-
dar display. To set up the information box, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select and set the appropriate menu item, referring to the table below. 4. Close the menu. Menu item
[2 OWN SHIP INFO]
[3 DISPLAY NAV DATA]
[4 NAV DATA SETTINGS]
[5 ZOOM]
Settings See section 1.10, section 1.11 and section 1.12 for de-
tails. OFF ON See section 1.47 for details. OFF 2TIMES 3TIMES Description Set up various own ship information, such as sensors used for position fix, date and time for-
mat/offsets, heading and speed sensors used. Disable navigational data display. Enable navigational data display. Set up the format in which various navigational data is displayed in the [INFORMATION BOX]. Disable zoom magnification. Set zoom magnification at 2. Set zoom magnification at 3. Table continued on the following page. 1-113 Settings Table continued from the previous page. Description STAB GND Ground stabilized zoom (Geographically fixed). STAB HDG STAB NORTH TT TRACK Heading stabilized zoom (Relative). North stabilized zoom (True). Tracked targets are zoomed. See the figure on the following page. Disable coordinates display for TT targets. Enable coordinates display for TT targets. When enabled, the data fields for CPA, TCPA, BCR and BCT are replaced with the coordi-
nates for the TT target:
Data appears in green color. Data color is based on chart. Note: When CHART COLOR is selected, invalid data and low-integrity data appear in orange or yellow color respectively, regardless of the chart color. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Menu item
[6 Z O O M D I S P L A Y
[7 TARGET DATA]
[8 DISPLAY TT COORDS]
1BOX 2BOX 3BOX LARGE TT 5BOX OFF ON
[9 NAV DATA COLOR]
STD CHART COLOR 1-114 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Zoom and navigational data are displayed here. Zoom and navigational data are displayed here. Zoom and navigational data are displayed here, but can be hidden by TT/AIS data. Zoom and navigational data are displayed here. Zoom and navigational data are displayed here. Zoom and navigational data are displayed here, but can be hidden by TT/AIS data. Zoom and navigational data are displayed here, but can be hidden by TT/AIS data. Zoom can be displayed here, but can be hidden by TT/AIS data. Zoom can be displayed here, but can be hidden by TT/AIS data. Zoom can be displayed here, but can be hidden by TT/AIS data. Only TT/AIS Data is displayed in the large box. Up to three AIS targets or up six TT targets. For MU-270W configurations, up to two TT targets can be shown. 1BOX 2BOX 3BOX LARGE Only TT Data is displayed Only TT Data is displayed Only TT Data is displayed Only TT Data is displayed Only TT Data is displayed TT 5BOX
(C-types only) TT/AIS data displayed in the information box is shown in order of acquisition in the bottom half of the box. When the target data is no longer displayed (TT is cancelled, etc.) in the upper box, the previous display is restored. When using the 2BOX or 3BOX setting and the bottom half of the information box is full, the upper half is overlayed with the newly aquired TT/AIS target data. Each box may display up two TT targets or one AIS target. (For MU-270W configurations, up to 3three TT targets can be shown) When TT 5 BOX is selected, only TT data is displayed. AIS data, ZOOM and other data are not displayed. 1-115 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.49 Interswitch The interswitch of this radar uses an Ethernet to transfer video and control signals. A digital signal transfers the video and control signals. You can connect up to four an-
tennas and four display units. Set radar display and antenna groups from the [ANTEN-
NA SELECT] display. When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment (set at installation) for that antenna are automatically applied. The [ANTENNA] box at the upper left position shows current antenna selection. Antenna box ANTx: x indicates antenna selected.
(M) or (S): indicates antenna is
(M)aster or (S)lave. X-Band or S-Band: indicates antenna bandwidth. 1.49.1 How to display antenna information 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [3 SELECT ANTENNA]. The [SELECT ANTENNA] menu appears. Note: You can also access the [SELECT ANTENNA] menu by right-clicking the
[ANTENNA] box at the top-left of the screen. SELECT ANTENNA 1 BACK ANT 1 : X-BAND 25UP Main Top ANT 2 : S-BAND 30UP Main 2nd ANT 3 : X-BAND 12 ANT 4 : X-BAND 12 OWN RADAR NO.1 2 DISP1 ANT1 Fore Aft MASTER DISP2 ANT2 MASTER DISP3 ANT3 MASTER DISP4 ANT4 MASTER 9 SAVE INTER-SWITCH NO / YES 0 CLEAR INTER-SWITCH NO / YES Using the information displayed in this example the antenna system configuration would look something like this. ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT4 Antenna Unit DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 Processor Unit HUB-3000 The following information is displayed in the [SELECT ANTENNA] menu:
Radar band, output power and antenna position of each antenna currently powered. (If an antenna is not powered, its data area is blank.) Own ship radar number (radar in use). Current antenna and display combinations. Note: For configurations with processors assigned as DISP5/DISP6/DISP7/DISP8 at installation, the processor unit automatically connects to the system as [SLAVE] when first turned on. You can change this setting after the first connection. See section 1.49.2. 1-116 1.49.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display in the radar system. As an example, the procedure below shows how to select the no. 1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [3 SELECT ANTENNA]. The [SELECT ANTENNA] menu appears. 4. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For the purpose of this example, select [DISP2] to select the no. 2 display unit. The indication for the antenna is highlighted. 5. Spin the scrollwheel to toggle between [MASTER] and [SLAVE]. The MASTER system passes on settings such as [CPA], [TCPA] and alarm settings to SLAVE radars connected to the same network. 6. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other display and antenna combinations. 7. Select [SAVE INTER-SWITCH], then select [YES] to save your selections. 8. Close the menu. Antenna selection considerations The Inter-switch feature for this radar is available only with other radars of the same series. Do not connect radars from other series (EG: FAR-3000, FAR-27, etc.). An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one Master display unit for one antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as masters, the display last-set as master becomes the master and all other displays are automatically changed to slave. An antenna unit without a Master display cannot be selected on the sub display units. If there is no antenna unit set as master, the lowest number display is auto-
matically set as master. If the Alert "EXT RADAR ERROR" appears, do one of the following, as applicable:
- If only your antenna is not displayed on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line in the Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, use the standalone mode.
- If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line in other Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, see the preceding page for how to select a different antenna unit When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone operation is possible. Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly depending on selection as [MASTER] or [SLAVE] (see the table on the following page). 1-117 Control Master Display Option Independent Desired value can be set Slave Display Option Desired value can be set Independent Desired value can be set Desired value can be set
(Echo Sampling at Master Range) Desired value can be set 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Radar Functions AIS function Brilliance Echo trails EBL Lat/long data Presentation mode Speed data Target alarm TT, AIS on/off TT, AIS track interval Vector mode Vector time VRM Wiper Zoom TT COLLISION alarm Range*2
(Sampling at Master) A/C SEA A/C RAIN Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Gain IR*1 Cannot control Desired value can be set Dependent Control Independent Desired value can be set Independent Desired value can be set Desired value can be set Dependent Control Desired value can be set Desired value can be set Cannot control Echo stretch Echo averaging Picture setting
(Customize echo) STBY/TX Tuning Reference Point TT LOST warning TT alerts ACK TT acquire TT/AIS AZ
*1: When the connected radar antenna is a FAR-3xx0/FAR-2xx8 series magnetron-type, and the radar is assigned as Slave, the desired value can be set for this functions. For FAR-3xx0/FAR-
2xx8 series SSD-types, this functions cannot be controlled.
*2: The desired value can be set when the radar is assigned as Slave, however the maximum dis-
playable range is dependent on the setting at the Master radar. Independent Desired value can be set Common Control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Desired value can be set 1-118 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.49.3 How to clear the interswitch You can clear the interswitch settings by following the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [3 SELECT ANTENNA]. The [SELECT ANTENNA] menu appears. 4. Select [0 CLEAR INTER-SWITCH]. 5. Select [YES] to clear the interswitch settings. The antenna settings are restored to default. 1.50 Performance Monitor The performance monitor, installed in the antenna unit, produces a visual indication on the radar display screen when the radar transmitter power and radar receiver sen-
sitivity are within the prescribed limits. Note 1: The performance monitor and related features are not available from FAR-
2x58 monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. Note 2: The performance monitor and related features are not available from FAR-
2268DS monitors. 1.50.1 How to activate/deactivate the performance monitor 1. Set the radar to TX (transmit) mode. 2. Open the menu. 3. Select [1 ECHO]. 4. Select [5 PERFORMANCE MONITOR]. 5. Select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[OFF]: Deactivate the performance monitor. Note: You can also deactivate the performance monitor by adjusting the range manually.
[ON]: Activate the performance monitor and show the graph.
[GRAPH ONLY]: Show the performance monitor graph, however the perfor-
mance monitor is not activated. 6. Close the menu. When the performance monitor is active, the indication "PM" appears in yellow char-
acters at the top of the display. Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another, turn off the blind sector in order to display echoes correctly. 1-119 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The radar is automatically set as follows when the performance monitor is activated. Setting Setting at PM activation
[GAIN]
[SEA]
[SEA AUTO]
[RAIN]
[RAIN AUTO]
[TUNE]
(Shown for magnetron radars only)
[TX CH]
(Shown instead of [TUNE]
for solid-state radars only)
[ACE]
[ES]
[EAV]
[IR]
[NOISE REJECT]
[VIDEO CONTRAST]
[PULSE]
[2ND ECHO REJ]
[LOW LEVEL ECHO]
[WIPER]
[CUSTOMIZED ECHO]
[PRESENTATION MODE]
[RANGE]
[OFF CENTER]
ANT REVOLUTION 70 *1 0 MAN 0 MAN AUTO CH1 OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF 4-B LONG OFF Previous setting kept, fixed. OFF Previous setting kept, fixed. No change. *2 24 NM, 24 SM, 48 km, 48 kyd (Settings other than NM are available for C-types only.) OFF 24 rpm Adjustable while PM is active Yes *3 No No No No No Setting at PM deactivation Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. No Setting before PM activation. No No No No No No No Yes No No No Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Setting before PM activation. Return to active display. Yes Setting at PM deactivation. Yes *4 Setting before PM activation. Yes No Setting at PM deactivation. Setting before PM activation.
*1: Gain is automatically set according to [PM GAIN ADJ], if it was adjusted at installation.
*2: [NORTH UP RM] is selected when the [PRESENTATION MODE] is set to [NORTH UP TM].
*3: The setting is not memorized.
*4: The performance monitor is deactivated if the range is changed manually. 1-120 1.50.2 How to check the radars performance 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The range scale is automatically set to 24 NM. The radar screen will show arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working conditions in as much as the origi-
nal state when the monitor was turned on, the innermost arcs should appear between 8.0 NM to 19.8 NM. The performance monitor can observe a total of 10 dB loss in transmitter and receiver. Note 1: The performance monitor and related features are not available from FAR-
2x58 monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. Note 2: The performance monitor and related features are not available from FAR-
2268DS monitors. How to set the number of arcs 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [6 PM ARC]. 4. Select [2], [3], [5] or [6] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Close the menu. The figure belows shows an example where [PM ARC] is set to [5]. Display Radar State Display Radar State Transmitter: normal Receiver: normal 8.0 NM to 19.8 NM Transmitter and receiver:
No arc indicates 10 dB loss. Contact your dealer for advice.
(For magnetron radars, have a technician check the magnetron. 8.0 NM to 19.8 NM Note 1: The lengths of the arcs can vary according to installation environment. Judge the strength of the echo that appears within 60 from the arc location to confirm if the radar is working properly or not. Note 2: The location of the arcs changes according to the [PM ARC] setting. Turn the performance monitor off when finished. 1-121 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.51 How to Change the Reference Position The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (heading line, stern mark, etc.) can be the radar antenna position ([ANT]) or the consistent com-
mon reference point ([CCRP]). The reference position is a location on own ship to which all horizontal measurements, for example range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of approach
(CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA), are normally referenced.
[CCRP] for this series of radars is fixed at the conning position and [ANT] is fixed at the radar antenna position. To change the reference position, use the trackball to place the cursor over the "REF POINT" indication at the top of the screen, then left-click to select [ANT] or [CCRP] as required. You can also change the reference by spinning the scrollwheel when the cur-
sor is placed over the indication. The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as shown below. If the CCRP is positioned outside of the effective display area, the bear-
ing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail. X Radar antenna position is at center of display X Conning position is at center of display ANT position CCRP position Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference po-
sition as in the table below. Category Item EBL VRM Cursor PI line Range ring Drop mark Heading line Stern mark Beam line Own ship vector Own ship track Range and bearing measurements Graphics Bearing cursor Course, speed 1-122 Reference point ANT Range and bearing measured from an-
tenna position. CCRP Range and bearing measured from CCRP. Drawn from anten-
na position. Drawn from CCRP. Drawn with antenna position at center. Calculated with an-
tenna position at center. Drawn with CCRP at center. Calculated with CCRP at center. Table continued on following page Category Item Reference point ANT CCRP 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW CPA, TCPA BCR, BCT Own ship data Table continued from previous page Calculated with an-
tenna position at center. Calculated from bow position. Data is taken from respective sensors, re-
gardless of reference point selected. Calculated with CCRP at center. Heading Speed Course over ground Speed over ground Own L/L Location of the CCRP. Note: When the antenna is located some distance from the CCRP, the CCRP can be outside the bearing cursor in true-motion or off-center. Also, when the CCRP is set as a reference point, some parts of the bearing cursor are not displayed. 1.52 Anchor Watch The anchor watch feature alerts you when your ship has traveled a distance greater than a threshold value, when it should be at rest. When the anchor watch is active, an orange dashed circle marks the anchor watch range. If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the alert "ANCHOR WATCH"
appears in the [ALERT] box. The alert is escalated from warning level to alarm level if the alert is not acknowledged within one minute. Also, if your vessel returns to within the tolerable radius, the alert status is automatically changed to rectified. Own ship location when anchor watch is set Own ship moves outside watch zone Anchor watch alarm setting Alarm is triggered 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [4 ALERTS]. 3. Select [4 ANCHOR WATCH]. 4. Select [ON] to enable [ANCHOR WATCH], then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Spin the scrollwheel to set the distance for the alert. Press the ENTER MARK key to apply the setting. 6. Close the menu. 1-123 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.53 Alerts 1.53.1 What is an alert?
Alert is a generic name for a notice to any unusual or potentially dangerous situation generated within the system. For detailed information regarding specific alerts and alert codes, including possible remedies, see "ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS" on page AP-17. Alerts are classified according to priority and category. Alert priority The level of priority, from highest to lowest, is ALARM WARNING CAUTION. Alarm: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to maintain the safe navigation of the ship. Warning: Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately haz-
ardous, but may become so. Caution: Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the or-
dinary consideration of the situation or of given information. Note: All active-unacknowledged warnings, except ANCHOR WATCH, are repeated as warnings after 60 seconds (manufacturers fixed time period). The ANCHOR WATCH alert is escalated from warning level to alarm level if it is not acknowledged within 60 seconds. Alert category An alert is further classified by category, A, B or C, according to its degree of severity or source. Category Description A B C Category A alerts include alerts indicating Danger of collision Danger of grounding Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision support is necessary. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under category A. Engine-related alert 1-124 1.53.2 Alert box overview 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW When an alert condition is found, the applicable alert message appears in the [ALERT]
box. A buzzer sounds for alarm and warning alerts. Normal display mode (IMO/C-types) The [ALERT] box is composed of three lines of text information, and several icons, as shown below. Alert number Alert list/log button Alert icon 194 NO VIDEO SIGNAL Buzzer silence icon A W C Active alert icons Simple display mode (C-types only) Alert name/description The icon for the highest priority alert appears at the bottom-right corner of the screen. Icon for alert with highest priority appears here 1.53.3 How to silence the buzzer Place the cursor on the buzzer silence icon in the alert box, then left-click. The alert buzzer is temporarily silenced. When the buzzer is silenced, the alert status is also changed (see section 1.53.6). Note: The buzzer silence box is not visible for C-types using [SIMPLE] display mode. 1.53.4 How to acknowledge an alert You can acknowledged alerts with one of the following methods:
Press the ALARM ACK (RCU-014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-031) key. Left-click the alert name in the alert box. Note: The alert box is not visible for C-types using [SIMPLE] display mode. Left-click the alert icon (C-types using [SIMPLE] display mode only) Open the alert list and left-click the alert in the list. When the buzzer is silenced, the alert status is also changed (see section 1.53.6). 1-125 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.53.5 Alert list The alert list displays the names of violated alerts, including the time and date violated. Up to 100 alerts are stored in the internal memory. Unacknowledged alarms are dis-
played first in the list (in red text), in the order in which they appear in the [ALERT] box. Unacknowledged warnings are displayed in the list (in yellow-orange text), in the order in which they appear in the [ALERT] box. Cautions are displayed in the list (in yellow text), in the order in which they appear in the [ALERT] box. You can show the alert list with one of the following methods. IMO/C-types using NORMAL display mode: place the cursor on the alert list/log button in the [ALERT] box then left-click. C-types using SIMPLE display mode: place the cursor on the alert icon then left-
click. Displayed page/Pages available ALERT LIST (1/2)
- When selected at page 1, 1 2 3 4 BACK(L=TOP) 194 MTR-DRV COM ERROR 52601 NO GYRO SIGNAL 52001 RPU:FAN2 SPD ERROR closes the list.
- When selected at page 2 or later, goes back to the previous page.
- Long-press the left button to go to page 1. Radar which output this alert Date and time of alert 23:15 03/FEB RADAR1 20:25 01/FEB RADAR1 12:18 01/FEB RADAR1 Alert code and alert message Alert icon
- Select to refresh the list.
- Long-press the left button to remove acknowledged and rectified alerts from the list. 9 REFRESH DATA(L=CLR) 0 NEXT(L=LAST)
- Select to go to the next page
- Long-press the left button to go to the last page. An unacknowledged alert can be acknowledged from the list by selecting it, then left-
clicking. To erase the data for the number selected, left-click again. To erase all alert indications, select [9 REFRESH DATA], then press and hold the left button. 1-126 1.53.6 Alert icons and their meanings 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Icon Status Visual indication Audible alert Active - unacknowledged alarm Red, flashing 3 short, audible alerts repeated every 7 seconds. Active - silenced alarm Red, flashing Silent Active - acknowledged alarm Red Active - responsibility transferred alarm Rectified - unacknowledged alarm Red Red Silent Silent Silent Active - unacknowledged warning Yellow-orange, flashing 2 short, audible alerts repeated every 60 seconds. Active - silenced warning Yellow-orange, flashing Silent Active - acknowledged warning Yellow-orange Silent Active - responsibility transferred warning Yellow-orange Silent Rectified - unacknowledged warning Yellow-orange Silent Caution Yellow Silent 1-127 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.54 Icing Prevention You can rotate the antenna (24 rpm) without transmission to keep the antenna from freezing. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [5 OPERATION]. 4. Select [7 ICING PREVENTION]. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. If you select [ON], the message "Rotate An-
tenna to Prevent Icing." appears at the bottom of the screen. 6. Click [Start Antenna Rotation] to rotate the antenna without transmission. The message changes to read "Antenna Rotating,No TX.". Rotate Antenna to Prevent Icing. Start Antenna Rotation Antenna Rotating,No TX. Stop Antenna Rotation When the antenna stops When the antenna rotates To stop the antenna rotation, left-click [Stop Antenna Rotation]. With this feature active and the antenna stopped, pushing the STBY TX key on the Control Unit or click the [STBY TX] button on the Status bar rotates the antenna and transmits pulses. Operating one of the above-mentioned controls again stops trans-
mission but the antenna rotates. 1-128 1.55 How to Select an Echo Display Area (C-type On-
ly) 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW C-type radars of this series have three echo display modes available:
[CIRCLE] mode: The echoes are displayed inside a circle on the screen. This is the default (IMO compliant) mode.
[WIDE] mode: The echoes are displayed in a square area, but are not displayed in the data display area.
[ALL] mode: The echoes are displayed across the entire screen. Follow the procedure below to change display modes. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. The [ECHO] menu appears. 3. Select [8 ECHO AREA]. 4. Select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key. CIRCLE 5. Close the menu. WIDE ALL 1.56 How to Use the Watch Alert The watch alert provides a visual alert at regular intervals to remind you to monitor the radar picture for safety or other purposes. When the watch alert is enabled, the WATCH box appears at the top of the screen. Watch box When the timer reaches 00:00, an audible alert is released. To silence the buzzer, click the watch box. The timer is reset and begins to countdown again. You can reset the timer at any time bu clicking the watch box. To enable or disable the watch alert, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [4 ALERTS]. The [ALERTS] menu appears. 3. Select [2 WATCH ALERT]. 4. Select the [OFF] to disable the alert, or select the required interval at which the alert is released. The available intervals are: [6min], [10min], [12min], [15min] and [20min]. 5. Close the menu. 6. Left-click the watch box to start the watch timer. You can also reset the countdown by left-clicking the watch box at any time. 1-129 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.57 Loran Decca Setup (C-types Only) When using Loran A time offset 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [9 LORANDECCA]. The [LORANDECCA] menu appears. 4. Select [3 LORAN/DECCA SELECT]. 5. Select [LORAN A]. 6. Select [2 LORANDECCA SETTING]. The setting window appears. Note: There are two pages for the [LORAN/DECCA SETTING] menu. If page 2 appears, press the F3 key to go back to page 1. 7. Select [LORAN A STA. COMB.], then press the left button. 8. Set the station combination referring to the [CH CODE LIST] in the lower half of the window. 9. Select [TIME OFFSET 1]. 10. Rotate the scrollwheel and press the left button to set the time offset value. 11. Select [TIME OFFSET 2]. 12. Rotate the scrollwheel and press the left button to set the time offset value. 13. Close the menu. When using Loran C time offset 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [9 LORANDECCA]. 4. Select [3 LORAN/DECCA SELECT]. 5. Select [LORAN C]. 6. Select [2 LORANDECCA SETTING]. The setting window appears. Note: There are two pages for the [LORAN/DECCA SETTING] menu. If page 2 appears, press the F3 key to go back to page 1. 7. Select [LORAN C]. 1-130 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 8. Set the station combination referring to the [CH CODE LIST] in the lower half of the window. 9. Select [TIME OFFSET 1]. 10. Rotate the scrollwheel and press the left button to set the time offset value. 11. Select [TIME OFFSET 2]. 12. Rotate the scrollwheel and press the left button to set the time offset value. 13. Close the menu. When using Decca chain offset 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [9 LORANDECCA]. 4. Select [3 LORAN/DECCA SELECT]. 5. Select [DECCA]. 6. Select [2 LORANDECCA SETTING]. The setting window appears. Note: There are two pages for the [LORAN/DECCA SETTING] menu. If page 2 appears, skip to step 8. 7. Press the F4 key to show the second page of the setting window. 8. Select [DECCA CHAIN]. 9. Set the station combination referring to the [CH CODE] in the lower half of the win-
dow. 10. Select [OFFSET VALUE 1]. 11. Rotate the scrollwheel and press the left button to set the time offset value. 12. Select [TIME OFFSET 2]. 13. Rotate the scrollwheel and press the left button to set the time offset value. 14. Close the menu. 1-131 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.58 How to Manage SD Card Data For IMO-types, the following data can be stored on a SD Card: map marks/lines, user settings, installation settings, own track, alert history and some logs (for example, the alert log). For C-types, the SD Card is used to store screenshots (see section 1.61). Note: The procedures and operations outlined in this section are only available when a SD Card is inserted. When there is no SD Card inserted, the operations and proce-
dures are not available. SD Cards must be formatted as FAT32. Other formats are not usable. 1.58.1 Formatting the SD card You do not normally need to format a SD card. If the card becomes unreadable, format the card with a formatting program that is compatible with the specifications of the card. 1.58.2 Cautionary notes on handling SD cards Handle the cards carefully. Improper use can damage the card and destroy its con-
tents. Make sure the card slot cover is closed, unless removing/inserting a card. Remove or insert a card using only your fingers. Do not use metal instruments (such as tweezers) to remove the card. Do not remove the card when data is loading from, or saving to, the card. 1.58.3 Compatible SD cards The table below lists the micro SD cards that have been verified as compatible for use with this equipment. Note 1: The cards were verified using basic functions. All functions were not verified. FURUNO does not guarantee card operations. Note 2: SD cards other than those listed below have not been verified. Maker Panasonic SanDisk Toshiba SD card type RP-SDUC16GJK RP-SDUC32GJK RP-SDWA16GJK RP-SDWA-32GJK SDSDB-016G-J35U SDSDC-032G-J35U SDSDXPA-016G-JU3 SDSDXPA-032G-JU3 SDSDXVE-032GB-JNJIP SDAR40N16G SDAR40N32G SD-L016G4 SD-L032G4 SDXU-B016G SDXU-B032G Capacity 16GB 32GB 16GB 32GB 16GB 32GB 16GB 32GB 32GB 16GB 32GB 16GB 32GB 16GB 32GB 1-132 1.58.4 How to insert SD cards The SD card slot is located on the front face of the processor unit, between the LAN1 port and the DVI-I port. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW SD card slot (covered) Note: Do not use any instruments to insert the card. 1. Remove the rubber cover on the SD card slot. 2. To insert a card, gently push the card into the slot, making sure that the card con-
nectors are facing downwards. 3. Close the rubber cover. 1.58.5 How to remove SD cards Follow the procedure below to safely remove an SD card. Note 1: When the system power is turned off, skip steps 1 to 3. Note 2: Do not use any instruments/tools top insert or remove the SD card. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. IMO-types C-types 3. For IMO-types, select [REMOVE EXT MEDIA], then select [YES]. For C-types, select [REMOVE SD CARD], then select [YES]. You can now remove the SD card safely. 4. Remove the rubber cover on the SD card slot. 5. Gently push the SD cards to release the card from the card slot. 6. Remove the SD card. Do not use any instruments to remove the card. 7. Close the menu. 1-133 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.58.6 How to save data to an SD card (IMO-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [2 SAVE DATA]. 4. Select the data to save, then press the ENTER MARK key. The software keyboard appears. 5. Using the software keyboard, name the file, then select [END] to start saving data. Note: Depending on the data saved, the first let-
ter of the filename is preset and cannot be changed. The presets are listed below. Marks/Lines: M Nav lines/Waypoints: W Setting data: S Install data: I Own track: T Alert history: H Log file: L The indication "WR CARD DATA" appears during the save process and the menu closes automatically. 6. When the process is complete, the indication "COMPLETED" appears on the screen. 1.58.7 How to read (load) data from an SD card (IMO-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [3 LOAD DATA]. 4. Select the data to load, then press the ENTER MARK key. The indication "RD CARD DATA" appears during the read process and the menu closes automatically. 5. When the process is complete, the indication "COMPLETED" appears on the screen. 1.58.8 How to delete data from an SD card (IMO-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [4 DELETE DATA]. 4. Select the data to delete, then press the ENTER MARK key. The indication "DELETE CARD DATA" appears during the delete process. 5. Close the menu. 1-134 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.59 Internal Memory (C-types only) The systems internal memory stores data such as own track, other ships track, marks, lines, routes, waypoints and some settings. When the temporary memory be-
comes full, the oldest data are deleted and the newest data is stored. You can save data to a USB flash memory, or to the internal memory. The process of saving and loading data uses internal, temporary and USB flash memory in the following manner. Display System On-screen Display Temporary memory Tracks Marks/lines Waypoints/routes Settings information Save Load Internal memory*
Tracks Marks/lines Waypoints/routes Settings information
*: Internal memory has 10 storage areas. Load Save Save Load USB flash memory Note: The procedures in this section must be done with the radar in STBY. If the radar is set to transmit, the [FILES] menu is not available. 1.59.1 How to save data to the internal memory You can save data from the temporary memory to the internal memory. The internal memory has 10 storage areas and each area has the following storage capacity. Own ship tracks: 30,000 Marks/lines: 30,000 Waypoints: 3,500 Routes: 200 Area marks: 50 1. Open the menu. Other tracks: 40,000, comprised of:
Consort vessels: 10,000;
AIS targets: 10,000;
TT targets: 10,000;
GPS buoys: 10,000. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 1-135 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 3. Select [4 SAVE TO INT. MEMORY]. The [INTERNAL MEMORY RECORDING]
window appears. 4. Select an item, then select [YES] to save the item to the internal memory. 5. To save other items, repeat step 4 as required. 6. Select an area to save the data. A pop up window appears showing the file name for the saved data. The default name is the date and time at which the data was saved. 7. To change the filename, go to the next step. To keep the default filename, close the menu. 8. Referring to section 1.5.3, enter the desired filename. A confirmation message ap-
pears. 9. Select [ENTER] to save the data, or select [CANCEL] to cancel the procedure. If you selected [ENTER], a progress window appears to show the save progress. When the save is completed, a message appears. 10. Select [OK]. 11. Close the menu. 1-136 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.59.2 How to view the contents of the internal memory You can view (replay) items stored in the internal memory. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [7 DISPLAY INT. MEMORY]. The [DISPLAY INTERNAL MEMORY] win-
dow appears. The internal memory areas (1 through 10) appear across three pages. Press F3 or F4 to change pages. 4. Select the items whose contents you want to view, then select [YES]. 5. Repeat step 4 to add other items you want to view. Note: The total number of selected items appears at the bottom of the window. If the selected number exceeds the maximum, the indication appears in yellow color and items which are in excess of the maximum are not displayed. 6. Close the window. The items you selected to view appear on the screen. Displayed tracks, marks and lines cannot be edited or deleted, as this feature only displays these items. To remove the stored items from the screen, repeat the above procedure, then select
[NO] at step 4. 1-137 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.59.3 How to load the contents of the internal memory You can load the data from the internal memory, however, this procedure replaces the temporary memory contents with the contents of the internal memory. If you want to keep the contents of the internal memory, save the contents before continuing with this procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [5 LOAD FROM INT. MEMORY]. The [INTERNAL MEMORY PLAYBACK]
window appears. 4. Select the item you want to load. 5. Depending on the item selected at step 4, select [ADD], [OVERWRITE] or [NO]
as appropriate.
[ADD]: selected data is added to the temporary data. Temporary data is not overwritten.
[OVERWRITE]: replace (overwrite) the temporary data with the selected data.
[NO]: selected data is not used. Note 1: When [ADD] is selected for [PLAY MARK/TRACK], a limit of 30,050 items applies. When this limit is reached, no more items can be added. Note 2: When [ADD] is selected for [PLAY OWN TRK] or [PLAY OTHER TRK]
and the limit is reached, the oldest items are deleted to make way for new items. For example, if you have 10,000 tracks already saved and add 25,000, the oldest 5,000 tracks from those already saved are deleted. 1-138
1 2 | User Manual 14 | Users Manual | 3.74 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Menu items
[7 VECTOR TIME LINK]*1 Description
[NO LINK]: Vector time is not linked with changes in range.
[LINK RANGE]: Link vector time with the range. As the range changes, the trail time is also automatically adjusted. When linked, the vector time indication appears in yellow color. Note: When using a range that is valid only when transmitting, the vec-
tor time is automatically adjusted to match either the maximum or min-
imum available range.
*1: For C-types only; *2: For IMO-types only. 5. Select the required setting by pressing the menu item number, or spinning the scrollwheel. Note: Regarding input for [8 HDG FINE ADJUST], when using the number keys, the indication is first selected as a whole. At this time, you can toggle between plus
+ or minus -. Press the 8 VECTOR MODE key for -, press the 2 EBL OFFSET key for +. If single digits are highlighted, toggle is not possible. In this case, press the CANCEL TRAILS key to re-highlight the whole indication. 6. Press the ENTER MARK key to confirm and apply the selection. 7. Close the menu. Shuttle ferry mode (IMO-types only) The shuttle ferry mode changes the orientation of the display when the external switch is turned on. (The external switch should be connected to the RS-232C port on the processor unit at installation.) There are two variations: Standard display ([SHUTTLE FERRY] is set to [OFF]) and reversed display ([SHUTTLE FERRY] is set to [MODE1] or [MODE2]). When the display is reversed for shuttle ferry mode, the following changes also occur:
Echoes are displayed 180 opposite to normal display. Bearing for speed data is re-calibrated to 180 opposite to normal. Wind direction based on speed input is re-calibrated to 180 opposite to normal. Where [Mode2] is selected, data input from the gyrocompass is re-calibrated to 180 opposite to normal. Note: Gyrocompass data input is not re-calibrated for [Mode1]. Standard display: Gyro input is displayed normally. Reversed display: Gyro input is displayed in reverse. 1-29 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.10 Heading Input 1.10.1 How to select the data source for heading input When a gyrocompass is connected, the ships heading appears on the right side of the screen, in the data display area. Heading input format can be selected as follows:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [2 HDG]. The [HDG] menu appears. Note: You can also access the HDG menu from the on-screen box. Place the cursor on the
[HDG ] indication in the heading box at the top-right of the screen, then right-click. 5. Select [2 HDG SOURCE], then press the EN-
TER MARK key. 6. Select [GYRO1] or [GYRO2] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 7. Close the menu. Note 1: The heading sensor must be able to follow a minimum ROT of 20 per second. Heading sensors with a lesser capability may degrade the performance of echo aver-
aging, trails and TT. The data refresh rate should also be as short as possible. If the refresh rate is too long, the ability to follow courses lessens, thereby affecting the per-
formance of echo averaging, trails and TT. Note 2: For IMO-types, Where the heading source is other than the heading sensor
(for example, and EPFS device), the sensor indication is displayed in yellow color. 1.10.2 How to adjust for magnetic correction (C-types only) To show true magnetic heading, magnetic data input is required. If your system con-
figuration included a GPS navigator, the corrections required to display correct head-
ing are done automatically. You can also set the magnetic correction manually with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [2 HDG]. 5. Select [3 MAGNETIC CORRECTION]. 6. Select [MANUAL]. 7. Enter the required correction value, then press the ENTER MARK key. Note: To toggle between [E] (East) and [W] (West), spin the scrollwheel. 8. Close the menu. 1-30 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.11 How to Set Own Ships Speed The TT and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input and compass signal. The speed can be entered from a log (STW, SOG) or EPFS (SOG) or manually on the menu. 1.11.1 Automatic speed input (log or EPFS navigator) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [3 SPEED]. The [SPEED] menu appears. Note: You can also access the [SPEED] menu from the on-screen box. Place the cursor on the
[SPD ] indication in the speed box at the top-
right of the screen, then right-click. 5. Select [2 SHIP SPEED]. 6. Select the appropriate source for automatic speed input, then press the ENTER MARK key. Note: Changes to the settings here are also applied to the speed calculations for TT targets, true trails, SOG and STW. Selection Explanation Stabilization Mode
[LOG (BT)]*1 Log, speed over ground (SOG) Log, Speed Thru Water (STW)
[LOG (WT)]
Speed input by GPS navigator
[EPFS]
Manually input speed
[MANUAL]
Echo-referenced speed input
[REF]
Speed input by ECDIS
[ECDIS]*2 Ground stabilization Sea stabilization Ground stabilization Sea stabilization Ground stabilization Ground stabilization or Sea Stabilization (Dependent on ECDIS settings).
*1: Set and drift may be required to display [LOG (BT)] correctly in deep waters. To change set and drift, see section 3.12.
*2: Where [ECDIS] is selected as the speed source, [4 OWN SHIP POSN] in the
[OWN SHIP INFO] menu is automatically set to [ECDIS] also. See section 1.12. 7. If you selected [MANUAL] as the speed data source, see section 1.11.2 to set the speed. 8. Close the menu. 1-31 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Notes on speed input It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar, the calculation of its true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccu-
rate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or lee-
way. IMO Resolution A.823(19) for TT recommends that a speed log to be interfaced with a TT should be capable of providing through-the-water speed (forward speed). Be sure not to select a [LOG] option when a speed log is not connected. If the log signal is not provided, the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will be blank. In the event of a log error, enter speed manually. When the speed source is set to [LOG(BT)] or [LOG(WT)], and no log signal is pres-
ent for 30 seconds, the [SPD] is shown as "*.* kn" and the label "NO LOG(BT) SIG-
NAL" or "NO LOG(WT) SIGNAL" (in yellow-orange) appears and the alert buzzer sounds. When the speed input in use is interrupted or lost, the system automatically chang-
es to another speed input (stabilization reference) and outputs the "SPD SOURCE CHG" alert. On IMO-type radars with AIS in use, [MANUAL] and [REF] are shown in gray to in-
dicate they are not available for selection. A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the leeway direction. When [ECDIS] is selected as the speed data source and communication with the ECDIS is interrupted or lost for 30 seconds, the Alert "ECDIS COM ERROR" is re-
leased. When speed stabilization is changed at the ECDIS and [ECDIS] is selected as the speed data source, the Alert "SPD SOURCE CHG" is released. 1.11.2 Manual speed input If the speed log is not working, enter speed manually as below. In this case the speed data type is shown as "MANUAL" and is speed thru water (STW). Manual speed input is not available on IMO-type radars when the AIS feature is active. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [3 SPEED]. 5. Select [2 SHIP SPEED]. 6. Select [MANUAL]. 7. Select [3 MANUAL SPEED INPUT]. 8. Spin the scrollwheel to set the speed. 9. Press the ENTER MARK key to confirm the new setting. 10. Close the menu. 1-32 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.12 Own Ship Position 1.12.1 How to set the Own Ship position You can select the data source for own ships position as follows:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [4 OWN SHIP POSN]. Note: You can also access the [OWN SHIP POSN] menu from the on-screen box. Place the cursor on the [POSN ] indication in the position box at the top-right of the screen, then right-click. 5. Select [2 POSITION SOURCE] or [3 MANUAL L/
L INPUT] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. If [2 POSITION SOURCE] is selected at step 2, select the appropriate position source, referring to the list below, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[2 POSITION SOURCE] uses navigational aids. Select the navigational aid to use. Available options are listed with a brief description in the table below:
Available options Description
[EPFS1]
[EPFS2]
[LAN]
[ECDIS]
[DEAD RECKONING]
Use the device assigned as EPFS1 for position data. Use the device assigned as EPFS2 for position data. Use the device connected to the LAN1 port for position data. Use the connected ECDIS for position data. Position data is derived from dead reckoning (manual in-
put) Note 1: When [2 POSITION SOURCE] is set to [DEAD RECKONING], the indica-
tion "DR" appears at the bottom of the [OS POSN] box. Note 2: When [2 POSITION SOURCE] is set to [DEAD RECKONING] or [MANU-
AL L/L INPUT], the AIS function cannot be used. Note 3: When [2 POSITION SOURCE] is set to [ECDIS], the source for own ship speed data is automatically set to [ECDIS] also. Note 4: On IMO-type radars with AIS in use, [DEAD RECKONING] is shown in gray to indicate it is not available for selection. Note 5: Speed and heading data is required in order to correctly display [DEAD RECKONING] position data. 7. To set [3 MANUAL L/L INPUT], do the following:
1) Select [3 MANUAL L/L INPUT]. The first digit of the latitude is highlighted. 2) Spin the scrollwheel to set the value, then left-click. The cursor moves to the next digit. You can also use the number keys on the Control Unit to input the value. 3) Repeat step 2 to set the latitude and longitude. 1-33 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 8. To share [OS POSN] data across the same network, do the following:
1) Select [SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT], then press the ENTER MARK key. 2) Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key to share data. To disable [OS POSN] data sharing, select [OFF], then press the ENTER MARK key. Note: A navigational aid must be selected at [2 POSITION SOURCE] to share
[OS POSN] across the same network. 9. Close the menu. 1.12.2 How to set the display format for position data (C-types only) You can set the display format for your position data with the following procedure. You can set how this data is displayed. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [4 OWN SHIP POSN]. 5. Select [5 COORDINATE SYSTEM]. 6. Select [LL] (Latitude/Longitude) or [LORANDECCA] as required. See section 1.57 for details regarding LORANDECCA settings. 7. Close the menu. 1.12.3 How to select the datum to use for positioning (C-types only) You can set the data used for navigation to match the datum used for your charts. If you use different datums, the position (coordinates) indicated on-screen may be dif-
ferent from those shown on your charts. You can change the datum with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [4 OWN SHIP POSN]. 5. Select [6 GEODETIC DATUM]. 6. Select [WGS-84] or [TOKYO] as required. Note: For configurations with an AIS transponder, select [WGS-84]. 7. Close the menu. 1-34 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.13 Date and Time 1.13.1 How to switch between UTC and local date/time Date and time are displayed at the top-right of the screen in the [DATE/TIME] box. You can left-click the date/time indication to toggle between [UTC] format and [LOCAL] for-
mat. Date/time indication Left-click: Toggle [UTC]/[LOCAL] time. Right-click: Open the [DATE] menu. Date Time 19 / SEP / 2016 15 15 1.13.2 How to adjust the local time You can adjust the local time and switch between UTC/local time from the menu. To adjust the local time, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [5 DATE]. 5. Select [2 DATE-TIME], then select [UTC] or [LO-
CAL] as appropriate.
[UTC]: Date and time are displayed in UTC for-
mat.
[LOCAL]: Date and time are shown with the lo-
cal time offset applied. 6. Select [3 ADJUST LOCAL TIME], then press the ENTER MARK key. Time indication highlighted as a whole. Toggle between + and - is possible. Single digit is highlighted. Toggle between + and - is not possible. 7. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the number keys to input the desired offset. The offset must be in 30 minute increments. Note: Regarding input for [3 ADJUST LOCAL TIME], when using the number keys, the indication is first selected as a whole. At this time, you can toggle be-
tween plus + or minus -. Press the 8 key for -, press the 2 key for +. If single digits are highlighted, toggle is not possible. In this case, press the CANCEL TRAILS key to re-highlight the whole indication. 8. Close the menu. 1-35 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.13.3 How to change the date/time display format (C-types only) You can change the manner in which time and date data is displayed. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [5 DATE]. 5. Select [4 DATE], then select the required display format for the date.
[DD/MMM/YYYY]: date appears as 04/JUL/2018.
[YYYY/MM/DD]: date appears as 2018/07/4.
[YYYY/MMM/DD]: date appears as 2018/JUL/04.
[MMM/DD/YYYY]: date appears as JUL/04/2018. 6. Select [5 TIME], then select the required display format for the time. 7. Close the menu. 1.14 User Settings (IMO-types only) The user functions shown in the table below can be reset to their default settings by enabling the [PILOT SETTING] option in the [USER SET] menu. Functions not shown in the table below maintain their previous setting. The unit can store two separate user settings, for the functions listed below, in the in-
ternal memory. These settings can also be recalled. Functions not shown in the table below cannot be stored or recalled. Function GAIN SEA RAIN TUNE Setting(s) Maintained as per previous setting.
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
Menu/On-screen box
[GAIN] box
[SEA] box
[RAIN] box
[TUNE] box
(Magnetron radars only)
[RANGE] box
[MAIN MENU] [NAV TOOLS] [RANGE RINGS]
[VRM1] box Maintained as per previous setting. (Solid State radars only)
[6 NM]
[OFF]
[ON]
[0.250 NM]
[OFF]
[0.000 NM]
[ON]
Maintained as per previous setting.
[VRM2] box
[EBL1] box Display Distance Display Distance Display Bearing Reference Maintained as per Display Bearing Reference previous setting.
[OFF]
Maintained as per previous setting.
[MAIN MENU] [NAV TOOLS] [EBLVRMCUR-
SOR SET] [EBLCURSOR BEARING]
[EBL2] box
[MAIN MENU] [NAV TOOLS] [EBLVRMCUR-
SOR SET] [EBLCURSOR BEARING]
Continued on following page TX CH Range Range rings VRM1 VRM2 EBL1 EBL2 1-36 Function Setting(s) Menu/On-screen box 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW PI Lines Display Interval Orientation Bearing
(True or Relative) Number of PI lines Mode
(Parallel or Perpendic-
ular) Presentation Mode Stabilization mode
(Sea/Ground) Off-centering Target trails Display, time Mode Past position Vector mod Vector time AZ1 AZ2 TT acquisition mode AIS display Association Continued from previous page
[OFF]
[PI Line] box Fixed to [TRUE].
[OFF]
[MAIN MENU] [NAV TOOLS] [PI LINES]
[SET MAXIMUM PI LINE]
[MAIN MENU] [NAV TOOLS] [PI LINES] [PI LINE MODE]
[NORTH UP TM]
[EPFS] (Ground)
[PRESENTATION MODE] box
[SPEED] box [SHIP SPEED]
On-centering
[ON], [6 MIN]
OFF CENTER key.*
[TRAIL MODE] box
[PAST POSN] box
[PAST POSN] box
[VECTOR] box
[TRUE]
[OFF]
[REL]
[6 MIN]
[OFF]
[OFF]
[MAN100]
[DISP ALL]
[ON] (TT > AIS)
[AZ1] box
[AZ2] box
[TT TARGET] [TT SELECT]
[AIS] box
[MAIN MENU] [TTAIS] [TARGET ASSOCIA-
TION] [ASSOCIATION TGT TYPE]
LOST TARGET ALERT box
[CPA LIMIT] box Lost Target Alert CPA/
TCPA alarm
[OFF] (Disabled)
[ON]
[2 NM]
[12 MIN]
ON/OFF CPA TCPA
*: Has the same effect as selecting the True Motion presentation mode. 1-37 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.14.1 How to reset the user settings 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [4 USER SETTINGS]. 4. Select [PILOT SETTING], then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Select [YES], then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Close the menu. Note 1: Items not shown in the above table keep their previous settings when [PILOT SET-
TING] is activated. Select the [USER SET]
box, then right-click. Note 2: TT tracking is continued after [PILOT SETTING] is activated. Note 3: The radar map displays the same map as before [PILOT SETTING] is activat-
ed. 1.14.2 How to save/load user settings 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [4 USER SETTINGS]. 4. Select [USER1(2) LOAD] or [USER1(2) SAVE] to recall or save user settings, re-
spectively, then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Select [YES], then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Close the menu. When loading settings, the following points apply:
If the newly loaded settings cannot be applied to items not listed in the table above, then these items keep their previous settings. TT tracking is continued after the settings are loaded. The radar map displays the same map as before the settings were loaded. 1-38 1.15 How to Start/Stop Transmission 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The radar is ready to transmit when the message "STBY" (C-types) or "RADAR STBY"
(IMO-types) appears in the operational display area. Transmission can be started us-
ing one of the following procedures:
Using the control unit: Press the STBY TX key. Using the on-screen box: Left-click the button on the InstantAccess bar. When the radar is switched to TX (transmit) status, most settings (such as brilliance, range, pulse width, etc) are restored with the same settings as before standby. For magnetron radars, it is recommended to place the radar in standby when trans-
mission is not required, to reduce wear on the magnetron. You can also set a blank sector where transmission is stopped (see the Installation Manual for details). How to stop antenna rotation Antenna rotation can be stopped using one of the following procedures:
Turn the antenna switch off. Turn antenna rotation off from the menu (See installation manual). Screen freeze The screen is not refreshed if the screen has frozen. An audio alarm is released 30 seconds after a screen freeze. The ALARM ACK (RCU-014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-
031) key flashes and a contact alert signal is also released. To return the radar to nor-
mal operation, turn the radar off, then on again. Quick start Provided that the radar was in use and the magnetron (transmitter tube) is still warm, you can switch to transmit mode without the three minute warm-up time. If the radar was turned off by mistake or you wish to restart the radar promptly, wait several sec-
onds before you press the POWER switch. 1-39 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.16 How to Tune the Receiver (Magnetron Radars Only) Your magnetron radar has a tuning function (automatic or manual). For solid-state ra-
dars, tuning is not available. 1.16.1 How to select the tuning method 1. Select the [TUNE] button, at the top of the InstantAccess bar, to change the tun-
ing method. The tuning box is displayed as "TUNE AUTO" or "TUNE MAN", de-
pending on the currently selected tuning method. 2. Left-click to toggle between automatic and manual tuning. Tuning method Shown as TUNE MAN or TUNE AUTO. Tuning level indication Note: The [Tune] button is grayed out and inoperable on FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. 1.16.2 How to initialize tuning Automatic tuning is initialized at installation or after replacing the magnetron. Howev-
er, if you feel that the automatic tuning is not functioning properly, re-initialize it by fol-
lowing the procedure below. Note: Automatic tuning is not available on FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key. 3. Select [4 TUNING INITIALIZE], then press the ENTER MARK key. The indication "TUNE INIT" appears in yellow characters at the top of the display during the initialization. 4. Close the menu. 1-40 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.16.3 How to tune the receiver manually 1. Select the 48-mile range from the [RANGE] box. Left-click to lower the range;
right-click to raise the range. 2. Select manual tuning following the procedure in section 1.16.1. 3. Place the arrow on the tuning level indication. 4. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust tuning. The best tuning point is where the bar graph swings maximum. The tuning control position is indicated with a triangle, dis-
played inside the tuning bar. 1.17 How to Select a Pulselength The pulselength in use is indicated on the [PULSE] button of the InstantAccess bar, at the top-left of the screen.
[PULSE] button PULSE L Current pulse length appears here. Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength settings, you can change them as shown in the procedure below. Note: The [Pulselength] button is not shown on FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation; instead the button is replaced with the in-
dication "SUB". 1.17.1 How to select a pulselength The pulselength can be changed using the procedure below. 1. Place the cursor in the [PULSE] box at the top left corner of the screen. 2. Left-click to decrease, right-click to increase the pulselength; or spin the scroll-
wheel to cycle through pulselengths. Radar model
(PULSE) indication Range 0.5 NM 0.75 NM 1.5 NM 3 NM Other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS Other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS Other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS Other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS 6 NM/12 NM Other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS 24 NM FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS Other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS S1, S2 S S1, S2, M1 S, M1 S1, S2, M1, M2 S, M1 S2, M1, M2, M3 S, M1, M2, L M1, M2, M3, L M1, M2, L M2, M3, L M1, M2, L 1-41 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.17.2 How to change the preset pulselength To change the preset pulselength for a range setting, follow the procedure below. Note: Pulselength presets are not available from FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS moni-
tors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [9 PULSE]. 5. Select the desired range, then select the re-
quired pulselength. Note: The example figure to the right is taken from a model other than the FAR-2x58 and FAR-
2268DS. Available pulselengths for FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS differ from those shown in this example. 6. Close the menu. 1.18 MOB Mark The MOB mark is used to mark the location where a man-over-board situation has oc-
curred. The are two methods to enter a MOB, as listed below:
Press the function key assigned with the [MOB] function. For how to assign func-
tions, see section 1.8.3. Left-click the [MOB] button on the InstantAccess bar. (C-types only) When a MOB mark is inserted, a MOB symbol is immediately inscribed at the own ship location. You can only insert one MOB mark at a time. If a new MOB mark is inserted, the old MOB mark is deleted. 200 MOB Waypoint number
(fixed at 200) MOB symbol
(C-types) MOB symbol
(IMO-types) For C-types, the following message appears when a MOB mark is inserted. To navigate directly to the MOB, select [RUN]. A course line appears between your vessel and the MOB symbol, on the screen. The line represents the shortest course to the MOB and the arrows on the line indicate the direction of travel. 1-42 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to see the MOB pop-up data (C-types only) Place the cursor on the MOB symbol to show the data pop-up
(see example figure to the right). The pop-up data shows the MOB coordinates, ETA and range from own ship. How to remove the MOB mark You can remove the MOB mark with one of the following procedures. For C-types, do one of the following:
Press and hold the function key assigned with the MOB function. Place the cursor on the MOB button on the InstantAccess bar, then left-click. For IMO-types, do the following:
1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click. The [CUR-
SOR] menu appears. 2. Select [MARK DELETE]. 3. Select the MOB mark. 4. Right-click the operational display area to complete the procedure. 1.19 How to Adjust Sensitivity The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver. The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display. To adjust receiver sensitivity, adjust the gain control so background noise is just visible on the screen. How to adjust the GAIN from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Rotate the GAIN knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the gain, or clockwise to in-
crease the gain. How to adjust the GAIN from the on-screen box 1. Place the cursor in the [GAIN] box at the top of the screen. GAIN 40 Place the cursor inside the gain level indication, then spin the scrollwheel. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the gain. The setting range is [0] to [100]. 1-43 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.20 How to Reduce Sea Clutter Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above the water, the further the clutter extends. When sea clutter masks the picture, reduce it with the A/C SEA control, either manually or automatically. Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is de-
creased more than when only one is changed. For that reason adjust them carefully. Note 2: The echo average function (see section 1.24) is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than station-
ary ones when echo average is active. 1.20.1 How to select the method of clutter adjustment 1. Place the cursor in the [SEA AUTO] or [SEA MAN] (whichever is shown) level in-
dication at the top of the display. Place the cursor on the [AUTO] or [MAN] indication, then left-click. SEA MAN 40 2. Left-click to display [SEA AUTO] or [SEA MAN] as appropriate. Note: For RCU-031 users, you can also push the A/C SEA knob to toggle between automatic and manual clutter reduction. 1.20.2 How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction Auto A/C SEA allows for fine tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within 20 dB. Accordingly, with the bar reading set to 50, gain is not lowered to minimum as with manual A/C SEA on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA level is low because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there are no sea surface reflections. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea, you can observe the size of the echoes because the STC curve changes with the size of the echoes. Note: The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes. Adjust the control care-
fully, watching the display. How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-
031) Rotate the AC/SEA knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the AC/SEA, or clockwise to increase the A/C SEA. How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction from the on-screen box 1. Select [SEA AUTO], following the procedure in section 1.20.1. 2. Place the arrow on level indicator inside the A/C SEA box at the top of the display. SEA AUTO 20 Place the cursor inside the level indication, then spin the scrollwheel. 3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, spin the scrollwheel to adjust the clutter reduction. The setting range is [-50] to [50]. 1-44 1.20.3 How to manually reduce sea clutter 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Sea clutter at screen center A/C SEA control adjusted;
sea clutter reduced Note: The proper setting of the A/C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea clutter and targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible windward. Be careful not to remove all sea clutter, because you may erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C SEA and A/C RAIN to reduce clutter. How to reduce sea clutter manually from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Rotate the AC/SEA knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the AC/SEA, or clockwise to increase the A/C SEA. How to reduce sea clutter manually from the on-screen box 1. Select [SEA MAN], following the procedure in section 1.20.1. 2. Place the arrow on level indicator inside the A/C SEA box at the top of the display. SEA MAN 40 Place the cursor inside the level indication, then spin the scrollwheel. 3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, spin the scrollwheel to adjust the clutter reduction. The setting range is [0] to [100]. 1.20.4 How to use the BERTHING STC function The [BERTHING STC] function allows you to show the main bang echo, even with the range set at 0.5 NM or less with AUTO SEA at maximum setting. This is particularly useful when attempting to berth, as it gives a clearer view of the berthing area and your ships location. To use the [BERTHING STC] function, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. The second page of the
[ECHO] menu appears. 4. Select [5 BERTHING STC]. 5. Select [ON] to activate, or [OFF] to deactivate, this function. 1-45 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.21 How to Reduce Rain Clutter You can reduce clutter caused by rain, either automatically or manually. Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is de-
creased more than when only one is changed. For that reason adjust them carefully. Note 2: The echo average function (see section 1.24) is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than station-
ary ones when echo average is active. 1.21.1 How to select the method of rain clutter reduction 1. Place the cursor in the [RAIN AUTO] or [RAIN MAN] (whichever is shown) level indication at the top of the display. Place the cursor inside the level indication, then left-click. RAIN MAN 40 2. Left-click to display [RAIN AUTO] or [RAIN MAN] as appropriate. Note 1: For RCU-031 users, you can also push the A/C RAIN knob to toggle be-
tween automatic and manual clutter reduction. Note 2: Unlike sea clutter reduction, rain clutter cannot be finely adjusted when set to [AUTO]. 1.21.2 How to manually reduce the rain clutter The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain clutter (rain, snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets. Rain clutter at screen center A/C RAIN control adjusted;
rain clutter reduced Note: The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control does but rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting the great-
er the anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier. Be careful not to remove all rain clutter, because you can erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C RAIN and A/C SEA to reduce clutter. How to fine-tune rain clutter reduction from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-
031) Rotate the A/C RAIN knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the A/C RAIN, or clock-
wise to increase the A/C RAIN. 1-46 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to fine-tune rain clutter reduction from the on-screen box 1. Select [RAIN MAN], following the procedure in section 1.21.1. RAIN MAN 40 Place the cursor inside the level indication, then spin the scrollwheel. 2. While observing the A/C RAIN level indicator, spin the scrollwheel to increase or decrease the level. 100 levels (0-100) are available. Note: The detection range is reduced when the RAIN is used to show targets in rain. Generally, the amount of rain, TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in deter-
mining how the detection range is affected. The figure below illustrates this. How to interpret the graph Using the graph below as an example, a radar target originally detected on the 8 NM range can only be detected in rain at the ranges shown below:
16 mm/h rain - short pulse 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain - long pulse 16 14 12 10 8 16 mm/h rain - short pulse 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain - long pulse 6 4 2 0 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Original range of first detection (NM) Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S-band 16 mm/h rain - short pulse 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain - long pulse 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Original range of first detection (NM) Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X-band 4 mm/h rain (short pulse) 16 mm/h rain (short pulse) 4 mm/h rain (long pulse) 16 mm/h rain (long pulse) 4 mm/h rain (short pulse) 4 mm/h rain (long pulse) 16 mm/h rain (short pulse) 16 mm/h rain (long pulse) t
) M M N N
n n o i o t c i t e c e e D t e d t s r t i s F r i f f o f e o g e n g a n R a f r o f n o o n i t c o u i t d c e u R d e R
) M N
n o i t c e t e D t s r i F f o e g n a R f o n o i t c u d e R The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for permission to reproduce Information from its Interantional Standard IEC 62388 ed.1.0 (2007). All such extracts are copyright of IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further information on the IEC is available from www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the extracts and contents are reproduced by the author, or is IC in any way responsible for the other content or accuracy therein. Accordingly, the short pulse may be preferable in rain on ranges less than 10 NM. 1-47 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.22 Interference Rejector Mutual radar interference can occur in the vicinity of an-
other shipborne radar operating in the same frequency band. It is seen on the screen as a number of bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usu-
ally curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture. Activating the interfer-
ence rejector circuit can reduce this type of interfer-
ence. The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It compares the received signals over successive transmissions and reduces randomly occur-
ring signals. There are three levels of interference rejection depending on the number of transmissions that are correlated. You can access this feature from the InstantAccess bar, or from the menu. The avail-
able settings are: [OFF], [1], [2] or [3]. How to reject interference from the InstantAccess bar TM To adjust the interference rejector, select the [IR] button (
IR OFF
) on the InstantAc-
cess bar, then left-click to cycle through the rejection levels. The available settings, in cyclic order, are: [OFF] [1] [2] [3] [OFF]... Level [3] provides the highest level of rejection. How to reject interference from the menu 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. Note: You can also right-click the [PICTURE]
box to access this menu. 4. Select [2 INT REJECTOR]. 5. Select the required setting. 6. Close the menu. Note: When multiple radars using the same frequency are nearby, interference may appear in a similar manner to that shown in the figure to the right. If this kind of in-
terference appears, do one of the following:
Press the HL OFF key, or click the [HL OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar. Change the range. Interference from radars Interference from radars using the same frequency. using the same frequency. 1-48 1.23 Echo Stretch 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three types of echo stretch, 1, 2 and 3, and the higher the number the greater the amount of stretch. Note: The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns (clutter) from sea surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason, make sure these types of interference have been sufficiently reduced before activating the echo stretch. You can access this feature from the InstantAccess bar, or from the menu. The avail-
able options are: [OFF], [1], [2] or [3]. How to use echo stretch from the InstantAccess bar TM To set echo stretch, select the [ES] button (
ES OFF
) on the InstantAccess bar, then left-click to cycle through the settings. The available settings, in cyclic order, are: [OFF] [1] [2] [3] [OFF]... How to use echo stretch from the menu 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [3 ECHO STRETCH]. 5. Select the required setting. 6. Close the menu. 1-49 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.24 Echo Averaging The echo averaging feature effectively reduces sea clutter. Echoes received from sta-
ble targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position every ro-
tation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions. To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over succes-
sive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames, it is present-
ed in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans and its brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter. Echo averaging uses a scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true motion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys will be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter. However, true echo averaging is not effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the ground. Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than sta-
tionary ones. Note 2: Do not use the echo averaging function under heavy pitching and rolling; loss of targets can result. Note 3: Echo averaging requires heading, position and speed data. Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA control. Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets. The available settings options are shown in the table below. Setting
(level)
[OFF]
[1], [2]
[3]
[4]
Description Echo averaging is not enabled Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. [2] is more effective than [1] in detecting targets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, [1] is more effective than [2] in displaying high-speed targets. Select the setting best suited to current con-
ditions. For effective monitoring of high-speed craft, you should use [2] to-
gether with the Wiper function. Stably displays unstable targets; distinguishes high-speed craft. Assists in distinguishing net floats better. Note: Setting level [4] is available for C-types only. You can access this feature from the InstantAccess bar, or from the menu. How to adjust the echo average function from the InstantAccess bar TM Select the [EAV] button (
EAV OFF
) on the InstantAccess bar, then left-click to select the desired level of echo averaging. 1-50 How to use the echo average function from the menu 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [4 ECHO AVERAGE]. 5. Select the required setting. 6. Close the menu. How to highlight fast-moving targets Normally, when echo averaging is in use, fast-moving targets may be displayed weak-
ly, or not at all. The fast target emphasis function highlights fast-moving targets, but can also highlight sea-surface reflections and other noise. To use the fast target emphasis function, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [6 EAV EMPH-FAST TGT]. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 1-51 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.25 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function This radar has the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function. This function detects sea and rain clutter from received echoes and automatically reduces sea and rain clutter according to the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) threshold setting. Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the screen. 1.25.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on/off You can activate/deactivate the ACE function with one of the two methods outlined be-
low. From the InstantAccess bar TM Place the cursor on the [ACE] button (
ACE OFF
), then left-click to toggle between [ON]
and [OFF]. From the menu 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [0 NEXT]. 5. Select [4 ACE]. 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 7. Close the menu. When [ACE] is activated, the [SEA] box and [RAIN] box are gray colored and cannot be adjusted, and the echo averaging function is disabled. The [GAIN] box changes to
[GAIN ACE], as shown in the figure below. ACE turned off. ACE turned on. GAIN SEA RAIN MAN MAN 30 30 30 GAIN SEA RAIN ACE MAN MAN 30 30 30 Note: When [PERFORMANCE MON] (see section 1.50) or [SART] (see section 2.3) is [ON], [ACE] is disabled and cannot be activated. 1.25.2 How to adjust the gain in Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) mode Rotate the GAIN knob to adjust the sensitivity. ACE can also be adjusted by placing the cursor inside the [GAIN ACE] level indication, then spinning the scrollwheel. 1-52 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.25.3 How to get high sensitivity When the ACE function is [ON], the high sensitivity mode is also available. High sen-
sitivity mode has three levels ([1], [2], [3]), with [3] applying the highest gain. To use high sensitivity mode, a function key must be assigned with the [ACE HIGH SENSITIVITY] function (see section 1.8). To activate the ACE feature, press the as-
signed function key. You can select the level of sensitivity for high sensitivity mode as follows:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [2 ACE], then press the ENTER MARK key. The [ACE] menu appears. 5. Select [2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT], then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Select the level from [1], [2] or [3]. 7. Close the menu. 1.25.4 How to suppress false echoes When the ACE function is [ON], the echo signals can appear on the screen at posi-
tions where there is no target or disappear when there are targets (see section 2.2). You can suppress these false echoes. Note: This procedure is only available when the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is [ON]. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [2 ACE], then press the ENTER MARK key. 5. Select [3 SUPPRESS SECTOR], then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the number keys, to set the start angle for sector sup-
pression. If you use the number keys, the cursor moves from left to right. When all three dig-
its are input, the cursor moves to the ANGLE item. If you use the scrollwheel, left-click when the start angle is set. To cancel any changes, press the ENTER MARK key. 7. Left-click, or press the ENTER MARK key to confirm the start angle. The cursor moves to the [ANGLE] item. 8. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the number keys, set the angle range of the sector to be suppressed. If you use the number keys, the cursor moves from left to right. When all three dig-
its are input, the setting process is complete. If you use the scrollwheel, left-click when the angle range is set. To cancel any changes, press the ENTER MARK key. 9. Close the menu. 1-53 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.26 Noise Rejector White noise can show itself on the screen as random speckles spread over the entire radar image. This equipment reduces the white noise, then improves the on-screen S/
N ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for the received echoes in the range direction. Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the screen or the range resolution may worsen. To remove this noise do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [7 NOISE REJECTOR]. 5. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate, then Noise Rejector indication press the ENTER MARK key. The indication for noise rejection is located at the top-left of the screen. The indication changes according to the selected setting. 6. Close the menu. 1.27 Wiper The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of weak signals (noise, sea clut-
ter, rain clutter, etc.) and unwanted signals such as radar interference to clear the pic-
ture of unwanted echoes. Its effect depends on the wiper setting used and whether each averaging is turned on or off, as described below. Wiper setting 1 Wiper setting 2 Echo averaging [OFF]
Condition A Echo averaging on([1] through [4]) Condition A Condition A Condition B Condition A: The brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such as noise, sea clutter and rain clutter, is reduced to clear up the picture. Condition B: Echo averaging is automatically activated when the wiper feature is turned on, allowing you to instantly see how the picture is affected with echo averaging turned off and turned on. Note 1: The [WIPER] function is not available when [TRUE VIEW] (located on page 2 of the [ECHO] menu) is set to [ON]. Note 2: The [WIPER] function requires valid data input for position, speed and heading. To activate the wiper feature, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [9 WIPER]. 4. Select the desired setting. The options are: [OFF], [1] or [2]. 5. Close the menu. 1-54 1.28 How to Preset Controls for a Specific Navigation Purpose 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the radar, which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide optimum settings for often-
encountered situations. The radar's internal computer offers several picture preset options to be assigned to each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the presets is [ROUGH SEA], and is designed to be used in heavy rain. Three user-programmable presets are also provided (labeled as [CUSTOM1], [CUS-
TOM2] and [CUSTOM3]), so that you can have the radar automatically set to those conditions which are not covered by the provided setup options. Below are the preset options provided with this radar. Preset
[CUSTOM1], [CUSTOM2]
and [CUSTOM3]
[NEAR]
[FAR]
[NEAR BUOY]
[FAR BUOY]
[ROUGH SEA]
[SHIP]
[HARBOR]
[BIRD]
[COAST]
User-defined custom settings. Description Optimum setting for short range detection using a range scale of 3 NM or less on calm seas. Optimum setting for long range detection, on a range scale of 6 NM or larger. Optimum setting for detecting buoys within 3 NM range. Optimum setting for detecting buoys on a range scale of 6 NM or larger. Optimum setting for rough weather or heavy rain. Optimum setting for detecting other vessels. Optimum setting for harbor berthing. Optimum setting for detecting birds. Optimum setting for coastal travel. Note: For C-types, you can change the name of the presets (see section 1.28.5). This section uses the default names for all procedures and examples. Each picture option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving op-
timum setup for a particular navigating situation. These include gain, target analyzer, hatching, ACE, ACE gain, interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise re-
jector, automatic anti-sea and anti-rain clutter, video contrast, near STC range/curve, pulse length and sea and radar conditions. Changing these features from the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu changes the original function key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular customize option, it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we recommended that you use the user-programmable presets ([CUSTOM1], [CUSTOM2] or [CUSTOM3]) when frequent adjustment of the radar image is necessary. The default settings for the custom presets are listed on the following pages. 1-55 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Default settings - models other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS IR ES EA NR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OFF 1 1 OFF 1 1 OFF 1 1 OFF 1 1 OFF 1 2 OFF 2 1 OFF 2 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF 1 2 OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF AUTO AUTO RAIN SEA MAN-30 MAN-0 AUTO-30 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-0 AUTO-40 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-30 AUTO-30 MAN-0 MAN-50 MAN-40 MAN-0 MAN-30 MAN-0 MAN-30 MAN-0 MAN-30 MAN-0 MAN-30 TARGET ANALYZER*
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF HATCHING*
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STC CURVE STC RANGE 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8 8 LOW LEVEL ECHOES 0 0 0 0 0 0 NEAR STC CURVE*
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 NEAR STC RANGE*
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 GAIN ACE ACE GAIN VIDEO CONTRAST 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 75 85 85 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 50 50 50 50 60 50 50 35 50 50 50 50 2-B 2-C 2-B 1-B 4-B 1-C 4-C 2-C 2-B 1-C 3-C 2-C CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST
*: Available for C-type radars only. 1-56 Default settings - FAR-2x58 CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST IR ES EA NR 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 OFF OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STC CURVE STC RANGE CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8 8 LOW LEVEL ECHOES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AUTO SEA MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-60 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-60 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-30 NEAR STC CURVE*
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 AUTO RAIN MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 NEAR STC RANGE*
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*: Available for C-type radars only. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW TARGET ANALYZER*
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF HATCHING*
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF GAIN ACE ACE GAIN 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 VIDEO CONTRAS T 1-B 2-B 1-B 2-A 1-B 3-B 1-B 1-B 2-A 1-B 2-B 2-B 1-57 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Default settings - FAR-2268DS IR ES EA NR CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 2 OFF 1 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF AUTO AUTO RAIN SEA MAN-0 MAN-50 MAN-0 MAN-40 MAN-45 MAN-60 MAN-30 AUTO MAN-0 MAN-50 MAN-0 AUTO MAN-40 MAN-0 MAN-50 MAN-60 MAN-50 MAN-40 MAN-40 MAN-30 MAN-40 MAN-25 AUTO AUTO TARGET ANALYZER*
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF HATCHING*
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STC CURVE STC RANGE CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8 8 LOW LEVEL ECHOES 0 0 0 0 0 0 NEAR STC CURVE*
4.5 4.5 4.5 3.0 4.5 4.5 NEAR STC RANGE*
1.0 1.0 1.7 1.0 1.7 1.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 3.0 4.5 3.0 3.0 4.5 4.5 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.0 1.7 1.7 GAIN ACE ACE GAIN 90 50 90 90 90 90 80 85 85 85 90 85 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 VIDEO CONTRAS T 3-B 3-B 3-B 3-B 4-B 3-B 3-B 2-B 2-B 2-A 3-A 2-B
*: Available for C-type radars only. 1-58 Default settings for [PULSELENGTH] - models other than FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST 0.125 NM to 0.5 NM S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 4 NM*
M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 0.75 NM 1 NM*
1.5 NM 2 NM*
3 NM S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 6 NM M2 M2 M2 M2 M3 M2 M3 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S2 S1 8 NM*
M2 M2 M2 M2 M3 M2 M3 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 12 NM L L L M3 L M3 L M3 L M3 M3 M3 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 M1 S2 16 NM*
L L L M3 L M3 L M3 M3 M3 L M3 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 24 NM L L L L L L L L L L L L
*: Available for C-types only. 1-59 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Default settings for [PULSELENGTH] - FAR-2x58 CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST 0.125 NM to 0.5 NM S S S S S S S S S S S S 4 NM*
M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M2 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M2 0.75 NM 1 NM*
1.5 NM 2 NM*
3 NM S S S S S M1 S S S S S S 6 NM M2 M2 M2 M2 M1 L M1 M1 M2 M1 M2 M2 S S S S S M1 S S S S S S 8 NM*
M2 M2 M2 M2 M1 L M1 M1 M2 M1 M2 M2 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 12 NM M2 L L L L L L L L L L L M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 16 NM*
L L L L L L L L L L L L M1 M1 M1 M1 M2 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M2 24 NM L L L L L L L L L L L L
*: Available for C-types only. 1-60 Default settings for [PULSELENGTH] - FAR-2268DS 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 CUSTOM3 NEAR FAR NEAR BOUY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR BIRD COAST 0.125 NM to 0.5 NM S S S S S S S S S S S S 4 NM*
M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 0.75 NM 1 NM*
1.5 NM 2 NM*
3 NM S S S S S S S S S S S S 6 NM L L L L L L L L L L L L S S S S S S S S S S S S 8 NM*
L L L L L L L L L L L L M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 12 NM L L L L L L L L L L L L M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 16 NM*
L L L L L L L L L L L L M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 M2 24 NM L L L L L L L L L L L L
*: Available for C-types only. 1.28.1 How to select a customized echo Left-click the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box at the top left of the screen to cycle through the options and select a customized echo option. The available options depend on the settings selected for [3 SELECT CUSTOM] in the
[ECHO] menu. See section 1.28.5. Note: For C-types, if the customization is linked with a range (see section 1.28.7), the indication appears in yellow color. 1-61 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.28.2 How to edit a customized echo 1. Select a customize echo option to edit (see section 1.28.1). 2. Open the menu. 3. Select [1 ECHO]. 4. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 5. Set the items below referring to the sections shown.
[2 INT REJECTOR]
[3 ECHO STRETCH]
[4 ECHO AVERAGE]
[5 TARGET ANALYZER]*
[6 HATCHING]*
[7 NOISE REJECTOR]
[8 VIDEO CONTRAST TYPE]
[9 PULSE]
[2 CONDITION]
[4 ACE]
*: Available for C-type radars only.
: section 1.22
: section 1.23
: section 1.24
: section 1.38
: section 1.38
: section 1.26
: section 1.17
: section 1.28.2
: section 1.25 Note: To set [2 CONDITION] and [4 ACE], select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu. 6. Select [8 VIDEO CONTRAST TYPE], then press the ENTER MARK key. 7. Select [1], [2], [3] or [4] (Dynamic Range) or [A], [B], [C] (Curve) as appropriate then press the ENTER MARK key. Video contrast and curve change depending on setting for [VIDEO CONTRAST] (set at installation), as shown in the figure be-
low.
[VIDEO CONTRAST] set to [ADVANCE] at installation:
T S A R T N O C 44 33 22 11 LEVEL T S A R T N O C A LEVEL T S A R T N O C B LEVEL T S A R T N O C C LEVEL
[VIDEO CONTRAST] set to [LEGACY] at installation:
CONTRAST 44 33 22 11 LEVEL CONTRAST C B A LEVEL 1 to 4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the nar-
rowest dynamic range. A: Low level echo brilliance is reduced and noise and clutter are also reduced. B: Low and high level echoes are displayed evenly. C: High level echoes' outer edge has gradation to indicate the echo level, with the higher level echo at the core. 8. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 9. Select [2 CONDITION]. 10. Select [2 STC CURVE]. 11. Select the appropriate setting for the current sea conditions, then press the EN-
TER MARK key. A higher setting is recommended for rough weather. 1-62 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 12. Select [3 STC RANGE]. 13. Set the distance for STC effectiveness, then press the ENTER MARK key. A high-
er setting eliminates farther surface reflections. 14. If necessary, select [4 LOW LEVEL ECHO] to reject low level echoes. The higher the figure, the stronger the low level echo that is erased. 15. Select [5 NEAR STC CURVE]. 16. Select the appropriate setting for close-range sea conditions. 17. Select [5 NEAR STC RANGE]. 18. Select the range to which you want to apply the [NEAR STC CURVE] settings. 19. Select [1 BACK] to show the second page of the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu. 20. To save custom settings, select [SAVE] from [3 DEFAULT]. Note: For C-types, when customized settings are not saved, the save floppy disc icon appears. You can click the icon to save the customized settings. 21. Close the menu. Save floppy disc icon 1.28.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings If you get lost in operation while changing the settings for a user customized echo, you can easily restore the settings for that user customized echo saved at section 1.28.2. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 5. Select [3 DEFAULT]. 6. Select [USER]. 7. Close the menu. 1.28.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default settings You can restore customized echo options to their factory default settings (see the ta-
bles on page 1-56 for a list of the default settings). 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 5. Select [3 DEFAULT]. 6. Select [FACTORY], then press the ENTER MARK key. 7. Close the menu. 1-63 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.28.5 How to edit the available customized echoes To edit which customizations are available from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [3 SELECT CUSTOM]. The [SELECT CUSTOM] menu appears. Page 1 Page 2 5. Select the customization you want to edit. The customizations are listed over two menu pages. Select [0 NEXT] to see the next page, or select [1 BACK] to return to the previous menu page. 6. Select [ON] to make the customization available from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO]
box, or select [OFF] to hide the customization from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box. Note: The factory default setting for all items in this menu is [ON]. 7. Close the menu. 1.28.6 How to change the name of a customization (C-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO]. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. Currently selected customized echo name appears here. 5. Select [5 CUSTOMIZED ECHO NAME]. The software keyboard window appears. 6. Referring to section 1.5.3, change the name of the customization. 7. Close the menu. 1-64 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.28.7 How to link the customization with a range (C-types only) You can set link your customized presets with a specified range to save time. Linked settings are changeable and are also applied if the range is changed while in stand-
by mode. To link customized settings with a range, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [8 CUSTOM LINK]. 5. Select [LINK RANGE]. 6. Select [SET CUSTOM LINK]. Linked customizations appear next to their linked range in the [SET CUSTOM LINK] menu. The default setting for all ranges is
[CUSTOM 1]. Linked customization appears here
[0.5]: links the customization to 0.5NM/SM/km/kyd range or lower
[0.75]: links the customization to ranges between 0.75 and 1NM/SM/km/kyd
[1.5]: links the customization to ranges between 0.175 and 1NM/SM/km/kyd
[3]: links the customization to ranges between 3 and 4NM/SM/km/kyd
[6]: links the customization to ranges between 6 and 8NM/SM/km/kyd
[12]: links the customization to ranges between 12 and 16NM/SM/km/kyd
[24]: links the customization to 24NM/SM/km/kyd range or higher 7. Select the range you want to link a customization to. The available options appear. Note: If the name of a customization is changed (see section 1.28.6), the custom name appears instead of the default. 8. Select the customization you want to link to the selected range. 9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to link other ranges and customizations. 10. Close the menu. 1-65 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.29 How to Reject Second-trace Echoes In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets can appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted. Pulse interval Actual ranges Second-trace echo Measured ranges This equipment lengthens the pulse repetition period to reject false echoes. Note 1: This function decreases the number of echo hits. Use this function carefully so that the possibility of detecting small targets and high-speed craft does not lessen. Note 2: This function is not available on FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. To reject second trace echoes, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO]. 3. Select [3 2ND ECHO REJ]. 4. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key. Select [OFF] to disable rejection. 5. Close the menu. 1-66 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.30 Orientation Modes This radar has the following orientation modes available:
Mode Description Relative Motion (RM) modes
[HEAD UP RM]
[STERN UP RM]*
Not stabilized The radar image is rotated 180. Graphics and relative and true bearings are also rotated 180.
[STAB HEAD UP RM] Head-up with compass bearing scale (True Bearing) where
[COURSE UP RM]
[NORTH UP RM]
True Motion (TM ) modes
[NORTH UP TM]
the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading. Compass-stabilized relative to ships orientation at the time of selecting COURSE UP. Compass-stabilized with reference to North. Land objects and sea are stationary. Requires compass and speed data.
*: [STERN UP RM] is only available for C-types. 1.30.1 How to select an presentation mode Select the [ORIENTATION MODE] box at the top left corner of the screen, then left-click to cycle through the available orientation modes. Loss of gyrocompass signal When the compass signal is lost, "NO GYRO SIGNAL" appears in yellow-orange in the [ALERT] box, the orientation mode automatically becomes HEAD UP, and TT and AIS targets, map and chart are erased. Stop the alert with the ALARM ACK (RCU-
014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-031) key or left-click the [ALERT] box. Check the GYRO data. 1.30.2 Description of presentation modes HEAD UP mode A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line that connects the center with the top of the display indicates your heading. Targets are shown at their measured distances and their directions relative to your heading. The short dotted line on the bearing scale is the north marker. North marker Heading line Note: For C-types, you can make the following adjust-
ment in the menu to show smoother echoes when turning at high speeds. However, with this adjustment, the [WIPER] and [ZOOM] functions are disabled. Set [TRUE VIEW] to [ON] on the second page of the [ECHO] menu. 1-67 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW COURSE UP mode The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course at the top of the screen. When you change the heading, the heading line moves with the course selected. If you select a new course, select the course up mode again to display the new course at the top of the display. Targets are shown at their measured distances and their direc-
tions relative to the set course, which is at the 0-de-
gree position. The heading line moves according to the yawing and any course change. NORTH UP mode Targets are shown at their measured distances and their true (compass) directions from your ship. North is at the top of the screen. The heading line changes its di-
rection according to your heading. North marker Heading line North marker Heading line STAB HEAD UP mode Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the HEAD UP mode. The difference from normal HEAD UP presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale. The bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in accordance with the heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship's heading at a glance. This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyrocompass. If the gyro-
compass fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of HEAD UP mode. True motion mode Your ship and other objects in motion move with their true courses and speed. All fixed targets, like landmasses, appear as fixed echoes in ground stabilized TM. When your ship reaches a point that is 50% of the radius of the display, the position is reset. The ship appears at 75% radius opposite to the extension of the current course. You can manually reset your ship symbol if you press the 5 CU/TM RESET key. Heading line North marker
(a) True motion is selected
(b) Your ship has reached a point 50% of display radius
(c) Your ship is automatically reset to 75% of display radius Note: The position of the own ship marker and bearing scale change according to ref-
erence position and off-centering. ANT: When OFF CENTER is active, the bearing scale intervals change accordingly. CCRP: When the CCRP moves outside the operational display area, the bearing scale intervals may not be displayed correctly. 1-68 STERN UP mode The STERN UP mode rotates the HEAD UP mode picture, relative and true bearings and display graphics 180. This mode is useful on dual-radar tugboats when backing up; one ra-
dar shows HEAD UP and another shows STERN UP. To enable the STERN UP mode, turn on [STERN UP] on the [OPERATION]
menu. Note: STERN UP mode is only available for C-types. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Heading line North marker 1.31 How to Select a Range Scale The selected range scale and range ring interval are shown at the upper left corner on the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it appears in 50-90% of the display radius. 1. Place the cursor in the [RANGE] box at the top left corner of the screen. RANGE box In the above example, the range scale is set to 0.125 NM and the interval between range rings is set to 0.025 NM. 2. Left-click to lower the range; right-click to raise the range. You can also select the range with the RANGE key on the control unit (not available for RCU-015/RCU-016). Press "+" to increase the range, or press "-" to reduce the range. Press and hold a key to successively change the range upwards or down-
wards. Changing the plotter range (C-types only) With the radar in standby (STBY) mode, you can change the plotter range by pressing the RANGE key. In this case, range means the on-screen displayed distance from the left-hand edge of the screen to the right-hand edge of the screen.
+: expands the range scale with the cursor location as the center.
-: reduces the range scale with the cursor location as the center. Press and hold the + or - key to change the range scale continuously. 1-69 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.32 How to Measure Range The range to a target can be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings, with the cursor, or with the VRM. Use the fixed range rings to get an estimate of the range to a target. The rings are the concentric solid circles on the display. The number of rings is automatically set by the current range scale. The distance between the rings is the range ring interval, and the current interval appears at the upper-left position on the screen. To measure the range to a target with the range rings, count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the range ring interval and estimate the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring. 1.32.1 How to show/hide the range rings 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS] to show the [NAV TOOLS] menu. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM] to show the [CURSOREBLVRM]
menu. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 RANGE RINGS]. For C-types, select [6 RANGE RINGS]. 4. Depending on your radar type, select the appropriate setting. For IMO-types: Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. For C-types: Select the appropriate setting, referring to the following list.
[OFF]: Hide the range rings.
[STD]: Range rings increase/decrease in number, according to the selected radar range.
[MANUAL]: Set a number of range rings that are not linked with the radar range. 5. Close the menu. 1.32.2 How to measure range with the variable range marker (VRM) There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can distinguish them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 VRM are longer. 350 000 010 340 330 020 030 Target echo 320 310 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 1-70 040 050 060 VRM1 070 080 090 100 110 120 VRM2 220 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 130 140 There are two methods for measuring range with the VRMs, using the VRM key and on-screen menu box operation. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Range to VRM VRM1 28.11 NM TTG 50:00 VRM2 NM 60:00 36.44 TTG TTG to VRM Currently active VRM is highlighted. Note: You can hide the [TTG] indication. See section 1.32.5. Using the VRM keys on the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) 1. Press the VRM ON key to activate the VRM1 box. Press the VRM ON key again to activate the VRM2 box. Press the VRM ON key again to switch between active VRMs. The currently active VRM marker is displayed as shown in the above fig-
ure. 2. Rotate the VRM knob to align the active VRM with the inner edge of the target, then read the distance at the lower right of the screen. In the above figure, the ac-
tive VRM reads "36.44 NM". Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the RANGE key or the [RANGE] box. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale. 3. Press the VRM OFF key to hide the VRMs. On-screen menu box operation 1. Select the appropriate [VRM] box. 2. The guidance box reads "VRM ON/". Left-click to turn on the VRM. The guidance box now reads "VRM SET L = DELETE /". Further, the box is highlighted and the corresponding VRM appears. 3. Left-click again and the cursor jumps to inside the operational display area. The guidance box now reads "VRM FIX L = DELETE / EXIT". 4. Move the trackball to adjust the VRM. Note: The maximum VRM distance is set by the current display range and can be set as high as twice the distance of the display range. 5. Left-click to anchor the VRM and fix its readout, or right-click to cancel and return the VRM to its previous location (range). 6. To hide the VRM, left-click the [VRM] box to show "VRM SET L = DELETE /" in the guidance box, then press and hold the left button on the trackball. 1-71 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.32.3 How to set the VRM unit of measurement (C-types only) VRMs can be displayed in the following units of measurement:
NM (Nautical Miles) SM (Statute Miles) km (Kilometers) kyd (Kiloyards) To change the unit of measurement, do the follow-
ing:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. Select [3 EBLVRM]. The [EBLVRM] menu appears. 4. Select [VRM1] or [VRM2] as appropriate. 5. Select the required unit of measurement. 6. Close the menu. Note: Changes made to the measurement units also affect the active VRMs. 1.32.4 How to set the short distance measurement unit (C-types only) You can set a different unit of measurement to use within a pre-determined range from your vessel. This setting affects the VRM indication as well as the cursor indication. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. The [CURSOREBLVRM] menu appears. 3. Select [8 SHORT DISTANCE UNIT]. 4. Select the unit to want to use for short distances, or select OFF to disable this feature. 5. Select [9 DIST UNIT CHANGEOVER]. 6. Spin the scrollwheel, or enter the distance using the control unit. Echoes selected within this distance (range) from your vessel have their distance shown with the selected measurement unit. 7. Close the menu. 1-72 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.32.5 How to show TTG to VRM TTG (Time To Go) to a selected VRM can be displayed as follows:
1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS] to show the [NAV TOOLS] menu. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM] to show the [CURSOREBLVRM]
menu. 3. For IMO-types, select [3 EBLVRMCURSOR SET]. For C-types, select [3 EBLVRM]. 4. For IMO-types, select [3 VRM TTG.]
For C-types, select [7 VRM TTG.]
5. Select the appropriate setting.
[OFF]: TTG is not displayed.
[1]: TTG from own ship to VRM 1 only is displayed.
[2]: TTG from own ship to VRM 2 only is displayed.
[1and2]: TTG from own ship to both VRMs is displayed. 6. Close the menu. 1.33 How to Measure Bearing The Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) are used to take bearings of targets.There are two EBLs, EBL1 and EBL2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The two EBLs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on EBL2 are longer. Each EBL has an EBRL (Electronic Bearing Range Line, indicated as a short line, crossing the EBL at right angles). When VRM is not displayed and only EBL is dis-
played, the EBRL shows the range from the EBL origin. When VRMs are displayed with EBLs the VRM overlaps the EBRL. The value for EBRL and VRM is the same and is displayed in the VRM box at the bottom-right of the screen. 340 330 350 000 010 EBRLs EBRLs 020 030 320 310 040 050 EBL2 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 Target echo EBL1 060 070 080 090 100 110 220 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 120 130 140 The currently active EBL marker is higlighted as shown below. EBL1 045.3 R EBL2 287.1 R 1-73 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.33.1 Methods to measure bearing There are two methods for measuring bearing, using the EBL key and on-screen menu box operation. Using the EBL keys on the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) 1. Press the EBL ON key to activate the [EBL1] box. Press the EBL ON key again to activate the EBL2 box. Press the EBL ON key again to switch between active VRMs. 2. Rotate the EBL knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the active EBL bisects the target of interest, then read its bearing at the lower-left corner of the screen. 3. Press the EBL OFF key to erase the active EBL. On-screen menu box operation 1. Select the appropriate EBL box. 2. The guidance box reads "EBL ON/". Press the left button to turn on the EBL.The guidance box now reads "EBL SET L=DELETE /". 3. Press the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the operational display area. The guidance box now reads "EBL FIX L=DELETE/". 4. Rotate the EBL knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the active EBL bisects the target of interest. Read the bearing at the lower-left corner of the screen. 5. To erase the EBL(s), place the cursor on the box for the EBL you want to erase, then press and hold the left button. 1-74 1.33.2 True or relative bearing The EBL readout is affixed by "R" (relative) if it is relative to own ship's heading, "T"
(true) if it is referenced to the north. True or relative indication is available regardless of presentation mode. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. For IMO-types, select [3 EBLVRMCURSOR SET]. For C-types, select [3 EBLVRM]. 4. For IMO-types, select [5 EBLCURSOR BEARING]. For C-types, select [2 EBL1] or [3 EBL2] as appropriate. 5. Select the [REL] or [TRUE] as required, then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Close the menu. Note: The EBL and its indication change according to gyrocompass changes as fol-
lows:
Gyro heading HEAD UP / relative HEAD UP / true EBL changes EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged. EBL indication does not change, however the EBL marker moves accordingly COURSE UP / relative EBL indication does not change, however the EBL marker COURSE UP / true NORTH UP / relative NORTH UP / true moves accordingly. EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged. EBL indication does not change, however the EBL marker moves accordingly EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged. 1-75 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.34 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere to enable measurement of range and bearing between any two targets. This function is also useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA (Closest Point of Approach) by us-
ing the EBL range marker as shown in (a) in the illustration below. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as shown in (b) in the illustration below, the target ship is on a collision course. 340 330 350 000 010 020 030 340 330 350 000 010 020 030 320 310 A 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 A1 040 050 320 310 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 EBL range marker A A1 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 040 050 060 070 EBL range marker 080 090 100 110 120 130 140 230 220 No. 1 EBL 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 130 140 230 220 No. 1 EBL
(a) (b) 210 150 200 160 190 180 170 1.34.1 How to assess risk of collision using the offset EBL There are two methods for assessing risk collision. You can use the control unit or the
[CURSOR] menu. Using the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) 1. Press the EBL ON key to display or activate an EBL (EBL1 or EBL2). 2. Place the cursor on a target appearing as threatening (indicated as A in the ex-
ample figure on the previous page). 3. Press the EBL OFFSET key and the origin of the active EBL shifts to the cursor position. 4. Press the EBL OFFSET key again to anchor the EBL origin. 5. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL knob until the EBL bisects the target at the new position (A1). The EBL readout shows the target ship's course, which can be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing refer-
ence setting. Note: If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using the range marker as shown in left-hand figure at the top of the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right-hand figure above, the target ship is on a collision course. 6. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, then press the EBL OFFSET key. 1-76 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Using the on-screen box 1. Select the operational display area, then right-click. The [CURSOR] context menu appears. 2. Select [EBL OFFSET]. 3. Select the operational display area, then left-click. The EBL line is attached to the cursor. 4. Place the offset EBL on the target appearing as threatening, then left-click. 5. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL used in step 4 until it bisects the target at the new position (A1). The EBL readout shows the target ship's course, which can be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting. 6. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, repeat steps 1 to 3. 7. Close the menu. 1.34.2 How to set the origin point reference for EBL OFFSET The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed), north stabilized (true) or referenced to own ships heading (relative). 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. For IMO-types, select [3 EBLVRMCURSOR SET]. For C-types, select [3 EBLVRM]. 4. For IMO-types, select [2 EBL OFFSET BASE]. For C-types, select [6 EBL OFFSET BASE]. 5. Select [STAB GND], [STAB HDG] or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[STAB GND]:
Reference to latitude and longitude. Origin position is always fixed regardless of your ship's movement.
[STAB HDG]:
Reference to heading. The relationship between origin posi-
tion and own position is kept always.
[STAB NORTH]:
Reference to North. The origin position changes with North position. 6. Close the menu. 1-77 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.35 How to Measure Range and Bearing Between Two Targets Range Marker 320 310 EBL1 300 290 340 330 350 000 010 020 030 Target 2 Target 2 040 050 Target 1 Target 1 Target 4 Target 4 R2 Target 3 Target 3 Range Marker EBL2 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 130 140 280 270 260 250 240 EBL origin 230 220 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 Range/bearing between targets 1 and 2 EBL1 045.3 R EBL2 287.1 R VRM1 28.11 NM TTG 50:00 VRM2 NM 60:00 36.44 TTG Range/bearing between targets 3 and 4 How to measure range and bearing from the [CURSOR] menu This procedure uses EBL1 and VRM1 as an example and is written on the premise that neither of the EBLs or VRMs is active. 1. Place the cursor on the EBL1 box, then left-click. EBL1 is now active. 2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] context menu. 3. Select [EBL OFFSET]. The cursor is displayed with a red surround, indicating that the [EBL OFFSET] mode is now active. 4. With the cursor in the operational display area, left-click. EBL1 moves to the cur-
sor location. 5. Place the offset EBL on the target of interest (Target 1), then left-click. 6. Right-click to deactivate the [EBL OFFSET] mode. The red surround on the cursor disappears. 7. Place the cursor on the [EBL1] box, then spin the scrollwheel until EBL1 intersects the secondary target (Target 2 in the example figure). 8. Place the cursor on the [VRM1] box, then spin the scrollwheel until the range marker on EBL1 aligns with Target 2. The readouts for EBL1 and VRM1, at the bottom of the screen, indicate the bearing and range between the Target 1 and Target 2. 9. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (shown as Target 3 and Target 4 in the above example) by using EBL2 and VRM2. Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T"
depending on EBL relative/true settings in the [EBLVRMCURSOR SET] menu. 1-78 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to measure range and bearing from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-
031)) Range and bearing can be measure using the EBL OFFSET key. 1. Press the EBL ON key to activate EBL1. 2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then press the EBL OFFSET key. EBL1 moves to the cursor. 3. Place the cursor (EBL1 moves with the cursor) on a target of interest. (Shown as Target 1 in the above example), then press the EBL OFFSET key. 4. Rotate the EBL knob to move the EBL until it passes through another target of in-
terest. (Shown as Target 2 in the above example). 5. Place the cursor on the [VRM1] box. 6. Rotate the VRM knob until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside edge of Target 2. The readouts for EBL1 and VRM1, at the bottom of the screen, indicate the bearing and range between the Target 1 and Target 2. 7. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (shown as Target 3 and Target 4 in the above example) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM. Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T"
depending on EBL relative/true settings in the [EBLVRM] menu. How to reset the EBL origin to the center of the screen 1. Place the cursor on the box for the EBL to reset, then left-click. The selected EBL is now active and highlighted. 2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click. The [CUR-
SOR] context menu appears. 3. Select [EBL OFFSET]. The cursor is now displayed with a red surround. 4. Left-click to return the EBL to the center of the display. 5. Right-click to deactivate the [EBL OFFSET] mode. The red surround on the cursor disappears. 1-79 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to link EBL and VRM OFFSET You can link the EBL and VRM offset to show the VRM range ring with one target as the center-point. This may helpful if the range marker on the EBL is difficult to see. 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [3 NAV TOOLS]. For C-types, select [3 CURSOREBLVRM]. 3. For IMO-types, select [3 EBLVRMCURSOR SET]. For C-types, select [3 EBLVRM]. 4. For IMO-types, select [4 VRM OFFSET]. For C-types, select [8 VRM OFFSET]. 5. Select [LINK EBL] to link the offset EBL is now displayed with the VRM range ring, as indicated in the figure below. 340 330 320 350 000 010 020 030 310 300 Linked VRM1 Linked VRM1 EBL1EBL1 290 280 270 260 250 240 Target 2 Target 2 Target 1 Target 1 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 230 220 EBL origin EBL origin 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 130 140 Select [OFF] to deactivate the link between the offset EBL and the VRM. 6. Close the menu. 1-80 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.36 How to Off-Center the Display Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is set beyond 75%
of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit. Cursor Cursor Put cursor where desired and do appropriate off-center procedure. Off-centered display This feature is available between 0.215 M and 48 NM ranges. The feature is not avail-
able in true motion mode. If the conning position is outside the effective radar display, some parts of the bearing scale are not shown. For details, see section 1.51. Note: When the conditions shown below are met, off-center cannot be canceled. This is because the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than 75% of the effective radar display. Own ship marker is large. The distance between antenna position and conning position is large. Short-distance display range. To cancel the off-center in these cases, select a larger range, then cancel the off-center. 1.36.1 How to off-center the display from the control unit (RCU-014/
RCU-031) With the cursor shown 1. Place the cursor at the position where you wish to move the sweep origin. 2. Press the OFF CENTER key. The sweep origin is now off-centered at the cursor position. 3. To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key again. With the cursor hidden Use the trackball to move the center to the desired location. To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key. The location to which the sweep origin returns depends on the following conditions:
With the radar in transmit mode, or with the radar in standby mode while off-center-
ing is not active: the sweep origin is returned to the center of the screen. With the radar in standby mode while off-centering is active: the sweep origin is re-
turned to the off-center position. 1-81 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.36.2 How to off-center the display from the on-screen menu 1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] menu. 2. Select [OFF CENTER]. The cursor is now displayed with a red surround, indicat-
ing that [OFF CENTER] mode is active. 3. Move the cursor to the position where you wish to move the sweep origin, then left click. The display is now centered at the cursor position. Note: If you need to move off-center position, you can reset the off-center while the cursor is displayed with the red surround by left-clicking the operational dis-
play area. 4. Right-click to cancel [OFF CENTER] mode. 5. To reset the sweep origin to the center of the operational display area, repeat steps 1 to 2, then left-click the operational display area. 1.37 Target Trails The trails of the radar echoes of targets can be displayed in the form of synthetic af-
terglow. Target trails are shown either relative or true and can be sea or ground stabi-
lized. True motion trails require a compass signal, and position and speed data. When the range is changed, trails are continued for targets which were already displayed in the previous range. Newly detected targets have no trail when first detected. 1.37.1 True or relative trails You can display echo trails in true or relative motion. Relative trails show relative movements between targets and own ship. True motion trails present true target movements in accordance with their over-the-ground speeds and courses. True target trails -
Stationary targets are not smeared. Relative target trails -
Targets move relative to own ship, stationary targets are smeared. Note: The indication in the [TRAIL MODE] box changes color based on the trail mode and orientation, as shown in the following table. Trail mode True trails
(TRUE-G or TRUE-S) Color Orientation HEAD UP (relative) STERN UP (relative) CURSOR GYRO (relative) White COURSE UP (relative) NORTH UP (relative) Yellow 1-82
1 2 | User Manual 15 | Users Manual | 5.56 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add other items you want to load. 7. Select the data to load from the [DATA SELECTION] list. A confirmation message appears. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 8. Select [YES] to load the selected data, or select [CANCEL] to cancel the load. If you selected [YES], a progress bar appears to indicate the loading status, fol-
lowed by a confirmation message when the loading is complete. 9. Select [CONFIRM]. 10. Close the window. 1.59.4 How to delete the contents of the internal memory You can delete the contents of each internal memory area. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [5 DELETE INT. MEMORY]. The internal memory areas appear in a two-
page menu. Page 1 Page 2 5. Select the internal memory area you want to delete. A confirmation message ap-
pears. 1-139 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 6. Select [RUN] to delete the area, or [CANCEL] to cancel the deletion. If you selected [RUN], the message "PROCESSING. PLEASE WAIT" appears in a window while the memory is deleted. The message disappears when the delete process ids complete. 7. Close the menu. 1.59.5 How to backup data in the internal memory Data can be automatically backed up when the system starts up, or you can manually back up your data at any time. Note: For automatic backups, the system start-up will take a short while longer than normal, to allow for the data backup. How to automatically backup your data 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [2 AUTO BACKUP]. 5. Select [3 INTERNAL MEMORY]. 6. Select [ON] to activate, or [OFF] to deactivate, the automatic backup. If you selected [ON], the internal memory is backed up each time you turn the sys-
tem on. 7. Close the menu. Note: When auto backup is activated, the system starts the backup process after the start-up warning screen is closed. A message appears while the backup is in progress and the message disappears when the backup is complete. How to manually backup your data 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [3 SAVE BACKUP DATA]. 1-140 5. Select [3 SAVE TO INT. MEMORY]. A confirmation message appears. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 6. Select [RUN] to backup the area, or [CANCEL] to cancel the backup. If you selected [RUN], the message "TRANSFERRING. PLEASE WAIT" appears in a window while the data is backed up and a progress bar indicates the backup progress. The message changes to "TRANSFER COMPLETED" when the back-
up is completed. 7. Select [CONFIRM] to close the window. 1.59.6 How to load backup data from the internal memory 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [4 LOAD BACKUP DATA]. 5. Select [3 LOAD FROM INT. MEMORY]. A confirmation message appears. 6. Select [RUN] to backup the area, or [CANCEL] to cancel the backup. If you selected [RUN], a progress window appears. When the data load is com-
plete, the system restarts automatically. 1-141 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.60 USB Flash Memory (C-types only) Note 1: This equipment is compatible with USB2.0. Note 2: The procedures in this section must be done with the radar in STBY. If the radar is set to transmit, the [FILES] menu is not available. 1.60.1 USB Flash memory connection Connect your flash memory to the USB port on the processor unit. Note: The following figure is for explanatory purposes, with the cover of the processor unit removed. There is no need to remove the cover when connecting a flash memory.
(A) USB port 1.60.2 How to remove the USB flash memory safely CAUTION CAUTION When removing the USB flash memory, only use the method described in this section. Use of any other method may result in malfunction or incorrect operation of the USB and/or this equipment. Note: If this equipment is turned off, steps 1 through 4 (menu operations) are not re-
quired. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [8 REMOVE USB MEMORY]. A confirmation message appears. 4. Select [CONFIRM]. 5. Remove the USB flash memory from the processor unit. 1-142 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.60.3 How to save data to the USB flash memory You can save your temporary data and the internal memory data (tracks, marks/lines, routes/waypoints, settings information, alert/action log and operation log) to a USB flash memory. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [2 SAVE TO USB MEMORY]. The [USB MEMORY RECORDING] window appears. 4. Select an item, then select [YES] to save the item to the USB flash memory. 5. To save other items, repeat step 4 as required. 6. Select [SEL. DATUM]. 7. Select [WGS-48] or [TOKYO] as required. 8. Select the data you want to save from the [DATA SELECTION] section.
[RUN]: Saves the data stored in the temporary memory.
[1:XXXXXXXXXX] though [10:XXXXXXXXXX]: Saves the data stored in the se-
lected internal memory area. (XXXXXXXXXX indicates the file name.) 9. A pop up window appears showing the file name for the saved data. The default name is the date and time at which the data was saved. 10. To change the filename, go to the next step. To keep the default filename, close the menu. 1-143 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 11. Referring to section 1.5.3, enter the desired filename. A confirmation message, similar to the one below, appears. 12. Select [ENTER] to save the data, or select [CANCEL] to cancel the procedure. If you selected [ENTER], a progress window appears to show the save progress. When the save is completed, a message appears. 13. Select [CONFIRM]. 14. Close the menu. 1.60.4 How to load data from the USB memory You can load the data from the USB flash memory, however, this procedure replaces the temporary memory contents with the contents of the USB flash memory. If you want to keep the contents of the internal memory, save the contents before continuing with this procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [5 LOAD FROM INT. MEMORY]. The [INTERNAL MEMORY PLAYBACK]
window appears. 1-144 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 4. Select the item you want to load from the [DATA SELECTION] section of the win-
dow. Note: If you are loading multiple items, load the settings information before any other data. If settings information is loaded together with other data, some, or all, of the non-settings data may not load correctly. 5. Depending on the item selected at step 4, select [ADD], [OVERWRITE] or [NO]
as appropriate.
[ADD]: selected data is added to the temporary data. Temporary data is not overwritten.
[OVERWRITE]: replace (overwrite) the temporary data with the selected data.
[NO]: selected data is not used. Note 1: When [ADD] is selected for [PLAY MARK/TRACK], a limit of 30,000 items applies. When this limit is reached, no more items can be added. Note 2: When [ADD] is selected for [PLAY OWN TRK] or [PLAY OTHER TRK]
and the limit is reached, the oldest items are deleted to make way for new items. For example, if you have 10,000 tracks already saved and add 25,000, the oldest 5,000 tracks from those already saved are deleted. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add other items you want to load. 7. Select [SEL DATUM]. 8. Select [WGS-48] or [TOKYO] as required. 9. Select the data to load from the [DATA SELECTION] list. A confirmation message appears. 10. Select [YES] to load the selected data, or select [CANCEL] to cancel the load. If you selected [YES], a progress bar appears to indicate the loading status, fol-
lowed by a confirmation message when the loading is complete. 11. Select [CONFIRM]. 12. Close the window. 1-145 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.60.5 How to transfer USB data to the internal memory You can save your transfer your USB data to the internal memory. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [6 TRF USB TO INT. MEMORY]. The [TRANSFER USB TO INTERNAL MEMORY] window appears. 4. Select an item, then select [YES] to transfer the item from the USB flash memory. 5. To transfer other items, repeat step 4 as required. Note: Internal memory has the capacity to store the following:
Own Track: 30,000 Marks/Lines: 30,050 Waypoints: 3,500 Routes: 200 Other tracks: 40,000, comprised of:
Consort tracks: 10,000 AIS tracks: 10,000 TT tracks: 10,000 GPS buoy tracks: 10,000 6. Select [SEL. DATUM]. 7. Select [WGS-48] or [TOKYO] as required. 8. Select the data you want to transfer from the [DATA SELECT] section. 9. A pop up window appears showing the file name for the saved data. The default name is the date and time at which the data was saved. 10. To change the filename, go to the next step. To keep the default filename, select go to step 12. 11. Referring to section 1.5.3, enter the desired filename (max. 15 characters). A confirmation message appears. 12. Select [ENTER] to save the data, or select [CANCEL] to cancel the procedure. If you selected [ENTER], a progress window appears to show the save progress. When the save is completed, a message appears. 13. Select [CONFIRM]. 14. Close the menu. 1-146 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.60.6 How to save the backup data to the USB flash memory Data can be automatically backed up when the system starts up, or you can manually back up your data at any time. Note: For automatic backups, the system start-up will take a short while longer than normal, to allow for the data backup. How to automatically backup your data to the USB flash memory 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [2 AUTO BACKUP]. 5. Select [2 USB MEMORY]. 6. Select [ON] to activate, or [OFF] to deactivate, the automatic backup. If you selected [ON], the internal memory is backed up each time you turn the sys-
tem on. 7. Close the menu. Note: When auto backup is activated, the system starts the backup process after the start-up warning screen is closed. A message appears while the backup is in progress and the message disappears when the backup is complete. How to manually backup your data to the USB flash memory 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [3 SAVE BACKUP DATA]. 5. Select [2 SAVE TO USB MEMORY]. A confirmation message appears. 6. Select [RUN] to backup the area, or [CANCEL] to cancel the backup. If you selected [RUN], the message "TRANSFERRING. PLEASE WAIT" appears in a window while the data is backed up and a progress bar indicates the backup progress. The message changes to "TRANSFER COMPLETED" when the back-
up is completed. 7. Select [CONFIRM] to close the window. 1-147 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.60.7 How to load backup data from the USB flash memory 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 4. Select [4 LOAD BACKUP DATA]. 5. Select [2 LOAD FROM USB MEMORY]. A confirmation message appears. 6. Select [RUN] to backup the area, or [CANCEL] to cancel the backup. If you selected [RUN], a progress window appears. When the data load is com-
plete, the system restarts automatically. 1.60.8 How to import data from other equipment You can import data from other compatible equipment into the internal memory. Note: Before importing data, consult your local dealer. 1. Connect the USB with the data you want to import to the USB port on the proces-
sor unit. 2. Open the menu. 3. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [FILES] menu. 5. Select [6 RELAY DATA]. The [RELAY DATA] menu appears. Menu item [8 GD-X80]
covers GD-280, GD-380, GD-680 and GD-280BB. Page 1 Page 2 1-148 6. Select the equipment from which you want to import data. the following figure shows an example of the GD-X80 (CARD) import window. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 7. Select the data you want to import from the [DATA SELECTION] section of the window. A confirmation message appears. Note: Internal memory has the capacity to store the following:
Own Track: 30,000 Marks/Lines: 30,050 Waypoints: 3,500 Routes: 200 Other tracks: 40,000, comprised of:
Consort tracks: 10,000 AIS tracks: 10,000 TT tracks: 10,000 GPS buoy tracks: 10,000 8. Select [RUN] to import the selected data, or select [CANCEL] to cancel the import. If you selected [RUN], the message "TRANSFERRING. PLEASE WAIT" appears while the data is imported up and a progress bar indicates the import progress. The message changes to "TRANSFER COMPLETED" when the import is com-
plete. 9. Select [CONFIRM] to close the window. 1-149 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.61 How to Take a Screenshot The system has an in-built screenshot feature. To use the feature, a SD Card must be inserted in the Processor Unit. If there is no card inserted, the screenshot button on the screen is not active. To take a screenshot of the currently displayed screen, click the screenshot button. Note: The screenshot function can also be as-
signed to a function key. For how to set up the func-
tion keys, see section 1.8 Screenshot button 1-150 2. RADAR OBSERVATION 2.1 General 2.1.1 Minimum range The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the point representing the antenna position. It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang reduction and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture. The IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m, respectively. This series of radars satisfy this requirement. 2.1.2 Maximum range The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and the atmospheric conditions. Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar hori-
zon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6%
because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is given in the follow-
ing equation. D: Radar horizon Optical horizon h 2 h 1 Globe D = 2.2 x ( h1 + h2) where D: radar horizon (nautical miles) h1: antenna height (m) h2: target height (m) For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
Rmax = 2.2 x ( 9 + 16) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs the radar signal). 2-1 2. RADAR OBSERVATION 2.1.3 X-band and S-band In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant differ-
ence between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation condition, an S-
band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar. 2.1.4 Radar resolution There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution and range resolution. Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets that are at the same range and close together. It is pro-
portional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength. The length of the antenna radiator should be selected for a bearing resolution better than 2.5 (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m
(4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet
(3.6 m) or longer. Targets Separate target echoes Horizontal beam width Targets Horizontal beam width Ovelapped target echoes Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets that are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is determined by pulselength only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars. Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an echoing area of 10 m2. Separate target echoes Transmission pulse Targets Ovelapping Transmission pulse Targets Ovelapped target echoes 2-2 2. RADAR OBSERVATION 2.1.5 Bearing accuracy One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a tar-
get can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to the ships heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the target echo at the extreme position on the screen by se-
lecting a suitable range. 2.1.6 Range measurement Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the radar. Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings and the vari-
able range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the screen with a prede-
termined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range to a target. The variable range markers diameter is increased or decreased so that the marker touches the in-
ner edge of the target, allowing the operator to obtain more accurate range measure-
ments. 2.2 False Echoes Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if you under-
stand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below. Multiple echoes Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C SEA control. True echo Target Your ship Multiple echo 2-3 2. RADAR OBSERVATION Sidelobe echoes Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the beam, called sidelobes. If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjust-
ment of the A/C SEA control. Mainlobe (beam) Sidelobe Sidelobe True target Antenna False echoes by sidelobes Virtual image A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen. Target ship Route for direct reflection Your ship True echo Bridge Route for indirect reflection False echo Mirror image of target ship 2-4 2. RADAR OBSERVATION Shadow sectors Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sec-
tor may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be detected. Radar position Wharf and its echo Radar position Shadow sector occurs because wharf is hidden behind ship. Wharf and its echo Shadow sector occurs because obstruction
(like mast) is in path of radar beam. Large ship Size of blind sector depends on size of obstruction and range. 2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) 2.3.1 SART description A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) can be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 s) through the band before be-
ginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 s) through the band back to the starting frequen-
cy. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar dis-
play, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown. When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be interspersed with the orig-
inal line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots. Screen A: When SART is distant Screen B: When SART is close Lines of 12 dots are displayed in concentric arcs. Echo from SART Radar antenna beamwidth 24 NM 1.5 NM Echo from SART Position of SART Your ship position SART mark length Your ship position Position of SART 2-5 2. RADAR OBSERVATION 2.3.2 How to show SART marks on the radar display This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detec-
tion. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condi-
tion. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART marks will en-
large to large arcs, blurring a large part of the screen. Note: The following procedure is not available from FAR-2x58 and FAR-2268DS monitors which are assigned as [SUB] at installation. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [1 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key. 3. Select [7 SART], then press the ENTER MARK key. 4. Select [ON] to show SART marks on the radar display, then press the ENTER MARK key. Select [OFF] to hide SART marks. When the SART function is active, the settings listed in the table on the following page are automatically made to radar functions:
Setting Range Pulselength Echo Stretch Noise Rejector Echo Averaging Interference Rejector Performance Monitor A/C RAIN 5. Close the menu. Changed to 12 NM Long Off Off Off Off Off Off The indication "SART" appears at the top of the screen, in yellow text, when this fea-
ture is active. Be sure to turn this feature off when SART detection is no longer your objective. 2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs SART range errors When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is displayed can be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART. When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position. Radar bandwidth This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges. A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART. 2-6 2. RADAR OBSERVATION Radar sidelobes As the SART is approached, sidelobes from the radar antenna can show the SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it can be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will con-
firm that the SART is near to own ship. Note: SART information excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION. 2.4 RACON A RACON is a radar beacon that emits radar receivable signals in the radar frequency spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general, the RACON sig-
nal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just be-
yond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse coded pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not accurate. RACON signal RACON signal RACON station RACON station Your ship position Your ship position Echoes on the radar screen Echo description 2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) An RTE is a radar transponder mounted on navigation buoys and masts of small crafts to significantly improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or RACON, which are passive, the RTE receives a radar signal, amplifies it and re-transmits it, with the in-
tention of making the target's signal look larger on a radar display. The RTE is avail-
able in X-band and S-band types. 2-7 2. RADAR OBSERVATION 2.6 Solid state radar In Solid State radars, long-range and short-range pictures are mixed before they are displayed on the screen. Due to this mixing process, echoes may be displayed differ-
ently when compared with magnetron radars.
: Short-range
: Long-range Approx. 0.5 NM to 2 NM Approx. 0.5 NM to 2 NM
(depending on the pulse length)
(depending on the pulse length) Range and signal intensity At long-range, even though the Solid State radar has lower transmission power than magnetron radars, the signal intensity is equivalent. At short-range on the other hand, due to the lower transmission power the signal in-
tensity of closer targets (including sea clutter and rain clutter) is reduced. For this reason, when a long-range target enters short-range the signal intensity ap-
pears weaker. False echoes fore and aft of the target At long-range, echoes with a strong reflection may appear with a false echo to their fore and aft. When the target changes direction, the reflection may weaken, causing the false echoes to disappear. You can also reduce the false echoes in these cases by reducing the gain. False echoes Echo 2-8 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.1 Precautions when Using Target Tracking WARNING WARNIN CAUTION CAUTION No one navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew. The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position. Electronic aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense. This TT automatically tracks automatically or manually acquired radar targets and calculates their courses and speeds, indicating them by vectors. Since the data generated by the auto plotter are based on what radar targets are selected, the radar must always be optimally tuned for use with the auto plotter, to ensure required targets will not be lost or unwanted targets such as sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked. A target does not always mean a land-mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels but can imply returns from sea surface and clutter. As the level of clutter changes with environment, the operator should properly adjust the [A/C SEA], [A/C RAIN] and [GAIN]
controls to be sure target echoes are not eliminated from the radar screen. The plotting accuracy and response of this TT meets IMO standards. Tracking accuracy is affected by the following:
Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is required to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change. (The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications.) The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the target. Delay is on the order of 15 - 30 seconds for high relative speed; 30 - 60 seconds for low relative speed. The target tracking and pertinent vector calculation accuracy is influenced by the following:
- Echo intensity
- The range measurement accuracy;
characterized by both random and biased measurement errors.
- The angular measurement accuracy;
characterized by beam shape, target glint and bias errors.
- Radar transmission pulsewidth
- Gyrocompass heading error
- Speed log error
- Curent and wind (set & drift)
- Course change (own ship and target) The data generated by TT, AIS and video plotter are intended for reference only. Refer to official nautical charts for detailed and up-to-date information. 3-1 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.2 TT Controls The control unit has three keys that are used in the target tracking mode. The keys are indicated in the figure below. OFF ON VRM MENU ACQ
ANGE
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL VRM OFF VRM ON NU ACQ
NGE
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL ALERT ACK RCU-014 RCU-031 ACQ: Acquires the selected echo as a target. TARGET DATA: Shows the selected targets data in the information box. TARGET CANCEL: Deactivates tracking for the cursor-selected target. These functions, along with other TT functions, can also be accessed from the [CUR-
SOR] menu (See section 1.7.3). 3.3 How to Show/Hide the TT Symbols You can show/hide the TT symbols to suit your requirements. To hide the symbols, left-click the TT indication in the TTAIS box to show [OFF]. To show the symbols, left-
click the indication to show [AUTO]*, [AUTO/MAN]*, [MAN]*.
*: These TT modes and their settings are described in section 3.4. Click to show/hide the TT symbols Note: The TT mode indication is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change TT settings in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the settings, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the dis-
play mode. 3-2 3.4 How to Select the TT mode 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) This radar can automatically acquire and track a maximum of 100 targets. The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the set-
ting for [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu. A target just acquired automatically is marked with a dashed circle and a vector ap-
pears within one minute to indicate the target's motion trend. If the target is consistent-
ly detected for three minutes, the plotting symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target symbol blinks. Vector At acquisition Within 1 min. after acquisition Stable tracking 3.4.1 How to setup the acquisition method You can set the system to acquire targets automatically, manually, or a combination of automatic and manual. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [6 TT]. For C-types, select [5 TT]. Note: You can also right-click the TT indication in the [TTAIS] box to open the
[TT] menu. 4. Select [2 TT SELECT], then select the acquisition condition. Menu setting Acquisition condition 100 targets manually, auto acquisition not available
[MANUAL 100]
[MANUAL 75 AUTO 25] 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually
[MANUAL 50 AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually
[MANUAL 25 AUTO 75] 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually
[AUTO 100]
100 targets automatically, manual acquisition not available 3-3 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 5. Close the menu. The selected settings change how the TT indication is displayed in the TTAIS box as follows:
TT mode selected
[MANUAL 100]
[MANUAL 75 AUTO 25]
[MANUAL 50 AUTO 50]
[MANUAL 25 AUTO 75]
[AUTO 100]
Indication change
"TT OFF" "TT MAN" "TT OFF"...
"TT OFF" "TT MAN/AUTO" "TT OFF"...
"TT OFF" "TT MAN/AUTO" "TT OFF"...
"TT OFF" "TT MAN/AUTO" "TT OFF"...
"TT OFF" "TT AUTO" "TT OFF"... Note: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets have been ac-
quired, the Alert "TT TARGET FULL(AUTO)" appears in the [Alert] box. 3.4.2 How to manually acquire targets Note: The following procedure requires [2 TGT DATA/ACQ SETTING] on the second page of the [CURSOR] menu to be set as [ANY] or [TT ONLY]. Acquire a target from the Control Unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Use the trackball to place the cursor on the target you want to acquire, then press the ACQ key. Acquire a target by the trackball module 1. When the target to acquire and the AIS symbol overlap one another, right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU]. 2. Select [TT TARGET DATA/ACQ]. 3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire then left-click. Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target should be within 24 NM (or 32 NM, de-
pending on initial setting) from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter. Note 2: You are alerted when the capacity of manual acquisition is 95% and 100%. These alerts are "TT TARGET95%(MAN)" and "TT TARGET FULL(MAN)". If the ca-
pacity is 100% you cannot acquire more targets. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire additional targets manually. Note 3: When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked, the targets may be "swapped". When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come close to each other, one of the two may become a lost target. If this occurs, manual re-acquisition of the lost target may be necessary after the two have separated. Note 4: You can reuse a target number. This is useful when you acquire the wrong target. Drag and drop the symbol onto the correct target. 3.4.3 How to automatically acquire targets Targets are automatically acquired when the TT mode is set to other than [MANUAL 100] and a target enters the acquisition zone (see section 3.14). The maximum track-
ing distance (24 NM, 32 NM or 48 NM*) is set at installation.
*: The maximum track distance of 48 NM is only available for the FAR-2x58 and FAR-
2268DS. 3-4 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.5 How to Enter Own Ship Speed The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW, SOG or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects). Manual input is also possible. For automatic or manual input, see section 1.11. For echo-referenced speed input follow the procedure below. 3.5.1 Echo-referenced speed input The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:
The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar. The vessel has no device (doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) that can measure ship's bow-stern, port-starboard movement. If you select echo-referenced speed, the TT calculates own ship's speed relative to a fixed reference target. The number of targets may be R1, R2 or R3. When a plural of objects are selected, the mean value is used, for stabilization and speed. 1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU]. 2. Select [REF MARK]. The cursor is highlighted to indicate that the reference mark function is active. 3. Place the cursor on a fixed echo (such as an island, etc.) at a range of 0.1 to 24 NM from own ship, to be used as a reference, then left-click. The cursor changes from the highlighted cross to a circle with dashed lines, indicating that the refer-
ence location is now set. See section 3.8 for more information on TT symbols and their attributes. At acquisition Stable tracking The dashed lines of the reference point change to a solid line over time, as shown in the figure above. 4. Repeat step 3 until to place up to three reference points. 5. Right-click to deactivate the reference mark function. 6. Open the menu. 7. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 8. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 9. Select [2 SHIP SPEED]. 10. Select [REF]. 11. Close the menu. It takes approximately one minute for the speed to appear in the own ship information box. When the speed appears, the indication "REF BT" also appears to the right of the speed value. 3-5 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Notes on speed input by reference target Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed. Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed. Relative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is slow, hampering the TT's ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision. Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as ground tracking speed. Do not choose a moving target as a reference target. A mov-
ing target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS, which results in wrong colli-
sion avoidance information. Further, an unstable stationary target produces inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost. On IMO-type radars with AIS in use, echo-referenced speed is shown in gray to in-
dicate they are not available for selection. When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, that reference target mark blinks and the indication "REF TARGET LOST" appears in the alert box. If all reference targets are lost, the speed indication reads "*.*" Select a different ref-
erence target if currently selected one is lost. When all targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the tar-
get-based speed becomes invalid. The speed is indicated as "BTREF" where BT means Bottom Track (speed over ground). For IMO-types only, reference targets can be marked with a vector. This can be done with [REF TARGET VECTOR] on the [TT TARGET] menu. Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true course of targets. Further, own ship speed will be inaccurate. How to cancel echo-referenced speed input 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [3 SPEED]. The [SPEED] menu appears. 5. Select any option, other than [REF]. 6. Close the menu. 3-6 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.6 How to Cancel Target Tracking When the number of tracked targets reaches maximum capacity, the alert box shows
[TT TARGET FULL (MAN)] or [TT TARGET FULL (AUTO)], based on the selected TT mode. No new targets can be acquired until a tracked target is lost or tracking is can-
celed. When this occurs, cancel tracking for non-dangerous targets as required. 3.6.1 How to cancel tracking for individual TT targets Note: The following procedure requires [3 TGT CANCEL SETTING] on the second page of the [CURSOR] menu to be set as [ANY] or [TT ONLY]. Using the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) 1. Place the cursor on the tracked target, or tracked targets data, to cancel. 2. Press the TARGET CANCEL key. Using the CURSOR menu 1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU]. 2. Select [TARGET CANCEL], then left-click. 3. Select the tracked target to cancel, then left-click. 4. Right-click to complete the procedure. 3.6.2 How to cancel tracking for all TT targets Using the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Press and hold the TARGET CANCEL key. Using the menu 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [6 TT]. For C-types, select [5 TT]. 4. Select [3 ALL CANCEL]. 5. Select [YES] to cancel tracking for all TT targets. 6. Close the menu. 3-7 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.7 Lost Target Targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become lost targets. A lost target is shown in the display with a flashing red "". Flashing stops after lost target alert is ac-
knowledged. Further, the alert box shows the indication "TT TARGET LOST" in or-
ange characters and the audible alert sounds. The symbol disappears when the alert is acknowledged. If you are in an area where tracked targets are lost frequently, you may want to disable the lost target alert against tracked targets by maximum range. 3.7.1 How to set the lost target filter You can set the lost target alert to sound against lost targets that are within a specific range. To set the criteria, use the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [6 TT]. For C-types, select [5 TT]. 4. Select [7 TT LOST TGT FILTER]. 5. Select [MAX RANGE]. 6. Select [ON]. The settings can now be adjusted. 7. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the setting as re-
quired, then left-click to apply the setting. 8. Close the menu. Note: Reference targets are not affected by this filter. 3.7.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert The [LOST TARGET] box, located at the bottom-right corner of the screen, enables and disables the lost target alert. This setting is shared for TT and AIS functions. Select the box with the cursor, then left-click to cycle through the settings in the follow-
ing order: [OFF] [FILT] [ALL] [OFF]... OFF Lost target filter setting
[OFF]: Disable the alert.
[FILT]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, excluding filtered targets.
[ALL]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, including filtered targets. Note: The lost target filter setting is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change TT settings in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the settings, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the dis-
play mode. 3-8 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.8 TT Symbols and Attributes The TT symbols used in this equipment are compliant with IEC62288. For details re-
garding the symbols and their meanings, see "TT/AIS symbols" on page AP-34. 3.8.1 How to adjust symbol brilliance Note: Each color scheme (palettes PLT1 to PL4) can be adjusted individually. For how to select a color scheme, see section 1.46.3. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [2 BRILL]. The [BRILL] menu appears. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 5. Select [7 TT SYMBOLS]. The set-
tings are highlighted and can now be adjusted. 6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the de-
sired brilliance, then left-click to ap-
ply the setting. 7. Close the menu. 3.8.2 How to set the symbol color 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the brilliance. 4. For IMO-types, select [2 TTAIS SYMBOL COLOR]. For C-types, select [2 TT SYMBOL]. Note: For IMO-types, symbol color is shared between TT and AIS. 5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click. 6. Close the menu. 3-9 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.8.3 How to set the symbol size (C-types only) C-types radar can show TT symbols in small or large size. You can change the size with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the menu. 5. Select [4 TT SYMBOL SIZE]. 6. Select [SMALL] or [LARGE] as required. 7. Close the menu 3.8.4 How to select a TT symbol (C-type on-
ly) With a C-type radar, you can assign a symbol (other than the standard circle) to TT targets. You can also change the color and naming for the TT symbols. There are 10 preset symbols available.The following figure shows the default presets, in numerical order. How to select a symbol from the presets Place the cursor on the TT symbol you want to change, then spin the scrollwheel. The selected targets symbol changes in numerical order. To change the attributes of each preset, see section 3.8.5. 3-10 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) How to change the attributes assigned to a symbol 1. Place the cursor on the symbol whose attributes you want to change, then right-
click. The editing window appears (either [TT CUSTOM SELECT], or [INPUT TT LA-
BEL]). Press F3 to toggle between the windows. Press F3 to toggle between the two windows. Note: You can also left-click the TT targets data in the information box (see section 3.9.2) to show the editing window. 2. If the [INPUT TT LABEL] window is shown, press F3 to show the [TT CUSTOM SELECT] window. 3. Referring to the following table, select the item you want to edit. Menu item
[LABEL]
Description Assigns a number to the target, other than the pre-assigned TT number. Note 1: The value set here appears in front of the name (as-
signed at [TGT NAME]). If no name is set, only the label ap-
pears with the target. Note 2: If 00 is set as the value, the label does not appear on-
screen.
[PRESET NUMBER] Assign preset attributes to the symbol.
[SMBL COLOR]
[SMBL SHAPE]
[TRACK COLOR]
[TGT NAME]
Note: You can change the symbol color, symbol shape and track color assigned to the preset. Assign a color to the TT symbol. Assign a shape to the TT symbol. Assign a color to the track for the selected target. Assign a name to the target. Note: The software keyboard appears inside the editing win-
dow. See section 1.5.3 for how to use the keyboard. 4. Select [RUN] to apply the changes and close the editing window. 3.8.5 How to change the attributes for a TT symbol preset The attributes for each preset can be customized to suit your preferences. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [5 TT]. 3-11 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 4. Select [5 CUSTOMIZE TT DISPLAY]. The [TT CUSTOM SETTINGS] window ap-
pears. 5. Select [PRESET NO.]. 6. Select the preset number whose attribute you want to change. The settings indi-
cated at [SMBL COLOR], [SMBL SHAPE], [TRK COLOR] and [TGT NAME]
change according to the preset selected. 7. Referring to the following table, select the item you want to edit. Menu item
[SMBL COLOR]
[SMBL SHAPE]
[TRACK COLOR]
[TGT NAME]
Description Change the symbol color for the selected preset. Change the symbol shape for the selected preset. Change the track color for the selected preset. Assign/change the target name. Note: The software keyboard appears inside the editing win-
dow. See section 1.5.3 for how to use the keyboard. 8. Right-click to close the window. 3-12 3.9 How to Display/Remove Target Data 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) The TT mode provides the full functionality of TT as required by the IMO Resolution A.823(19) and IEC 62288, including display of range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA of all tracked targets. The target bearing is shown in relative bearing in the HEAD UP mode and true bearing in the COURSE UP, NORTH UP and True Motion modes, with the suffix "R" (Relative) or "T" (True). The target speed and course are shown as speed over the ground or speed through the water depending on speed source. 3.9.1 TT pop up information The TT pop-up shows abbreviated TT data for the selected TT. Simply put the cursor on the TT symbol to show the pop-up. The following figure shows pop-up examples. C-type IMO-type TT No. Label* Name*
TT No. For C-types, course and speed appear as CRS and SPD respectively.
*: Label and Name appear only when assigned. Current track setting The popup can be enabled or disabled with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL], then select [0 NEXT]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL], then select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [6 TT POP-UP INFO]. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required. 6. Close the menu 3-13 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.9.2 How to show target data in the data display area Place the cursor on a desired tracked target and left-click, or press the ACQ key. The targets symbol is surround with a broken square and the selected TT targets data is shown in the data display area. Note: This feature requires [2 TGT DATA/ACQ SETTING] on the second page of the
[CURSOR] menu to be set as [ANY] or [TT ONLY]. Target No. Label*
Name*
*: Shown for C-types only when
[LABEL] and [TGT NAME] are set in the [TT CUSTOM SELECT] settings window. Description Indication Target No. Label Name BRG RNG T COG T SOG Number assigned by the system to this target. Target numbers which have become vacant are not re-used until the system is restarted, or the system tracks more than 100 targets. Label number assigned to this target (C-types only). Name assigned to this target (C-types only). Bearing from own ship to target in relative (R) or True (T) reference. Range from own ship to target. Relative (R) or True (T) Course Over Ground of target. Displayed as "T CTW" where speed input is set to [LOG(WT)]. Displayed as "R CRS" where speed data is not available. Relative (R) or True (T) Speed Over Ground of target. Displayed as T STW where speed input is set to [LOG(WT)]. Displayed as R SPD where speed data is not available. Closest Point of Approach of target to own ship. Time to CPA of target to own ship. Bow crossing range of target. Bow crossing time of target. CPA*
TCPA*
BCR*
BCT*
*: Not shown for C-types when the following menu settings (see section 1.48) are ap-
plied:
Main menu [7 INFORMATION BOX] [7 TARGET DATA] is set to [5 BOX]. Main menu [7 INFORMATION BOX] [8 DISPLAY TT COORDS] is set to [ON]. When [8 DISPLAY TT COORDS] is set to [ON], these items are replace with the lat-
itude/longitude of the target, as shown in the following example. CPA, TCPA, BCR and BCT are replaced with the lat/lon coordinates for the target. 3-14 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) The number of TT data that can be displayed at one time in the information box de-
pends on your settings for [7 INFORMATION BOX] (see section 1.48). To remove the target data, place the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the TARGET CANCEL key, left-click. The select targets data is removed from the data display area. 3.9.3 How to display, hide and sort the target list The target list provides a comprehensive data display of all TT (and AIS) targets being tracked (up to 1303 targets on total). How to display/hide the target list Select the [TGT LIST] menu item at the bottom-right of the screen, then left-click. The target list appears inside the information box. Target details The following operations are available when the list is open:
Go to next page:
Go back one page:
Go to the top (first) page of Click [0 NEXT]. Click [1 BACK]. Select [1 BACK], then press and hold the left-button. the list:
Go to the last (bottom) Select [0 NEXT], then press and hold the left-button. page of the list:
Refresh the list:
Click [9 REFRESH DATA]. To hide the list, do one of the following:
Place the cursor inside the list, then right-click. Press the MENU key. Left-click the [MENU] box. 3-15 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) How to sort the target list 1. With the target list displayed, place the cursor on the sorting method indication to the right of [SORT] ("CPA" in the example below). The indication is highlighted. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the sort method, referring to the table below, then left-click. Sorting method Filter method Description Sorting method Targets are sorted in order from closest to farthest CPA.
[CPA]
Targets are sorted in order from shortest to longest TCPA.
[TCPA]
Targets are sorted in order from closest to farthest BCR.
[BCR]
[BCT]
Targets are sorted in order from shortest to longest BCT.
[RANGE] Targets are sorted in order from closest to farthest range.
[SPEED]
[NAME]
Targets are sorted in order from fastest to slowest. Targets are sorted in Alphabetical order. Note: Targets with no data are sorted to the back of the list, regardless of the se-
lected sorting method. 3. Set the filter method in the same manner. Filter method
[TT ONLY]
[AIS ONLY]
[DISP FILTER]
[ALL TGT]
Description Show only TT targets. Show only AIS targets. Show only filtered targets. Show all targets (ignore filter settings). 4. Close the menu. 3-16 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.10 Vector Modes Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ships heading (Relative) or North
(True). Note: IMO recommends the use of true vector mode in sea stabilization or relative vector mode for collision avoidance. 3.10.1 Description of vectors Stabilization modes It is important to select the optimum stabilization mode for the radar display. To assess risk of collision the relative motion of a target gives the clearest indication of CPA and may be monitored by observing either the direction of the target's relative trail, or the CPA predicted by the relative vector. By default, relative motion displays relative target trails and true motion displays true target trails. Where true target trails is selected, a sea stabilized display will indicate all targets' motion through the water. A ground sta-
bilized display will indicate all targets' motion over the ground. In coastal, estuarine and river waters where a significant set and drift may be experi-
enced, a sea stabilized display will produce significant target trails from all fixed (sta-
tionary) objects possibly producing an unacceptably high level of clutter and masking. In such circumstances a ground stabilized display may reduce its effect and enable the observer to detect clearly the trails of moving targets, thus enhancing the observ-
er's situational awareness. However, the display should be considered only as an approximation of the course and speed made good over the ground. Among other factors, the accuracy of the ground-stabilization is affected by inaccuracies in speed and heading inputs as well as radar measurement imprecision and will require the display to be readjusted peri-
odically. The information displayed should be interpreted with due regard to these fac-
tors. Note: It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar; the calculation of its true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccu-
rate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or lee-
way. 3-17 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Ground stabilization and sea stabilization Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the page from the menu. Select for ground stabilization or for sea stabilization. The vector mode indica-
tion shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [TRUE-G] or [TRUE-S]. Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems un-
satisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. Note that set and drift should not be used when the radar is displaying AIS targets. True vector In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly entered. In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization
(TRUE-G) and sea stabilization (TRUE-S). The stabilization mode is automatically se-
lected according to speed selection, as shown in the table below. Manual selection is available from the [SPD] menu at the top-right of the screen. Speed selection True vector mode LOG(WT) LOG(WTC) LOG(BT) EPFS(BT) REF(BT) MAN(WT) MAN(WTC) TRUE-S TRUE-G TRUE-G TRUE-G TRUE-G TRUE-S TRUE-G Relative vector Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, naviga-
tional marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted lines in the figure are for explanation only.) TT Buoy TT Current
(Set and drift) Buoy TT Buoy Own Ship Own Ship Own Ship AIS AIS AIS True vectors in ground stabilization True vectors in sea stabilization Relative vectors 3-18 3.10.2 Vector mode and vector length 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Vectors can be displayed in true or relative modes. Vector lengths can be set between 30 seconds and 60 minutes. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision with any target. How to change the vector mode Place the cursor on the vector reference indication in the [Vector] box, then left-click to cycle through the following settings.
[REL] [TRUE-G/TRUE-S] [REL]... Vector mode Vector time How to change the vector time Place the cursor on the vector time indication in the [Vector] box, then left-click to cycle through the following settings.
[6min] [10min] [20min] [30min] [45min] [60min] [30sec] [1min]
[3min] [5min] [6min]... You can also spin the scrollwheel to change the vector time in one-minute increments. Note: When [7 VECTOR TIME LINK] is set to [LINK RANGE], the trail time is also au-
tomatically adjusted as the range changes, to provide a normalized vector. While linked, the vector time indication appears in yellow color. 3.10.3 How to change the vector appearance (C-types only) By default, vectors appear as a dashed line. For C-types, you can show vectors as a solid line with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL], then select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [2 TT VECTOR LINE]. 5. Select [DASHED] or [SOLID] as required. 6. Close the menu 3-19 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.11 Past Position Display The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions of any targets being tracked. A new dot is added every minute (or at other preset time intervals) until the preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted course will not be a straight line. Past position orientation, true or relative, is controlled with [TRAIL MODE] in the
[TRAIL] context menu. To adjust the trail orientation, see section 1.37.1. 3.11.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting in-
terval Select the [PAST POSN] setting, then left-click to cycle through the following settings.
[OFF] [30sec] [1min] [2min] [3min] [6min] [OFF]... When [OFF] is selected, all past position tracks are deleted. OFF PAST POSN setting Note: The [PAST POSN] setting is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change the setting in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the setting, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the display mode. 3.11.2 How to select the number of past position points to be dis-
played 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL], then select [0 NEXT]. 4. For IMO-types, select [5 TTAIS PAST POSN POINTS]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS PAST POSN POINTS]. 5. Select [5] or [10] as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 3-20 3.11.3 How to change the color of TT tracks (C-types only) You can change the color of the TT tracks with the following procedure. 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. Select [3 TT SYMBOL COLOR]. 5. Select the desired color you want to show the TT tracks in. 6. Close the menu. 3.12 Set and Drift Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in 0.1-de-
gree steps. Drift, also known as Rate, or the speed of the current, can also be en-
tered manually in 0.1-knot steps. When course through water and speed through water are available, activate set and drift to get course over ground and speed over ground. Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and tar-
get data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information. These values are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors. To enter set and drift do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX]. 3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO]. 4. Select [3 SPEED]. The [SPEED] menu appears. Note: You can also access the [SPEED] menu from the on-screen box. Place the cursor on the [SPD ] indication in the speed box at the top-right of the screen, then right-click. 5. Select [4 SET DRIFT]. 6. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key. The setting can now be adjusted and [SET] is selected. 7. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate setting (Setting range: 000.0 to 359.9), then left-click. The [DRIFT] setting is now selected. 8. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate setting (Setting range: 00.0kn to 19.9kn), then left-click. 9. Close the menu. Note 1: Set and drift are available when using manually input speed, speed through the water. The speed source is shown as "WTC" (Water Tracking Count). Note 2: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness. Note 3: When speed data input from the position sensor is valid, set and drift are not adjustable. 3-21 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.13 Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions. The TT continuously monitors the pre-
dicted range at the Closest Point of Ap-
proach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each TT. When the pre-
dicted CPA of any TT becomes smaller than a preset CPA range and its predict-
ed TCPA less than a preset TCPA limit, the audio alarm sounds and "TT DAN-
GER OF COLLISION" appears (in red, flashing) in the Alert Box. In addition, the symbol of the offending TT is red and flashes together with its vector. CAUTION CPA/TCPA Alarm The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision.The navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual lookout for avoiding collisions, whether or not the radar or other plotting aid is in use. This feature, when used correctly, helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting you to threatening targets. It is important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar con-
trols are properly adjusted. CPA and TCPA ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, ton-
nage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship. The reference point for CPA and TCPA calculation can be selected from antenna po-
sition or conning position. For further details, see section 1.51. 3.13.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA ranges CPA and TCPA ranges can be adjusted from the appropriate indication in the [TT] box. 1. Left-click the [CPA/TCPA] indication to activate the feature. CPA setting Left-click here to activate/deactivate the CPA/TCPA settings. TCPA setting Note: The [CPA/TCPA] indication is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change the setting in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the setting, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the display mode. 2. Place the cursor on the indication you wish to adjust. 3. Left-click, or spin the scrollwheel, to adjust the settings as required. The settings options are outlined in the table below. Indication CPA TCPA Method Left-click Scrollwheel Left-click Scrollwheel Settings options 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (NM) 0.1 to 20; 0 to 10 in 0.1 NM increments, 1 NM increments thereafter 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15 (minutes) 1 to 60 minutes in 1-minute increments 3-22 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.13.2 How to acknowledge the TT collision alarm Press the ALARM ACK (RCU-014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-031) key on the control unit, or select the [ALERT] box with the trackball then left-click to acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer. The alert "TT DANGER OF COLLISION" remains in the Alert Box until the dangerous situation is gone or you intentionally terminate target tracking. The symbol and vector stop flashing and are displayed in a solid red color. Note that when the "TT DANGER OF COLLISION" alarm is generated the AIS display is automatically turned on. 3.14 Acquisition Zone The acquisition zone functions both to alert you targets in a specific area and acts as an automatic acquisition area when automatic target acquisition is active. Any targets entering the zone will be automatically acquired. When a target enters an acquisition zone, the buzzer sounds and the indication "TT NEW TARGET" (or "AIS NEW TARGET") appears (in yellow-orange) in the Alert Box. The symbol of the offending target is red and flashing. Further, the AIS display is au-
tomatically turned on if it is off. There are two types of acquisition zones available, arc and polygon, however, AZ1 can only be set as an arc. 3.14.1 How to enable the acquisition zones 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE]. 4. Select [2 AZ/ALR SELECT]. 5. Select [ACQUISITION ZONE]. The [ACQUISITION ZONE] box title changes to read "AZ". Title bar shows AZ when
[ACQUISITION ZONE] is selected. AZ zone settings 6. Close the menu. AZ target settings 3-23 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.14.2 How to activate the first acquisition zone (AZ1) The No. 1 acquisition zone is available between 3 NM and 6 NM and can have a width between 0.5 NM and 1 NM. The TT/AIS acquisition zones lines are white and dashed so as to distinguish them from the radar target alarm. The procedure below shows how to set AZ1, using the example at the bottom of the page. 1. Place the cursor on the [1:] indication at the bottom-right of the screen, then left-click. The AZ zone setting reads "1: SET" and the cursor moves inside the operational display area. 2. Place the cursor on the acquisition zone starting point (A in the figure to the right), then left-click. 3. Place the cursor on the acquisition zone end point (B in the figure to the right), then left-click. The AZ zone setting now reads "1: WORK". A 0.5 to 1 NM 0.5 to 1 NM B Target in acquisition zone is red and flashing 3.14.3 How to set a polygon acquisition zone (AZ2) Note: This procedure is not available if [5 AZ POLYGON] in the [ACQUISITION ZONE] menu is set to [OFF]. The No. 2 acquisition zone can be set anywhere when the No. 1 zone is already in use. Polygon zones must have at least three points, and may have a total of 10 points. To set a polygon shaped acquisition zone:
1. Place the cursor on the [2:] indication at the bottom-right of the screen, then left-
click. The AZ zone setting reads "2: SET" and the cursor moves inside the oper-
ational display area. 2. Place the cursor on the acquisition zone starting point, then left-click. 3. Place the cursor on the second point, then left-click. 4. Repeat step 3 as required to set the remaining points of the polygon zone. 5. Right-click to complete the acquisition zone set up. Note: If 10 points are entered, the zone is automatically completed. Notes on acquisition zones If you wish to create an acquisition zone having a 360-degree coverage around own ship, set point B in almost the same direction (approx. 3) as point A. The default acquisition zone is fan shaped. It can also be a polygon having 3-10 points. If both acquisition zones are displayed, a maximum of four polygon points are shown. TT and AIS are automatically set to TT=AUTO MAN and AIS=DISP, respectively, when an AZ is activated in the following conditions:
TT: TT=OFF or TT=MANUAL 100 AIS:AIS FUNC=OFF or AIS DISP=OFF 3-24 3.14.4 How to sleep/deactivate an acquisition zone 1. Select the appropriate [AZ] box. 2. Sleep, or deactivate, the acquisition zone, as explained below:
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Sleeping the acquisition zone Left-click the box several times until the indication shows "SLEEP". Deactivating the acquisition zone Highlight the box with the cursor, the press and hold the left-button until the AZ box becomes blank. Note: When both zones ([1:] and [2:]) are active, [2:] must be deactivated before
[1:] can be deactivated. If [1:] and [2:] are active when you try to deactivate [2:], the system releases an audible alert and shows the message "DELETE AZ2 FIRST". 3.14.5 How to acknowledge the acquisition zone alert You can acknowledge the alert, and silence the buzzer, with one of the following meth-
ods:
Press the ALARM ACK (RCU-014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-031) key;
Highlight the [ALERT] box with the cursor, then left-click;
Highlight the alert in the [ALERT LIST], then left-click. 3.14.6 How to select the target type to acquire (C-types only) You can set the radar to acquire on TT targets, or both AIS and TT targets. To select the target type to acquire, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE]. 4. Select [3 TARGET TYPE TO ACQUIRE]. 5. Select [TT AND AIS] or [TT ONLY] as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 3.14.7 How to change the acquisition zone reference The acquisition zone can be referenced to heading or North using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE]. 4. Select [4 AZ STABILIZATION]. 5. Select [STAB HDG] to reference heading, or [STAB NORTH] to reference North, then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Close the menu. 3-25 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.14.8 How to set acquisition zone shape and stabilization The shape of the No. 2 acquisition zone can be a sector or a polygon having up to 10 points. (The shape of the No.1 acquisition zone is always a sector.) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE]. 4. Select [5 AZ POLYGON]. 5. Select the appropriate setting. Setting
[OFF]
Description Acquisition zone is a sector; number of points is limited to four. Stabilized against land. Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against ground. Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against heading.
[STAB GND]
[STAB HDG]
[STAB NORTH] Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against North.
[AROUND CHECK AREA]*
Sets a check area around own ship. See the topic on the follow-
ing page for details and settings.
*: Shown only for C-types. 6. Close the menu. How to set the check area around own ship (C-type only) When [5 AZ POLYGON] is set to [AROUND CHECK AREA], the area details must be set. To setup the check area, do the following procedure. This procedure is abbrevi-
ated, and takes into consideration that [AROUND CHECK AREA] is selected. 1. Select [6 CHECK AREA SETTING]. 2. Referring to the figure below, use the number keys to enter a distance for [PORT],
[STBD], [BOW] and [STERN]. You can also spin the scrollwheel, then left-click to enter these values.
[BOW]
[BOW]
setting setting
[PORT]
[PORT]
setting setting Own ship
[STBD]
[STBD]
setting setting
[STERN]
[STERN]
setting setting The area shown in gray is the check area. The available setting range for all four values is [0.0NM] to [16.0NM]. The default setting for all four values is [1.0NM]. 3-26 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.15 Trial Maneuvers (IMO-types only) The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect of own ship's movement against all tracked targets, without interrupting the updating of target information. It is available for use with the TT and AIS functions. For more accurate results, use sea stabilization
(water tracking). 3.15.1 Types of trial maneuvers There are two types of trial maneuvers: dynamic and static. Dynamic trial maneuver A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and own ship. You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain "delay time." Assuming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and courses, the targets' and own ship's future movements are simulated in 0.5-
second increments indicating their predicted positions in 30-second intervals as illustrated in the right figure. Delay time = 2 m 30 s. Current position The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when own ship will actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should therefore take into consid-
eration own ship's maneuvering characteris-
tics such as rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly important on large vessels. Regardless of how much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and ends in a minute. In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a ma-
neuver) for a delay time of 2:30 and alters speed and course until operator-specified intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this example). 3-27 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Static trial maneuver The static trial maneuver shows the relationship between your ship and tracked tar-
gets at the completion of the trial maneuver. The expected position of TTs at the end of the trial maneuver are shown on the display. By shortening and extending the trial time you can find the safe time to make a ma-
neuver. Thus, the static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result immediately. Position of target B at end of trial maneuver Course and speed changes completed; position where course and speed are changed Position of target A at end of trial maneuver B Delay time Current position A T 3.15.2 How to perform a trial maneuver To set up and perform a trial maneuver, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [3 TRIAL MANEUVER]. 4. Select [2 TRIAL MANEUVER]. 5. Select [OFF], [STATIC] or [DYNAMIC] as appropriate. 6. Select [3 SPEED RATE]. 7. Set the upper and lower speed rate as re-
quired. 8. Select [4 TRIAL TURN RATE]. 9. Set the upper and lower turn rate for the trial as required. Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided. This is done to provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship's speeds and turn rates. 3-28 Setting example for [3 TRIAL SPEED RATE]
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 5 kn, 0.15 kn/s 10 kn, 0.45 kn/s 0.45 kn/s
(Second setting) 0.15 kn/s
(First setting) e t a r d e e p s l a i r T 5 kn
(First setting) 10 kn
(Second setting) Trial maneuver speed Setting example for [4 TRIAL TURN RATE]
5 kn, 1.5 /s 10 kn, 4.5 /s e t a r n r u t l a i r T 4.5 /s
(Second setting) 1.5 /s
(First setting) 5 kn
(First setting) 10 kn
(Second setting) Trial maneuver speed 10. Close the menu 11. Highlight the [TRIAL] status indication in the [TRIAL] box, then left-click. The indi-
cation changes from "OFF" to "SET" and the trial maneuver settings appear.
[DYNAMIC] mode Click here
[STATIC] mode Trial maneuver status Trial maneuver speed Trial maneuver mode. S: Static; D: Dynamic Trial maneuver course and reference Delay time Note: The initial indications for course and speed are derived from own ships cur-
rent course and speed at the time when the trial maneuver set up starts. 12. Select the trial maneuver course and reference indication, then left-click. 13. Spin the scrollwheel to set the course, then left-click. The reference is not changeable here. 14. Set the speed in the same manner as the course. 3-29 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 15. Select the delay time indication, then left-click. 16. Spin the scrollwheel to set the amount of delay. This is the time after which own ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change the delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. The time indication depends on trial type:
[DYNAMIC]: The position of your ship and TTs is displayed every 30 seconds and updating occurs every 0.5 seconds.
[STATIC]: The position of your ship and TTs when set course and speed are reached are displayed. Put the cursor in the Trial time indication and roll the scroll-
wheel. Increase or decrease the time to get a safe maneuver. If a maneuver is un-
safe, change speed, course and delay until it is safe. 17. Highlight the [TRIAL] status indication, then left-click. The indication changes from
"SET" to show a timer for the trial maneuver and the maneuver begins. The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the screen. The time appears at the top-right position on the display. If any TT is predicted to be on a collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset CPA/
TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol flashes. If this happens, change own ship's tri-
al speed, course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver. 3.15.3 How to stop the trial maneuver You can stop the maneuver at any time by placing the cursor on the [TRIAL] status indication, then press and hold the left mouse button until "OFF" is shown. When [DYNAMIC] is selected as the maneuver type, the maneuver automatically stops when the trial timer reaches 60 minutes. When [STATIC] is selected as the maneuver type, the maneuver automatically stops when there is no operation of the [TRIAL] box for more than one minute. 3-30 3.16 TT System Messages There are four main reasons the TT may trigger the audio and visual alerts:
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Collision alarm Acquisition zone alert Lost target alert Target capacity You can acknowledge visual alerts and silence the audio alerts with one of the follow-
ing methods:
Press the ALARM ACK (RCU-014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-031) key Click the [ALERT] box, at the bottom-right of the screen. Click the alert in the [ALERT LIST]. Meaning Action required Alert message TT DANGER OF COLLISION TT NEW TARGET TT TARGET LOST REF TARGET LOST TT TARGET FULL (AUTO) or
(MAN) TT TARGET 95%
(AUTO) or (MAN) Priority Alarm A tracked target is on collision course with your vessel. Warning Tracked target has entered an ac-
quisition zone. The tracked tar-
get's symbol is red and flashing. Warning When the system detects a loss of a tracked target, the lost tracked target symbol appears in red and flashes. At the same time, an au-
dio alert is produced for one sec-
ond. The lost target mark disappears from the screen after the lost target alert is acknowl-
edged. Warning When the system detects a loss of a reference target, the target sym-
bol turns red and flashes. At the same time, an audio alert is pro-
duced for one second. The refer-
ence target mark disappears from the screen after the reference tar-
get alarm is acknowledged. Warning Appears when capacity for auto-
matically (manually) acquired tar-
gets is full. Appears when capacity for auto-
matically (manually) tracked tar-
gets is 95% full. Caution Take evasive action or termi-
nate tracking of TT. Confirm the tracked target, then press the ALARM ACK (RCU-
014) or ALERT ACK (RCU-
031) key. Confirm the lost target, reac-
quire if necessary. To continue using a referenced target for speed input, select an-
other tracked target. To continue acquiring targets, cancel tracking for unnecessary targets. 3-31 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.17 TT Simulation Mode You can simulate the risk of a collision by using the TT simulation mode. This function can be used for familiarization training for your crew. The simulation can be terminated at any time by pressing the STBY TX key. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [7 TESTS]. 4. Select [4 TT SIMULATION MODE]. The normal operation is suspended then three simulated targets appear on the dis-
play. The indication "S" appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the sim-
ulation mode. The simulation may be terminated any time by going to the STBY mode. Three simulated targets move as the following table. The simulated target is automat-
ically generated with the relative movement in the following table based on own ship's movement at the start of simulation mode. Note: If own ship moves after the start of simulation mode, the movement of the sim-
ulated target is not matched with the values in the following table. Range (R) Bearing (R) Speed (R) Course (R) CPA TCPA Target 01 Target 02 Target 03 9.5 NM 1.1 NM 9.3 NM 270.0 333.0 45.0 20.0 kn 10.2 kn 19.9 kn 90.0 90.2 225.1 0.0 NM 28.5 min 1.0 NM 2.9 min 0.0 NM 28.0 min 03 01 02 S Place the cursor on a target, then press the ACQ key to display the target data. Acquire the simulated targets after the TT simulation mode is performed. The tracking state changes from unstable to stable and the vector appears. You can simulate the movement of each function with changing true/relative vector, stabilization through the water/over the ground, range or length of vector. Repeat the check for all targets. 3-32
1 2 | User Manual 16 | Users Manual | 5.80 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
3.18 Criteria for Tracking Target Selection 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes that are less than this dimension, are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small cir-
cles superimposed over the video echo. When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with the International Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (IMO TT) requirements, an indica-
tion of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TTs comply with these requirements. Acquisition and tracking criteria A target which is hit by five consecutive radar pulses, is detected as a radar echo. Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball.Automat-
ic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5-7 times con-
tinuously depending upon the congestion. Tracking is achieved the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10 consecutive scans, whether acquired au-
tomatically or manually. Required tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3, 6, 12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale has been changed. Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become lost targets. Quantization The entire picture is converted to a digital from called Quantized Video. A sweep range is divided into small segments and each range element is1 if there is radar echo return above a threshold level, or 0 if there is no return. The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the an-
tenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1s indicating an echo presence at the exact same range, a target start is initiated. Since receiver noise is random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an echo. The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet and most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the discrimi-
nator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular extent sub-
tended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a map of the area. This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship-sized echoes beyond the closest coast outline. Five consecutive scans of coastal outline are re-
tained in memory to allow for signal variation. All smaller echoes are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise range and bearing co-ordinates of each echo on every scan. This range/bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan for consistency. When it is deter-
mined to be as consistent as a real target, automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target. 3-33 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ships course and speed. The re-
sulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked targets. This process is updated continually for each target on every scan of the radar. Qualitative description of tracking error The FURUNO TT's accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards. Own ship maneuvers For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than 150/minute, depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets that lasts for a min-
ute or two then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy. Other ship maneuvers Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds at low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag, but accuracy recovers quickly. 3.19 Factors Affecting Target Tracking Sea returns If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data. Rain and snow Rain clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the rain clutter control to suppress the clutter. If it is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the interference rejector on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acqui-
sition. Accuracy can be affected. Low clouds Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the rain clutter control. Non-synchronous emissions No effect. Low gain Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at long distance. The TT display will be missing on one or more targets that could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were increased. The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined. Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automat-
ic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously. 3-34 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Tracking continues if a return echo is received at least once in nine antenna rotations. However, the fewer the return echoes the lower the accuracy. If no return echo is re-
ceived within nine antenna rotations the target is declared a lost target. Second trace echoes When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such long ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse. This gives an incorrect range indication. Second- and third-trace echoes can be tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but tar-
get course and speed data will be in error. Blind and shadow sectors Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard the ship, for example, funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of some targets. The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone and again present normal radar echo. The an-
gular width and bearing of any shadow sector should be determined for their influence on the radar. In certain cases false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system to acquire, track, and vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided. Indirect echoes A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received as re-
flection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two or more echoes on the display, each at a different range. The TT system can acquire and track a false echo if it is detected in five consecutive scans. Reduction in radar gain can eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be reduced. Radar interference If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral "dotting"
and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector can clear the display. Delay of sensor input If the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal is too slow, error in target bearing occurs when own ship turns. To prevent this error, the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal must be as indicated in the System Configuration drawings. 3-35 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) This page is intentionally left blank. 3-36 4. AIS OPERATION An AIS transponder can be connected to this radar to overlay AIS targets on the radar display. The radar can store up to 1,200 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this buffer becomes full of AIS targets, the Alert "AIS CAPACITY FULL" is generated to alert you to a full storage buffer. The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed Over the Ground (SOG) and Course Over the Ground (COG). The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc. The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets. This radar can activate 50 AIS targets. The Alert "ACTIVE AIS FULL" is generated when 50 AIS targets are activated. This radar can display a maximum of 350 AIS targets. The Alert "AIS DISPLAY FULL"
is generated when 350 AIS targets, which includes both activated and sleeping tar-
gets, are displayed. The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the radar defines which AIS targets are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge a lost target alert, the corresponding AIS symbol will be removed from the display. Type of Ship Class A: Navigation status is anchor or not under command or moored or aground, and SOG 3kn Class A: Navigation status is anchor or not under command or moored or aground, and SOG > 3kn Class A: 0kn SOG < 14kn Class A: 14kn SOG 23kn Class A: SOG > 23kn Class B: CS SOG 2kn Class B: CS SOG > 2kn Class B: SO 0 kn SOG 2kn Class B: SO 2 kn < SOG < 14kn Class B: SO 14 kn SOG 23kn Class B: SO SOG > 23kn Class A and Class B: no SOG available AIS SAR aircraft AIS aid to navigation AIS base station AIS search and rescue transponder IMO nominal reporting interval 3 min Lost target indication
(reporting interval >) 10 min 10 s 10 s 6 s 2 s 3 min 30 s 3 min 30 s 15 s 5 s N/A 10 s 3 min 10 s N/A 50 s 50 s 30 s 10 s 10 min 150 s 10 min 150 s 75 s 25 s 10 min 50 s 10 min 50 s 10 min An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either a Class A or Class B AIS. Additionally, the AIS transponder receives messages from ships and non-ships (AIS SAR aircraft, AIS aid to navigation, AIS base station, and AIS search and rescue transmitter). 4-1 4. AIS OPERATION There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets, and of those only a few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the radar display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not active (="sleeping"). Such sleeping targets are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and change it from sleeping to active (see section 4.5 and section 4.6), or filter the targets to display on-
screen (see section 4.4). Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle with speed vector, headline, ROT indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active AIS targets and change their status to sleeping. An indication of AIS target activated capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When 95% of 50 targets are activated, the Alert "ACTIVE AIS 95%" appears. When 50 targets are activated, the Alert "ACTIVE AIS FULL" appears. Sleep any unnecessary AIS targets to allow acquisition of new targets. An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When 95% of 350 targets are displayed, the Alert "AIS DISPLAY 95%" appears. When 350 targets are displayed, the Alert "AIS DISPLAY FULL" appears. An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached. The Alert "AIS CAPACITY FULL" appears when 1,200 targets are in the storage buffer. When capacity-related AIS alerts occur, you can reduce the number of AIS targets to display from [AIS DISP FILTER] in the [AIS] menu. See section 4.4. This radar generates AIS-related alerts. These are Alert "AIS DANGER OF COLLI-
SION" and Alert "AIS TARGET LOST". Only active AIS targets generate alerts. The op-
erator can activate or sleep AIS target alerts as desired. The feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets that need supervision. This radar further eases the task of the operator by automatically changing non-active targets to active targets, if their CPA and TCPA are within a preset limit. 4.1 Controls for AIS The control unit has three keys that are used in the AIS mode. The keys are indicated in the figure below. OFF ON VRM MENU ACQ
ANGE
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL VRM OFF VRM ON NU ACQ
NGE
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL ALERT ACK RCU-014 RCU-031 TARGET DATA: Shows the selected targets data in the information box. If the tar-
get is sleeping, activates the target. TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps the cursor-selected target. These functions, along with other AIS functions, can also be accessed from the [CUR-
SOR] menu (See section 1.7.3). 4-2 4.2 How to Select the AIS Display Mode AIS display mode 4. AIS OPERATION
[DISP OFF]: AIS symbols are hidden.
[DISP FILT]: Only filtered AIS targets are displayed.
[DISP ALL]: All AIS symbols are displayed. To disable the AIS function, put the cursor on the AIS display mode indication, then long right-click. The AIS display mode indication shows [FUNC OFF] when the AIS function is disabled. Note: The AIS mode indication is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change AIS settings in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the settings, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the dis-
play mode. 4.3 AIS Symbols and Their Meanings When the AIS display is active, each AIS target is marked with a symbol that indicates the targets status. For the meaning of each AIS symbol, see "TT/AIS symbols" on page AP-34. Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is de-
activated. When the AIS is activated again, symbols are immediately displayed. Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased and the screen is redrawn after the heading is changed in the HEAD UP mode. Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the message "AIS COM ERROR" appears in the Alert Box. Check connection with the AIS transponder. When the AIS function is disabled: Above message is prioritized as a Caution level alert. When the AIS function is active: Above message is prioritized as a Warning level alert. 4-3 4. AIS OPERATION 4.4 How to Use the AIS Display Filter If there are too many AIS targets on the screen you may wish to remove unnecessary ones. You can remove sleeping targets class A/B by distance from own ship, speed and class. For example, you might want to remove slow moving targets, as they nor-
mally do not require close monitoring. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [4 AIS]. Current display filter settings appear here Note: You can also right-click the AIS indication in the [TTAIS] box to open the
[TT] menu. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 5. Select [2 AIS DISP FILTER]. 4-4 6. Referring to the table below, select the appropriate filter. 4. AIS OPERATION Filter type
[MAX RANGE]
[MIN SHIP SPEED]
Definition Any sleeping AIS targets class A/B beyond the range set here will not be shown. Any sleeping AIS targets class A/B slower than this set-
ting will not be shown. Select [ON] to remove sleeping AIS targets class B. Select [ON] to remove the BASE STATION symbol.
[EXCEPT CLASS B]*
[EXCEPT BASE STATION]
[EXCEPT PHYSICAL ATON] Select [ON] to remove the AIS PHYSICAL ATON sym-
[EXCEPT VIRTUAL ATON]
bol. Select [ON] to remove the AIS VIRTUAL ATON symbol.
*: This menu item appears only on C-type radars. 7. Do one of the following depending on your selection at step 6.
[MAX RANGE]: Select [ON], spin the scrollwheel to set the maximum range (00 to 99 N), then click to confirm selection.
[MIN SHIP SPEED]: Select [ON], spin the scrollwheel to set the minimum speed
(0.0 to 9.9 kn), then click to confirm selection.
[EXCEPT CLASS B], [EXCEPT BASE STATION], [EXCEPT PHYSICAL ATON], [EXCEPT VIRTUAL ATON]: Select [ON] to hide the corresponding AIS target. 8. Close the menu. Set the AIS display mode to [DISP FILT] to show only the AIS symbols selected for display on the [AIS DISP FILTER] menu. Note: This function is not available for an activated target. 4.5 How to Activate AIS Targets When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, that targets course and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by monitoring the vector. Sleeping targets within an acquisition zone are automatically changed to activated tar-
gets and are colored red. See section 3.14 for how to use acquisition zones. 4.5.1 How to activate specific targets manually Note: Enable target data and acquisition beforehand. Right click to show the [CURSOR] menu[0 NEXT][TGT DATA/ACQ SET-
TING][ANY] or [AIS ONLY]. Activate an AIS target from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Put the cursor on the symbol of the AIS target to activate, then press the TARGET DATA key. 4-5 4. AIS OPERATION Activate a AIS target with the trackball Put the cursor on the symbol of the AIS target to activate, then click. SOG (Speed Over Ground) and COG
(Course Over Ground) vector *1
*1 Vector shows STW (Speed Thru Water) and CTW (Course Thru Water) when water tracking mode is selected at the radar. Turning direction (ROT) Heading line *2
*2 If there is no heading data available, the heading line is not displayed. 4.5.2 How to set the AIS auto activate function You can limit the function of the AIS auto activate function by distance from own ship, ship's speed, ship class, and ship's length. How to set the AIS auto activate function 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [9 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] to show the [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] menu. 5. Referring to the table below, select the appropriate filter, then left-click. Filter type
[MAX RANGE]
[MIN SHIP SPEED]
[EXCEPT CLASS B]
Definition Any AIS targets beyond the range set here will not be automat-
ically activated. Any AIS targets slower than this setting will not be automatical-
ly activated. Select [ON] to prevent activation of AIS targets class B. 6. Do one of the following depending on your selection at step 5.
[MAX RANGE]: Select [ON], spin the scrollwheel to set the maximum range (00 to 99 N), then click to confirm selection.
[MIN SHIP SPEED]: Select [ON], spin the scrollwheel to set the minimum speed
(0.0 to 9.9 kn), then click to confirm selection.
[EXCEPT CLASS B], [EXCEPT BASE STATION], [EXCEPT PHYSICAL ATON], [EXCEPT VIRTUAL ATON]: Select [ON] to hide the corresponding AIS target. 7. Close the menu. 4-6 How to enable/disable the AIS auto activate function Use the [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] box at the bottom right corner to enable or disable the AIS auto activate function. 4. AIS OPERATION OFF OFF CPA auto-activate setting Note: The AIS CPA setting is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change the setting in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the setting, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the display mode. 1. Place the cursor on the [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] box, then left-click display to cy-
cle through the auto activate settings. Filter type Definition
[OFF]
[AUTO ACT FILT] Activation against AIS targets which meet the following criteria:
AIS target that meets the criteria set with Disable the AIS auto activate function.
[CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] on the [TTAIS] menu. CPA or TCPA of an AIS target is smaller than that set in section 3.13.
[AUTO ACT ALL]
Activation against AIS targets whose CPA or TCPA is less than set in section 3.13 4.6 How to Sleep AIS Targets You can sleep an AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with radar echoes and TTs, which might prevent important radar and AIS displays from being identified. Note: Targets that have been activated automatically and dangerous targets cannot be slept. 4.6.1 How to sleep individual AIS targets Note: Enable target data and acquisition beforehand. Right click to show the CURSOR menu[0 NEXT][TGT DATA/ACQ SET-
TING][ANY] or [AIS ONLY]. Sleep a AIS target from the control unit (RCU-014/RCU-031) Place the cursor on the symbol of the AIS target to sleep, then press the TARGET CANCEL key. Sleep a AIS target with the trackball 1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click. The [CUR-
SOR] menu appears. 2. Select [TARGET CANCEL]. 3. Place the cursor on the symbol of the AIS target to sleep, then click. 4-7 4. AIS OPERATION 4.6.2 How to sleep all AIS targets 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [5 AIS]. 4. Select [2 SLEEP ALL TARGETS]. 5. Select [YES] or [NO] as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 4.7 How to Set Up For a Voyage At the start of a voyage, following five items must be input from the [VOYAGE DATA]
menu: navigational status, ETA, destination, draught and crew. 4.7.1 How to access the [VOYAGE DATA] menu There are two methods by which you can access the [VOYAGE DATA] menu: from the InstantAccess bar, or from the menu. The following procedure shows the menu method. If you click the [OWN AIS] button on the lower half of the InstantAccess bar, skip to step 5 in the below procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [5 AIS]. 4. Select [6 VOYAGE DATA]. 5. Select [2 NAV STATUS]. 6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the navigation status number, then left-click. Nav Status No. 00 01 02 03 04 Meaning UNDERWAY USING ENGINE AT ANCHOR NOT UNDER COMMAND RESTRICTED MANEUVERABILITY CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT Continued on following page 4-8 4. AIS OPERATION Nav Status No. Meaning 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Continued from previous page MOORED (DEFAULT) AGROUND ENGAGED IN FISHING UNDER WAY SAILING RESERVED FOR HIGH SPEED CRAFT (HSC) RESERVED FOR WING IN GROUND
(WIG, FOR EXAMPLE, HYDROFOIL) POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL (AHEAD/ASTERN) POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL (AHEAD/ALONGSIDE) RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SART ACTIVE UNDEFINED 7. Select [3 ETA]. 8. Spin the scrollwheel to set the estimated day of the month to arrive, then left-click. Currently selected digit is highlighted by the cursor. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the day. Left-click to move to the next digit. 9. Select [4 DESTINATION], then left-click. The software keyboard appears. 10. Use the trackball to highlight a letter or digit on the software keyboard, then left-
click. Repeat until the destination name is entered. (Max. 20 characters) 11. Use the trackball to highlight [END] on the software keyboard, then left-click. 12. Spin the scrollwheel to assign a destination number (1 to 10) to the destination en-
tered at step 9, then left-click. The next time you use this place as your destination, simply select the corresponding destination number. 13. Select [5 DRAUGHT]. 14. Spin the scrollwheel to set the ships draught (0.0 to 25.5 m), then left-click. 15. Select [6 PERSONS]. 16. Spin the scrollwheel to set the number of people on-board (0000 to 8191), then left-click. 17. Close the menu. 4-9 4. AIS OPERATION 4.8 How to Display AIS Target Data You can display an AIS targets data by selecting it on the display, when the AIS func-
tion is set for [DISP FILT] or [DISP ALL]. 4.8.1 AIS pop-up information The AIS pop-up shows abbreviated AIS data (Vessel name, COG, SOG, CPA, TCPA and destination*) for the selected AIS target. Simply put the cursor on the AIS target to show the pop-up.
*: Destination appears for Class A targets only. XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Pop-up AIS data Note: When the received AIS sentence does not contain certain data, the appropriate section of the pop-up shows "missing". The pop-up can be enabled or disabled with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. For C-types, select [0 NEXT]. For IMO-types, go to the next step. 5. Select [8 AIS POP UP INFO]. 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. 7. Close the menu. 4-10 4. AIS OPERATION 4.8.2 How to display basic AIS target data Place the cursor on a desired AIS target and press the TGT ACQ key, or left-click. The target is highlighted with a square box and the selected AIS targets data is shown in AIS target data box inside the information box, on the right side of the screen. Unavail-
able data appears with the indication "missing". Note 1: This feature requires [2 TGT DATA/ACQ SETTING], on the second page of the [CURSOR] menu, to be set as [ANY] or [AIS ONLY]. Note 2: A total of three AIS targets data can be shown inside the information box. To change the information box settings, see section 1.48. A AIS target data box
(A, B or C) 123456789 Targets MMSI ID Position quality*1 Targets co-ordinates Targets heading Targets rate of turn Targets nav status*2 Name of target ship Bearing to target Range to target Targets course Targets speed Targets CPA Targets TCPA Targets bow cross range Targets bow cross time
*1: Position quality indicates overall accuracy, and is calculated and displayed as shown below. POSN QLTY value 1 2 3 4 Position accuracy Position > 10 m Position with RAIM > 10 m Position 10 m Position with RAIM 10 m
*2: For Class B targets, "CLASS B" appears in place of nav status. 4-11 4. AIS OPERATION 4.8.3 How to display expanded AIS target data The expanded AIS data display provides additional information about an AIS target, including call sign, IMO No., etc. To display expanded AIS data, show the basic data for a target, then left-click the target data display. The expanded data appears. Vessel name Call sign Position Type of position sensor Position accuracy Navigation status MMSI number IMO number Vessel dimensions Destination ETA at destination AIS transponder version Association (ON or OFF) Ship and cargo type EXPANDED DATA 12345678901234567890 1234567 GPS GLONASS POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL
(AHEAD/ALONGSIDE) 123456789 123456789 25.4m 12345678901234567890 23:59 31/DEC 1 Repeat indicator 1 Note: Navigation status is not available for Class B targets. Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the [STATUS] box shows the aircrafts altitude. If data for an item is unknown, "missing" appears. 4.8.4 How to remove target data from the display area Place the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the TARGET CANCEL key. The select targets data is no longer displayed in the data display area. 4-12 4. AIS OPERATION 4.9 How to Change AIS Symbol Attributes To change the brilliance, size and color of AIS symbols follow the appropriate proce-
dure in this section. 4.9.1 How to adjust the AIS symbol brilliance Note: The brilliance of the AIS symbols can be adjusted from the [PLT] button on the Instant Access bar. See section 1.46.1. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [2 BRILL]. The [BRILL] menu appears. 4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 5. Select [8 AIS SYMBOLS]. The settings are highlighted and can now be adjusted. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the brilliance. 6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the desired brilliance, then left-click to apply the set-
ting. 7. Close the menu. 4.9.2 How to change the color of the AIS symbol 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. For IMO-types, select [2 TTAIS SYMBOL COL-
OR]. For C-types, select [4 AIS SYMBOL COLOR].
(For IMO-types, the color is shared between AIS and TT.) 5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click. 6. Close the menu. 4-13 4. AIS OPERATION 4.9.3 How to change the color of the ATON symbol 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. For IMO-types, select [3 ATON SYMBOL COLOR]. For C-types, select [6 ATON SYMBOL COLOR]. 5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click. 6. Close the menu. 4.9.4 How to change the size of the AIS symbol 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL], then select [0 NEXT]. 4. For IMO-types, select [6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [4 AIS SCALED SYMBOL]. 5. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate, then left-click.
[OFF]: All AIS symbols are displayed in the same size.
[ON]: AIS symbols are displayed in scale, according to the ship length. Standard symbol Scaled symbol The figure above shows examples of standard and scaled symbols. 6. Close the menu. 4.9.5 How to customize the AIS symbol display (C-types only) You can customize how the ship name, symbol color and trail color are displayed for up to 100 AIS targets. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [0 NEXT]. 5. Select [4 CUSTOMIZE AIS DISPLAY]. 6. Select [2 MMSI NO.]. 7. Enter the MMSI of the vessel whose AIS display you want to customize. If name data is available for the entered MMSI, the vessel name appears below the MMSI. If no name is available, the indication "missing" ap-
pears. 4-14 4. AIS OPERATION Note: You can also right-click an AIS target to open the [CUSTOMIZE AIS DIS-
PLAY] menu with the selected vessels MMSI field completed. 8. Select [3 CUSTOMIZE SHIP NAME]. 9. Referring to section 1.5.3, enter a custom name for the vessel. If [6 DISP CUSTOMIZED NAME] is set to [ON], the name set here appears near the AIS symbol. If [DISP CUSTOMIZED NAME] is set to [OFF] and the vessel is transmitting its name in the AIS data, the received name appears near the AIS symbol. 10. Select [4 AIS SYMBOL COLOR]. 11. Select the color you want to show the selected AIS targets symbol with. Select [STD.] to keep the color selected at section 4.9.2. 12. Select [5 AIS TRACK COLOR]. 13. Select the color you want to show the selected AIS targets track with. Select [STD.] to keep the color selected at section 4.9.2. 14. Select [6 SAVE THESE SETTINGS?]. 15. Select [YES] to assign the customization to the selected AIS target. Select [NO] to go back and change the customization. 16. Close the menu. 4.9.6 How to edit or remove AIS customizations (C-types only) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [0 NEXT]. 5. Select [5 CUSTOM AIS LIST].
[1 BACK]: Left-click to go back one page in the list. Click and hold to go back to the top page of the list. Targets custom AIS number
[0 NEXT]: Left-click to go forward one page in the list. Click and hold to go to the last page of the list. Targets MMSI Customization details 6. Select [2 SEARCH CUSTOMIZED AIS]. 7. Enter the custom AIS number for the target whose details you want to edit. 8. To change the customizations for the selected AIS target, select [EDIT]. To remove all customizations for the selected AIS target, select [DELETE]. The [CUSTOMIZE AIS DISPLAY] menu appears. 9. Referring to section 4.9.5, change the customization settings as required. 10. Close the menu. 4-15 4. AIS OPERATION 4.9.7 How to show/hide the customized AIS name (C-types only) You can display a vessels name below the corresponding AIS symbol. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [0 NEXT]. 5. Select [6 DISP CUSTMIZED NAME]. 6. To show the name, select [ON]. The name set at section 4.9.5 appears below the icon for the selected vessel. To hide the name, select [OFF]. Although the customized name is hidden, if the selected vessel is transmitting the vessel name in the AIS data, the vessel name received in the AIS data appears below the icon. If the AIS data does not contain the vessels name, the class (A/B/C) appears instead. 7. Close the menu. 4.10 Past Position Display The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset num-
ber is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line. Below are examples of past position displays.
(a) Ship turning
(b) Ship running straight
(c) Ship reduced speed
(d) Ship increased speed 4.10.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting in-
terval Select the [PAST POSN] setting, then left-click to cycle through the following settings.
[OFF] [30sec] [1min] [2min] [3min] [6min] [OFF]... OFF PAST POSN setting The past positions are displayed in accordance with the selected setting. Note: The [PAST POSN] setting is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change the setting in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the setting, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the display mode. 4-16 4.10.2 How to select the number of past position points to be dis-
4. AIS OPERATION played 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL], then select [0 NEXT]. 4. For IMO-types, select [5 TTAIS PAST POSN POINTS]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS PAST POSN PTS]
5. Select [5] or [10] as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 4.10.3 Past position display orientation Past position orientation, true or relative, is controlled with [TRAIL MODE] in the
[TRAIL] context menu. To adjust the trail orientation, see section 1.37.1. 4.10.4 Stabilization in true motion True motion past position display can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The
[TRAIL] box shows current stabilization as "TRUE-G" or "TRUE-S". To change stabi-
lization mode, open the [SHIP SPEED MENU] menu and set [SHIP SPEED] to
[LOG(BT)] (ground stabilization) or [LOG(WT)] (sea stabilization). 4.10.5 How to set the AIS track color (C-types only) You can set the AIS track color with the following procedure. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. Select [4 AIS TRACK COLOR]. 5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click. 6. Close the menu. 4-17 4. AIS OPERATION 4.11 Lost Target A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter. When this occurs, the target is marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol and the message "AIS TARGET LOST" appears in the Alert Box. To acknowledge a lost target, press the ALARM ACK key, or use the trackball to select the [ALERT] box then press the left button. 4.11.1 How to set the lost target filter If there are a lot of AIS targets in your area, the lost target alert can sound frequently. In this case you may wish to have the alert ignore lost targets whose range, speed, class or length are below the threshold value you specify. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [0 NEXT]. 5. Select [3 AIS LOST TGT FILTER]. 6. Select [MAX RANGE]. 7. Referring to the following table, select the appropri-
ate filter, then press the ENTER MARK key. Filter type
[MAX RANGE]
[MIN SHIP SPEED]
[EXCEPT CLASS B]
Definition Any AIS targets beyond the range set here will not trigger the lost target alert. Any AIS targets slower than this setting will not trigger the lost target alert. Select ON to prevent AIS targets class B triggering the lost tar-
get alert. 8. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key. The settings can now be adjust-
ed. 9. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the setting as required, then left-click to apply the setting. 10. Close the menu. 4-18 4. AIS OPERATION 4.11.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert The [LOST TARGET] box, located at the bottom-right corner of the screen, enables and disables the lost target alert. Select the box with the cursor, then left-click to cycle through the settings in the follow-
ing order: [OFF] [FILT] [ALL] [OFF]... OFF Lost target filter setting
[OFF]: Disable the alert.
[FILT]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, excluding filtered targets.
[ALL]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, including filtered targets. Note: The lost target filter setting is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change TT settings in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the settings, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the dis-
play mode. 4.12 ROT Setting You can set the lower limit of the ROT (Rate Of Turn) at which the heading line on target symbols will point in direction which the vessel is turning. Ship turning to starboard ROT display 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [4 TTAIS SYMBOL]. For C-types, select [3 TTAIS SYMBOL]. 4. For IMO-types, select [4 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT]. For C-types, select [7 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT]. 5. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the ROT as appropriate, then left-click. The setting range is 000.0/min to 720.0/min. 6. Close the menu. 4-19 4. AIS OPERATION 4.13 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions. An AIS dangerous target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and TCPA limits set in the TT/AIS box. The AIS symbol of an AIS dangerous target is red and flashing, and is announced with the Alert "AIS DANGER OF COLLISION". Af-
ter the alert is acknowledged the target symbol is displayed in red color. Dangerous target When a sleeping or an activated target violates the CPA/TCPA alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous target symbol (red and flashing) and the message AIS DANGER OF COLLISON appears. To acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm, press the ALARM ACK key, click the [ALERT] box, or click the CPA/TCPA alarm in the ALERT LIST. The audible alarm is silenced and the symbol stops flashing. Take appropriate action to avoid collision. Thicker than activated target 4.13.1 How to set CPA and TCPA The CPA/TCPA function can be activated and deactivated from the [CPA/TCPA] box at the bottom-right of the screen. 1. Left-click the [CPA/TCPA] indication to activate the feature. Click the indication to toggle between active (settings are visible and can be changed) and inactive (indication shows "OFF"). CPA setting Left-click here to activate/deactivate the CPA/TCPA settings. TCPA setting Note: The [CPA/TCPA] indication is hidden when [SIMPLE] display mode is used. To change the setting in [SIMPLE] mode, first restore [NORMAL] display mode, adjust the setting, then return to [SIMPLE] mode. See section 1.9 for how to change the display mode. 2. Place the cursor on the indication you wish to adjust. 3. Left-click, or spin the scrollwheel, to adjust the settings as required. The settings options are outlined in the table below. Indication CPA TCPA Method Left-click Scrollwheel Left-click Scrollwheel Settings options 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (NM) 0.1 to 20; 0 to 10 in 0.1 NM increments, 1 NM increments thereafter 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15 (minutes) 1 to 60 minutes in 1-minute increments 4-20 4.14 How to Associate TT and AIS Targets 4. AIS OPERATION An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display. This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative to own ship radar antenna). To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the association function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the as-
sociation criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the association method selected. Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS target is lost. 1. Confirm that the [TT ACQ MODE]
indication shows "AUTO", "AUTO MAN" or "MAN". TT ACQ MODE indication 2. Open the menu. 3. Select [5 TTAIS]. 4. For IMO-types, select [7 TARGET ASSOCIATION]. For C-types, select [6 TARGET ASSOCIATION]. 5. Select [2 ASSOCIATION TGT TYPE]. 6. Select [OFF], [AIS] or [TT], as appropriate, to select which symbols and data to display when the associ-
ation criteria are met.
[OFF]
[AIS]
[TT]
: Disable association.
: Use AIS symbols and AIS data.
: Use TT symbols and TT data. Note: In NORMAL display mode, association can also be switched on and off from the screen by left-clicking the Association Usage icon, shown below. Left-click the association icon to change the association setting.
>: Use TT Symbols and data.
<: Use AIS symbols and data. No indication: Association is disabled. 7. Referring to the table below, set the association criteria. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the value, then left-click to confirm the setting.
[3 GAP]
[4 RANGE]
[5 BEARING]
[6 SPEED]
[7 COURSE]
: Range between AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.000-0.050 (nm))
: Range direction difference from own ship to AIS target and tracked target. (setting range: 0.000-0.100 (nm))
: Bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.0-9.9 ())
: Speed difference between AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.0-6.0 (kn))
: Course difference between AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.0-25.0 ()) 8. Close the menu. 4-21 4. AIS OPERATION When the association criteria (gap, range, bearing, speed, and course) is met, and the ASSOCIATION TARGET setting is [AIS], the TT symbol is erased and only the AIS symbol is displayed. All default association settings are restored whenever the power is turned on. To show the association information, place the cursor on the target data box at the right side of the screen, then press the ACQ key. The selected targets AIS and TT data are displayed together as shown in the examples below. Bearing Range Course Over Ground Speed Over Ground Closest Point of Approach Time to Closest Point of Approach Bow Crossing Range Bow Crossing Time Targets name Targets MMSI Targets coordinates
(latitude, longitude) Targets heading Targets Rate Of Turn Targets navigational status*
*: Not shown for Class B targets. 4-22 4.15 How to View Own Ship Data Own ships static data (type of ship, call sign, etc.) can be viewed as follows:
4. AIS OPERATION 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [7 OWN SHIP DATA]. The [OWN SHIP DATA] menu appears. FURUNOMARU AZ1234567 Name of your ship Ships callsign Current location Course/Speed Heading/Rate of Turn Positioning source and quality of positioning data Ships MMSI number Ships IMO number Ships dimensions External EPFS devices installation location AIS transponder version Ship and cargo type Note: The indications "A", "B", "C" and "D" at [EXT EPFS ANT POSN] show the location of the external EPFS antenna, calculated in the following manner:
External EPFS antenna position 5. Close the menu. 4-23 4. AIS OPERATION 4.16 How to Use AIS Messages You can transmit and receive messages via the AIS, to a specified destination (MMSI) or all ships in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for ex-
ample, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also permitted. Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety infor-
mation. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS. 4.16.1 How to create and save messages Up to ten messages can be saved at any time. To create and save a message, do the following:
Note: The MMSI of the receiving ship can be automatically set by selecting [TRANS-
MIT MESSAGE] from the pop up menu. To show the pop up menu, select the receiv-
ing ships data in the AIS data display area, then press the right button. 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 3. Select [5 AIS]. 4. Select [5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. 5. Select [2 ADDRESS TYPE]. 6. Select [ADDRESSED] (message for a specific MMSI. Automatically selected if the MMSI is automatically using the data display.) or [BROADCAST] (message to all AIS-equipped vessels within the area), then press the ENTER MARK key. 7. Select [3 MESSAGE TYPE]. 8. Select [SAFETY] (for safety messages) or [BINARY] (for routine messages), then press the ENTER MARK key. 9. For [ADDRESSED] message, do this step. For [BROADCAST] message, or if
[TRANSMIT MESSAGE] was selected from the AIS data display pop up menu, go to step 8. 1) Select [4 MMSI No.]. 2) Use the number keys to set the receiving ships MMSI. 10. Select [5 CHANNEL]. 11. Select the AIS channel to transmit your message over: [A], [B], [A or B], or [A and B], the press the ENTER MARK key. 12. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page. 13. Select [4 EDIT]. A software keyboard appears at the bottom of the menu. 4-24 14. Select the character desired, then left-click. The maximum of 80 characters can be entered for the message. 4. AIS OPERATION Message contents appear here 15. Select [END] to complete message input, then left-click. 16. Select [3 SAVE FILE]. 17. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate number, then left-click. 18. Close the menu. 4.16.2 How to transmit messages 1. Do one of the following:
a) Create a message, as described in subsection 4.16.1. b) Use a file saved in the memory by selecting [5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] fol-
lowed by [2 OPEN FILE] from the second page of the [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
menu. 2. Select [5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] from the second page of the [TRANSMIT MES-
SAGE] menu to transmit the message.
"TRANSMIT ERROR" appears in the alert box if an error occurred while transmit-
ting the message. 3. Close the menu. 4-25 4. AIS OPERATION 4.16.3 How to view messages When an AIS message is received, the system automatically stores the message in the message list. If [AUTO DISP MESSAGE] in the [AIS TARGET MENU] is set to
[ON], the envelope icon on the [AIS message] button, on lower half of the InstantAc-
cess bar, changes to a blue color to indicate a new, unread message is stored. The system stores up to 200 AIS messages. When the storage capacity is reached the oldest AIS message is automatically erased to make room for the latest. Note that only received messages are backed up when the power is turned off. AIS alert mes-
sages are not backed up. You can access the received messages from the InstantAccess bar, or from the menu. The following procedure shows the menu method. If you click the [AIS mes-
sage] button on the lower half of the InstantAccess bar, skip to step 5. Currently displayed page no. Close message list. When displayed as BACK, goes back one page in the list. Message list Display next page. Name and Call Sign of selected messages sender. Message details 1. Open the menu. 2. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 3. Select [5 AIS]. 4. Select [4 SHOW RECEIVED MSGS]. 5. Select the message to be dis-
played, then left-click. 6. The message details are displayed below the message list. 7. Close the menu. 4.16.4 How to set up the AIS mes-
sage notification 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE]. 5. Select [ON] to show the received message indication (blue envelope icon) when a new message is received, [OFF] to disable the notification. No unread messages, or [3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE]
is set to [OFF].
[3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE] is set to [ON] and at least one unread message is stored. 6. Close the menu. 4-26 4.16.5 How to display AIS alert messages The AIS transponder outputs various alert messages. To view the alert list:
4. AIS OPERATION 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. For IMO-types, select [5 AIS]. For C-types, select [4 AIS]. 4. Select [8 AIS ALERT MESSAGES]. 5. Select the date and time of the message to display, then left-click. Message contents appear here 6. Close the menu. 4.17 AIS System Messages AIS system messages are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. The table below shows the AIS system messages, their alert priority and their meanings. Message Priority Alarm Meaning CPA and TCPA of an activated AIS target are below value set on the menu.
"AIS DANGER OF COLLISION"
"AIS NEW TARGET"
"AIS TARGET LOST" Warning Lost target. An activated target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter.
"AIS DISPLAY FULL" Warning The radar only displays the closest 350 AIS targets from own Warning AIS target has entered an acquisition zone.
"ACTIVE AIS FULL"
"AIS COM ERROR"
Warning Number of active AIS targets has reached 50. Warning Not receiving AIS data from own AIS (VDO message). ship. Note: When [AIS FUNC] is set to [OFF], this message is prior-
itized as a Caution level alert; when [AIS FUNC] is set to [ON], it is prioritized as a Warning level alert.
"AIS CAPACITY FULL" Caution Number of AIS targets has reached 1200.
"AIS DISPLAY 95"%
"ACTIVE AIS 95%"
"TRANSMIT ERROR"
Caution Number of displayed AIS targets has reached 333. Caution Number of active AIS targets has reached 48. Caution Could not send AIS message. 4-27 4. AIS OPERATION This page is intentionally left blank. 4-28 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-
TYPES) The video plotter has the following functions:
Enter waypoints (up to 198) and marks. Creates and displays radar maps. Own ship track plotting. Display charts and chart-related information (requires a valid chart card). 5.1 Orientation Modes Five orientation modes are available: [HEAD UP RM], [STAB HEAD UP RM],
[COURSE UP RM], [NORTH UP RM], [NORTH UP TM] (True Motion). Note: The screen may flash when the heading is changed more than one degree in the [HEAD UP RM] or [STAB HEAD UP RM] mode. Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode In the true motion mode, the own ship mark is automatically returned stern-ward 75%
from the screen center when it reaches a location 50% of the display radius. To select an orientation mode, see section 1.30. 5.2 How to Select a Mark Type 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [5 RADAR MAP]. The [RADAR MAP] menu appears. Note: You can also right-click the [MARK] box to open the [RADAR MAP] menu. 4. Select [3 MARK TYPE]. 5. Select the appropriate type of marker, referring to the list below.
[ORIGIN MARK(No.)]: Inscribes the standard origin mark symbol (
), with mark number (1 to 10). For detailed information regarding ori-
gin marks, see section 5.5. 5-1 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES)
[ORIGIN MARK(SYM)]: Inscribes an origin mark symbol, with no mark number. You can set one of the following symbols as the origin mark. See section 5.5 for details.
[MAP MARK]: Inscribes the selected map mark.
[WP1-50], [WP51-100], [WP101-150], [WP151-198]: Inscribes a waypoint marker number within the selected range. For detailed information regarding waypoints, see section 5.9.
[OWN SHIP SHAPE]: Inscribes a mark with the same shape as own ship. For detailed information regarding the own ship mark, see section 5.6. 6. Close the menu. 5.3 How to Select the Mark Inscription Position You can select the location at which the marker is inscribed from the following:
Location
[CURSOR]
[OWN SHIP]
[L/L]
Description You can select the location using the Control Unit. Marker is placed at own ship position. Marker is placed at the co-ordinates selected. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [5 RADAR MAP]. The [RADAR MAP] menu appears. Note: You can also right-click the [MARK] box to open the [RADAR MAP] menu. 4. Select [4 MARK POSITION]. 5. Referring to the table above, select the appropriate location, then press the EN-
TER MARK key. How to set the co-ordinates Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L], the co-ordinates settings are dis-
played. Co-ordinates can be set one digit at a time, as shown in the figure below. Currently selected digit is highlighted by the cursor. Left-click to move to the next digit. Roll the scrollwheel to change the value. 028 00.200 S 153 43.100 E N - North (Latitude) S - South (Latitude) W - West (Longitude) E - East (Longitude) 1) Spin the scrollwheel to change the value, then left-click to move to the next digit. 2) Repeat step 1 to adjust the Latitude and Longitude as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 5-2 5.4 Radar Map 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can define and input the navigation data, route planning and monitoring data. The radar map can contain 20,000 points of data. Inscribed marks are retained when the power is turned off. The radar map is referenced to the WGS-84 datum and appears only when there is valid position data input. The radar map does not affect any radar functions. Note: The location and orientation of mark symbols and mark lines can change, de-
pending on the display presentation mode, as shown in the table below. Presentation mode HEAD UP RM/STERN UP RM/STAB HEAD UP RM COURSE UP RM/NORTH UP RM/NORTH UP TM Mark symbol Mark line Location is changed ac-
cording to heading and own ship position. Orientation is unchanged. Location is changed ac-
cording to own ship posi-
tion. Orientation is unchanged. Location and orientation are changed according to heading and own ship posi-
tion. Location and orientation are changed according to own ship position. 5.4.1 How to show/hide the radar map You can show or hide the radar map from the InstantAccess bar. Click the [Radar Map] button to toggle between show and hide. Hide the radar map MAP OFF Click to toggle MAP ON Show the radar map You can also show or hide the radar map from the menu. Open the [MAIN MENU] then select [2 MARKS] [0 NEXT] [2 RADAR MAP]. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropri-
ate. 5.4.2 How to inscribe marks You can inscribe marks anywhere inside the operational display area, however, marks cannot be inscribed in the same location as a menu box. Depending on the setting for [4 MARK POSITION] the method to inscribe a mark is slightly different. Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [CURSOR]
1. Referring to section 5.2, select the mark type you want to use. 2. Place the cursor on the [MARK] box, at the bottom-left of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. The cursor moves inside the operational display area. 4. Place the cursor on the location (inside the operational display area) you wish to inscribe the mark, then left-click to anchor the mark. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for multiple mark inscription. 6. Right-click to complete the procedure. 5-3 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [OWN SHIP]
1. Referring to section 5.2, select the mark type you want to use. 2. Place the cursor on the [MARK] box, at the bottom-left of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. The selected mark is inscribed at the OS position. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure. Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L]
1. Referring to section 5.2, select the mark type you want to use. 2. Place the cursor on the [MARK] box, at the bottom-left of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. [RADAR MAP]
menu appears and the first digit of the latitude is selected. 4. Referring to section 5.3, set the latitude and longitude. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure. Note: You can see the number of radar map marks, lines used, on the [RADAR MAP]
menu: [MENU][2 MARKS][5 RADAR MAP]. Radar map marks, lines entered/total number of marks, lines available 5-4 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.4.3 How to delete marks Marks can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. How to delete marks individually 1. Select the operational display area, then right-click to show the [CURSOR] con-
text menu. 2. Select [MARK DELETE]. The cursor changes to a highlighted cursor. 3. Place the highlighted cursor on the mark to be deleted, then left-click. Note: The position of the cursor determines how lines are deleted. To deleted a line segment, put the cursor on the starting point (or end point). To delete consec-
utive line segments, put the cursor on the connecting point. Click starting point/ending point. Click connecting point. 4. Repeat step 3 to delete another mark, or press the right button to return the cur-
sor to normal function. How to delete all marks 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [8 DELETE DATA]. 4. Select [2 ALL MARKS]. 5. Select [YES], then press the ENTER MARK key. 6. Close the menu. 5-5 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.4.4 How to align the radar map When there is positional error between the radar screen and radar map marks and lines, do the following to correct it. 1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU]. 2. Select [MAP ALIGN]. The cursor is now highlighted and the [MAP ALIGN] function is active. 3. Left-click the map at the location you want to move. The map is now anchored to the cursor. 4. Move the cursor to align the radar map with the radar screen, then left-click. The indication "MAP ALIGN" appears on the right side of the operational display area. 5. Right-click to deactivate the [MAP ALIGN] function. Display indications affected by map alignment The following items are also re-aligned when the [MAP ALIGN] function is activated. Map marks Drop marks Anchor watch settings Target tracks AIS symbols EBL offsets (STAB GND mode only) Origin marks NAV lines and waypoints MOB marks Own ship tracks Latitude/Longitude Grid AIS symbol vector display Zoom window display (STAB GND mode only) Cursor position coordinates (when CUR-
SOR L/L ALIGN is set to [ON] only) Display indications unaffected by map alignment The following items are not re-aligned when the [MAP ALIGN] function is activated. Radar echoes TT symbol vector display PI lines Own ship mark TT symbols EBL/VRM reference point OS coordinates ([POSN]) display Barge mark How to disable the map alignment 1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU]. 2. Select [MAP ALIGN], then left-click. The cursor is now highlighted and the [MAP ALIGN] function is active. 3. Press and hold the left button. The "MAP ALIGN" indication is cleared and the map alignment is cleared. 4. Right-click to deactivate the [MAP ALIGN] function. 5-6 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.5 Origin Mark You can mark any prominent target or a point of particular interest using the origin mark feature. When an origin mark in entered, the distance and bearing from the cur-
sor position to the mark are shown at the bottom of the screen, as in the figure below. 20 origin marks may be entered. MARK Distance from cursor position to origin mark Bearing from cursor position to origin mark 5.5.1 How to inscribe origin marks The method in which an origin mark is inscribed depends on the setting of [MARK PO-
SITION] (section 5.3). Below are the procedures for each method. Heading and position inputs are necessary to inscribe an origin mark. Where [MARK POSITION] is set to [CURSOR]
1. Referring to section 5.2, set [3 MARK TYPE] to [ORIGIN MARK No.] or [ORIGIN MARK SYM]. 2. Put the cursor on the [MARK] box at the bottom of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the origin mark to inscribe. 4. Click the [MARK] box. 5. Click the location where to put the origin mark. The origin mark is inscribed at the location selected. To re-inscribe the origin mark at a different location, click the desired location for the mark. 6. To enter an origin mark at another location, spin the scrollwheel to change the or-
igin mark, then click the desired location for the origin mark. 7. Right click to finish. Where [MARK POSITION] is set to [OWN SHIP]
1. Referring to section 5.2, set [3 MARK TYPE] to [ORIGIN MARK No.] or [ORIGIN MARK SYM]. 2. Put the cursor on the [MARK] box at the bottom of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the origin mark to inscribe. 4. Click the [MARK] box. The origin mark is inscribed at own ship position. 5. Right click to finish. 5-7 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) Where [MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L POSITION]
1. Referring to section 5.2, set [3 MARK TYPE] to [ORIGIN MARK No.] or [ORIGIN MARK SYM]. 2. Put the cursor on the [MARK] box at the bottom of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the origin mark to inscribe. 4. Click the [MARK] box. The [RADAR MAP] menu appears with a window for entering latitude and longi-
tude position. 5. Referring to section 5.3, enter latitude and longitude position of the origin mark. After the position is entered, the origin mark appears at the position entered. 6. To continue inscribing origin marks in this method, do steps 2 to 5. 5.5.2 How to set origin mark stabilization Origin marks can be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or moving (sea stabi-
lized). 1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu. 2. Select [2 ORIGIN MARK STAB]. 3. Select [GND] or [SEA] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. 4. Close the menu. 5.5.3 How to delete origin marks Origin marks can be erased as follows. 1. Right click anywhere within the radar effective inside diameter to show the [CUR-
SOR MENU]. 2. Select [MARK DELETE]. 3. Click the origin mark to delete. 4. To delete another origin mark, repeat step 3. 5. Right click to finish. 5-8 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.6 How to Change the Shape of the Own Ship Mark Ten locations on the own ship mark (section 1.44.5) can be adjusted to depict the shape of own ship more realistically. The ten points are as shown below. 10 01 02 09 08 07 03 04 05 06 1. Referring to section 5.2, set [3 MARK TYPE] to [OWN SHIP SHAPE]. 2. Put the cursor in the [MARK] box at the bottom of the screen. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select the point no. to change. The cursor movies to the selected point position. 4. Use the trackball to move the point to the position desired, then click. Point position information appears in the [MARK] box, as shown in the figure be-
low. MARK Distance from own ship to point 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 to adjust other points. Distance from port side of own ship to point 5-9 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.7 How to Use ECDIS Chart Marks Note: This function is only available if [ECDIS] is set to [SERIAL] or [LAN] at installa-
tion. Consult your dealer for details. You can display marks received from an ECDIS on the radar screen. If the received mark also contains predicted position data, the predicted position is also displayed on-
screen. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [6 ECDIS MARKS DISPLAY]. 4. Select the appropriate item.
[2 USER CHART]: Shows/hides received user charts.
[3 CURVED EBL]: Shows/hides the received Curved EBL.
[4 CHART SYMBOL]: Shows/hides the re-
ceived chart symbols.
[5 NOTE BOOK]: Shows/hides the received notes. [ON] shows notes only when they are received. [DISPLAY] shows notes continuously. The notes are shown in the information box at the right-side of the screen.
[6 ROUTE]: Shows/hides the received route. [CENT] shows only the route line;
[ALL] shows both the route line and the route width.
[7 PREDICTOR]: Shows/hides the received predicted position with a symbol
(dotted line) of the same size as the own ship. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. [ON]
shows the selected items ECDIS mark when received, [OFF] hides the ECDIS mark. 6. Close the menu. 5-10 5.8 Own Ship Track 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) A total of 20,000 points are allotted for storage of own ships track, marks and lines. When this memory becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room for the lat-
est. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to conserve the memory. Note: You can check how many tracks have been used at any time from the [RADAR MAP] menu. The number of points used and the total number available are shown at the bottom of the [RADAR MAP] menus first page. Own ship track points used/total number of own ship track points available 5.8.1 How to show/hide tracks You can show or hide tracks for own ship. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [7 TRACKS]. 4. Select [2 OWN TRACK]. 5. Select [2 DISPLAY OWN TRACK]. 6. Select [ON] to show tracks, or [OFF] to hide tracks. 7. Close the menu. Select 5-11 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.8.2 How to set the plotting interval The system plots tracks at regular intervals in order to paint the track. You can adjust this interval. A shorter interval gives a smoother track, however the maximum record-
ing time is reduced. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [7 TRACKS]. 4. Select [2 OWN TRACK]. 5. Select [3 SAVE INTERVAL]. 6. Select the appropriate setting, then left-click. The table below shows the relation between plotting interval settings and maxi-
mum track recording time. Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time Own track recording times 10 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 56 hours 167 hours 333 hours 667 hours 3 min 6 min 15 min DRAW ONLY 1000 hours 2000 hours 5000 hours No track data recorded. Set the interval to [OFF] to hide tracks made from the time you make this setting. To hide both new and old tracks, set [2 DISPLAY OWN TRACK] to [OFF]. 7. Close the menu. 5.8.3 How to delete tracks Track can be deleted partially (based on length) or completely, as follows. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [8 DELETE DATA]. 4. Select [5 OS TRACK-COLOR/TIME]. 5. Select the percentage of the track you wish to delete, then left-click. The available options are: [30%], [50%], [80%] or [ALL]. 6. Close the menu. 5-12 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.9 How to Use Waypoints A particular location is known as a waypoint, whether it be a starting point, a desti-
nation point or an intermediate point on a voyage. This radar system can store 200 waypoints. Waypoints 1 to 198 are user set waypoints, waypoint 199 is reserved for external input, waypoint 200 is reserved for MOB (Man Over Board). Waypoints can be entered with the cursor, or from the menu (manual input of latitude and longitude). Waypoints 1 to 198 can be edited from the menu. 5.9.1 How to set the data source for waypoints 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE]. 4. Select the appropriate data source, referring to the list below.
[OFF]: Waypoints and nav lines (such as tracks) are not shown.
[EXT DATA]: Use navigational data from an ex-
ternal EPFS device for waypoints and nav lines
(waypoint 199).
[INTERNAL DATA]: Use waypoints and nav lines saved internally (waypoints 1 to 198). 5. Close the menu. 5.9.2 How to enter waypoints A waypoint can be entered two ways: with the cursor or manual entry of latitude and longitude position. After a waypoint is entered, the distance and bearing from own ship to the waypoint are show in the [MARK] box. MARK Distance from own ship to waypoint How to enter waypoints with the cursor Bearing from own ship to waypoint 1. Referring to section 5.2, select the appropriate waypoint number group. The available groups are: [WP1 to WP50], [WP51 to WP100], [WP101 to WP150]
or [WP151 to WP198]. 2. Place the cursor on the [MARK] box. Spin the scrollwheel to select the waypoint number for new waypoint, then left-click. The cursor jumps inside the operational display area. MARK 3. Place the cursor on the location to inscribe the waypoint, then left-click. Spin scrollwheel to select number. 4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to inscribe other waypoints. 5. Right-click the operational display area to complete waypoint inscription. 5-13 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) How to enter/edit waypoints from the menu Note: A waypoint cannot be edited if it is part of an active route. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [2 WPT SET]. 4. Select [2 WPT NO. SELECT]. 5. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the control unit numbered keys, to select a waypoint number, then left-click. To edit or input a waypoint name, go to step 6. To skip naming the waypoint, go to step 7. 6. Select [3 WPT NAME], then left-click. The software keyboard appears. Referring to section 1.5.3, name the waypoint. 7. Select [4 WPT L/L]. The latitude and longitude settings can now be adjusted. 8. Input the latitude and longitude with the number keys, or spin the scrollwheel to select a digit, then left-click to move to the next digit. WPT L/L WPT L/L Use the scrollwheel to select a numeral, then left-click. The cursor jumps to to next right place. Repeat to enter the latitude and longitude. 9. Close the menu. 5.9.3 How to edit waypoints Note: A waypoint cannot be edited if it is part of an active route. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [2 WPT SET]. 4. Select [2 WPT NO. SELECT]. 5. Select the waypoint number to edit. 6. Select the waypoint data to edit, then make necessary changes.
[WPT NAME]: Use the software keyboard to change the name.
[WPT L/L]: Spin the scrollwheel to change the latitude and longitude position of the waypoint. 7. Close the menu. 5-14 5.9.4 How to erase waypoints 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) There are two methods to erase individual waypoints: cursor selection or from the menu. How to erase a waypoint by cursor selection 1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click. 2. Select [MARK DELETE]. The mark delete function is activated and the cursor is highlighted when inside the operational display area. 3. Select the waypoint you wish to delete, then left-click. 4. Right-click inside the operational display area to deactivate the mark delete func-
tion. How to erase a waypoint from the menu 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [6 WPT SET]. 4. Select [2 WPT NO. SELECT]. Then select the waypoint to erase. 5. Select [5 CLEAR DATA]. 6. Select [YES] or [NO] as appropriate, then left-click. 7. Close the menu. How to erase all waypoints You can erase all waypoints from the menu. If there is an active route, this procedure cannot be completed. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [8 DELETE DATA]. 4. Select [3 ALL WAYPOINTS]. 5. Select [YES] to erase all waypoints. Select [NO] to cancel the procedure. Note: All routes are also deleted with this procedure. 6. Close the menu. 5-15 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.9.5 How to display the waypoint list 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [7 WPT LIST] to show the [WPT LIST].
- Click while on page No.1 to close the list.
- Click while on page No.2 or after to go back on page.
- Long-push the left button to go to page No.1. WPT No., WPT name Displayed page/Total no. of pages Latitude and longitude position of waypoint
- Go to next page.
- Long-push the left button to go to last page. 4. Close the menu. 5.9.6 How to show/hide the waypoint name/number 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT], then select [0 NEXT] to show the next page. 3. Select [4 DISP WPT NO.] or [5 DISP WPT NAME] as appropriate. 4. Select [ON] to show the waypoint name/number, or [NO] to hide the waypoint name/number, then left-click. he waypoint number and/or waypoint name appear to the right of the waypoint mark. Waypoint number Waypoint name 5. Close the menu. 5-16 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.10 Routes You can display one route (NAV LINE), which is either received from a connected EPFS device (GPS, etc), or stored internally. 5.10.1 How to set/edit an internal route You can store up to 30 routes, each with up to 30 waypoints, in the internal memory. The procedure for new routes and route editing is the same. To edit a route, you can skip setting other items and only edit the items you wish to change. Note: While a route is active, tracks and waypoints cannot be deleted and data cannot be loaded from an SD card. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [8 NAV LINE SET] to show the [NAV LINE SET] menu. 4. Select [2 SELECT NAV LINE]. 5. Spin the scrollwheel, or input the number from the keyboard, to assign a number to the route. The in-
put areas for [3 NAV LINE], [4 NAV LINE ENTRY]
and [5 CLEAR DATA] become active. 6. Select [3 NAV LINE NAME]. 7. Referring to section 1.5.3, assign a name to the route. You can use up to 15 characters in the name. 8. Select [4 NAV LINE ENTRY]. 9. Spin the scrollwheel to select a waypoint, then left-click. 10. Repeat step 9 until all waypoints for the route are entered. When the last waypoint is entered, move the cursor to the next blank input area, then left-click, or assign the last waypoint as "000" using the numeric keys. If 30 waypoints are entered, the setting process for waypoints is automatically complet-
ed. 11. Close the menu. 5-17 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.10.2 How to display routes To display internal routes or received routes, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAV LINEWPT]. The [8 NAV LINEWPT] menu appears. 3. Select [2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE]. 4. Select the desired source, referring to the list be-
low.
[OFF]: No routes are displayed.
[EXT DATA]: Routes received from external sources are displayed.
[INTERNAL DATA]: Routes saved in the inter-
nal memory are displayed. For [INTERNAL DATA], see step 5; for [EXT DATA], see step 8. 5. Select [NAV LINE SELECT]. 6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the desired route number, then left-click. 7. Select the direction you want to navigate the route in.
[FORWARD]: Navigate the route in the direction in which it was created.
[REVERSE]: Navigate the route in reverse of the direction in which it was created. 8. Close the menu. 5.10.3 How to skip a waypoint On a voyage similar to the below example, you may want to skip a waypoint to save time. You can skip the next waypoint on the current leg of your route by using the pro-
cedure below. Destination port WPT6 WPT5 WPT4 New route leg Departure port WPT1 WPT3 WPT2 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAV LINEWPT] to show the [8 NAV LINEWPT] menu. 3. Select [4 SKIP NEXT WPT]. 4. Close the menu. 5-18 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.10.4 How to set the route width You can set a width for each route (NAV LINE). For example, if you set a 5 NM route width, the route width is 5 NM to port and starboard, with the own ship as the center. The route width is dis-
played as orange dotted lines to either side of the route line. To set a route width, do the following:
1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [5 NAV LINE WIDTH]. 4. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the numeric keys, to set a width for the route. To disable the route width alert and hide the route width lines, set the width to [0.00 NM]. Note: This width is applied to all routes. 5. Close the menu. 5.10.5 How to show/hide the turning line Waypoint 2 Route width Own ship Waypoint 1
: Route line
: Width line You can show or hide the turning line, the point at which your vessel starts a turn in a route. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [0 NEXT]. 4. Select [3 TURNING LINE]. 5. Select the appropriate setting, referring to the list below.
[OFF]: Turning line is hid-
den.
[ON]: Turning line is dis-
played.
[REVISED]: Turning line is displayed, but offset based on the route and current own ship position. 6. Close the menu. Estimated course with no offset calculation*
Estimated course with offset calculation*
Own ship Own ship
[TURNING LINE]
set to [ON]
: Route
: Track
: Turning line
[TURNING LINE]
set to [REVISED]
*: Estimated course is not displayed on-screen. 5-19 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 5.10.6 How to use the waypoint arrival distance function The waypoint arrival distance function lets you know when you are within a preset dis-
tance from the next waypoint. When the waypoint arrival area is set, the next waypoint is shown circumscribed with an dashed orange-colored circle, whose radius is equiv-
alent to waypoint arrival distance setting. When your vessel comes within the destina-
tion arrival radius, the system places the arrival radius marker on the next destination. Waypoint arrival radius To set and use the waypoint arrival area function, follow the procedure below. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the second page of the [NAVLINEWPT] menu appears. 4. Select [2 WPT ARRIVAL DIST]. 5. Set the width (radius) of the arrival area. 6. Close the menu. 5.10.7 How to delete internal routes You can delete a specified route, or all routes. Note: Active routes and routes from external sources cannot be deleted. How to delete individual internal routes 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [8 NAVLINE SET]. 4. Select [2 SELECT NAV LINE]. 5. Spin the scrollwheel, or input the number from the keyboard, to select the route you want to delete. 6. Select [5 CLEAR DATA]. 7. Select [YES] to delete the selected route. 8. Close the menu. How to delete all internal routes 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKS]. 3. Select [8 DELETE DATA]. 4. Select [4 ALL NAV LINES]. 5. Select [YES] to delete all internal routes. 6. Close the menu. 5-20 5.10.8 How to view the routes list Routes saved to the internal memory can be view by following the procedure below. 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [8 NAVLINEWPT]. 3. Select [9 NAVLINE LIST] to show the [NAVLINE LIST]
- Click while on page No.1 to close the list.
- Click while on page No.2 or after to go back on page.
- Long-push the left button to go to page No.1. Displayed page/Total no. of pages 01 ROUTE 001 004 007 002 005 008 003 006 009 Route number/
route name*
Waypoints registered to the route
- Go to next page.
- Long-push the left button to go to last page.
* Route name is blank if no name is registered. 4. Close the menu. 5.11 How to Show/Hide Grid Lines 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARK]. 3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next page. 4. Select [2 GRID], then select [ON] to show the grid, or [OFF] to hide the grid. 5. Close the menu. MARK (2/2) BACK GRID 5-21 5. PLOTTER OPERATION (IMO-TYPES) This page is intentionally left blank. 5-22 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-
TYPES) Plotter operation is available in both IMO- and C-type specifications, with the functions and menus different for each type. This chapter covers the operations for the C-type. For the IMO-type, see chapter 5. The following plotter functions are available with the C-type radar:
Display own ship track and other ship track. Enter waypoints. Enter marks. Create routes. Set destination. Display charts and chart-related informa-
tion (requires a valid chart card). 6.1 Tracks Own ship track is traced on the display based on position data sent from position-fixing equipment. Additionally, with connection of a AIS transponder or GPS buoy, other ships tracks can also be shown. Heading line Own ship vector Own ship mark Other ship symbol
(ex. sister ship) Current vector T01 Time mark Own ship track Target number Current marker Other ship track Own ship track and other ship track can be saved as a route. For details see "Creating a route from existing tracks" on page 6-53. Note: Own ship track and other ship track are automatically saved every ten minutes and when the radar goes into standby (STBY) mode. 6.1.1 Symbols Own ship mark The own ship mark appears at current position. The mark changes as shown in the figure to the right, de-
pending on whether you are plotting a track. Plotting a track Track plotting stopped In addition to marking own ship position, the mark has the following functions:
The own ship vector line (thick, white) points in the direction of ships course. The heading line, colored light blue, points in the direction of ships heading. The current vector points in the direction of the tide flow for a maximum of five depth layers. (Layer #1, yellow; layer #2, purple; layer #3, blue; layer #4, green, lay-
er #5, white.). Requires tide data in NMEA 0183 format. 6-1 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) How to show/hide the own ship vector Follow the procedure below to show or hide the own ship vector. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS]. 3. Select [5 OPERATION]. 4. Select [4 OWN SHIP VECTOR]. 5. Select one of the following:
[OFF]: Hide the own ship vector.
[HDG]: The own ship vector points in heading direction.
[COURSE]: The own ship vector points in course direction. 6. Close the menu. How to show/hide other ships tracks The following are required in order to show other ships tracks. A AIS transponder or GPS buoy Own ship position data Set up on this radar See "SYMBOLS" on page AP-32 for TT and AIS symbols. Do the following to show or hide the consort symbol, GPS buoy symbol. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [5 CONSORTGPS BUOY]. 4. Select [5 CONSORT DISPLAY] or [6 GPS BUOY DISPLAY]. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. The follow-
ing symbols may appear when [ON] is selected.
: GPS buoy symbol
: Consort ship symbol 6. Close the menu. How to change the size of the target no. display for consort ship, GPS buoy Do the following to change the size of the target no. display for consort ship, GPS buoy. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [5 TTAIS]. 3. Select [5 CONSORTGPS BUOY]. 4. Select [7 SIZE OF TARGET NO]. 5. Select [OFF] (hide target no. display), [SMALL] or [LARGE] as appropriate. 6. Close the menu. 6-2 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) 6.1.2 How to show/hide ships tracks Show/hide own ships tracks Do the following to show or hide own ships tracks. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [3 TRACK]. 4. Select [8 OWN TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [2 OWN TRACK DISPLAY]. 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required. For [ON], the cursor moves to the [MAX. POINTS] indication. 7. You can set the max. number of track points to save. Spin the scrollwheel to set desired value. 8. Close the menu. Note: Time can be marked hourly with the time mark
(T). Set [7 TIME MARK DISPLAY] to [ON] to show the time mark. The time is updated every hour, on the hour and appears as two digits (T01, T02, etc.), in 24-hour format, regardless of the setting selected in the [DATE] menu. Show/hide other ships tracks Do the following to show or hide other ships tracks. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [3 TRACK]. 4. Select [8 OTHER TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [2 AIS TRACK DISPLAY], [3 CONSORT TRACK DISPLAY], [4 TT TRACK DISPLAY], or
[5 GPS BUOY TRACK DISPLAY]. 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required. 7. Close the menu. Show/hide current vector display on other ships tracks Do the following to show or hide the current vector display on other ships tracks. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [3 TRACK]. 4. Select [8 OTHER TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [2 AIS TRACK DISPLAY], [3 CONSORT TRACK DISPLAY], [4 TT TRACK DISPLAY], or [5 GPS BUOY TRACK DISPLAY]. 6-3 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required. 7. Select [1 BACK] to return to the [TRACK] menu. 8. Select [8 OTHER TRACK SETTINGS]. 9. Select [7 OTHER CURR VCT DISP.]. 10. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required. For [ON], go to the next step to set the current measuring layers to use. 11. Select [1 BACK] to return to the [TRACK] menu. 12. Select [0 NEXT]. 13. Select [3 SET CURRENT LAYER]. 14. Select [1LAYER]. Spin the scrollwheel to set the measuring layer (1 to 5) to use. 15. Do the same for [2LAYER], [3LAYER]. 16. Close the menu. How to automatically display the tracks of acquired TT You can automatically display the tracks of acquired TT as follows. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [3 TRACK]. 4. Select [9 OTHER TRACKS DISPLAY]. 5. Select [4 TT TRACKS DISPLAY]. 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required.
[ON]: Track of all TT is displayed.
[OFF]: Track of TT is not displayed. To show the track of a TT, do the following:
1) Put the cursor within the radar effective radius, then right click to show the
[CURSOR] menu. 2) Select [TRACK ON-OFF]. 3) Click the TT whose track you want to show. 4) Right-click to finish. 7. Close the menu. 6-4 6.1.3 How to set own ship track recording How to start/stop recording own ship track 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) You can stop recording own ship track when the ship is anchored for an extended pe-
riod or in port. This will help present unnecessary recording of track points. 1. Put the cursor within the radar effective radius, then right click. 2. Select [TRACK ON-OFF]. 3. Right-click within the radar effective radius until the Hold icon (
) appears. Each click selects a track recording interval or stops recording in the following se-
quence. Recording interval 1 Recording interval 2 Hold When recording is stopped, the appearance of the own ship mark changes from filled circle (
) to a pair of concentric circles (
). 4. Right-click to finish. To restart recording, repeat the above procedure to show the recording interval 1 icon
) or recording interval 2 icon (
). The own ship mark changes from (
) to
). Note: For RCU-031 users, you can also press TRACK ON/OFF to toggle recording. How to show/hide track without recorded them 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [3 TRACK]. 4. Select [6 DISP. STOPPED TRACKS]. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required.
[OFF]: Tracks made while recording is off are not shown.
[ON]: Tracks made while recording is off are shown. However, since tracks are not record-
ed, tracks are erased when the power is turned off or the track is not within the display area. Also, own ship tracks made while recording is off are erased whenever recording is restarted, or the display is zoomed in or out.
[DISP. STOPPED TRACKS]
is ON. Own ship Recording stopped Own ship track is erased. Recording stopped Own ship Recording restarted 6-5 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) 6. Close the menu. How to connect non-recorded tracks after restarting recording 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [2 MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [3 TRACK]. 4. Select [7 JOIN STOPPED TRACKS]. 5. Select [NO JOINT] or [JOIN] as required.
[NO JOINT]: The point where recording was stopped is not connected to the point where recording was resumed.
[JOIN]: The point where recording was stopped is connected to the point where recording was resumed. Actual ships movement
(Dotted line not displayed.) Own ship Points connected with straight line. Own ship Recording stopped Recording restarted Recording stopped Recording restarted
[NO JOINT] selected
[JOIN] selected 6. Close the menu. 6.1.4 How to stop and re-start tracks You can stop, or pause tracks, then re-start the same track as desired. 1. Right-click within the radar effective radius to show the [CURSOR] menu. 2. Select [TRACK ON-OFF]. 3. Select the vessel whose tracks you want to stop (or re-start), then left-click. 4. Right-click within the radar effective radius to complete the procedure. 6.1.5 How to change track color Track color is available in seven colors: red, yellow, green, light blue, purple, blue, and white. For example, you may want to show track in red on the day you leave port to distinguish from track related to other activities. The own ship track can color can be automatically changed according to water temperature or depth. How to change own ships track color 1. Right-click within the radar effective radius to show the [CURSOR] menu. 2. Select [TRACK COLOR]. 3. Click within the radar effective radius. The [CHANGE TRACK COLOR] window appears. 6-6 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) Note: For RCU-031 users, you can also press TRACK COLOR to open the
[CHANGE TRACK COLOR] window. 4. Select [COLOR]. 5. Select desired reference for track color.
[WATER TEMP]: The track color changes according to water temperature. (Re-
quires water temperature data.)
[WATER DEPTH]: The track color changes according to depth. (Requires depth data.) The color of the track changes at the point when the new color is selected. 6. Close the window. Note: You can also change the color partially, from the [EDIT TRACK] menu. See
"How to change own ships track color" on page 6-6. How to change own ships track color according to water temperature If you selected [WATER TEMP] as the track color reference, the track changes color according to temperature changes in the water. This makes it easier to find changes in the temperature, which makes it easier to find specific fishing areas. There are two methods to change the track color:
Method 1: change the color based on a temperature range Method 2: change the color based on a preset difference Note: This feature requires valid water temperature data input. Method 1: temperature-range-based color change 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [TRACK]. 4. Select [OWN TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [NEXT]. 6. Select [TRACK COLOR BY TEMP]. 7. Select [RANGE]. 8. Set the color for the temperature range. For example, to show water temperatures above 20 degrees centigrade in red color, do the follow-
ing:
1) Select [RED]. 2) Rotate the scrollwheel to set +20.0, then press the left button. 3) Set the other colors in a similar manner. Note 1: The water temperature steps should be ascending order. Note 2: Temperatures below the [BLUE] setting appear in white color. 9. Select [TEMP DATA DISPLAY]. 6-7 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) 10. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required.
[ON]: Show water temperature on the track.
[OFF]: Hide water temperature on the track. 11. Close the menu. Method 2: preset-difference-based color change According to the setting, there are five colors which are used in a cycle to color the track. In the example figure below, the preset difference is set to [EV. 0.2] and the tem-
perature ranges from 17.0C to 18.2C. The color changes every 0.2C. Own ship Yellow 18.2C Red 18.0C Magenta Blue 17.8C Green 17.6C Yellow Red 17.4C 17.2C 17.0C 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [TRACK]. 4. Select [OWN TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [NEXT]. 6. Select [TRACK COLOR BY TEMP]. 7. Select [EV. 0.2] or [EV. 2.0] as required.
[EV. 0.2]: changes the color with every temperature increase/decrease of 0.2C.
[EV. 2.0]: changes the color with every temperature increase/decrease of 2.0C. 8. Set the color for the temperature range. For example, to show water temperatures above 18 degrees centigrade in red col-
or, do the following:
1) Select [RED]. 2) Rotate the scrollwheel to set +18.0, then press the left button. 3) Set the other colors in a similar manner. Note 1: The water temperature steps should be in ascending order. Note 2: Temperatures below the [BLUE] setting appear in white color. 9. Select [TEMP DATA DISPLAY]. 10. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required.
[ON]: Show water temperature on the track.
[OFF]: Hide water temperature on the track. 11. Close the menu. 6-8 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) How to change own ships track color according to depth If you selected [WATER DEPTH] as the track color reference, the track changes color according to depth changes in the water. This makes it easier to see changes in depth directly below your boat. there are two methods to change the track color:
Method 1: change the color based on a depth range Method 2: change the color based on a preset difference Note: This feature requires valid depth data input. Method 1: depth-range-based color change This method gives depths within the same range the same color. For example, if you set the range between 200 m and 300 m, and the depth remains shallower than 300 m and deeper than 200 m, the color remains the same. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [TRACK]. 4. Select [OWN TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [NEXT] twice. 6. Select [TRACK COLOR BY DEPTH]. 7. Select [RANGE]. 8. Set the color for the depth range. For example, to show depths from 400 m and below in red color, do the following:
1) Select [RED]. 2) Rotate the scrollwheel to set 0400.0, then press the left button. 3) Set the other colors in a similar manner. Note 1: The depth intervals should be in as-
cending order. Note 2: Depths below the [BLUE] setting appear in white color. 9. Select [DEPTH DATA DISPLAY]. 10. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required.
[ON]: Show water temperature on the track.
[OFF]: Hide water temperature on the track. 11. Close the menu. 6-9 6. PLOTTER OPERATION (C-TYPES) Method 2: preset-difference-based color change According to the setting, there are five colors which are used in a cycle to color the track. In the example figure below, set the preset difference is set to [EV. 2] and the Depth ranges from 170 m to 180 m. The color changes every 2 m. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [TRACK]. 4. Select [OWN TRACK SETTINGS]. 5. Select [NEXT] twice. 6. Select [TRACK COLOR BY DEPTH]. 7. Select [EV. 2], [EV. 20] or [EV. 200] as re-
quired. Own ship Example: gradually increasing depth Red Magenta 180 m Green Blue 178 m 176 m 174 m Yellow Red 172 m 170 m
[EV. 2]: changes the color with every depth increase/decrease of 2 m.
[EV. 20]: changes the color with every depth increase/decrease of 20 m.
[EV. 200]: changes the color with every depth increase/decrease of 200 m. 8. Select [DEPTH DATA DISPLAY]. 9. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required.
[ON]: Show water temperature on the track.
[OFF]: Hide water temperature on the track. 10. Close the menu. How to change own ships track color based after a specified time You can use the [AUTO COLOR CHANGE] feature to change your track color at a specific time. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [MARKSPLOTTER]. 3. Select [TRACK]. 4. Select [NEXT]. 5. Select [AUTO COLOR CHANGE]. 6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as required. If you select [ON], the cursor moves to the time indication. 7. Set the time at which you want the track to change color. Tracks will change colors every day at this time. 8. Close the menu. 6-10
1 2 | User Manual 17 | Users Manual | 5.81 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE 6 RELAY DATA 1 BACK 2 GD-300/700 3 GP-3700 4 FAR-14x7 5 FAR-21x7 6 FAR-14x6 7 GP-3500 8 GD-X80(CARD) 9 GP-3000 series 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 GD-500 3 GD-188(CARD) 7 INFORMATION BOX 1 BACK 2 OWN SHIP INFO 1 BACK 2 HDG 1 BACK 2 HDG SOURCE (GYRO1, GYRO2) 3 MAGNETIC CORRECTION (AUTO, MANUAL
(99.9W~99.9E; 0.70W) MANUAL, REF, ECDIS) 3 SPEED 1 BACK 2 SHIP SPEED (LOG(BT), LOG(WT), EPFS, 4 OWN SHIP POSN 3 MANUAL SPEED INPUT (0.0kn~99.9kn; 0.0kn) 4 SET DRIFT (OFF, ON (000.0~359.9;
000.0, 00.0~19.9kn; 00.0kn) 1 BACK
* C-type only 2 POSITION SOURCE (EPFS1, EPFS2, LAN, ECDIS, DEAD RECKONING) 5 DATE 3 MANUAL L/L INPUT
(0000.000~9000.00N/S; 0000.000N, 00000.000~18000.00E/W; 00000.000E) 4 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT (OFF, ON) 5 COORDINATE SYSTEM (LL, LORANDECCA) 6 GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, TOKYO) POSITIONING SYSTEM (Shows system in use.) 1 BACK 2 DATE-TIME (UTC, LOCAL) 3 ADJUST LOCAL TIME (-12:00 to +14:00; +00:00) 4 DATE (DD/MMM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD, YYYY/MMM/DD, MMM/DD/YYYY)*
5 TIME (12HOUR, 24HOUR)*
DATA SOURCE (Shows time/date source.) 3 DISPLAY NAV DATA (OFF, ON) 4 NAV DATA SETTING
(IMO-type) 1 BACK 2 DEPTH (OFF, ON; m, ft) 3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500) 4 DEPTH MARK (000~500; 000) 5 CURRENT (OFF, ON) 6 WIND (OFF, ON; kn, m/s) 7 WIND REFERENCE (APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL) 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 TEMPERATURE (OFF, ON; C, F) 3 WPT DATA (OFF, REL, TRUE) 1 BACK 2 DEPTH (OFF, ON; m, ft) 3 CURRENT (OFF, ON) 4 WIND REFERENCE (APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL) 5 WIND (OFF, ON; kn, m/s) 6 TEMPERATURE (OFF, ON; C, F) 7 WPT DATA (OFF, REL, TRUE) 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 MOB DATA (OFF, ON) 3 HIRO SETTING (10000~1.9999m, 1.5152m) 4 NAV DATA SETTING
(C-type) AP-10 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE 5 ZOOM (OFF, 2TIMES, 3TIMES 6 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, TT TRACK) 7 TARGET DATA (1BOX, 2BOX, 3BOX, LARGE, TT5BOX) 8 DISPLAY TT COORDS (OFF, ON) 9 NAV DATA COLOR (STD, CHART COLOR) 1 BACK 2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE (OFF/EXT DATA/INTERNAL DATA) 3 NAV LINE SELECT (Unselected, 01 to 30; FORWARD, REVERSE) 4 SKIP NEXT WPT 5 NAV LINE WIDTH (0.00NM to 9.99NM) 6 WPT SET 8 ROUTES WAYPOINTS
(IMO-type) 1 BACK 2 WPT No. SELECT (001 to 198) 3 WPT NAME (Input waypoint name.) 4 WPT L/L (0000.000~9000.00N/S, 00000.000N, 00000.000~18000.000E/W; 00000.000E) 5 CLEAR DATA (NO, YES) 7 WPT LIST 8 NAV LINE SET 1 BACK 2 SELECT NAV LINE (01 to 30,) 3 NAV LINE NAME (Input navline name.) 4 NAV LINE ENTRY 5 CLEAR DATA (NO, YES) 9 NAV LINE LIST 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 WPT ARRIVAL DIST (OFF, ON; 0.00NM~9.99NM; 0.00NM) 3 TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED) 4 DISPLAY WPT No. (OFF, ON) 5 DISPLAY WPT NAME (OFF, ON) 1 BACK 2 SHOW WAYPOINTS LIST 3 SHOW ROUTES LIST 4 WAYPOINT MARK (OFF, SMALL, LARGE) 5 WPT NAME DISPLAY (OFF, SMALL, LARGE) 6 SET GOTO METHOD (1 POINT, 100 POINTS) 1 BACK 7 WAYPOINT 2 BEARING TO WYPOINT (REL, TRUE) SETTINGS 3 RNG & BRG MODE (GREAT CIR., RHUMB LINE) 4 WPT ARRIVAL TIME (TTG, ETA) 5 WPT REFRESH SETTING (WPT ON VERTICAL LINE/ARRIVE ALERT RANGE) 6 CONFIRM OVERWRITE (OFF, ON) 7 WPT NAME ZERO DISPLAY (HIDE 0, ALL 0) 8 WPT POP UP INFO (OFF, ON) 9 TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED) 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 TURNING LINE SETTING 1 BACK 2 SPEED RATE(0.00~9.99kn/s; 0.00kn/s) 3 TURN RATE(00.0~99.9; 00.0) 8 ROUTE DATA SOURCE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL 1 BACK 2 BRILL 1 BACK 2 ECHO COLOR (YEL, GRN, WHT, AMB*, M-GRN*, M-CYA*) 3 PALETTE (DAY-GRY, DAY-BLU, DAY-GRN, DUSK-GRY, 8 ROUTES WAYPOINTS
(C-type) 9 INITIAL SETTINGS DUSK-BLU, DUSK-GRN, NIGHT-GRY, NIGHT-BLU) 4 CONTROL PANEL (0~15, 15) 5 CHARACTERS (0~15, 15) 6 CURSOR (7~15, 15) 7 ECHOES (0~15, 15) 8 TRAILS (0~15, 15) 9 HL (7~15, 15) 0 NEXT
* C-type only AP-11 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE 3 SELECT ANTENNA 4 USER*2 SETTINGS 5 OPERATION AP-12
*1: is antenna no. assigned at installation.
*2: IMO-type only
*3: C-type only
*4: Default setting for IMO-type Page 2 1 BACK 2 RANGE RINGS (0~15, 15) 3 BEARING CURSOR (0~15, 15) 4 EBL (0~15, 15) 5 VRM (0~15, 15) 6 PI LINES (0~15, 15) 7 TT SYMBOLS (0~15, 15) 8 AIS SYMBOLS (0~15, 15) 9 L/L GRID (0~15, 15) 0 NEXT Page 3 (IMO-type) 1 BACK 2 MARKS (0~15, 15) Page 3 (C-type) 1 BACK 2 PLOTTER (0~15, 7) 3 CHART (0~15, 7) 4 DEPTH (0~15, 7) 1 BACK 2 ANT1*1 (MASTER, SLAVE) 3 ANT2*1 (MASTER, SLAVE) 4 ANT3*1 (MASTER, SLAVE) 5 ANT4*1 (MASTER, SLAVE) 6 SAVE INTER-SWITCH (NO, YES) 7 CLEAR INTER-SWITCH (NO, YES) 1 BACK 2 PILOT SETTING (NO, YES) 3 USER1 SAVE (NO, YES) 4 USER1 LOAD (NO, YES) 5 USER2 SAVE (NO, YES) 6 USER2 LOAD (NO, YES) 1 BACK 2 MOUSE WHEEL DIR (NORMAL, REVERSE) 3 KEY BEEP (OFF, LOW, MID, HIGH) 4 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE) 5 STERN UP RM (OFF, ON) 6 SHUTTLE FERRY (OFF, MODE1, MODE2) 6 DISPLAY MODE (NORMAL, SIMPLE)*3 7 ICING PREVENTION (OFF, ON) 8 HDG FINE ADJUST (-9.9 to +9.9; +0.0) 9 USB MOUSE SPEED (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 AUTO COURSE UP RESET (OFF, ON) 3 DISPLAY SCROLL (OFF, ON) 4 CURSOR MENU*3 SELECT 1 BACK 2 TARGET CANCEL (OFF, ON) 3 TT TGT DATA/ACQ (OFF, ON) 4 EBL OFFSET (OFF, ON) 5 OFF CENTER (OFF, ON) 6 ZOOM (OFF, ON) 7 MARK DELETE (OFF, ON) 8 OWN TRACK DELETE (OFF, ON) 9 MAP ALIGN (OFF, ON) 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 TRAIL ERASE (OFF, ON) 3 MARK SELECT (OFF, ON) 4 MOVE MARKWPT (OFF, ON) 5 WPT (OFF, ON) 6 GO TO (OFF, ON) 7 TRACK COLOR (OFF, ON) 8 TRACK ON-OFF (OFF, ON) 9 CURSOR ON-OFF (OFF, ON) 5 MODE KEY FUNCTION*3 (ORIENTATION, CURSOR ON-OFF) 6 TRAIL TIME LINK (NO LINK, LINK RANGE) 7 VECTOR TIME LINK (NO LINK, LINK RANGE) APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE 6 FUNCTION KEY SETUP 1 BACK 2 F1 1 BACK 2 ECHO 1 BACK 2 (CUSTOM SELECT, IR, ES, EAV, NOISE REJ, ANT SELECT, PULSE LENGTH, AUTO-SEA, AUTO-RAIN, TUNE SELECT, 2ND ECHO REJ, STC CURVE, STC RANGE, PM, SART, ECHO TRAIL, TRAIL T/R, WIPER*1, ACE, ACE HIGH SENSITIVITY) 3 STD KEY 1 BACK 2 (ALERT ACK, STBY TX, HL OFF, EBL OFFSET, ORIENTATION-MODE, OFFCENTER, CU-TM RESET, PI LINE, VECTOR TIME, VECTOR MODE, TARGET LIST, BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE UP, RANGE DOWN, ACQ, TARGET DATA, TARGET CANCEL) 4 TTAIS 1 BACK 2 (TT-DISP, AIS-DISP, TARGET DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN INTERVAL, REF MARK, CPA LIMIT, CPA, TCPA, AZ1, AZ2, TARGET LIST SORT, TRIAL MANEUVER*1, TRIAL MODE CHANGE*1, ASSOCIATION, AIS MESSAGE, AIS SCALED SYMBOL, CONSORT-DISP*2, GPS BUOY-DISP*2) CONSORT MESSAGES) 1 BACK 2 (MARK DELETE, MARK ALL DELETE, OWN TRK DELETE, OWN TRK ALL DELETE, TGT TRK DELETE*2 , TGT TRK ALL DELETE*2) 5 DELETE DATA 0 NEXT Page 2 (C-type) 1 BACK 2 (CONSORT LIST,GPS BUOY LIST, 6 OPERATION 1 BACK 2 (BUZZER STOP, ECHO AREA*2, ECHO COLOR, PALETTE, RING(ON/OFF), ZOOM, MOB, ALARM1, ALARM2, WATCH ALERT RESET, TLL*2, MAP ALIGN, ANCHOR WATCH, DROP MARK, SCREEN SHOT, CHART DISPLAY*2, NAV AIDS*2, CURSOR ON-OFF, CURSOR CENTER*2) 7 PLOTTER*2 0 NEXT Page 2 (C-type) 1 BACK 2 (CURSOR OFF CENTER, DISPLAY MODE*2) 1 BACK 2 (WPT, GO TO, WAYPOINT LIST, MARK SELECT, TRK COLOR SEL*3, TRK INTVL, PLOTTER, EDIT TRACK, MARK SIZE, EDIT MARK, WAYPOINT MARK, OWN TRACK DISPLAY, TRK ROUTE CONVERSION, GRID, ENLARGED CURSOR INFO, TRK TEMP DATA DISP, TRK DEPTH DATA DISP) 1 BACK 2 PICURE1~PiCTURE12) 3 F2 (Same options as F1, default: ES*4, TRK INTERVAL*3) 4 F3 (Same options as F1, default: AUTO-SEA*4, MARK SELECT*3) 5 F4 (Same options as F1, default: AUTO-RAIN*4, TLL*3) 0 NEXT PICTURE*2
*1: IMO-type only
*2: C-type only
*3: C-type default setting
*4: IMO-type default setting
*5: Requires antenna rotation. AP-13 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE 7 TESTS Page 2 (C-type) 1 BACK 2 F1 KEY MODE (SINGLE, MULTI) 3 F2 KEY MODE (SINGLE, MULTI) 4 F3 KEY MODE (SINGLE, MULTI) 5 F1 KEY MODE (SINGLE, MULTI) 1 BACK 2 DIAGNOSTIC TEST 3 SENTENCE MONITOR 1 BACK 2 HDG 3 GPS 4 LOG 5 AIS 6 AMS 7 ECDIS 8 LAN1 9 LAN2 MODE*
4 TT SIMULATION 8 CHART UPDATE*
9 LORAN DECCA 1 BACK 2 LORANDECCA SETTING 3 LORANDECCA SELECT (LORAN A, LORAN C, DECCA)
*: C-type only Right-click the display. Default settings in bold italic. 2 (TARGET DATA / ACQ, TARGET CANCEL, TT TGT DATA / ACQ*1, EBL OFFSET, OFF CENTER, ZOOM, MARK DELETE, OWN TRACK DELETE, MAP ALIGN, TRAIL ERASER2, MARK SELECT2, MOVE MARKWPT2, WPT2, GO TO2, TRACK COLOR2,TRACK ON-OFF2, CURSOR ON-OFF2) 0 NEXT Page 2 1 BACK 2 TGT DATA/ACQ SETTING (ANY, TT ONLY, AIS ONLY) 3 TGT CANCEL SETTING (ANY, TT ONLY, AIS ONLY 4 CIRCLE CURSOR*1 5 REF MARK*1
*1: IMO-type only
*2: C-type only AP-14 APPENDIX 2 LONGITUDE ERROR TA-
BLE (96 NM SCALE) The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole, namely, 1 nm is equivalent to 1 minute at 0 degree latitude, 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude, 3 minutes at 70 degrees latitude and so on. For this reason, a longitude error occurs on the radar display. For example, when own ship is at 60N and 135E, even if the cursor indication is 62N and 139E, the real cursor position is deviated to the left (west) side. The table below shows the longitude er-
ror, represented from 0 to 90 at 96 nm from the radar center (own ship). Real cursor position N Cursor position indicated Real cursor position R: Error Cursor position indicated 96 nm q LAT E 62N 60N 135E 139E OS position
(nm) q LAT 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0.2256 0.4444 0.6496 0.8350 0.9950 1.1248 1.2202 1.2786 1.2980 0.21980213 0.43290201 0.632803 0.8134132 0.96923215 1.09551918 1.1884382 1.24517456 1.26402037 0.21229339 0.41810678 0.61115946 0.78556318 0.93600295 1.05790007 1.14755221 1.20224625 1.22034042 0.20316898 0.40012949 0.58486463 0.75173456 0.89565021 1.0122297 1.09793265 1.15016811 1.16737294 0.19249832 0.37910698 0.55411863 0.71218478 0.84848102 0.95885565 1.03998717 1.08933651 1.10552105 0.18036264 0.35519924 0.51915545 0.66721485 0.79485438 0.89818413 0.97406698 1.02021439 1.03525547 0.16685429 0.32858822 0.48024119 0.61716701 0.73517843 0.83067689 0.90076355 0.94332783 0.95711098 0.15207608 0.29947644 0.437672 0.56242216 0.66990732 0.7568477 0.82060477 0.85926197 0.87168229 0.13614047 0.26808546 0.39177186 0.53339693 0.59953781 0.67725844 0.73420069 0.76865661 0.77961957 0.11916876 0.2346542 0.3428901 0.44054055 0.52460545 0.59251483 0.6422089 0.67220131 0.68162348 0.10129001 0.19943707 0.29139874 0.37433139 0.44568053 0.50326182 0.54532952 0.57063015 0.57843983 0.08264056 0.16270211 0.23768966 0.30527334 0.36336372 0.41017869 0.44429984 0.46471615 0.47085389 0.06336208 0.12472888 0.18217162 0.23389198 0.27828148 0.31397386 0.33988878 0.35526538 0.35968447 0.04360137 0.0858064 0.12526714 0.16073056 0.19108136 0.21537949 0.23289096 0.24311083 0.24577764 0.02350833 0.04623087 0.0674093 0.08634588 0.10242699 0.11514595 0.1241207 0.12910605 0.13000029 0.00323737 0.0063035 0.00903844 0.01130406 0.01299309 0.01403609 0.0144058 0.0141187 0.01323356 AP-15 APPENDIX 2 LONGITUDE ERROR TABLE (96 NM SCALE) 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
(nm) 1.2780 1.2192 1.1233 0.9933 0.8332 0.6479 0.4431 0.2249 0 1.24442563 1.18701379 1.09356117 0.96694117 0.81103484 0.3061092 0.43117887 0.21881975 0 1.20131324 1.14577786 1.05546143 0.93315023 0.78260251 0.60843159 0.41596331 0.21107193 0 1.14905813 1.09582188 1.00932899 0.89225746 0.74821409 0.58162173 0.397582 0.20171772 0 1.08805799 1.03752602 0.95551494 0.84457408 0.70813132 0.55038538 0.37617487 0.19082831 0 1.0187708 0.97133397 0.89442885 0.79046297 0.66265924 0.51496026 0.35190481 0.17848659 0 0.94174265 0.89774948 0.82653562 0.73033596 0.61214392 0.47561599 0.32495654 0.16478648 0 0.85754099 0.81733258 0.75235195 0.66465066 0.55696981 0.43265198 0.29553516 0.14983224 0 0.76681293 0.73069528 0.63744242 0.59390696 0.49755683 0.38639524 0.26386458 0.13373769 0 0.67024897 0.63849695 0.58741521 0.51864327 0.43435714 0.33719779 0.23018583 0.11662531 0 0.568584 0.54143927 0.49791741 0.43943239 0.36785173 0.28543407 0.19475522 0.09862535 0 0.46259176 0.44026091 0.40463016 0.35687717 0.29854675 0.23149802 0.15784242 0.07987479 0 0.35307892 0.3357319 0.30826343 0.2716059 0.22696965 0.17580013 0.11972833 0.06051633 0 0.2487894 0.22864776 0.20955062 0.18426754 0.15366517 0.1187643 0.08070304 0.0406973 0 0.12684572 0.11982348 0.10624302 0.09552679 0.0791912 0.04106355 0.04106355 0.02056855 0 0.01184713 0.01008727 0.008104 0.00605903 0.00411455 0.00111154 0.00111154 0.00028325 0 q LAT 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 AP-16 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MES-
SAGES & MEANINGS For ALF format alerts, the alert identifier (the first three/five digits of the alert code), is displayed on the alert list and in the alert box. The alert instance (the last one or two digits of the alert code), is transferred along with it's identifier to the connected Bridge Alert Management System. The ta-
ble below shows the alert ID for ALF formats alerts, with the instance separated by a comma. ALR format alerts have no instance assigned. ALR Alert ID
ALF Alert ID 52190,1 Alert title Priority &
Category TARGET CAPACITY Caution Cat: B Alert description Message: "TT TARGET 95%(AUTO)"
Meaning: Automatically acquired target capacity has reached 95%. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually. 523 TARGET CAPACITY Warning 190,2 Cat: A Message: "TT TARGET FULL(AUTO)"
Meaning: Automatically acquired target capacity has reached 100%. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually.
52190,3 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Cat: B Message: "TT TARGET 95%(MAN)"
Meaning: Manually acquired target ca-
pacity has reached 95%. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually. 525 TARGET CAPACITY Warning 190,4 Cat: A Message: "TT TARGET FULL(MAN)"
Meaning: Manually acquired target ca-
pacity has reached 100%. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually.
52190,5 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Cat: B Message: "AIS DISPLAY 95%"
Meaning: AIS display capacity has reached 95% (333 targets). Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Adjust [AIS DISP FILTER] settings to decrease the number of targets displayed. 531 TARGET CAPACITY Warning 190,6 Cat: A Message: "AIS DISPLAY FULL"
Meaning: AIS display capacity has reached 100% (350 targets). Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Adjust [AIS DISP FILTER] settings to decrease the number of targets displayed.
52190,8 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Cat: B Message: "AIS CAPACITY FULL"
Meaning: AIS capacity has reached 100% (1200 targets). Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Adjust [AIS DISP FILTER] settings to decrease the number of targets displayed.
52190,9 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Message: "ACTIVE AIS 95%"
Meaning: Active AIS target capacity has reached 95% (48 targets). Remedy: Press the Press the ALARM ACK key. Sleep all unnecessary AIS targets. 535 TARGET CAPACITY Warning 190,10 Cat: B Cat: A Message: "ACTIVE AIS FULL"
Meaning: Active AIS target capacity has reached 100% (50 targets). Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Sleep all unnecessary AIS targets. AP-17 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ALR Alert ID 526 ALF Alert ID 191,1 Alert title CPA/TCPA Priority &
Category Alarm Cat: A Alert description Message: "TT DANGER OF COLLI-
SION"
Meaning: TT is within CPA/TCPA threshold, danger of collision. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Take evasive action if necessary. Adjust CPA/TCPA settings. Alarm 536 Cat: A CPA/TCPA 191,2 Message: "AIS DANGER OF COLLI-
SION"
Meaning: AIS target is within CPA/TCPA threshold, danger of collision. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Take evasive action if necessary. Adjust CPA/TCPA settings. Warning 521 Cat: A NEW TARGET Message: "TT NEW TARGET"
Meaning: A new TT target has entered the Acquisition Zone. 192,1 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm location of new target. 529 NEW TARGET 192,2 Warning Cat: A Message: "AIS NEW TARGET"
Meaning: A new AIS target has entered the Acquisition Zone. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm location of new target. 527 LOST TARGET 193,1 Warning Cat: A Message: "TT TARGET LOST"
Meaning: TT target is lost. 193,2 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lost target indication (blinking in red) is removed. 528 Message: "REF TARGET LOST"
Meaning: REF targets is lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lost target indication (blinking in red) is removed. 537 Warning Cat: A LOST TARGET LOST TARGET 193,3 Warning Cat: A Message: "AIS TARGET LOST"
Meaning: AIS target is lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lost target indication (blinking in red) is removed. 720 SYSTEM ERROR 194,1 Warning Cat: B Message: "NO HEADLINE SIGNAL"
Meaning: Heading marker signal inter-
rupted/lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 721 SYSTEM ERROR 194,2 Warning Cat: B Message: "NO AZIMUTH SIGNAL"
Meaning: Antenna signal is interrupted/
lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 722 SYSTEM ERROR 194,3 Warning Cat: B Message: "NO TRIGGER SIGNAL"
Meaning: Antenna trigger interrupted/
lost Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 723 SYSTEM ERROR 194,4 Warning Cat: B Message: "NO VIDEO SIGNAL"
Meaning: Video signal interrupted/lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 70 SYSTEM ERROR 194,5 Warning Cat: B Message: "CTRL UNIT COM ERROR"
Meaning: Keyboard (RCU-014/015/016) signal interrupted/lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 782 SYSTEM ERROR 194,6 Warning Cat: B Message: "PM COM ERROR"
Meaning: PM communication error. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. AP-18 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ALR Alert ID 48 ALF Alert ID 194,7 Alert title SYSTEM ERROR Priority &
Category Warning Cat: B Alert description Message: "TUNE ERROR"
Meaning: TUNE error due to faulty set-
tings or malfunction. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 727 SYSTEM ERROR 194,8 Warning Cat: B Message: "RADAR ANT COM ERROR"
Meaning: Signal between processor and antenna interrupted/lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 781 SYSTEM ERROR 194,9 Warning Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV COM ERROR"
Meaning: Signal between antennas SPU and MTR-DRV interrupted/lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 783 SYSTEM ERROR 194,10 Warning Cat: B Message: "RF-CONVERTER COM ER-
ROR"
Meaning: Signal between antennas SPU and RF-CONVERTER interrupted/
lost. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss. 784 SYSTEM ERROR 194,11 Warning Cat: B Message: "LAN1 NETWORK ERROR"
Meaning: LAN1 IP address is use by other equipment. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check IP settings and assign a unique IP address. 785 SYSTEM ERROR 194,12 Warning Cat: B Message: "LAN2 NETWORK ERROR"
Meaning: LAN1 IP address is use by other equipment. 194,13 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check IP settings and assign a unique IP address. Message: "RP COM ERROR"
786 Meaning: Signal between MAIN board and RP board in the processor is inter-
rupted or lost. SYSTEM ERROR*6 Warning Cat: B Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal or rectify the reason for the signal loss. Message: "NO TUNE GATE SIGNAL"
787 Meaning: No tune gate signal from the FAR-2x58/FAR-2268DS antenna. SYSTEM ERROR*6 Warning 194,14 Cat: B Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Consult your local dealer for service. SYSTEM ERROR*6 Warning 788 194,15 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Consult your dealer for a software update. 789 SYSTEM ERROR*6 Warning 194,16 Cat: B Cat: B Message: "RP VERSION MISMATCH"
Meaning: MAIN board and RP board software versions do not match. Message: "TX-HV ERROR"
Meaning: FAR-2x58/FAR-2268DS An-
tenna voltage is below 300 V. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Turn the PSU-019 power on. If the problem persists, consult your local dealer for service. 52485,1 485 DEPTH Warning Cat: B Message: "DEPTH ALERT"
Meaning: Ship position outside set an-
chor watch zone. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm Own Ship location and adjust as necessary. AP-19 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ALR Alert ID 495 ALF Alert ID 52495,1 Alert title ANCHOR WATCH Priority &
Category Warning Cat: B Alert description Message: "OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH ZONE"
Meaning: Ship position outside set an-
chor watch zone.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm Own Ship location and adjust as necessary. Message: "TRANSMIT ERROR"
Meaning: Unable to transmit AIS binary message. Caution Cat: B AIS MSG 52540,1 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check power to AIS unit. SENSOR ERROR 450 52601,1 Warning Cat: B Message: "NO GYRO SIGNAL"
Meaning: No heading information re-
ceived from gyrocompass for five sec-
onds. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Match the on-screen indication with the actual gyrocompass. 278 52601,2 SENSOR ERROR*1 Warning/
Caution Cat: B Message: "NO LOG(WT) SINGAL"
Meaning: No speed data received for five seconds when [LOG(WT)] is set as speed reference. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check SDME sensor. Use a different sensor if necessary. 284 52601,3 SENSOR ERROR*2 Warning/
Caution Cat: B Message: "NO LOG(BT) SIGNAL"
Meaning: No speed data received for thirty seconds when [LOG(BT)] is set as speed reference. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check SDME sensor. Use a different sensor if necessary. 170 SENSOR ERROR 52601,4 Warning Cat: B Message: "NO POSITION SIGNAL"
Meaning: EPFS Error. No position data received from EPFS device for thirty seconds. 52601,5 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal. This indication cannot be erased if the position signal is missing. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored. Message: "POSITION DATUM UN-
469 KNOWN"
Meaning: DTM sentence not received for thirty seconds, or erroneous data re-
ceived. Warning Cat: B SENSOR ERROR Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Use the WGS-84 datum. SENSOR ERROR 272 52601,6 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal to remove this indication. 380 SENSOR ERROR 52601,7 Warning Cat: B Warning Cat: B Message: "NO UTC SIGNAL"
Meaning: UTC error. No date or time data received for thirty seconds. No ZDA sentence input. Message: "AIS COM ERROR"
Meaning: No AIS data received for thirty seconds. Note: When [AIS FUNC] is set to [OFF], this message is prioritized as a Caution level alert; when [AIS FUNC] is set to
[ON], it is prioritized as a Warning level alert. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check power and connection to AIS unit. AP-20 ALR Alert ID 279 ALF Alert ID 52601,8 Alert title SENSOR ERROR APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS Priority &
Category Warning Cat: B Alert description Message: "NO COG/SOG SIGNAL"
Meaning: EPFS Error. No COG/SOG data received from EPFS device for thir-
ty seconds. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal. This indication cannot be erased if the COG/SOG signal is missing. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored. 50 SENSOR ERROR 52601,9 Warning Cat: B Message: "ECDIS COM ERROR"
Meaning: No ECDIS data received for thirty seconds. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check power and connection to ECDIS unit.
52602,1 SOURCE CHANGE Caution Cat: B Message: "POSN SOURCE CHG"
Meaning: Positioning sensor input lost, automatically changed sensors. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored or a different sensor is selected.
52602,2 SOURCE CHANGE Caution Cat: B Message: "SPD SOURCE CHG"
Meaning: Speed sensor input lost, auto-
matically changed sensors. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored or a different sensor is selected.
52602,3 SOURCE CHANGE Caution Cat: B Message: "HDG SOURCE CHG"
Meaning: Heading sensor input lost, au-
tomatically changed sensors. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored or a different sensor is selected. 740 EXT RADAR ERROR Warning 52740,1 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the external radar to normal operating condition. 750 EXT RADAR ERROR Warning 52740,2 Cat: B Cat: B Message: "EXT RADAR NO SIGNAL"
Meaning: Selected radar has an error.
(Only displayed when Interswitch is ac-
tive.) Message: "EXT RADAR COM ERROR"
Meaning: Communication with external radar interrupted or lost. (Only displayed when Interswitch is active.) 52790,1 ARRIVAL Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check connection and power to the external radar. Message: "ARRIVED AT WPT"
790 Meaning: Ship has entered the destina-
tion arrival alert zone. Note: This alert appears on C-type ra-
dars only. Warning Cat: B Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. No other action required. 791 XTD LIMIT 52791,1 Warning Cat: B Message: "XTD LIMIT EXCEEDED"
Meaning: Cross-track error, ship is off-
course. Note: This alert appears on C-type ra-
dars only. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check course and adjust as necessary.
52001,1 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RPU:FAN1 SPD ERROR"
Meaning: FAN1 in the processor unit has low RPM. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan. AP-21 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ALR Alert ID
ALF Alert ID 52001,2 Alert title HW STATUS NO-
TICE Priority &
Category Caution Cat: B Alert description Message: "RPU:FAN2 SPD ERROR"
Meaning: FAN2 in the processor unit has low RPM. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
52001,3 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RPU:FAN3 SPD ERROR"
Meaning: FAN3 in the processor unit has low RPM. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
52001,4 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RPU:HIGH TEMP"
Meaning: Temperature in the processor unit is above limit. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lower the temperature. HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B 52001,5
Message: "MONITOR:HIGH TEMP"
Meaning: Temperature in the monitor unit is above limit. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lower the temperature. HW STATUS NO-
TICE*6 Caution Cat: B 52001,6
Message: "RPU:FAN (RP) SPD ER-
ROR"
Meaning: The RPU fan on the RP board, in the processor unit, has low RPM. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
52001,11 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MD TYPE MISMATCH"*3 Meaning: Unable to detect the MD board bandwidth. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check connections to the antenna.
52001,12 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "PM TYPE MISMATCH"*3 Meaning: FAN1 in the processor unit has low RPM. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
52001,21 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:TEMP HIGH"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board temperature is above limit. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lower the temperature.
52001,22 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:OVER CUR-
RENT"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board power input from the motor is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the motor.
52001,23 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:MOTOR POWER ERROR"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board motors volt-
age is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the motor.
52001,24 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:P12V POWER ERROR"
Meaning: Voltage in the +12V line of the MTR-DRV motor is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power supply. AP-22 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ALR Alert ID
ALF Alert ID 52001,25 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Alert title Priority &
Category Caution Cat: B Alert description Message: "MTR-DRV:HALL SENSOR ERROR"
Meaning: Error in the hall sensor signal detected by the MTR-DRV board. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the hall sensor.
52001,26 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:ANTENNA LOCK"
Meaning: Antenna lock detected by the MTR-DRV board. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Unlock the antenna.
52001,27 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:POWER SUP-
PLY ERROR"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board detected an drop in power. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power supply.
52001,28 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:BRAKE RESIS-
TANCE ERROR"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board detected an error in the brake resistance. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the antenna brake.
52001,29 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "MTR-DRV:OVERLOAD"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board detected an overload. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the motor.
52001,31 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "PM:P12V POWER ERROR"
Meaning: Voltage in the +12V line of the PM board is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power supply.
52001,32 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "PM:PLL UNLOCK"
Meaning: PM boards PLL is unlocked. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the PM board.
52001,41 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RF-CONV:P6V POWER ER-
ROR"*4 Meaning: Voltage in the +6V line of the RF-Converter is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power.
52001,42 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RF-CONV:P48V POWER ERROR"*4 Meaning: Voltage in the +6V line of the RF-Converter is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power.
52001,43 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RF-CONV:IF PLL UN-
LOCK"*4 Meaning: PLL lock on the IF side of the RF-Converter is unlocked. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
52001,44 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RF-CONV:PLL UNLOCK"*4 Meaning: PLL lock on the RF side of the RF-Converter is unlocked. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter. AP-23 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ALR Alert ID
ALF Alert ID 52001,45 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Alert title Priority &
Category Caution Cat: B Alert description Message: "RF-CONV:OUTPUT SIG-
NAL LEVEL ERROR"*4 Meaning: Signal output from the RF Converter is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
52001,46 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "RF-CONV:INTPUT SIGNAL LEVEL ERROR"*4 Meaning: Signal input to the RF Con-
verter is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
52001,47 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "HPA:OUTPUT SIGNAL LEVEL ERROR"*4 Meaning: Signal output from the HPA board is outside rating. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the HPA board.
52001,48 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Message: "HPA:OUTPUT PEAK CUR-
RENT ERROR"*4 Meaning: Peak current detected in the signal output from the HPA board.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the HPA board. Message: "VSWR ERROR"*4 Meaning: Abnormal VSWR detected by the RF Converter. 52001,52 HW STATUS NO-
TICE Caution Cat: B Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the antenna. 83 52002,01 HW STATUS ER-
ROR Warning Cat: B Message: "RPU FAN1 NO ROTATION"
Meaning: Fan1 in the processor unit is stopped or disconnected. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit. 84 52002,02 HW STATUS ER-
ROR Warning Cat: B Message: "RPU FAN2 NO ROTATION"
Meaning: Fan2 in the processor unit is stopped or disconnected. 85 Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit. Message: "RPU FAN3 NO ROTA-
TION"*6 Meaning: Fan3 in the processor unit is stopped or disconnected. 52002,03 HW STATUS ER-
ROR Warning Cat: B Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit. 86 52002,04 HW STATUS ER-
ROR*5 Warning Cat: B Message: "RPU FAN (RP) NO ROTA-
TION"
Meaning: The RPU fan on the RP board, in the processor unit, is stopped or dis-
connected. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit. 87 52002,05 HW STATUS ER-
ROR*5 Warning Cat: B Message: "RPU RP HW ERROR"*7 Meaning: The RP board has stopped working. Charts and marks cannot be displayed. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit. AP-24 ALR Alert ID
ALF Alert ID 52729,01 POSN INT ERROR Alert title APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS Priority &
Category Caution Cat: B Alert description Message: "POSN INTERVAL ERROR"
Meaning: Positioning interval (Lat/Lon) cycle has exceeded 10 seconds for a period of three minutes or more. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check the output settings for the connected EPFS device. Adjust output interval (cycle) as required. 52792,01 CHART ERROR*5 792 Warning Cat: B Message: "CHART MEMORY ERROR"
Meaning: An error has occurred while loading chart data. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit. 570 52570,01 LEAVE*5 Warning Cat: B Message: "DESTINATION LEAVE"
Meaning: Your ship has passed beyond the set distance while the [WAYPOINT DEPARTURE ALERT] is active. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check your route and waypoints and steer your vessel ac-
cordingly. 571 52571,01 INSTRUSION*5 Warning Cat: B Message: "INTRUSION BAN"
Meaning: Your ship has entered a pre-
set no-go-zone while the [NO GO ZONE] alert is active. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Move your vessel away from the no-go-zone. 572 52572,01 TEMPERATURE*5 Warning Cat: B Message: "WATER TEMPERATURE ALERT"
Meaning: A change in water tempera-
ture was detected that matches the cri-
teria for the [WATER TEMP ALERT]. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Move your vessel to an area within the alert limits. 573 52573,01 CURRENT*5 Warning Cat: B Message: "CURRENT RIP"
Meaning: A temperature change was detected that matches the criteria set for
[SHEER ALERT]. Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Move your vessel to an area within the alert limits.
*1: When LOG(WT) is not selected, the alert priority for this alert is changed to "Caution". Caution level alerts are not shown on C-type radars.
*2: When LOG(BT) is not selected, the alert priority for this alert is changed to "Caution". Caution level alerts are not shown on C-type radars.
*3: This alert is output on magnetron radars only.
*4: This alert appears on S-BAND SSD radars only.
*5: This alert is output only on C-types radars.
*6: This alert is output only on S-BAND radars with High Speed Kits installed.
*7: When this alert is rectified, [Chart] button appears in yellow color. Click the [Chart] button to re-
store the system to normal operation. AP-25 COG/SOG VTG-A, D, P RMC-A, D, F, P, R and
(status: A) and (NAV status: S, V). VTG-E, M, S RMC-E, M, S, and (sta-
tus: A) RMC-A, D, F, P, R and
(status: A) and (NAV status: C, U) APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING Validity and integrity of input data (mode indicator) Data color Normal color
(normal data) HDG THS-A, E HDT L/L GNS-A, D *1, F, P, R and (NAV status: S, V) GGA-1, 2 *1, 3, 4, 5 GLL-A, D and (status: A) RMC-A, D, F, P, R and (status: A) and (NAV status: S, V) SPD VBW-A VHW Yellow-or-
ange color
(invalid data) Yellow color
(low integrity)
GNS-E, M, S GGA-6, 7, 8 GLL-E, M, S and (status: A) RMC-E, M, S and (Status: A) GNS-A, D*1, F, P, R, and (NAV status: C, U) RMC-A, D, F, P, R and (status: A) and (NAV status: C, U) THS-M, V, S GNS-N GGA-0 RMC-N, (status: V), (NAV status: N) GLL-N, (status: V) VBW-V VTG-N RMC-N (sta-
tus: V)
*1: Age of differential GPS data in GGA and GNS sentences is ten seconds or higher. In this case, ships latitude and longitude are displayed in yellow. AP-26 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS A:
Abbreviation ACK Act ANT AP AUTO A/C SEA ALF AMB APR AUG Word Acknowledge Activate Antenna Autopilot Automatic Anti Clutter Sea ALF sentence Amber April August B:
Abbreviation ACQ ACE AIS ATON A/C RAIN AID ALR AMS ARC Word Acquire Automatic Clutter Elimination Automatic Identification System Aids to Navigation Anti Clutter Rain Aid Alarm Alert Management System Arc Abbreviation BLU BCT BRILL Word Blue Bow Crossing Time Brilliance Abbreviation BCR BRG BT Word Bow Crossing Range Bearing Bottom Tracking C:
Abbreviation CALC CH CCRP CPA CPU CTW CU D:
Word Calculated Channel Consistent Common Refer-
ence Point Closest Point of Approach Central Processing Unit Course Through the Water Course Up Abbreviation CALIB CHG CONT Word Calibrate Change Continue CORR CRS COG CYA Corrected/Correction Course Course Over Ground Cyan Abbreviation DTM deg DGPS DIST Word Datum degree(s) Differential GPS Distance Abbreviation DEC DEST DISP DR Word December Destination Display Dead Reckoning AP-27 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS E:
Abbreviation E EBL ECDIS EQUIP ES ETD F:
Word East Electronic Bearing Line Electronic Chart Display and Information System Equipment Echo Stretch Estimated Time of Departure Abbreviation EAV EBRL EP Word Echo Averaging Electronic Bearing Range Line Estimated Position ERR ETA EXT Error Estimated Time of Arrival External Abbreviation FEB FUNC February Function Word G:
Abbreviation FILT Filter/Filtered Word Abbreviation GAP GND Gap Ground Word Abbreviation GC GMDSS GPS GRN GT H:
Global Positioning System Green Gross Tonnage GRAD GRY Word Great Circle Global Maritime Distress and Safety System Gradation Gray Abbreviation HD HL Word Heading Heading Line Abbreviation HDG HSC Word Heading High Speed Craft I:
Abbreviation IBS IMO INS IR J:
Word Integrated Bridge System International Maritime Or-
ganization Integrated Navigation Sys-
tem Interference Rejection Abbreviation ID INT Identification Interval Word INFO Information IP ADDRESS Internet Protocol Address Abbreviation JAN JUL Word January July Abbreviation JUN Word June AP-28 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS L:
Abbreviation L LAN LIM LOG LOP Word Long pulse Local Area Network Limit Log Line Of Position Abbreviation LAT LCD L/L LON Word Latitude Liquid Crystal Display Latitude/Longitude Longitude M:
Abbreviation MAG MAN MAX MBS MD MFDF M-GRN MID M2 MOB Msgs N:
Word Magnetic Manual Maximum Main Bang Suppression Modulator Medium Frequency Direction Finder Multi Green Middle Medium pulse 2 Man Over Board Messages Abbreviation MAG MAR MAY M-CYA MENU MIC Word Magenta March May Multi Cyan Menu Monolithic Integrated Circuit M1 M3 MON MSC MTR-DRV Medium pulse 1 Medium pulse 3 Monday Maritime Safety Committee Motor Drive Abbreviation N NLT NOV Word North Not Less Than November Abbreviation NAV NMT NR Word Navigation Not More Than Noise Rejector O:
Abbreviation OS Word Own Ship Abbreviation OCT Word October P:
Abbreviation PAST POSN PI PLL PNK PPI Word Past Positions Parallel Index Line Phase Locked loop Pink Plan Position Indicator Abbreviation PC PLT PM POSN Word Personal Computer Palette Performance Monitor Position AP-29 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS R:
Abbreviation RACON RAM RD REF REJ Word Radar beacon Random Access Memory Read Reference/Echo Reference Rejection Abbreviation RAD RAIN RED R, REL RENC RFC board RM ROM RTE RX S:
RF Control board Relative Motion Read Only Memory Route Receive RL RNG ROT RTGT Word Radius Anti Clutter Rain Red Relative Regional ENC Co-ordinating Cen-
tre Rhumb Line Range Rate Of Turn Reference Target Abbreviation S S2 SAR SD SEL SEP SOG SPD STAB STBY Std SW Symb Word South Short pulse2 Search and Rescue Secure Digital Select September Speed Over Ground Speed Stabilized Standby Standard Switch Symbol(s) T:
Abbreviation S1 S57 SART SEA SENC SIO SOLAS SPU STBD STC STW SYM Word Short pulse1 IHO Special Publication 57 Search and Rescue Transponder Anti Clutter Sea System ENC Serial Input Output Safety of Life at Sea Signal Processing Unit board Starboard Sensitivity time control Speed Through Water Symbol Abbreviation T TCPA TM True-G TT TX Word True Time to CPA True Motion True ground stabilized Target Tracking/Tracked Target Transmit Abbreviation TAG TGT TPL True-S TTG Word Tag Target Transferred Line Of Position True sea stabilized Time To Go U:
Abbreviation UNCAL Word Uncalibrated Abbreviation UTC Word Coordinated Universal Time V:
Abbreviation VECT Word Vector Abbreviation VRM Word Variable Range Marker AP-30 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation WAT WHT WOP WPT WT Word Water White Wheel Over Point Waypoint Water Tracking W:
Abbreviation W WGS W/O WP WR WTC Word West World Geodetic System Without Waypoint Write Water Tracking Current X:
Abbreviation XTE Word Cross Track Error Y:
Abbreviation YEL Word Yellow Units of measurement Unit abbreviation deg H KM KYD m NM SM Meaning Unit abbreviation Meaning Degree(s) Hour(s) Kilometer(s) Kiloyard(s) Meter(s) Nautical miles Statute mile(s) ft km kn min MHz sec Foot/feet Kilometer(s) Knot(s) Minute(s) Megahertz Second(s) Degree(s) AP-31 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS The pages following list the symbols which appear on your radar. General symbols Symbol/Icon Name/Meaning
(on power switch) Power Symbol Own Ship Marker. Appears at the CCRP location as either a scaled symbol (left figure) or minimized symbol (right figure). Own Ship Marker (shown when plotting track). Appears at CCRP location as a filled circle (plotting is on), or double circle (plotting is paused or off). Antenna mark. Indicates the location of your antenna and appears only when ship symbol is scaled. Heading line. Appears at the CCRP location and indicates your current heading. Stern line. Appears at the CCRP location and indicates your current stern direction. Fixed Range Rings. Appear with the CCRP location as the center and allow you to estimate range. Variable Range Markers. Appear with the CCRP as the center*1 and allow for range measurement. The dashed line length for each VRM is different. Electronic Bearing Lines. Indicate bearing. Shown as a dashed line with different line length from the heading line and eachoth-
er. The small line that intersects the EBL is the EBRL, used for measuring range. North mark. Indicates the NORTH direction. Appears a thin dotted line at the edge of the operational display area. Cursor. Indicates the cursor location. Barge Icon. Inidcates the barge localtion. Drop Mark. Appears at the location a drop mark is entered. Range and bearing from OS to the drop mark appear on-screen. VRM 1 VRM 2 EBL2 EBL1 EBRL markers (range) 1 Origin Marks For numbered origin marks, number availability depends on your radar type. IMO-types: 1 to 10; C-types: 1 to 40 200 MOB MOB (Man Over Board) Marks Left: C-types; Right: IMO-types Chart status (C-types only) Left: Chart scale displayed correctly;
Center: Chart scale displayed incorrectly;
Right: There is no chart file. IMO-types only AP-32 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS Symbol/Icon Name/Meaning Other ship marks Left: consort ship; right: GPS buoy Waypoint marks IMO-types C-types Marks (C-types only) Hold icon (C-types only) Indicates that track plotting is stopped
(on-hold). Recording interval icon (C-types only) Indicates the track recording interval in use. Save icon (C-types only) Indicates that the current voyage is being saved as a route. Save floppy disc icon (C-types only) Indicates that the current customized settings are not saved. Symbol Orange Orange Orange Name Mark Mark Mark Magenta
)pam(enilvaN White Gray eniltsaoC eniLruotnoC Magenta thgilhgiHregnaD Magenta (cable) thgilhgiHregnaD Radar map symbols (IMO type) Symbol Name Red Green Red Green Red Green Red Green Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Magenta Magenta thgilhgiHregnaD Danger Highlight Orange Orange kraM kraM AP-33 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS TT/AIS symbols TT symbols Symbol Name Manually acquired target. Appears as a dashed circle at intial acquisition, changes to solid circle when tracking is stable. Automatically acquired target. Appears as a dashed red circle at intial acquisition, changes to solid circle when tracking is stable. Vector on acquired target (approx. 1 minute after acquisition) Stable tracking on acquired target (approx. 3 minute after acquisition) Dangerous target. Symbol flashes in red color to indicate that this target may be on a collision course with your vessel. Associated TT target. Appears when the target is associated and TT is given priority. Associated dangerous TT target. Appears in red color when the target is associated, TT is given priority and the target may be on a collision course with your vessel. Lost TT target. Indicates that this target is lost and is no longer being tracked. Appears as a flashing symbol with a red colored X. Acquisition zone target. Appears when a target is acquired by the acquisition zone. Target symbol flashes in red color. Selected target. Indicates that the target is selected for data display
(range, bearing, speed, etc.). Three minutes later Reference target. Indicates that this target is selected as a reference point for speed calculations. R T S R Trial maneuver indication (IMO-types only) TT simulation mode indication Note: For C-types, you can change the TT symbol shape to one of the following symbols. You can also change the color of the selected symbol.
AP-34 AIS symbols Symbol A APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS Name Activated AIS target. Appears a thick-lined symbol. Color is selectable from the menu. Activated AIS target with vector. Indicates the targets ROT (Rate Of Turn). Vector appears when the targets ROT is higher than the menu setting. Dangerous AIS target. Flashing red symbol indicates that the target matches then CPA/TCPA criteria. Symbol stops flashing after the alert is acknowledged. Lost AIS target. Indicates that this target is lost and is no longer being tracked. Appears as a flashing symbol with a red colored X until the alert is acknowledged. Sleeping AIS target. Color is selectable from the menu. AIS target with no heading/COG data. Symbol faces the top of the screen. Furthermore, if CPA/TCPA cannot be calculated, symbol appears as a dashed line. AIS target selected for data display. Location of data display in the information box is indicated below the target as A, B or C. Associated AIS target. Appears when the target is associated and AIS is given priority. Dangerous associated AIS target. Appears in red color when the target is associated, AIS is given priority and the target may be on a collision course with your vessel. Active AIS target with scaled ship symbol. Indicates the target vessels dimensions (length, width, antenna location) and changes on-screen size according to display range. AIS SART (TEST) AIS SART (ACTIVE) AIS Base station AIS Aircraft. Note: AIS aircraft are not regarded as a collision hazard. CPA and TCPA for AIS aircraft appears as ***. AIS Search and Rescue (SAR) Vessel AP-35 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS AIS Physical AtoN Symbol AIS Virtual AtoN Symbol Meaning Basic shape No virtual symbol RACON Emergency wreck mark North cardinal mark East cardinal mark South cardinal mark West cardinal mark Port hand mark Starboard hand mark Isolated danger Safe water Special mark No virtual symbol Off position (Displayed with yellow line and yellow text) No virtual symbol Light fail or at reduced range
(Displayed with yellow text) No virtual symbol RACON error
(Displayed with yellow text) No physical symbol Missing
(Displayed with yellow dashed line and yellow text) AP-36 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Control Unit RCU-014 Rear cover of RCU-014 Rear cover of RCU-014 Remove to show PCB Remove to show PCB Trackball Trackball Module Module PNL board PNL board 03P9649 03P9649 Buzzer Buzzer 03P9362 03P9362 Control unit RCU-015/RCU-016 Trackball Trackball Module Module KEY TB KEY TB board board 03P9650 03P9650 Control Unit RCU-031 RAKEY board 03P9674 Trackball module AP-37 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Processor Unit RPU-025 FAN FAN
(attached to plate)
(attached to plate) LAN Signal Converter*
FIL board FIL board 03P9545 03P9545
(Under LAN Signal Converter
(Under LAN Signal Converter TB board 03P9648 MAIN board 03P9652 Fuse 1 Fuse 1 Fuse 2*
Fuse 2*
Remove top layer (inner chassis) to show PWR1 and PWR2 boards. RPU-025 front view Remove caps to replace fuses PWR1board 03P9543 PWR2 board*-
03P9527 FAN*
FAN
*: The presence of this component depends on configuration purchased. AP-38 Scanner Unit RSB-128 (FAR-2218(-BB), FAR-2318, FAR-2228(-BB), FAR-2328) APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION
*: RTR-105 or RTR-106. Depends on configuration purchased. RF Unit*
Performance Performance Monitor Monitor Inside rear cover Rear cover Rear cover De-icer De-icer board board Front Front Cover Cover RF Unit*
Inside front cover Rear of RSB-128 Rear of RSB-128 De-icer De-icer board board
*: RTR-105 or RTR-106. Depends on configuration purchased. AP-39 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION MotorMotor MTR-DRV board MTR-DRV board FanFan Front view of RSB-128
(front cover removed) RF Unit RTR-105/106 (FAR-2218(-BB), FAR-2318, FAR-2228(-BB), FAR-2328) Remove cover to show Remove cover to show RF PWR board. RF PWR board. RTR-105: 03P9537A RTR-105: 03P9537A RTR-106: 03P9537B RTR-106: 03P9537B RF TB board RF TB board 03P9570 03P9570 BaseBase IF board IF board 03P9568A 03P9568A Remove base to show MD board and IF Board
(underside of unit). MMIC board MMIC board 03P9567 03P9567
(located below
(located below IF board) IF board) MD board MD board RTR-105: 03P9565A RTR-105: 03P9565A RTR-106: 03P9565B RTR-106: 03P9565B AP-40 Scanner Unit RSB-129 (FAR-2238S(-BB), FAR-2338S) APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Performance monitor Performance monitor Remove RF UNIT (RTR-107) to Remove RF UNIT (RTR-107) to access motor and MTR-DRV board. access motor and MTR-DRV board. RSB-129 RSB-129 rear rear cover cover RF Unit RTR-107 MotorMotor MTR-DRV board MTR-DRV board 03P9560 03P9560
(inside case)
(inside case) Remove rear cover to show the RF UNIT (RTR-107) RF Unit RTR-107 (FAR-2238S(-BB), FAR-2338S) RF TB board RF TB board 03P9570 03P9570 MIC board 03P9569 Remove cover to Remove cover to show IF board show IF board 03P9568B 03P9568B Remove cover to Remove cover to show RF PWR show RF PWR board 03P9537C board 03P9537C RTR-107 - right-side Remove base to show Remove base to show SPU board 03P9561 SPU board 03P9561 Remove covers to show:
Remove covers to show:
MD board 03P2568B MD board 03P2568B Pulse Transformer 03TF00080 Pulse Transformer 03TF00080 Magnetron Magnetron MG5223F MG5223F Curculator Curculator
Limiter Limiter FanFan LAN LAN signal signal coverter coverter RTR-107 - left-side RTR-107 rear-view AP-41 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Scanner Unit RSB-133 (FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT) Performance monitor Performance monitor RSB-133 RSB-133 rear rear cover cover RF Unit RTR-111 Remove rear cover to Remove rear cover to access the RF Unit. access the RF Unit. RF Unit RTR-111 (FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT) RTR-111 - rear view RTR-111 - front view RF TB board RF TB board 03P9570 03P9570 RF PWR board RF PWR board 03P9538 03P9538 HPA board HPA board 03P9552 03P9552 RF-CONV board RF-CONV board 03P9577 03P9577 SPU board SPU board 03P9546 03P9546 TR Module TR Module 03P9555 03P9555 03P9556 03P9556 03P9588 03P9588 AP-42 Scanner Unit RSB-139 (FAR-2258) APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Inside front cover Performance monitor RF Unit RTR-122 Rear cover BP board 03P9347 Motor Front cover MTR-DRV board 03P9560 AP-43 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION RF Unit RTR-122 (FAR-2258) Remove cover to show IF board 03P9666 and MIC board 03P9567
(located below IF board) Remove cover to show RFC board 03P9540 PFN2 board 03P9432 RF-TB board 03P9665 PFN1 board 03P9431 PFN3 board 03P9433 Magnetron 9M31 AP-44 Scanner Unit RSB-144 (FAR-2268DS) APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Remove rear cover to show PFN1 board 03P9431, PFN2 board 03P9445, PFN3 board 03P9433, RELAY board 03P9693 Remove cover to show magnetron MG5240F Cover BUF board 03P9446 Remove cover to show RFC board 03P9540 Remove cover to show IF-TB board 03P9711 and IF board 03P9666 Remove cover to show MIC board 03P9569 MTR_DRV board 03P9560 RF_TB board 03P9712 AP-45 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION Motor Power Supply Unit PSU-019 BP board 03P9347 Remove cover to show TXHV board 03P9350 Remove cover to show FIL board 01P6130 AP-46 Remove cover to show PSU_PWR board 03P9669 PSU_TB board 03P9668 Remove cover to show SPU board 03P9670 APPENDIX 8 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION XX cm FAR-2258 FAR-2218 FAR-2318 FAR-2228 FAR-2328 RTR-122 1390 cm RTR-105 440 cm RTR-106 950 cm FAR-2238S FAR-2338S FAR-2238S-NXT FAR-2338-NXT FAR-2268DS RTR-107 460 cm RTR-111 100 cm RTR-129 1600 cm AP-47 FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES (Fishing) SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR FAR-2xx8 SERIES (Fishing) ANTENNA RADIATOR 1 1.1 Type Slotted waveguide array 1.2 Beam width and sidelobe attenuation Radiator type Length Horizontal beam width Vertical beam width Sidelobe within 10 Sidelobe outside 10 Sidelobe within 20 Sidelobe outside 20 X-band S-band XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF** SN24CF* SN30CF* SN36CF 4 ft 1.9
-24 dB
-30 dB 6.5 ft 1.23 20
-28 dB
-32 dB 8 ft 0.95
-28 dB
-32 dB 8 ft 2.6 10 ft 2.3 25
-23 dB
-27 dB
-24 dB
-30 dB 12 ft 1.8
-24 dB
-30 dB
*: C-type radar only. **: 24 rpm only. 1.3 Polarization Horizontal 1.4 Rotation 1.5 Wind load 24 rpm or 42 rpm (for high speed craft) 100 kn relative 1.6 De-icer (option) On: when temperature goes down to 0C Off: when temperature goes up to +5C TRANSCEIVER 2 2.1 TX Frequency and modulation X-band (Magnetron) 9410 MHz 30 MHz, P0N S-band (Magnetron) 3050 MHz 30 MHz, P0N S-band (Solid state) CH1 P0N: 3043.75 MHz/ Q0N: 3063.75 MHz 5 MHz or CH2 P0N: 3053.75 MHz/ Q0N: 3073.75 MHz 5 MHz 2.2 Output power FAR-2218(BB)/2318 FAR-2228(BB)/2328 12 kW 25 kW FAR-2238S(BB)/2338S 30 kW FAR-2238S-NXT(BB)/2338S-NXT 250 W (equivalent to magnetron radar 30 kW) 2.3 Range scale, Pulse Repetition Rate and Pulselength Magnetron radar: FAR-2218(BB)/2318/2228(BB)/2328/2238S (BB)/2338S PRR
(Hz approx.) 3000*
3000*
1500 1200 1000 600**
Range scale (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: C-type radar only
*: 2200 Hz with TT range on 32 NM. **: 500 Hz on 96 NM range. SP - 1 E3652S02F-M 200121 FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES (Fishing) Solid state radar: FAR-2238S-NXT(BB)/2338S-NXT PRR
(Hz approx.) 2400*
2000*
1500 1060 1000 600 Range scale (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: C-type radar only
*: 1800 Hz (S1) and 1500 Hz (S2) with TT range on 32 NM. PROCESSOR UNIT 3 3.1 Minimum range 3.2 Range discrimination 22 m 26 m 3.3 Range accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m, 3.4 Bearing discrimination whichever is the greater X-band:
S-band:
2.1 (XN12CF),1.5 (XN20CF), 1.2 (XN24CF), 2.8 (SN24CF), 2.5 (SN30CF), 2.0 (SN36CF) 3.5 Bearing accuracy 1 3.6 Range scale and Range ring interval (RI) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 2 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 8 16 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 6 4 Range (NM) RI (NM)*
4 Number of rings*
1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: C-type radar only. 1.5 5 5 5 3 6 1
*: changeable from menu for C-type radar. 3.7 Warm-up time 3 min. approx. (solid state radar excluded) 3.8 Presentation mode Head-up, STAB head-up, Course-up, North-up (RM/TM), Stern-up 3.9 Marks Cursor, Range ring, Heading mark, North mark, Bearing mark, 3.10 Target tracking (TT) Auto or manual acquisition: 100 targets in 24/32 NM VRM, EBL, Acquisition zone 3.11 AIS
(range selected from menu for maintenance) Auto tracking on all acquired targets, Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min Display capacity: 350 targets, Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min 3.12 Echo trail True/Relative, Trail length: 0 to 30 minutes (30 s steps) or continue, Maximum 48 hours setting available for C-type radar 3.13 Radar map 3.14 Acquisition zone 20,000 pts 2 zones PLOTTER FUNCTIONS (for C-type Radar) 4 4.1 Projection Mercator 4.2 Useable area 85 latitude or below SP - 2 E3652S02F-M 200121 FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES (Fishing) 4.3 Effective projection area 0.025 to 120 NM (for STBY), follows the radar range scale while transmitting 4.4 Memory capacity Own ships track 30,000 pts (10,000 pts indicated) Other ships track TT: 100,000 pts (10,000), AIS: 10,000 pts (10,000), consort ship: 10,000 pts (1,000), GPS buoy: 10,000 pts (1,000) Mark/line Waypoint Route
( ): indicated pts 30,000 pts 3,500 pts 200 routes with 100 waypoint each 4.5 External memory Waypoint: 100 pts, 1 route 4.6 Electronic chart Mapmedia 4.7 Own ships tracking 7 colors 5 MONITOR UNIT 5.1 Screen type MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 5.2 Brightness MU-190 MU-231/270W 5.3 Visible distance 19-inch color LCD, 1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 23.1-inch color LCD, 1600 x 1200 (UXGA) 27-inch color LCD, 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA) 450 cd/m2 typical 400 cd/m2 typical MU-190/270W MU-231 1.02 m nominal 1.2 m nominal 5.4 Radar effective diameter MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 282 mm 331 mm 349 mm INTERFACE 6 6.1 Number of port (processor unit) Serial 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports, AD-10: 1 port) Alarm output 6 ports: contact signal, load current 250mA DVI output 2 ports: DVI-D, DVI-I or RGB picture data (for VDR)
(Normal close/ open: 4, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1) LAN USB
(RGB resolution 1280x1024 (SXGA), 60.0Hz or 1440x900 (WXGA+), 59.9Hz) 2 ports: Ethernet 100Base-TX 2 ports: USB flash memory and mouse/keypad RS-232C 1 port: brilliance control Sub display (for ECDIS) 2 ports: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal 6.2 Data sentences (IEC61162-1/2) Input ABK, ACK, ACN, ALR, BWC, BWR, CUR, DBK*1, DBS*1, DBT, DDC, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HBT, HDG, HDM, HDT*1, MTW, SP - 3 E3652S02F-M 200121 FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES (Fishing) Output MWV, OSD, RAQ, RMB, RMC, ROT, RTE, THS, TLL, TTM, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, VWR*1, VWT*1, WPL, ZDA ABM, ACK, AIQ, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, DDC, EVE, HBT, OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL*2, TTD, TTM, VSD
*1: for retrofit. *2: for C-type radar 6.3 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 Port (LAN2) 100Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector Data sentences Same as 6.2 sentences IEC61162-450 transmission group Input Output MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, TIME, PROP Arbitrary (default: TGTD) Multicast address 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16 Destination port 60001 to 60016 Re-transmittable binary image transfer Multicast address 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30 Destination port 60026 to 60030 Other network function excepted IEC61162-450 6.4 Output port on antenna unit Sub display (for radar/plotter) 1 port: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal SNMP, HTTP, Syslog, Furuno Management Protocol (FMP) POWER SUPPLY 7 7.1 Processor unit (w/ antenna unit) FAR-2218/2318 100-230 VAC: 2.1-1.0 (2.9-1.3) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz or 24 VDC (21.6-31.2V): 5.4 A (9.0 A) FAR-2228/2328 100-230 VAC: 2.3-1.1 (3.2-1.4) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz or 24 VDC (21.6-31.2V): 8.9 A (12.4 A) FAR-2238S/2338S 100-230 VAC: 3.2-1.5 (5.6-2.5) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz FAR-2238S-NXT/2338S-NXT 100-230 VAC: 2.6-1.2 (5.1-2.2) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
( ): 42 rpm 7.2 Monitor unit MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 7.3 HUB (option) 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A max. 1 phase, 50/60 Hz 7.4 De-icer (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 2.6/1.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 8 8.1 Ambient temperature Antenna unit Indoor units
-25C to +55C (storage: -25C to +70C)
-15C to +55C (storage: -20C to +70C) 8.2 Relative humidity 93% or less at +40C 8.3 Degree of protection Antenna unit IP56 Processor/ monitor unit IP22 SP - 4 E3652S02F-M 200121 FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES (Fishing) Control unit HUB IP20 IP20 (HUB-100), IP22 (HUB-3000) 8.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4 UNIT COLOR 9 9.1 Antenna unit 9.2 Processor unit 9.3 Control/ monitor unit N9.5 N2.5 N2.5 9.4 HUB N3.0 (HUB-100), N2.5 (HUB-3000) 9.5 Radar console 2.5GY5/1.5 (standard), 7.5BG7/2, 2.5G7/2, N7.5 10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR 10.1 PM-32A (X-band) Frequency range 9380 to 9440 MHz Input power Output power Step level
+18 dBm to +30 dBm
-21 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -41 dBm (1st pulse min. output) 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) 10.2 PM-52A (S-band, MAG) Frequency range 3040 to 3080 MHz Input power Output power Step level
+25 dBm to +40 dBm
-38 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -58 dBm (1st pulse min. output) 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) 10.3 PM-52B (S-band, SSD) Frequency range 3063.75 2 MHz Input power Output power Step level
+5 dBm to +25 dBm
-52 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -72 dBm (1st pulse min. output) 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) SP - 5 E3652S02F-M 200121 FURUNO FAR-2258 SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR FAR-2258 (Non-IMO) ANTENNA RADIATOR 1 1.1 Type 1.2 Antenna length 1.3 Horizontal beam width 1.4 Vertical beam width 1.5 Sidelobe attenuation Slotted waveguide array 8 ft (XN24AF), 10 ft (XN30AF) 0.95 (XN24AF), 0.75 (XN30AF) 20 XN24AF XN30AF 1.6 Polarization 1.7 Rotation 1.8 Wind load (relative)
-28 dB (within 10 of mainlobe), -32 dB (10 outside of mainlobe)
-26 dB (within 10 of mainlobe), -33 dB (10 outside of mainlobe) Horizontal 24 rpm 100 kn (XN24AF), 70 kn (XN30AF) TRANSCEIVER 2 2.1 TX Frequency and modulation 2.2 Output power 2.3 Range scale, Pulse Repetition Rate and Pulselength 9410 MHz 30 MHz, P0N 50 kW PRR
(Hz approx.) 1900 1100 600 600 Range scale (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 S M1 M2 L 1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: C-type radar only PROCESSOR UNIT 3 3.1 Minimum range 3.2 Range discrimination 3.3 Range accuracy 33 m 25 m 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m, whichever is the greater 1.2 (XN24AF), 1.0 (XN30AF) 1 1 3 5 5 5 1.5 3.4 Bearing discrimination 3.5 Bearing accuracy 3.6 Range scale and Range ring interval (RI) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 2 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 8 16 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 6 4 Range (NM) RI (NM) Number of rings*
1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: C-type radar only, *: selectable from menu 3 minutes approx. Head-up, STAB head-up, Course-up, North-up (RM/TM), Stern-up Cursor, Range ring, Heading mark, North mark, Bearing mark, Target trail, VRM, EBL, Acquisition zone Auto or manual acquisition: 100 targets in 24/32/48 NM
(range selected from menu for maintenance) Auto tracking on all acquired targets, Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets 3.7 Warm-up time 3.8 Presentation mode 3.1 Marks 3.2 Target tracking (TT) 4 6 SP - 6 E3672S01C-M 210324 FURUNO FAR-2258 3.3 AIS 3.4 Radar map 3.5 Acquisition zone 3.9 Interswitch function Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min Display capacity: 350 targets, Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min 20,000 pts 2 zones Selectable from menu PLOTTER FUNCTIONS 4 4.1 Projection 4.2 Useable area 4.3 Effective projection area 0.025 to 120 NM (for STBY), Mercator 85 latitude or below 4.4 Memory capacity Own ships track Other ships track Mark/line Waypoint Route 4.5 External memory 4.6 Electronic chart 4.7 Own ships tracking follows the radar range scale while transmitting 30,000 pts (10,000 pts indicated) TT: 100,000 pts (10,000), AIS: 10,000 pts (10,000), consort ship: 10,000 pts (1,000), GPS buoy: 10,000 pts (1,000)
( ): indicated pts 30,000 pts 3,500 pts 200 routes with 100 waypoint each Waypoint: 100 pts, 1 route Mapmedia 7 colors 5 MONITOR UNIT (OPTION) 5.1 Screen type MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 5.2 Brightness 19-inch color LCD, 1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 23.1-inch color LCD, 1600 x 1200 (SXGA) 27-inch color LCD, 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA) MU-190 MU-231/270W 5.3 Visible distance MU-190/270W MU-231 450 cd/m2 typical 400 cd/m2 typical 1.02 m nominal 1.2 m nominal 5.4 Radar effective diameter MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 282 mm 331 mm 349 mm INTERFACE 6 6.1 Number of port (processor unit) Serial Alarm output DVI output 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports, AD-10: 1 port) 6 ports: contact signal, load current 250mA
(Normal close/ open: 4, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1) 2 ports: DVI-D, DVI-I or RGB picture data (for VDR) SP - 7 E3672S01C-M 210324 FURUNO FAR-2258
(RGB resolution 1280x1024 (SXGA), 60.0Hz or 1440x900 (WXGA+), 59.9Hz) 2 ports: Ethernet 100Base-TX 2 ports: USB flash memory and mouse/keypad 1 port: brilliance control LAN USB RS-232C Sub display (for ECDIS) 2 ports: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal 6.2 Data sentences (IEC61162-1/2) Input Output ABK, ACK, ACN, ALR, BWC, BWR, CUR, DBK*1, DBS*1, DBT, DDC, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HBT, HDT*1, MTW, MWV, OSD, RAQ, RMB, RMC, ROT, RTE, THS, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, VWR*1, VWT*1, WPL, ZDA ABM, ACK, AIQ, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, DDC, EVE, HBT, OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL, TTD, TTM, VSD
*1: for retrofit. 6.3 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 Port (LAN2) Data sentences IEC61162-450 transmission group 100Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector Same as 6.2 sentences Input Output Multicast address Destination port MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, TIME, PROP Arbitrary (default: TGTD) 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16 60001 to 60016 Re-transmittable binary image transfer Multicast address Destination port 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30 60026 to 60030 Other network function excepted IEC61162-450 6.4 Output port on antenna unit Sub display (for radar) 1 port: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal SNMP, HTTP, Syslog, Furuno Management Protocol (FMP) POWER SUPPLY 7 7.1 Power supply unit 7.2 Processor unit 7.3 Monitor unit MU-231 MU-190/270W 7.4 HUB (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 3.1/1.5 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 2.2-1.1 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 8 8.1 Ambient temperature Antenna unit Indoor unit 8.2 Relative humidity 8.3 Degree of protection Antenna unit Power supply unit Processor/ monitor unit
-25C to +55C (storage: -25C to +70C)
-15C to +55C (storage: -20C to +70C) 93% or less at +40C IP56 IP22 IP22 SP - 8 E3672S01C-M 210324 FURUNO FAR-2258 Control unit HUB 8.4 Vibration IP20 (RCU-014/015/016), IP22 (RCU-031) IP20 (HUB-100), IP22 (HUB-3000) IEC 60945 Ed.4 UNIT COLOR 9 9.1 Antenna unit 9.2 Power supply unit 9.3 Processor unit 9.4 Monitor/ control unit 9.5 HUB N9.5 N2.5 N2.5 N2.5 N3.0 (HUB-100), N2.5 (HUB-3000) 10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR 10.1 Frequency range 10.2 Input power 10.3 Output power 10.4 Step level 9380 to 9440 MHz
+18 dBm to +30 dBm
-21 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -41 dBm (1st pulse min. output) 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) SP - 9 E3672S01C-M 210324 FURUNO FAR-2268DS SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR FAR-2268DS (Non-IMO) ANTENNA RADIATOR 1 1.1 Type 1.2 Antenna length 1.3 Horizontal beam width 1.4 Vertical beam width 1.5 Sidelobe attenuation 1.6 Polarization 1.7 Rotation 1.8 Wind load (relative) Slotted waveguide array 10 ft (SN30AF/30DF), 12 ft (SN36AF) 2.3 (SN30AF/30DF), 1.8 (SN36AF) 25 (SN30AF/36AF), 22 (SN30DF)
-24 dB (within 20 of mainlobe), -30 dB (20 outside of mainlobe) Horizontal 24 rpm 70 kn TRANSCEIVER 2 2.1 TX Frequency and modulation 2.2 Output power 2.3 Range scale, Pulse Repetition Rate and Pulselength 60 kW 3050 MHz 30 MHz, P0N PRR
(Hz approx.) 1900 1100 600 600 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 Range scale (NM) S M1 M2 L 1/2/4/8/16/32 NM: for C-type only. PROCESSOR UNIT 3 3.1 Minimum range 3.2 Range discrimination 3.3 Range accuracy 3.4 Bearing discrimination 3.5 Bearing accuracy 3.6 Range scale and Range ring interval (RI) 37 m 32 m 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m, whichever is the greater 2.5 (SN30AF/30DF), 2.0 (SN36AF) 1 Range (NM) RI (NM) Number of rings 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 2 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 8 16 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 6 4 1.5 3 5 5 5 4 6 1 1/2/4/8/16/32 NM: for C-type only. 3.7 Warm-up time 3.8 Presentation mode 3.9 Marks 3.10 Target tracking (TT) 3.11 AIS 3 minutes approx. Head-up, STAB head-up, Course-up, North-up (RM/TM), Stern-up Cursor, Range ring, Heading mark, North mark, Bearing mark, Target trail, VRM, EBL, Acquisition zone Auto or manual acquisition: 100 targets in 24/48 NM
(range selected from menu for maintenance) Auto tracking on all acquired targets, Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min Display capacity: 350 targets, Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min SP - 10 E3685S01B 210301 FURUNO FAR-2268DS 3.12 Echo trail 3.13 Radar map 3.14 Acquisition zone 3.15 Interswitch function True/Relative, Trail length: 0 to 30 minutes (30 s steps) or continue 20,000 pts 2 zones Selectable from menu PLOTTER FUNCTIONS (C-TYPE ONLY) 4 4.1 Projection 4.2 Useable area 4.3 Effective projection area 0.025 to 120 NM (for STBY), Mercator 85 latitude or below follows the radar range scale while transmitting 30,000 pts (10,000 pts indicated) TT: 100,000 pts (10,000), AIS: 10,000 pts (10,000), consort ship: 10,000 pts (1,000), GPS buoy: 10,000 pts (1,000)
( ): Number of points indicated. 30,000 pts 3,500 pts 200 routes with 100 waypoint each Waypoint: 100 pts, 1 route Mapmedia (newpec) 7 colors 19-inch color LCD, 1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 23.1-inch color LCD, 1600 x 1200 (UXGA) 27-inch color LCD, 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA) 4.4 Memory capacity Own ships track Other ships track Mark/line Waypoint Route 4.5 External memory 4.6 Electronic chart 4.7 Own ships tracking 5 MONITOR UNIT 5.1 Screen type MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 5.2 Brightness MU-190 MU-231/270W 5.3 Visible distance 5.4 Radar effective diameter 282 mm (MU-190), 331 mm (MU-231), 349 mm (MU-270W) 450 cd/m2 typical 400 cd/m2 typical 1.2 m nominal (MU-231), 1.02 m nominal (MU-190/270W) INTERFACE 6 6.1 Number of port (processor unit) Serial Alarm output DVI output 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2, IEC61162-1: 4, AD-10: 1) 6 ports: contact signal, load current 250mA
(Normal close/ open: 4, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1) 2 ports: DVI-D, DVI-I or RGB picture data (for VDR)
(RGB resolution 1280x1024 (SXGA), 60.0Hz or 1440x900 (WXGA+), 59.9Hz) 2 ports: Ethernet 100Base-TX 2 ports: USB flash memory and mouse/keypad 1 port: brilliance control LAN USB RS-232C Sub display (for ECDIS) 2 ports: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal 6.2 Data sentences (IEC61162-1/2) Input ABK, ACK, ACN, ALR, BWC, BWR, CUR, DBK*1, DBS*1, DBT, DDC, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HBT, HDT*1, MTW, MWV, OSD, RAQ, RMB, RMC, ROT, RTE, THS, VBW, VDM, VDO, SP - 11 E3685S01B 210301 FURUNO FAR-2268DS Output VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, VWR*1, VWT*1, WPL, ZDA ABM, ACK, AIQ, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, DDC, EVE, HBT, OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL*2, TTD, TTM, VSD
*1: for retrofit, *2: C-type only. 6.3 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 Port (LAN2) Data sentences IEC61162-450 transmission group 100Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector Same as 6.2 sentences Input Output Multicast address Destination port MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, TIME, PROP Arbitrary (default: TGTD) 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16 60001 to 60016 Re-transmittable binary image transfer Multicast address Destination port 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30 60026 to 60030 Other network function excepted IEC61162-450 SNMP, HTTP, Syslog, Furuno Management Protocol (FMP) 6.4 Input/output port on antenna unit Input from main radar Output to sub radar 1 port: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal 3 port: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal POWER SUPPLY 7 7.1 Power supply unit 7.2 Processor unit 7.3 Monitor unit MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W 7.4 HUB (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 3.2/1.5 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 2.8-1.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz 100-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 8 8.1 Ambient temperature Antenna unit Indoor unit 8.2 Relative humidity 8.3 Degree of protection Antenna unit Power supply unit Processor/ monitor unit Control unit HUB 8.4 Vibration UNIT COLOR 9 9.1 Antenna unit 9.2 Power supply unit 9.3 Processor unit 9.4 Monitor/ control unit 9.5 HUB
-25C to +55C (storage: -25C to +70C)
-15C to +55C (storage: -15C to +70C) 93% or less at +40C IP46 IP22 IP22 IP20 (RCU-014/015/016), IP22 (RCU-031) IP20 (HUB-100), IP22 (HUB-3000) IEC 60945 Ed.4 N9.5 N2.5 N2.5 N2.5 N3.0 (HUB-100), N2.5 (HUB-3000) SP - 12 E3685S01B 210301 INDEX A Acquisition zone .......................................3-23 acknowledge AZ alert.............................3-25 activate AZ1 ...........................................3-24 AZ shape................................................3-26 AZ stabilization.......................................3-26 AZ2 polygon ...........................................3-24 change AZ reference..............................3-25 sleep a zone...........................................3-25 AIS CPA/TCPA alarm ...................................4-20 display mode selection.............................4-3 pop-up info .............................................4-10 symbols and meanings ............................4-3 AIS lost target filtering....................................................4-18 AIS operation activate target...........................................4-5 auto activate function enable/disable...... 4-6, 4-7 controls.....................................................4-2 CPA/TCPA .............................................4-20 create and save messages ....................4-24 display AIS alerts ...................................4-27 display filter ..............................................4-4 how to set up for a voyage .......................4-8 how to sleep all targets ............................4-8 how to sleep individual targets .................4-7 how to sleep targets .................................4-7 manually activate target ...........................4-5 messages...............................................4-24 own ship data .........................................4-23 ROT setting ............................................4-19 system messages ..................................4-27 target data ..............................................4-10 transmit messages .................................4-25 TT/AIS association .................................4-21 view messages.......................................4-26 AIS opertation lost target ...............................................4-18 past position display...............................4-16 past position orientation .........................4-17 past position stabilization .......................4-17 symbol attributes ....................................4-13 symbol brilliance.....................................4-13 symbol color ...........................................4-13 AIS target data how to display AIS target data ...............4-11 how to remove AIS target data...............4-12 Alerts alert icons and meanings .....................1-127 alert list.................................................1-126 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function..1-52 AZ ............................................................3-23 IN-1 B Background colors ..................... 1-110, 1-111 Bearing measurement..............................1-73 EBL key..................................................1-74 methods .................................................1-74 on-screen box ........................................1-74 true/relative ............................................1-75 C Chart align........................................................6-71 chart settings..........................................6-73 icons.......................................................6-71 settings menu.........................................6-73 show/hide ...............................................6-70 type selection .........................................6-72 Chart functions .........................................6-70 Chart settings ...........................................6-73 Color palettes ............................. 1-110, 1-111 CPA/TCPA ...............................................3-22 acknowledge alarm ................................3-23 set ranges .................................... 3-22, 4-20 Cursor diamond ...............................................1-100 net ........................................................1-100 Customized echo editing.....................................................1-62 restoring to factory default settings ........1-63 restoring to saved settings .....................1-63 D Diamond cursor......................................1-100 Display mode .........................................1-129 DRIFT ......................................................3-21 E EBL collision assessment assess risk .............................................1-76 set reference point .................................1-77 F False echoes multiple echoes ........................................2-3 shadow sectors ........................................2-5 sidelobe echoes .......................................2-4 virtual images ...........................................2-4 H Heading line how to hide the heading line ................1-104 I Interswitch antenna information .............................1-116 L Lost target alert enable/disable alert ........................ 3-8, 4-19 M Maintenance major parts life expectancy ..................... 7-4 periodic schedule .................................... 7-2 MARKS C-type marks ......................................... 6-20 deleting origin marks (C-types) ............. 6-38 deleting up marks for C-types ............... 6-26 editing up marks for C-types ................. 6-28 entering origin marks (C-types) ............. 6-37 entering up marks for C-types ............... 6-22 filtering marks (C-types) ........................ 6-31 origin marks (C-types) ........................... 6-36 setting up marks for C-types ................. 6-20 setting up origin marks (C-types) .......... 6-36 viewing mark information (C-types)....... 6-29 Marks barge mark .......................................... 1-107 delete marks............................................ 5-5 hide heading line ................................. 1-104 how to inscribe a mark ............................ 5-3 INS mark ............................................... 5-10 mark inscription position.......................... 5-2 mark type ................................................ 5-1 origin mark stabilization........................... 5-8 own ship symbol settings .................... 1-107 show/hide stern mark .......................... 1-105 Menu operations ..................................... 1-17 main menu ............................................ 1-17 menu layers........................................... 1-18 N Nav data display settings.................................... 1-112 enable/disable display ......................... 1-113 Net cursor.............................................. 1-100 Noise rejector .......................................... 1-54 NR ........................................................... 1-54 O Observation bearing accuracy ..................................... 2-3 false echoes ............................................ 2-3 range measurement ................................ 2-3 resolution................................................. 2-2 Off-center ................................................ 1-81 Orientation modes description ............................................. 1-67 selection ................................................ 1-67 Origin mark inscribing ................................................. 5-7 P Parallel index lines .................................. 1-96 bearing and interval............................... 1-97 bearing reference .................................. 1-97 INDEX displayed lines....................................... 1-96 length adjustment .................................. 1-99 orientation ............................................. 1-98 reset ...................................................... 1-98 Past position POSN plotting intervals ................ 3-20, 4-16 set points to display...................... 3-20, 4-17 show/hide past POSN .................. 3-20, 4-16 Past position display ............................... 3-20 PAST POSN............................................ 3-20 Performance monitor activate/deactivate .............................. 1-119 check radar performance .................... 1-121 PI............................................................. 1-96 PI lines .................................................... 1-96 R RACON ..................................................... 2-7 Radar map ................................................ 5-3 disable map alignment ................... 5-6, 6-72 enable map alignment ............................. 5-6 Radar Target Enhancer............................. 2-7 Range and bearing measurement........... 1-78 how to measure..................................... 1-79 Range measurement............................... 1-70 on-screen box ....................................... 1-71 TTG to VRM .......................................... 1-73 VRM key................................................ 1-71 VRM units.............................................. 1-72 Range rings hide/show rings ..................................... 1-70 RTE ........................................................... 2-7 S SART......................................................... 2-5 bandwidth ................................................ 2-6 description ............................................... 2-5 radar sidelobes........................................ 2-7 range errors............................................. 2-6 show/hide SART marks........................... 2-6 SC card delete data .......................................... 1-134 load data ............................................. 1-134 read data ............................................. 1-134 save data............................................. 1-134 Search and rescure transponder............... 2-5 SET ......................................................... 3-21 SET DRIFT.............................................. 3-21 Static trial maneuver ............................... 3-28 Symbols general radar symbols.........................AP-32 IMO map radar symbols ......................AP-33 radar(AIS symbols)..............................AP-34 radar(TT symbols) ...............................AP-34 T Target alarm............................................ 1-94 alarm settings ........................................ 1-95 deactivate .............................................. 1-95 mute ...................................................... 1-95 IN-2 INDEX on/off ......................................................1-94 setting.....................................................1-94 vector length...........................................3-19 vector time..............................................3-19 Target tracking Video plotter create waypoints ....................................5-13 delete own ships track...........................5-12 delete waypoints ....................................5-15 display waypoint list ...............................5-16 display waypoint name/number..............5-16 enter waypoints ......................................5-13 orientation modes.....................................5-1 own ships track......................................5-11 own ships track plot interval ..................5-12 radar map.................................................5-3 waypoints ...............................................5-13 W Waypoints changing display name (C-types)...........6-48 changing display size (C-types) .............6-48 creating waypoints (C-types)..................6-39 deleting waypoints (C-types)..................6-45 editing waypoints (C-types)....................6-45 external (C-types)...................................6-49 searching the waypoints list (C-types) ...6-46 setting the voyage speed (C-types) .......6-47 viewing waypoint information (C-types) .6-47 Waypoints (C-types).................................6-39 Wiper........................................................1-54 controls.....................................................3-2 display/remove target data.....................3-14 echo referenced speed ............................3-5 hide target list.........................................3-15 lost target .................................................3-8 lost target filter..........................................3-8 mode selection .........................................3-3 on-screen box overview ...........................3-2 own ship speed ........................................3-5 selection criteria .....................................3-33 show target list .......................................3-15 simulation mode .....................................3-32 sort target list..........................................3-15 symbol brilliance.......................................3-9 symbol color .............................................3-9 symbols and attributes .............................3-9 system messages ..................................3-31 Target trails ..............................................1-82 clutter prevention....................................1-87 hide trails................................................1-86 narrow trails............................................1-86 trail erase/restart ....................................1-87 trail gradation .........................................1-85 trail level .................................................1-85 trail stabilization......................................1-86 trail time..................................................1-84 true/relative ............................................1-82 Tracks auto-display tracks for C-types.................6-4 changing display size for C-types ............6-2 consort/GPS buoy info for C-types.........6-17 C-types.....................................................6-1 delete other tracks for C-types ...............6-19 editing tracks for C-types .......................6-16 hiding other tracks for C-types .................6-2 OS vector for C-types...............................6-2 show/hide other vectors for C-types.........6-3 show/hide tracks for C-types....................6-3 Symbols for C-types.................................6-1 track color for C-types ..............................6-6 track delete for C-types ..........................6-14 track lines for C-types ............................6-12 track recording for C-types.......................6-5 track recording method/intervals for C-types 6-13 Trial maneuver static trial ................................................3-28 Troubleshooting advanced troubleshooting ........................7-6 basic troubleshooting ...............................7-5 diagnostics ...............................................7-8 TT.............................................................1-82 static trial maneuver ...............................3-28 V Vector modes ...........................................3-17 description..............................................3-17 IN-3 Declaration of Conformity
[FAR-2218/FAR-2218-BB/FAR-2228/FAR-2228-BB/FAR-2238S/
FAR-2238S-BB/FAR-2238S-NXT/FAR-2238S-NXT-BB/FAR-2258/
FAR-2268DS/FAR-2318/FAR-2328/FAR-2338S/FAR-2338S-NXT]
Bulgarian
(BG) Spanish
(ES) Czech
(CS) Danish
(DA) German
(DE) Estonian
(ET) Greek
(EL) English
(EN) French
(FR) Croatian
(HR) Italian
(IT) Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. , 2014/53/, SI 2017/1206. EC/UK
Por la presente, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declara que el tipo de equipo radioelctrico arriba mencionado es conforme con la Directiva 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. El texto completo de la declaracin de conformidad de la EU/UK est disponible en la siguiente direccin Internet:
Tmto Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. prohlauje, e ve zmnn typ rdiovho zazen je v souladu se smrnic 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. pln znn EU/SK prohlen o shod je k dispozici na tto internetov adrese:
Hermed erklrer Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., at ovennvnte radioudstyr er i overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. EU/UK-overensstemmelseserklringens fulde tekst kan findes p flgende internetadresse:
Hiermit erklrt die Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dass der oben genannte Funkanlagentyp der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206 entspricht. Der vollstndige Text der EU/UK-Konformittserklrung ist unter der folgenden Internetadresse verfgbar:
Kesolevaga deklareerib Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., et lalmainitud raadioseadme tp vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL, SI 2017/1206 nuetele. EL/GB vastavusdeklaratsiooni tielik tekst on kttesaadav jrgmisel internetiaadressil:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., 2014/53/, SI 2017/1206. EE/UK
Hereby, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declares that the above-mentioned radio equipment type is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. The full text of the EU/UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
Le soussign, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dclare que l'quipement radiolectrique du type mentionn ci-dessus est conforme la directive 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. Le texte complet de la dclaration UE/RU de conformit est disponible l'adresse internet suivante:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. ovime izjavljuje da je gore reeno radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. Cjeloviti tekst EU/UK izjave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedeoj internetskoj adresi:
Il fabbricante, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio menzionato sopra conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformit UE/RU disponibile al seguente indirizzo Internet:
Latvian
(LV) Ar o Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. deklar, ka augstk mints radioiekrta atbilst Direktvai 2014/53/ES, SI 2017/1206. Lithuanian
(LT) Hungarian
(HU) Maltese
(MT) Dutch
(NL) Polish
(PL) Pilns ES/AK atbilstbas deklarcijas teksts ir pieejams d interneta vietn:
A, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., patvirtinu, kad pirmiau minta radijo rengini tipas atitinka Direktyv 2014/53/ES, SI 2017/1206. Visas ES/JK atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas iuo interneto adresu:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. igazolja, hogy fent emltett tpus rdiberendezs megfelel a 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206 irnyelvnek. Az EU/EK-megfelelsgi nyilatkozat teljes szvege elrhet a kvetkez internetes cmen:
B'dan, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., niddikjara li msemmija hawn fuq-tip ta' tagmir tar-radju huwa konformi mad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. It-test kollu tad-dikjarazzjoni ta' konformit tal-UE/RU huwa disponibbli f'dan l-indirizz tal-Internet li ej:
Hierbij verklaar ik, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dat het hierboven genoemde type radioapparatuur conform is met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. De volledige tekst van de EU/VK-conformiteitsverklaring kan worden geraadpleegd op het volgende internetadres:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. niniejszym owiadcza, e wyej wymieniony typ urzdzenia radiowego jest zgodny z dyrektyw 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. Peny tekst deklaracji zgodnoci UE/UK jest dostpny pod nastpujcym adresem internetowym:
Portuguese
(PT) O(a) abaixo assinado(a) Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declara que o mencionado acima tipo de equipamento de rdio est em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. O texto integral da declarao de conformidade da EU/UK est disponvel no seguinte endereo de Internet:
Romanian
(RO) Slovak
(SK) Slovenian
(SL) Finnish
(FI) Swedish
(SV) Prin prezenta, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declar c echipamentul radio menionat mai sus este n conformitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE, SI 2017/1206. Textul integral al declaraiei de conformitate UE/RU este disponibil la urmtoarea adres internet:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. tmto vyhlasuje, e vyie spomnan rdiov zariadenie typu je v slade so smernicou 2014/53/E, SI 2017/1206. pln E/SK vyhlsenie o zhode je k dispozcii na tejto internetovej adrese:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. potrjuje, da je zgoraj omenjeno tip radijske opreme skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. Celotno besedilo izjave EU/ZK o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem spletnem naslovu:
Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. vakuuttaa, ett yll mainittu radiolaitetyyppi on direktiivin 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206 mukainen. EU/UK-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutuksen tysimittainen teksti on saatavilla seuraavassa internetosoitteessa:
Hrmed frskrar Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. att ovan nmnda typ av radioutrustning verensstmmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU, SI 2017/1206. Den fullstndiga texten till EU/Storbritannien-frskran om verensstmmelse finns p fljande webbadress:
Online Resource http://www.furuno.com/en/support/red_doc Notice for radiated immunity The test for the radiated immunity is performed up to 2.7 GHz only without the special condition of spot frequency being applied. There would be chance where the equipment may be interfered with allocated services in the frequency range of 2.7 GHz to 6 GHz near the harbor, the river, bank of the lake, etc.
1 2 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.95 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
EQUIPMENT LISTS radars specification. Refer to the following table to confirm your category. The radar category de-
pends on the installed monitor. Category CAT 1 CAT 1H CAT 2 CAT 2H CAT 3 Radar type ANT. rotation speed FAR-2318, FAR-2328, FAR-2328W, FAR-2338S, FAR-2338SW, FAR-2338-NXT Same models as above FAR-2218, FAR-2228, FAR-2238S, FAR-2238S-NXT Same models as above FAR-2218, FAR-2228, FAR-2238S, FAR-2238S-NXT 24 rpm 42 rpm 24 rpm 42 rpm 24 rpm For BB type, a monitor unit meeting the category requirements of IMO must be prepared by the user. xxiv 1. INSTALLATION NOTICE Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts of the equipment. Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts, especially plastic connectors. 1.1 Antenna Unit (X-band Radar) 1.1.1 Installation Considerations The Antenna Unit is generally installed either on top of the wheelhouse or on the radar mast, on a suitable platform. Locate the Antenna Unit in an elevated position to permit maximum target visibility. A line of sight from the Antenna Unit to the bow of the ship must hit the surface of the sea in not more than 500 m or twice the ships length, depending whichever val-
ue is smaller, for all load and trim conditions. less than 500 m or twice the ship's length BS/CS broadcast equipment may be subject to interference from radar waves. For BS/CS antenna installation, adjust the height and installation position of the BS/CS antenna to avoid interference from radars. Install the Antenna Unit so that any blind sectors caused by objects (mast, etc.) are kept to a minimum. A blind sector must not exist in arc of the horizon from right ahead to 22.5 aft of the beam to either side (see the figure below). Also, individual blind sectors of more than 5, or the total arc of both blind sectors of more than 20, must not occur in the remaining arc (Figure 2). Note that any two blind sectors sep-
arated by 3 or less are regarded as one sector. Figure 1 Figure 2 270 22.5 90 22.5 a, b, c: less than 5 respectively a, b, c: less than 5 respectively a+b+c+: less than 20 a+b+c+: less than 20 Do not install the antenna where extreme winds may strike the port and starboard sides of the antenna. less than 3 1-1 1. INSTALLATION Install the Antenna Unit away from interfering high-power energy sources and TX radio antennas. Keep the lower edge of the Antenna Unit above the safety rail by at least 500 mm. Install two Antenna Units as shown in the figure below. more than 20 more than 20 more than 1 m more than 1 m X-band radar S-band radar No funnel, mast or derrick shall be within the vertical beamwidth of the Antenna Unit in the bow direction, especially zero degree 5, to prevent blind sectors and false echoes on the radar picture. It is rarely possible to place the Antenna Unit where a completely clear view in all directions is available. Therefore, determine the angular width and relative bearing of any shadow sectors for their influence on the radar at the first opportunity after fitting. Locate the antenna of an EPFS clear of the radar antenna to prevent interference to the EPFS. A separation of more than two meters is recommended. A magnetic compass will be affected if the Antenna Unit is placed too close to the compass. Observe the compass safe distances on page ii to prevent interference to a magnetic compass. Do not paint the radiator aperture, to ensure proper emission of the radar waves. Ground the unit with the ground wire (supplied). Deposits and fumes from a funnel or other exhaust vent can affect the aerial perfor-
mance and hot gases may distort the radiator portion. Do not install the Antenna Unit where the temperature is more than 55 C. Leave sufficient space around the unit for maintenance and servicing. See the An-
tenna Unit outline drawing for recommended maintenance space. For X-band radar, an antenna switch is pro-
vided on the chassis to stop the antenna. Make sure the mounting location provides easy access to the switch. ANT MOTOR SW 1-2 1. INSTALLATION For X-band radar, if it is necessary to lay down the radiator before you fasten it to the Antenna Unit, lay it down with the wave-
guide up, to prevent dam-
age to the cylinder that surrounds the waveguide. Lay down radiator with waveguide facing upward. Waveguide Cylinder If the de-icer is installed, a two-pole breaker (supplied locally) must also be installed. Note: For more information, please refer to IMO SN/Circ.271 "Guidelines for the in-
stallation of shipborne radar equipment. 1.1.2 FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 Radars How to assemble the Antenna Unit The Antenna Unit consists of the antenna radiator and the Antenna Unit chassis, and they are packed separately. Fasten the antenna radiator to the Antenna Unit chassis as follows:
1. Coat the hatched area shown in the figure in step 2 with the supplied adhesive. 2. Remove the protective waveguide cap from the waveguide on the radiator brack-
et. Hacth: Adhesive Do not apply the adhesive to these locations. Radiator bracket Remove this cap BEFORE fastening the radiator. 3. Pass the Gasket (03-182-3186, supplied) to six sets of the Antenna fixing bolts
(03-182-4188, supplied, w/two flat washers), and then coat the threads of the An-
tenna fixing bolts with the supplied adhesive. Set the radiator on the radiator bracket. Radiator bracket Coat with adhesive Coat with adhesive Radiator Bracket Radiator Bracket Gasket Flat washers REAR view Antenna Fixing Bolt (w/ two flat washers) 1-3 1. INSTALLATION 4. Fasten the antenna radiator to the radiator bracket with the six sets of Antenna fixing bolts. Fasten the bolts in the order shown in the figure to the right. The torque must be 15.0 Nm. 5. Coat the Antenna fixing bolts fixed at step 4 with the supplied adhesive as shown in the right figure. Adhesive How to hoist the Antenna Unit The Antenna Unit may be assembled before hoisting it to the mounting platform. At-
tach lifting belt slings to the Radiator Bracket, NOT the antenna radiator, as shown in the figure below. Also, hoist the Antenna Unit slowly. Hoisting swiftly may cause a damage to the an-
tenna radiator or damage the radiator chassis. There are two methods to hoist the Antenna Unit. Upright hoisting OK Belt sling Radiator bracket Set belt slings to radiator bracket. Sideways hoisting Fasten belt sling to a shackle, pass belt sling around radiator bracket and fasten other end of belt sling to other shackle. Shackle Shackle
(left, right)
(left, right) Lifting fixture Lifting fixture
(20)
(20) Belt sling Belt sling Bow side UP Radiator bracket Radiator bracket Note: Pass belt sling around the Radiator bracket. 1-4 1. INSTALLATION How to fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform 1. Construct a suitable mounting platform referring to the outline drawing at the end of this manual. Note: The mounting platform must be flat, level and firmly secured. The diameter of the mast for fixing the Antenna Unit platform must be over 180 mm. The thickness of the Antenna Unit platform must be over 12 mm. The reinforcement rib must be installed diagonally. Bottom of platform The reinforcement ribs must be installed diagonally. Over 12 mm Diameter:
Diameter:
Over 180 mm Over 180 mm Be careful not to get welding splatter on nuts, bolts, etc. on the mounting platform. Mounting platform Thickness: Over 6 mm Thickness: Over 6 mm 2. Referring to the outline drawing at the back of this manual, drill four mounting holes (15 mm) in the mounting platform. 3. Place the Antenna Unit on the platform, then orient the unit so the bow mark on its base is facing the ships bow. Note: When the Antenna Unit is placed on the platform, make sure that the plat-
form is not inclined. FRONT Bow mark () 4. Insert four sets of hex bolts (M1270) attached the seal washers to the mounting holes of the antenna chassis, referring to the installation guide
(C3900Y01) at the back of this manual. Lift the antenna chassis slightly then in-
sert the bolts attached the insulation sheets. Note: DO NOT insert the bolts from the underside of the platform. The cover can-
not be opened. M1270 (four places) 5. Adjust the direction of the Antenna Unit so the bow mark on its base is facing the ships bow. 6. Fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform with four sets of hex bolts
(M1270), nuts, flat washers and seal washers. Insert the bolts from the topside 1-5 1. INSTALLATION of the platform. The torque must be 49 Nm. For how to fasten double nuts, see the installation guide (C3900Y01) at the back of this manual. 7. Using a hex bolt (M625), nut (M6) and flat washer (M6), establish the ground sys-
tem on the mounting platform. The location must be within 340 mm of the ground terminal on the Antenna Unit. Connect the ground wire (RW-4747, 340 mm, sup-
plied) between the grounding point and ground terminal on the Antenna Unit. Coat the hardware of the ground system with the supplied adhesive. Antenna chassis side Adhesive Ground terminal Antenna Chassis Ground wire Mounting platform side Arrange a ground terminal as close as possible to Antenna Unit. There are two methods to connect the ground wire for mounting platform side. Method 1 Ground wire Ground wire Adhesive Adhesive Method 2 Hex bolt Flat washer Mounting Platform Mounting Platform Ground wire Ground wire Flat washer Spring washer Hex nut Welding Adhesive Adhesive Hex bolt Spring washer Flat washer Hex bolt Mounting Platform Mounting Platform 1.1.3 FAR-2258 Radar How to assemble the Antenna Unit The Antenna Unit consists of the antenna radiator and the Antenna Unit chassis, and they are packed separately. Fasten the antenna radiator to the Antenna Unit chassis as follows:
1. Attach the supplied two guide pins to the underside of the antenna radiator. 2. Remove the protective waveguide cap from the waveguide on the radiator brack-
et. 1-6 3. Coat the grayed area shown below with the supplied adhesive. 1. INSTALLATION 10 mm 10 mm 5 mm5 mm O-ringO-ring Radiator bracket Gray: Adhesive 4. Grease the O-ring and set it to the O-ring groove of the radiator flange. 5. Set the supplied spring washers and flat washers then coat the adhesive to the threads of the supplied hex. bolts M840. 6. Set the antenna radiator to the radiator bracket. Antenna radiator Guide pin 7. Remove the two guide pins (insert-
ed at step 1), and then tighten fixing bolts. The torque must be 15 Nm. Waveguide Radiator bracket Hex bolt
(M840, w/plain washer and spring washer), 8 pcs. O-ring CAUTION Be sure to remove the guide pins. Injury may result if the guide pins loosen and fall. 8. Coat hex bolts M840 with the supplied adhesive and use them to loosely fasten the antenna radiator to the Antenna Unit chassis. Adhesive 1-7 1. INSTALLATION How to hoist the Antenna Unit The Antenna Unit may be assembled before hoisting it to the mounting platform. Do one of the following to hoist the Antenna Unit. Attach shackles (20, local supply) to the lifting fixtures to use belt slings. After the Antenna Unit is securely placed, remove the shackles. Also, hoist the Antenna Unit slowly. Hoisting swiftly may cause a damage to the an-
tenna radiator or damage the radiator chassis. Upright hoisting Belt sling Shackle Top view Attach shackles so that belt slings get crossed as viewed from above. Lifting Fixture Note: Do not hoist the Antenna Unit by hanging belt slings around the radiator directly. Sideways hoisting Fasten one belt sling to both shackles, and pass the other belt sling around the stern side of the radiator. Bow side of the antenna unit Belt sling Note: Pass the belt sling around the stern side of the radiator. Lifting Fixture Shackle 1-8 1. INSTALLATION How to fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform 1. Construct a suitable mounting platform referring to the outline drawing at the end of this manual. Note: The mounting platform must be flat, level and firmly secured. 2. Lay the rubber mats (supplied) on the mounting platform. 3.Place the Antenna Unit on the supplied rubber mats, then orient the unit so the nameplate on the scanner box is facing the ships bow. Note: When the Antenna Unit is placed on the platform, make sure that the platform is not inclined. Nameplate Rubber mat FRONT tached the seal washers to the mounting holes of the antenna chassis. 5. Adjust the direction of the Antenna Unit so the nameplate is facing the ships bow. 4.Insert four sets of hex bolts (M1260) at-
6. Fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform with four sets of hex bolts, nuts, flat washers and seal washers. The torque must be 49 Nm. Note: For how to fasten the double nuts, see the installation guide (C3900Y01) at the back of this manual. 7. Using a hex bolt (M625), nut (M6) and flat washer (M6), establish the ground system on the mounting platform. The location must be within 340 mm of the ground ter-
minal on the Antenna Unit. Connect the ground wire (RW-4747, 340 mm, sup-
plied) between the grounding point and ground terminal on the Antenna Unit. Coat the hardware of the ground system with the supplied adhesive. M1260 (4 places) Antenna chassis side REARREAR Ground terminal Adhesive Antenna Antenna Chassis Chassis Ground wire 1-9 1. INSTALLATION Mounting platform side Arrange a ground terminal as close as possible to Antenna Unit. There are two methods to connect the ground wire for mounting platform side. Method 1 Ground wire Ground wire Adhesive Adhesive Method 2 Hex bolt Flat washer Mounting Platform Mounting Platform Ground wire Ground wire Flat washer Spring washer Hex nut Welding Adhesive Adhesive Hex bolt Spring washer Flat washer Hex bolt Mounting Platform Mounting Platform 1.2 Antenna Unit (S-band Radar) For installation considerations regarding the Antenna Unit, see section 1.1.1. 1.2.1 Installation precaution for S-band Antenna Unit Due to the S-band radiator length, there may be excessive stress placed on the radi-
ator caused by vibrations, rolling and general ship movement. To prevent damage to the Antenna Unit and radiator, do not install the antenna near the end of a platform. If there is no other location available, reinforce the platform before installing the Antenna Unit. Mast for DF, etc. OK S-band Antenna S-band Antenna Mount the antenna unit directly on the mast or on the platform, as near as possible to center of the mast. Excessive movement
(pitching) 1.2.2 FAR-2x38S Radars How to assemble the Antenna Unit The Antenna Unit consists of the antenna radiator (w/antenna support) and the anten-
na unit chassis, and they are packed separately. Fasten the antenna radiator to the Antenna Unit chassis as follows:
1. Remove the protective waveguide cap from the waveguide on the radia-
tor bracket. Waveguide cap Waveguide cap Radiator Radiator bracket bracket Antenna Antenna chassis chassis 1-10 2. Set the radiator on the radiator bracket (w/antenna support) so the guide pins of the antenna support fit into the guide pin holes on the radiator bracket. (Orient the logo of the radiator to the side with bow mark on the bracket. If reversely oriented, the radiator cannot be set to the bracket.) 1. INSTALLATION Antenna support Guide pin holes Front view Front view Bow mark () 3. Coat the threads of eight hex bolts (M1250, supplied) with the supplied adhesive. 4. Fasten the antenna radiator to the radiator bracket from the bottom of the bracket with the eight hex bolts, spring washers and flat washers. The torque must be 49 Nm. M12 bolts (eight places) Coat with adhesive 5. Coat the bolt heads fastened at step 4 with the sup-
plied adhesive as shown in the figure to the right. Bracket Bracket Flat washers Spring washers Hex bolt Adhesive 6. Connect the coaxial cable from the Antenna Unit to the rotary joint. The torque must be 25 Nm. 1) 2) 1) Keep the cable straight. 2) Connect the cable connector vertically. Hole in the antenna support Note 1: The coaxial cable connector must be connected vertically. Note 2: The coaxial cable must be horizontal and must not contact the antenna support hole. Note 3: If the coaxial cable is long, bend the cable some distance from the con-
nector. Insert surplus cable into antenna support. Connect the cable to the rotary joint, taking care that the threads of the cable and rotary joint are aligned. 1-11 1. INSTALLATION 7. Coat the hex bolts (M1240, 4 pcs.) for the support cover with the supplied adhe-
sive). 8. Fasten the support cover with the hex bolts, spring washers and flat washers. The torque must be 20 Nm. Left when viewed from the front side Antenna support cover Safety rope Hex bolt
(four places) Front view Front view Note 1: Make sure the safety rope does not contact the antenna support cover. Note 2: Set the screw for the safety rope to come to the left when viewed from the front side of the antenna. How to hoist the Antenna Unit The Antenna Unit may be assembled before hoisting it to the mounting platform. Ori-
ent the FURUNO logo of the radiator to the bow side of the antenna unit. Hoist the an-
tenna unit with belt slings (approx. 4 m) and shackles of hole diameter 20 mm
(supplied locally with required quantities according to hoisting). Also, hoist the Antenna Unit slowly. Hoisting swiftly may cause a damage to the an-
tenna radiator or damage the radiator chassis. There are two hoisting methods as follows. Upright hoisting Th antenna unit is positioned upright. 1. Pass both ends of two belt slings through four shackles. Attach the shackles to the lifting fixtures (A, B, 4 places) of the chassis as shown in the figure below. Belt sling Shackle Shackle FURUNO logo Shackle Shackle
(through the hole in the
(through the hole in the lifting fixture) lifting fixture) A Lifting fixture Lifting fixture
(Upper chassis, two places)
(Upper chassis, two places) Cable entrance Bow direction B Lifting fixture Lifting fixture
(Lower chassis, two places)
(Lower chassis, two places) 2. Lift while tilting the antenna unit so that the front and rear loads of the belt slings are even. The tilt angle should be about 10 cm on the opposite side with en-
trance side as the fulcrum point. Also, protect the parts where the tilted antenna unit and the belt slings come into contact (dashed area) with cloth to prevent 1-12 scratches.After the antenna unit is hoisted in place, remove the all shackles and the lifting fixtures at the upper chassis (A, two places). 1. INSTALLATION Protector
(cloth etc.) Belt sling Remove lifting fixtures. Lifting fixture
(Remove) Bolt and gasket Fasten the bolts tightly.
(Torque: 21.0 Nm) Bolt and gasket cable entrance side 10 cm Note: If you forget to remove the lifting bracket, water may enter the antenna. Sideways hoisting The antenna unit is positioned sideways with mast installed etc. Place the antenna so that the bow side faces upward. Attach two shackles to both ends of a belt sling, and pass through the stern side of the antenna support as shown in the figure below. Fasten the shackles to the lifting fixtures (B, two places), and hoist the chassis.s For landscape hoisting, the lifting fixtures (A, two places) at the upper chassis are not used. After the antenna unit is hoisted in place, remove the all shackles and the lifting fix-
tures at the upper chassis (A, two places), referring to the description in the "Upright hoisting" on page 1-12. Shackle Shackle
(left, right)
(left, right) Lifting fixture Lifting fixture
(20)
(20) Belt sling Belt sling Bow side UP Antenna support Antenna support Note: Pass the belt sling around the Antenna Support. How to fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform 1. Construct a suitable mounting platform referring to the outline drawing at the back of this manual. Note: The mounting platform must be flat, level and firmly secured. The diameter of the mast for fixing the Antenna Unit platform must be over 250 mm. The thickness of the Antenna Unit platform must be over 15 mm. 1-13 1. INSTALLATION The reinforcement ribs must be installed diagonally shown in the following fig-
ure. 2. Referring to the outline drawing, drill eight mounting holes (16 mm) in the mount-
ing platform. 3. If two insulation sheets (type: 03-183-
3106) are supplied in the installation ma-
terials, place these sheets as aligned with eight mounting holes. If the insulation sheets are not supplied, go to next step because the sheets have been attached on the antenna unit already. Mounting holes Mounting holes
(eight places)
(eight places) Insulation Insulation Sheet S Sheet S 4. Place the Antenna Unit on the mounting platform, then orient the unit so the bow mark on its base is facing the ships bow. Note: When the Antenna Unit is placed on the platform, make sure that the plat-
form is not inclined. FRONT Bow mark () 5. Fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform with M1270 hex bolts, nuts, flat washers, spring washers and seal washers (supplied). The torque must be 49 Nm. Fasten the double nuts, referring to the installation guide (C3900Y01) at the back of this manual. Note: The bolts can also be inserted from the underside of the platform. Mounting platform The reinforcement ribs must be installed diagonally. M1270 (eight places) Over 15 mm Be careful not to get welding splatter on nuts, bolts, etc. on the mounting platform. Thickness:
Thickness:
Over 6 mm Over 6 mm Diameter:
Diameter:
Over 250 mm Over 250 mm Bottom of platform 1-14 1. INSTALLATION 6. Using a hex bolt (M625), nut (M6), spring washer (M6) and flat washer (M6), es-
tablish the ground system on the mounting platform as shown in the following fig-
ure. The location must be within 340 mm of the ground terminal on the Antenna Unit. Connect the ground wire (RW-4747, 340 mm, supplied) between the ground-
ing point and ground terminal on the Antenna Unit. Coat the hardware of the ground system with the supplied adhesive. Antenna chassis side Adhesive Ground wire Ground terminal Antenna Chassis Antenna Chassis Mounting platform side Arrange ground terminal as close as possible to Antenna Unit. There are two methods to connect ground wire for mounting platform side. Method 1 Ground wire Ground wire Adhesive Adhesive Method 2 Hex bolt Flat washer Mounting Platform Mounting Platform Ground wire Ground wire Flat washer Spring washer Hex nut Welding Adhesive Adhesive Hex bolt Spring washer Flat washer Hex bolt Mounting Platform Mounting Platform 1.2.3 FAR-2268DS Radar How to assemble the Antenna Unit 1. Screw the two supplied guide pins in the radiator, and remove the protective waveguide caps from the choke guide and radiator. Guide pin Guide pin Choke guide Choke guide Protective Protective Waveguide cap Waveguide cap Protective Waveguide cap Protective Waveguide cap Bottom of radiator Scanner Scanner Radiator bracket Radiator bracket 2. Grease the two supplied O-ring and set it to the groove on the choke guide. 1-15 1. INSTALLATION 3. Orient the FURUNO logo of the radiator to the side with the sticker on the bracket. If re-
versely oriented, the radiator cannot be set to the bracket. Set the radiator so the guide pins fit into the guide holes on the radiator bracket. Direction for FURUNO logo Sticker 4. Attach the spring washers and the flat washers to the hex bolts and then coat the threads of ten hex bolts (M1025, supplied) with the supplied adhesive. Fix loose-
ly the radiator to the radiator bracket with the hex bolts. Remove the guide pins. Note: If the guide pins remains on the antenna unit, they may fall down and lead to an accident over time. 5. Tighten the 10 hex bolts (torque: 36.5 Nm) and then coat the bolt heads with the supplied adhesive. Adhesive (Bolt threads) Adhesive (Bolt heads) How to hoist the Antenna Unit Attached four shackles (locally supplied) with two belt slings (approx. 4 m, locally sup-
plied) to the lifting fixtures (20) on the chassis, and then hoist the antenna unit. After the antenna unit is hoisted in place, remove the shackles. 1. Subject the orientation of the radiator parallel to the direc-
tion of both covers of the an-
tenna unit. Radiator Radiator Direction of covers 2. Attach four shackles to both sides of two belt slings. Attach the shackles to the four lifting fixtures on the chassis so that the belt slings passes over the radiator. Cover Cable entrance Lifting fixture
(four places) 1-16 Belt slings
(two pieces) Shackles
(four pieces) 1. INSTALLATION Belt sling Protector 3. Lift while tilting the antenna unit so that the front and rear loads of the belt slings are even. The tilt angle should be about 15 cm (about 15) on the opposite side with the cable entrance side as the fulcrum point
(). Also, protect the parts where the tilted antenna unit and the belt slings come into contact (dashed area) with cloth to prevent scratch-
es. Protector Cable entrance side 15 cm 15
(Fulcrum point) How to fasten the Antenna Unit to the mounting platform Note: The antenna is made of cast aluminum, which is subject to electrolytic corrosion if the mounting platform is steel or iron. To prevent electrolytic corrosion, use the sup-
plied seal washers and corrosion-proof rubber mat. Fix the antenna unit to the mounting location, referring to the procedure below. 1. Referring to the antenna outline drawing, prepare a mounting platform. Drill eight fixing holes of 15 mm in diameter in the mounting platform or the deck. The diameter of the mast for the mounting platform must be over 250 mm. The thickness of the platform must be over 15 mm. Install the reinforcement rib diagonally. Use two nuts. Over 15 mm Install the reinforcement rib diagonally. At least 250 mm in diameter, thickness at least 6 mm. Ship's bow Bottom view 2. Lay the corrosion-proof rubber mat (supplied) on the mounting platform, aligning the holes on the rubber mat with the fixing holes on the mounting platform. 3. Lay the antenna unit on the rubber mat, orienting it so the cable gland is directed toward ship's bow. 4. Fix the antenna base to the mounting platform with four M12x70 hex bolts, nuts, washers and seal washers (supplied). The torque must be 63.5 Nm. For fasten-
1-17 1. INSTALLATION ing the double nuts, see the installation guide (C3900Y01) at the back of this man-
ual. 5. Arrange the ground point at a location on the mounting platform that is within 300 mm from the ground terminal on the antenna unit. Fasten the ground wire (RW-
4747, 340 mm) there, using the M6x25 hex bolt, nut and washers. 6. Connect the other end of the ground wire to the ground terminal on the antenna unit. 7. Coat the ground terminal, ground point on the mounting platform and fixing bolts on the antenna unit with adhesive (supplied). Adhesive Antenna Antenna chassis chassis Ground terminal Ground wire Ground terminal provided on antenna base.
Lay corrosion-proof rubber mat, bolt antenna unit to mounting location, and oat exposed hardware with anticorrosive sealant. G1_1/4-A Method 1 Grounde Grounde wire wire Adhesive Adhesive Method 2 Grounde Grounde wire wire Flat washer Antenna chassis Antenna chassis Flat washer Spring washer Hex. nut Adhesive Adhesive Hex. nut Spring washer Flat washer Hex. bolt Arrange ground terminal as close as possible to antenna unit. Welding Welding Antenna chassis Antenna chassis 1.3 Monitor Unit See the operators manual for MU-190 (OMC-44670), MU-231 (OMC-44690), MU-
270W (OMC-44930) or MU-190HD (OMC-44570) for the installation procedure. Keep in mind the following points when selecting a location. Locate the monitor unit where no framing is installed immediately in front of the monitor. Locate the monitor where the display is easily visible in all ambient lighting condi-
tions. 1-18 Bridge window Viewing point Viewing point Viewing point Viewing point 1. INSTALLATION Bridge window 1.4 Control Unit The Control Units can be installed on a desktop or flush mounted in a console. Installation considerations Keep in mind the following points when selecting a location. Select a location where the Control Unit can be operated easily. Locate the unit away from heat sources because of heat that can build up inside the cabinet. Locate the equipment away from places subject to water splash and rain. Leave sufficient space at the sides and rear of the unit to facilitate maintenance. Determine the location considering the length of the signal cable between the Con-
trol Unit and the Processor Unit. A magnetic compass will be affected if the Control Unit is placed too close to the magnetic compass. Observe the compass safe distances in the SAFETY IN-
STRUCTIONS to prevent interference to the compass. 1.4.1 Desktop installation For desktop installation, the unit can be laid flat or tilted. How to mount the unit tilted
<RCU-014/015/016>
1. Fit the KB fixing plate (in FP03-09850 for RCU-014, in FP03-09860 for RCU-015/
016) to the bottom of the Control Unit. 2. Attach the rubber foots (three for RCU-014, two for RCU-015/016) to the bottom of the Control Unit as shown in the following figure. 3. Install the Control Unit at the de-
sired location with self-tapping screws (local supply). KB fixing plate Rubber Foot 1-19 1. INSTALLATION
<RCU-031>
The Control Unit can be mounted with the KB fixture, which mounts the unit at an an-
gle. 1. Drill four pilot holes in the mounting location for mounting screws, referring to the outline drawing at the back of this manual. 2. Secure the KB fixture (supplied) to the mounting location, using four self tapping screws (520, supplied). Note: Secure the KB fixture so that the cutout is located on the top side. Cutout should be located on the top side. Self tapping screw
(520, 4 pcs) KB fixture 3. Attach a ground wire (IV-1.25sq, supplied locally) to the ground terminal at the bottom of the unit. Ground screw*
*: Use the screw that is preattached to the ground terminal. Ground wire 4. Secure the Control Unit the KB fixture, using four binding screws (M520, sup-
plied). 1-20 1. INSTALLATION 5. Attach four bolt hole caps (supplied). Bolt hole cap
(4 pcs) Binding screw
(M520, 4 pcs) How to mount the unit flush with mounting surface
<RCU-014/015/016>
1. Drill four mounting holes of 5 mm diameter referring to the outline drawing at the back of this manual. 2. Fix the Control Unit with four screws (M4) from the underside of the desktop. (The M4 screws with a sufficient length for the thickness of the desktop should be pro-
vided locally.) Control Unit RCU-014 F1 F2 F3 F4 Control Unit RCU-015/RCU-016
<RCU-031>
1. Drill four pilot holes in the mounting location for stud bolts (M450), referring to the outline drawing at the back of this manual. 2. Attach a ground wire (IV-1.25sq, supplied locally) to the ground terminal at the bottom of the unit. 1-21 1. INSTALLATION 3. Insert four stud bolts (M420, supplied) to the bolt holes at the bottom of the unit. Note: Insert the stud bolts manually. If you in-
sert the stud bolts using a tool, the unit may be damaged.
*: Use the screw that is preattached to the ground terminal. Stud bolt
(4 pcs) Ground screw*
4. Set the unit to the mount-
ing location so that the stud bolts on the bottom of the unit are inserted to the pilot holes. Ground wire 5. Fasten the four wing nuts (supplied) to the stud bolts from the rear side of the mounting surface. Wing nut
(4 pcs) 1.4.2 Flush mount Installation Note: For flush mounting in a panel, the mounting surface must be flat. Do not install the unit on an uneven surface. Flush mount, fixed at rear (for RCU-014/015/016) Use the optional flush mount kit FP03-09870 to mount the Control Unit to a console panel. See the outline drawing at the back of this manual. 1-22 1. Prepare a cutout in the location as shown in the figure as below. 1. INSTALLATION 170 2 mm (67') 170 2 mm (67') 176 2 mm (69') 176 2 mm (69') 388 2 mm (153') RCU-014 150 2 mm (59') RCU-015/016 2. Set the Control Unit to the cutout. 3. Attach the flush mount fixtures to the Control Unit with four screws from the rear side. 4. Screw the wing screw to each mounting plate and then insert hex. bolt to each wing screw. 5. Fasten each wing screw and then fasten the hex. nuts as shown in figure below. RCU-014 RCU-015/016 Side view of Control Units Flush mount, using with panel (for RCU-014 only) Use the optional flush mount kit OP03-245 to mount the control unit to a console panel using with the panel. See the mounting procedure in the kit for details. Flush mount, fixed at front (for RCU-031) Note: For flush mounting, select a location where the surface is flat. 1. Make a mounting hole and drill four pilot holes in the mounting location, referring to the outline drawing at the back of this manual. 2. Attach a ground wire (IV-1.25sq, supplied locally) to the ground terminal at the bottom of the unit. Ground screw*
*: Use the screw that is preattached to the ground terminal. Ground wire 1-23 1. INSTALLATION 3. Set the unit to the mounting hole, then secure the unit with four self-tapping screws (520, supplied). 4. Attach four bolt hole caps (supplied). Bolt hole cap
(4 pcs) Self tapping screw
(520, 4 pcs) 1.4.3 Installation of RCU-016 connected with RCU-014 1. Pass the cable from RCU-016. 2. Connect the RCU-016 cable connector to J502. 3. Clamp the copper part of the cable with the cable clamp. 1.4.4 How to change the cable entry of RCU-015/016 To change the cable entry from the side (default) to the bottom, modify the unit as shown in the following procedure. 1. Turn the chassis upside-down and remove four screws (M38) to open the back cover. 1-24
1 2 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 5.56 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
2. Remove the cable clamp, then remove the cable. Screw (M38) 1. INSTALLATION Remove the cable clamp . Remove the cable clamp . Screw
(M48) J5 2 4 J5 2 1 Bottom of the unit 3. Pass the cable through the hole in the figure shown in the figure to the right, then clamp the copper part of the cable with the cable clamp removed at step 1. Note: If the RCU-016 is con-
nected in series with RCU-
015, connect J522 instead of J521. 4. Close the back cover of RCU-
016. Hole to pass the cable. J5 2 4 J5 2 1 J522
(for connection with RCU-015 ) 1.5 Power Supply Unit This unit can be installed on a bulkhead, wall or on the floor. 1.5.1 Installation considerations Keep in mind the following points when selecting a location. Locate the Processor Unit away from heat sources because of heat that can build up inside the cabinet. Select a location where the vibration is minimal. Locate the equipment away from places subject to water splash and rain. Leave sufficient space at the sides and rear of the unit to facilitate maintenance. A magnetic compass will be affected if the Processor Unit is placed too close to the magnetic compass. Observe the compass safe distances in the SAFETY IN-
STRUCTIONS to prevent interference to a magnetic compass. 1-25 1. INSTALLATION Install the Processor Unit on the floor, or on a bulkhead referring to the following di-
rections. For bulkhead, the cable entry must face the deck. OK OK Installation on a bulkhead Installation on a floor Connect the ground wire (IV-8sq, local supply) between the earth terminal on the chassis and the ships earth, using the supplied crimp-on-lug FV2-4 BLU.
: Cable entry 1.5.2 How to install the Power Supply Unit Use four bolts (M6, local supply) to fasten the Power Supply Unit. For bulkhead mounting, fasten two bolts for the lower notches, leaving 5 mm of thread exposed from the bolt head. Set the notches of the Power Supply Unit on the two bolts, then fas-
ten two bolts for the upper bolt holes. Then secure the Power Supply Unit in place with all four bolts fastened tight-
ly. Note: For bulkhead installations, the cable entry must face the deck. Bolt holes Notches 1-26 1. INSTALLATION 1.6 Processor Unit This unit can be installed on a bulkhead, wall or on the floor. 1.6.1 Installation considerations Keep in mind the following points when selecting a location. Locate the Processor Unit away from heat sources because of heat that can build up inside the cabinet. Select a location where the vibration is minimal. Locate the equipment away from places subject to water splash and rain. Leave sufficient space at the sides and rear of the unit to facilitate maintenance. A magnetic compass will be affected if the Processor Unit is placed too close to the magnetic compass. Observe the compass safe distances in the SAFETY IN-
STRUCTIONS to prevent interference to a magnetic compass. Allow for a service clearance of 100 mm in front of the vent hole (front and rear sides). Front view
Cable entrance side Rear view
: Vent hole Install the Processor Unit on the floor, or on a bulkhead with the following direction. For bulkhead, the cable entry must face the deck. OK OK Installation on a bulkhead Installation on a floor
: Cable entry 1-27 1. INSTALLATION Connect the ground wire (IV-8sq, local supply) between the earth terminal on the chassis and the ships earth, using the supplied crimp-on-lug FV2-M3 BLU. 1.6.2 How to install the Processor Unit Use four bolts (M6, local supply) to fasten the Processor Unit. For bulkhead mounting, fasten two bolts for the lower notches, leaving 5 mm of thread exposed from the bolt head. Set the notches of the Proces-
sor Unit on the two bolts, then fasten two bolts for the upper bolt holes. Then secure the Processor Unit in place with all four bolts fastened tight-
ly. Note: For bulkhead installations, the cable entry must face the deck. 1.7 Transceiver Unit The transceiver unit is required for TR-DOWN Radar. Installation considerations Keep in mind the following points when selecting a location. Bolt holes Notches Locate the unit away from heat sources because of heat that can build up inside the cabinet. Locate the equipment away from places subject to water splash and rain. Leave sufficient space at the sides and rear of the unit to facilitate maintenance. Determine the location considering the length of the cable between the transceiver unit and the Antenna Unit and the cable between the transceiver unit and the Power Supply Unit. A magnetic compass will be affected if the transceiver unit is placed too close to the magnetic compass. Observe the compass safe distances in the SAFETY IN-
STRUCTIONS to prevent interference to the compass. Be sure to connect the ground wire (between the earth terminal on the chassis and the ships earth). How to mount the transceiver unit Fix the unit to the mounting location with M6 bolts or 6 coach screws. See the outline drawing for mounting dimensions. 1-28 1.8 Intelligent Hub (option) 1. INSTALLATION Use the optional Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 to connect gateway network equipment. Do not connect this network to the shipborne LAN network. Further, do not connect a PC to this network, other than for maintenance. Installation considerations Keep in mind the following considerations when selecting a location. Locate the hub away from heat sources because of heat that can build up inside the cabinet. Select a location where the vibration is minimal. Locate the hub away from places subject to water splash and rain. Be sure to connect a ground (between the earth terminal on the hub and the ships earth). Leave sufficient space at the sides and rear of the unit to facilitate maintenance. A magnetic compass will be affected if the hub is placed too close to the magnetic compass. Observe the compass safe distances in the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS to prevent interference to a magnetic compass. How to install the Intelligent Hub 1. Use two binding screws (M36, supplied) to attach the cable clamp (supplied) to the bottom of the HUB-3000. Binding screw
(M36, 2 pcs) Cable clamp 2. Fasten four self-tapping screws (420, supplied) to secure the unit. Bottom view
: Screw holes 1-29 1. INSTALLATION 1.9 Switching Hub (option) Use the HUB-100 to connect sensor networks. This network cannot be connected to the shipborne LAN network. Further do not connect a commercial PC to this network, other than for the maintenance. For the installation procedure, see the operators manual for HUB-100 (Pub. No. OMC-35191). Installation considerations Keep in mind the following points when selecting a location. Locate the hub away from heat sources because of heat that can build up inside the cabinet. Select a location where the vibration is minimal. Locate the equipment away from places subject to water splash and rain. Make sure that the ground wire is connected between the earth terminal on the hub and the ships earth. Leave sufficient space at the sides and rear of the unit to facilitate maintenance. A magnetic compass will be affected if the hub is placed too close to the compass. Observe the compass safe distances in the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS to prevent compass malfunction. 1.10 Junction Box (option) If the length of the antenna cable is more than 100 m, junction boxes are required. In-
stall the boxes in a location protected from the weather, because their waterproofing standard is IPX3. Fasten the junction boxes to the mounting location with four sets of M8 bolts and nuts. See the outline drawing for mounting dimensions. 1-30 2. WIRING 2.1 Overview Cable considerations To lessen the chance of picking up electrical interference where possible, avoid routing the antenna cable (power and LAN lines) near other onboard electrical equipment (ra-
dars, TX radio antennas, etc.). Also avoid running the cable in parallel with power ca-
bles. When crossing with other cable, the angle must be 90 to minimize the magnetic field coupling. The antenna cable between the antenna and Processor Units is available in lengths of 15 m, 30 m, 40 m, and 50 m. Whatever length is used, it must be unbroken; namely, no splicing allowed. Use the antenna cable as short as possible to minimize attenuation of the signal. The radar must be connected to an emergency power source, as required by SOLAS II-
1. About wiring The length of LAN cables must be within 50 m. Use Cat5e or Cat6 LAN cable for the network if available locally. If LAN cables are not available locally, use the optional LAN cables (FR-FTPC-CY for sensor network, DTI-C5E350 VCV for gateway network). If extension or division of the DVI or RGB cables is necessary, use the dividers shown below. DVI cable divider: DVI-12A (maker: IMAGENICS) RGB divider: CIF-12H, DD-106 or WBD-14F (maker: IMAGENICS) Make sure that the ground wires are connected between the ground terminals on each equipment and the ships earth. Pass the cables through the specified clamp or the locking wire saddle. If a UPS (user supply) is connected to this equip-
ment, be sure that the grounding lamp does not light. 50Hz 60Hz The output from the UPS must be a sine wave, as shown in the figure to the right. About network construction Use the optional Switching Hub HUB-100 to connect the sensor networks. For the gateway networks, use the optional Intelligent Hub HUB-3000. Do not connect the ships LAN network to the optional HUBs. Also, commercial PCs cannot be connected to the gateway network, other than for maintenance. To connect the FAR-2xx7 series via LAN network, use the Gateway network. This unit does not support IGMP snooping or CGMP enabled switch. This unit does not have a router or repeater hub function. The Switching HUB HUB-100 does not support IGMP snooping or GCMP enabled switch. 2-1 2. WIRING 2.1.1 Standard wiring A Cat 5e LAN cable (RW-00135, RW-00339) connects between the Antenna Unit
(Power Supply Unit for FAR-2258/2268DS) and the Processor Unit. The maximum length of the cabling between the Processor Unit and the Antenna Unit is 80 m. Retrofit (using antenna cable RW-9600/4896) or foremast installation is also possible, with the installation of a pair of LAN Signal Converters, one in the Antenna Unit, the other in the Processor Unit. See section 2.10. X-band/S-band (TR-UP) radars for FAR2x18/2x28/2x38 radars The appropriate radars are FAR-22x8(-BB), FAR-2228-NXT(-BB), FAR-23x8, FAR-
2328-NXT, FAR-22x8S(-BB), FAR-23x8S(-NXT) and FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB).
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply ANTENNA UNIT S03-92-* (8P) 15/30/40/50 m Sub display Antenna Cable (LAN+serial) RW-00135 15/30/40/50 m DPYCY-1.5 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer) Control Unit RCU-014/RCU-015/
RCU-016/RCU-031 XH10P-W-5P 1.5/10/20/30 m XH10P-W-6P 2.3/10/20/30 m Control Unit RCU-016 DVI-D/D SINGLE LINK 5/10 m 100-230 VAC 12-24 VDC Monitor Unit MU-190/MU-231/MU-270W or Monitor Unit MU-190HD TTYCSLA-4 Gyrocompass
(AD-10 format) TTYCSLA-1Q Gyrocompass
(IEC61162 format) TTYCSLA-4 AIS Transponder TTYCSLA-1Q EPFS (GPS) TTYCSLA-1Q SDME (Speed log) 100-230 VAC DPYC-1.5 Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 DTI-C5E 350 VCV 10/20/30 m PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-025 TTYCSLA-4 AMS
(IEC61162 format) VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC DPYC-1.5 VDR
(Analog RGB) Switching HUB HUB-100 FR-FTPC-CY 10/20/30 m DVI-BNCX5+GND-L2.0 2 m 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-2.5 DPYC-1.5 24 VDC Transformer DPYC-6 Rectifier PR-850A 100/110/120 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-1.5 2-2 TTYCSLA-4 TTYCSLA-7 ECDIS AMS
(Contact) RW-4864 1/5/10/15 m Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS RW-4864 1/5/10/15 m Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS max. 5 m
(For mouse) max. 2 m
(For chart update) USB Device USB Device For AC power or For DC power X/S-band radars for FAR-2258/2268DS radars
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply Antenna Unit 2. WIRING Antenna Cable
RW-0013 15/20/30/50 m
03CA00099 70 m
RW-0030 15/20/30/50 m
(For FAR-2258 only) Motor Cable TPYCY-2.5 Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031 XH10P-W-6P 10/20/30 m Power Supply Unit PSU-019 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-2.5 RW-4864 10/15 m RW-00136 30/40/50/70 m RW-4864 10/15 m RW-00136 30/40/50/70 m RW-4864 10/15 m RW-4864 10/15 m External radar Sub monitor 1 Sub monitor 2 Sub monitor 3 Antenna Cable RW-00339 1.5/5/10/15/30/40/50 m Control Unit RCU-014/
RCU-015/
RCU-031 XH10P-W-5P 1.5/10/20/30 m XH10P-W-6P 10/20/30 m Control Unit RCU-016 Monitor Unit MU-190/
MU-231/
MU-270W DVI-D/D S-LINK 5 m (option: 10 m) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-1.5 Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 DTI-C5E 350 VCV 10/20/30 m Processor Unit RPU-025 FR-FTPC-CY 10/20/30 m 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-1.5 Sensors
(IEC61162-450 format) 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-1.5 VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) Switching HUB HUB-100 OR Switching HUB HUB-100 VDR
(Analog RGB) DVI-BNCX5+GND-L2.0 2 m 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-2.5 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-1.5 Transformer TTYCSLA-4 Gyrocompass (AD-10 format) TTYCSLA-1Q Gyrocompass (IEC61162 format) TTYCSLA-4 AIS Transponder TTYCSLA-1Q EPFS (GPS) TTYCSLA-1Q SDME (Speed log) TTYCSLA-4 AMS (IEC61162 format) TTYCSLA-4 ECDIS TTYCSLA-7 AMS (Contact), BNWAS Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS RW-4864 1/5/10/15 m RW-4864 1/5/10/15 m max. 5 m
(For mouse) max. 2 m
(For chart update) USB Device USB Device 2-3 2. WIRING X-band/S-band (TR-DOWN) radars The appropriate radars are FAR-2328W and FAR-2338SW.
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply ANTENNA UNIT DPYCY-1.5 100-115/220-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer) TTYCYSLA-10 15/30/40/50 m X-band FR-9 Waveguide, 20/30/50 m S-band LHPX-20-ASSY or WF-H50-7S, 20/30 m TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-108 (X-band) or RTR-109 (S-band) S03-92-* (8P) 15/30/40/50 m Sub display Antenna Cable (LAN+serial) RW-00135 15/30/40/50 m Control Unit RCU-014 or RCU-015 XH10P-W-6P 2.3/10/20/30 m XH10P-W-5P 1.5/10/20/30 m Control Unit RCU-016 USB Device Monitor Unit MU-190 or MU-231 or MU-270W max. 5 m
(For mouse) DVI-D/D SINGLE LINK 5/10 m TTYCSLA-4 Gyrocompass
(AD-10 format) TTYCSLA-1Q Gyrocompass
(IEC61162 format) TTYCSLA-4 AIS Transponder TTYCSLA-1Q EPFS (GPS) TTYCSLA-1Q SDME (Speed log) 100-230 VAC DPYC-1.5 Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 DTI-C5E 350 VCV 10/20/30 m PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-025 TTYCSLA-4 AMS
(IEC61162 format) 100-230 VAC VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) DPYC-1.5 100-230 VAC Switching HUB HUB-100 FR-FTPC-CY 10/20/30 m VDR
(Analog RGB) DVI-BNCX5+GND-L2.0 2 m DPYC-2.5 100-230 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1, 50-60 Hz DPYC-1.5 Transformer 2-4 TTYCSLA-4 TTYCSLA-7 ECDIS AMS
(Contact) RW-4864 1/5/10/15 m Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS RW-4864 1/5/10/15 m Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS max. 2 m
(For chart update) USB Device 2. WIRING WAGO connector Press downward. Procedure Wire Twist Terminal opener WAGO connector 1. Twist the cores. 2. Press the terminal opener downward. 3. Insert the wire to hole. 4. Remove the terminal opener. 5. Pull the wire to confirm that it is secure. A terminal opener is provided on the circuit board as below. FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 radars Processor Unit Antenna Unit/Transceiver Unit Terminal Opener Terminal Opener TB Board 03P9648 RF-TB Board 03P9570 FAR-2258/2268DS radars Power Supply Unit Antenna Unit
<FAR-2258>
<FAR-2268DS>
Shield case Terminal Opener Terminal Opener RF-TB Board 03P9665 Terminal Opener RF-TB Board 03P9712 2-5 2. WIRING 2.2 Antenna Unit for X-band, TR-UP Radar 2.2.1 How to fabricate the cables LAN cable 25 mm approx. 9 mm Expose inner vinyl sheath. Remove the inner vinyl sheath by approx. 25 mm. Be careful not to damage inner shield and cores. Fold back the shield, wrap it onto the inner vinyl sheath and cut it, leaving approx. 9 mm. approx. 9 mm approx. 11 mm Fold back drain wire and cut it, leaving approx. 9 mm. Straighten and flatten the cores in colored order and cut them, leaving approx. 11 mm. Drain wire Insert the cable into the modular plug so that the folded part of the shield enters into the plug housing. The drain wire should be located on the tab side of the jack. Using special crimping tool MPT5-8AS (PANDUIT CORP.), crimp the modular plug. Finally, check the plug visually.
[Crossover cable]
Modular plug
[Straight cable]
1 WHT/GRN 2 GRN 3 WHT/ORG 4 BLU 5 WHT/BLU 6 ORG 7 WHT/BRN 8 BRN WHT/ORG 1 ORG 2 WHT/GRN 3 BLU 4 WHT/BLU 5 GRN 6 WHT/BRN 7 BRN 8 1 WHT/ORG 2 ORG 3 WHT/GRN 4 BLU 5 WHT/BLU 6 GRN 7 WHT/BRN 8 BRN WHT/ORG 1 ORG 2 WHT/GRN 3 BLU 4 WHT/BLU 5 GRN 6 WHT/BRN 7 BRN 8 RW-00135 (Antenna cable for FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 radars) For X-band radar, the end of the antenna cable RW-00135 which connects to the An-
tenna Unit is pre-fabricated. 2-6 2. WIRING RW-0013/RW-0030/03CA00099 (Antenna cable for FAR-2258 radar) RW-0013/03CA00099: No armor Outer sheath Vinyl tape 450450 340340 Power line Fabrication of the coaxial cable 6 1414 1414 55 Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Folded shield Inner shield Inner shield Outer shield Outer shield Crimp-on lug FV5.5-4, supplied
*: For 03CA00099 cable, do not fold the shield as shown in the following. 1414 1414 55 RW-0030: With armor 1010 3030 450450 300300 Armor Vinyl tape Power line Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Inner shield Inner shield Outer sheath Inner sheath Outer shield Outer shield 6 Fabrication of the coaxial cable 1414 1414 55 Folded shield Crimp-on lug FV5.5-4, supplied RW-9600/6895/4873 (for retrofit or foremast installation for FAR-2x18/2x28/
2x38 radars) The existing cable (RW-9600/6895/4873) can be used for the following cases. Cable extension for foremast installation (only for RW-9600 cable) Retrofit Depending on your installation, one or more of the following kits (available as optional extras) may be required. For the LAN Coaxial Converter, see section 2.10 "LAN Sig-
nal Converter" and for details. LAN Signal Converter: Type: OP03-247-3 Retrofit Cable Kit: Type: OP03-255-3 Cable type Antenna specification RW-9600 w/LAN signal converter w/o LAN signal converter RW-6895 RW-4873 w/o LAN signal converter Cable entrance Cable cover Bottom of chassis Cable cover Bottom of chassis Bottom of chassis LAN Signal Converter Retrofit Cable Kit
(: Required, : Not required) 2-7 Note: The maximum antenna cable length is 100 m for RW-9600, 50 m for RW-6895/
4873. If the existing antenna cable is longer than the above maximum length, replace the antenna cable with RW-00135. For wiring the RW-9600 cable via the cable cover, the cable fabrication is shown be-
low. In other cases, see the installation manual in the optional kit. The unused power lines are tied up and attached to the crimp-on lug FV5.5-S4 (LF), supplied locally. Connect these unused lines to the ground terminal with the shield line. See the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual for details. RW-9600 4040 1010 Outer sheath Armor Vinyl tape Inner sheath 515515 Power line 480480 480480 515515
(unit: mm) 1414 1414 Folded shield 55 6 Crimp-on lug Inner shield Inner shield Outer shield Outer shield Coaxial cable Coaxial cable S03-92-15/30/40/50 (RW-00136 + connector, for a sub monitor) Note: The maximum cable length is 50 m. Clamp the armor with the cable clamp. 490490 4040 1010 Armor Outer sheath Vinyl tape Inner sheath 330330 390390 Shield Shield Coaxial cable Coaxial cable 6 Crimp-on lug
(FV5.5-4(LF), local supply) 1414 1414 55
(unit: mm) Folded shield DPYCY-1.5 (for the optional de-icer, FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 radas) Before beginning any work on the Antenna Unit, turn off the breaker for the de-icer at the mains switchboard. (Turning off the display unit has no effect.) The de-icer activates when the temperature becomes 0 C, and shuts down when the temperature reaches 5 C. 2. WIRING 2-8 2. WIRING Clamp the armor with the cable clamp. 4040 1010 945945 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Crimp-on lug (FV2-4), supplied Vinyl tape Spiral tubing
(unit: mm) TPYCY-2.5 (Motor power cable for FAR-2258) 1010 5 6 400400 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Crimp-on lug FV2-4, pre-attached on TB901 2.2.2 How to connect the cables for X-band radar (TR-UP, FAR-2x18/
2x28/2x38) NOTICE If there is a chance of inclement weather when the RF unit is removed, cover the intakes on both covers with packing tape for waterproofing. Be sure to remove the tape after completing the installation. Intake Some parts or wiring have been omitted from the illustrations for clarity. Also, in the procedure, mainly figures of magnetron radar are shown. 1. Loosen four bolts from the rear cover to remove the rear cover. If the de-icer is already installed, loosen two bolts inside the antenna to remove the front cover. REARREAR For de-icer installation 2-9 2. WIRING Note 1: The cable for the performance monitor is connected between the rear cover and the RF-TB Board in the Antenna Unit. Open the cover slowly to prevent damage to the cable and connector. Note 2: If the de-icer is to be installed, remove four M5 screws and spread open the right and left heater elements on the cover, then remove the front cover, being careful not to hit the elements on the radiator or chassis. Heater Heater M5 screw M5 screw
(four places)
(four places) Note 3: If this a retrofit or foremast installation, a LAN Signal Converter is re-
quired, in both the Antenna Unit and the Processor Unit. See section 2.10. 2. Disconnect the performance monitor connector (J807) and the motor drive con-
nectors (J803, J804 and J808) from the RF-TB Board. RF-TB board (03P9570) J808 (motor) J808 (motor) J804 (motor) J804 (motor) J803 (motor) J803 (motor) J807 (performance monitor) J807 (performance monitor) REARREAR 3. Unfasten the six bolts in the figure below to enable removal of the transceiver unit. Then, pull the handle on the transceiver unit to remove the unit. For magnetron radar, lay the unit on its side or on top of non-ferrous material, to prevent demagnetization of the magnetron Magnetron radar Solid state radar REARREAR Handle Handle Handle Handle 2-10 4. Unfasten four screws to open the cable entrance cover. 2. WIRING Cable entrance cover Cable entrance cover How to change the orientation The orientation of the cable entrance can be changed, in one of the three orienta-
tions shown in the following figure. No other orientation is allowed, to maintain watertight integrity. The default orientation is "deck". To change the entrance, unfasten the four screws circled in the following figure, then orient the cable en-
trance in the required direction. Refasten the screws. Available direction of cable entrance
(Bow direction ) Remove four screws to change the direction of cable cover. Deck entrance
(Factory setting) Mid-stern entrance Stern entrance 5. Unfasten the two screws fixing the cable clamp for antenna cable, then pass the antenna cable through the cable entrance. Cable entrance Cable entrance Remove two screws to remove the cable clamp for antenna cable. Antenna cable 2-11 2. WIRING If applicable, unfasten the two screws fixing the cable clamp for the sub monitor and de-icer power cable, then pass the cables through the cable entrance. Remove two screws to remove the cable clamp for the sub monitor and de-icer power cable. Sub monitor cable De-icer power cable Note: Dummy plugs are provided to insert into unused cable slots for waterproof-
ing. 6. Pass the cables through their respective locking wire saddles in the chassis from the cable entrance. Note: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Cable entrance Cable entrance Locking wire saddle Locking wire saddle for de-icer cable for de-icer cable Locking wire saddle for antenna Locking wire saddle for antenna and sub monitor cables and sub monitor cables REARREAR 7. Re-mount the transceiver unit then reconnect the connectors for the motor (J803, J804 and J808). 8. Attach the appropriate WAGO connectors (pre-attached) to the appropriate ca-
bles, and then connect the antenna and sub monitor cables to the RF-TB Board as shown in the following figure. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see
"WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnection di-
agram at the back of this manual. Note 1: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Note 2: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. Destination of antenna cable Power line: TB801 through the locking wire saddles (A, two places). LAN cable: J821 through the locking wire saddles (B, two places). Shield of power line: Screw on fixing plate (C) Shield of LAN cable: Screw (D) 2-12 2. WIRING C TB801 Connect shield for power line A A B Power line REARREAR B J821 D Connect shield for LAN cable LAN cable B J821 Note: For the antenna cable RW-9600/6895/4873, connect the crimp-on lug
(that binds unused wires) together with the shield of the power line. Destination of sub monitor cable Signal line: TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A). Coaxial cable: TB804 (B) Shield of signal cable: Screw on fixing plate (C) B TB804 Fasten conductor with screw. Fasten shield with clamp. TB803 B C NOTE: Do not use crimp-on lug, to prevent contact resistance from increasing. Coaxial cable REARREAR A Signal line 9. For DE-ICER INSTALLATION, connect the de-icer power cable the de-icer board 03P9573 attached on the front cover. If the de-icer is not provided, go to step 10. Front cover w/de-icer, inside view DEICER Board (03P9573) TB901
[TEST] button Voltage Setting switch 2-13 2. WIRING 1) Set a locking wire saddle (supplied) at locations (B) and (C) shown in the fol-
lowing figure. Pass the de-icer power cable from cable entrance through the locking wire saddles (A), (B) and (C) and pull it to the front side. FRONT FRONT B C A B C 2) Pass the de-icer power cable through the cable band. Connect the cable to TB901 on the DE-ICER board
(03P9573), using the supplied crimp-
on lugs. 3) Set the Voltage Setting switch accord-
ing to the power source for the de-icer;
115 V or 230 V. The default setting is 230 V. Cable band Cable band TB901 4) Apply power to the de-icer then press and hold the TEST button for about ten seconds. Check that the heater gets hot and then release the TEST button. 5) Coat the gasket (all brims) of the intake with the supplied oil compound. Be sure to coat the gasket completely. BrimBrim Front cover, inside view Oil compound 6) Set the front cover to the Antenna Unit. Close the open heater and return to its original position.Take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. 7) Fasten the base of the heater with two M5 screws and apply the adhesive the screw heads. Also, fasten the fixing shafts for the cover bolts with two M5 screws. M5 screw M5 screw M5 screw M5 screw Fixing Fixing shaft shaft Cover bolt Cover bolt 2-14 10. Position the cables so their armors lie beneath their respective cable clamps in the cable entrance. Fasten the cable clamps. 2. WIRING 11. Coat the hinge with the supplied adhesive for hinge waterproof then close the ca-
ble entrance cover. Fix the cable cover with four screws, then coat the screws with the supplied adhesive. Cable clamp Close Screw Adhesive Adhesive Cable entrance cover 12. Reconnect the performance monitor connector (J807) to the rear cover. 13. Check that the gasket on the front and rear covers is seated properly, then close the covers. The torque for the fixing bolts must be 10.0 Nm. Note 1: If it is necessary to open the front cover after installing the de-icer kit, re-
move the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle as shown in the follow-
ing figure, then detach the cover slowly to prevent damage to the heater element. Remove the power cable from the locking wire Remove the power cable from the locking wire saddle to open the front cover. saddle to open the front cover. FRONT FRONT Note 2: For the de-icer, take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. If the heater hits something, unfasten the fixing screws for the heater to adjust the position of the heater. Then fix the heater again. 2-15
1 2 | User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 5.26 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
2. WIRING 2.2.3 How to connect the cables for X-band radar (TR-UP, FAR-2258) Some parts or wiring have been omitted from the illustrations for clarity. Front Front
(Nameplate side)
(Nameplate side) Rear Rear
(Cable entry side)
(Cable entry side) 1. Loosen 12 bolts from both covers to remove the covers. Covers Motor side Motor side RF unit side RF unit side 12 places on both covers. Note 1: If the performance monitor is installed, the cable for the performance monitor is connected between the cover for the RF unit side and the RF-TB Board in the Antenna Unit. Open the cover slowly to prevent damage to the cable and connector. Note 2: Both covers have the safety chains to pre-
vent falling covers. Safety chain 2. Disconnect the motor drive connectors (J917, J918) and the BP connector (J911) from the RF-TB Board. If the performance monitor is installed, disconnect the per-
formance monitor connector (J916). RF-TB board (03P9665) RF unit side RF unit side J911J911 J916 J916 J917 J917 J918 J918 2-16 3. Unfasten the two bolts circled in the figure below to enable removal of the RF unit. Then, pull RF unit to remove it with the handle. To move the RF unit, use two han-
dles on the RF unit. 2. WIRING Handle Handle RF unit side RF unit side Note: The magnetron in the transceiv-
er module will demagnetize if it con-
tacts ferrous material. When dismounting the transceiver module, lay it on its side or on top of non-ferrous material as shown in the figure to the right. 4. Unfasten the cable glands for the an-
tenna and power cables on the rear side and remove the gasket, three flat wash-
ers and remove the protector of each entrance. RF unit RF unit Handle Handle Transceiver module
(magnetron inside) Non-ferrous block Height more than 5 cm Cable entry for Cable entry for antenna cable antenna cable Cable entry for Cable entry for power cable power cable Rear side Rear side 5. Slide the flat washers and gasket onto the cables as shown in the figure below. Flat washers onto outer sheath Flat washers onto outer sheath Shield line Shield line Cable Cable entry entry Inner Sheath Inner Sheath Armor*
Armor*
Flat washer Flat washer Gasket Gasket
(Set on the outer
(Set on the outer sheath) sheath) GlandGland Outer Sheath Outer Sheath
*: For the cable without armor Shield line Shield line Flat washer Flat washer The shield line should be The shield line should be wound once on the flat wound once on the flat washer. washer. 2-17 2. WIRING 6. Push the flat washer against the armor then sandwich in the armor between two flat washers. 7. Trim the armor so that it does not extend past the flat washers. 8. Pass the antenna and power cables through each cable entrance and attach the appropriate connectors to the appropriate cables. For how to connect the cables to WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. Note: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. Motor power cable 1) Pass the motor power cable as follows:
2) Connect the wires of the motor power cable to the Terminal board TB901 on the front side through the appropriate wiring clamps, according to wiring stick-
er. TB901 TB901 TB901 TB901 Pass through the Pass through the wiring clamps. wiring clamps. 1 2 3 RED BLK WHT MOTOR_H GND MOTOR_C Front side Front side Antenna cable 1) Pass the antenna cable as follows:
2) Connect the wires of the antenna cable to the appropriate WAGO connectors
(pre-attached on the RF-TB board). Coaxial cable: TB902 on the TNC Junction Box, passing over the slide rail. Signal lines: TB801, TB802 and TB803, passing over the slide rail. Shield lines: Wing bolt, passing under the slide rail. Signal lines Coaxial cable RF-TB board (03P9665) Slide rail TB801 TB801 TB802 TB802 RF unit side RF unit side Wing bolt Shield lines TB803 TB803 2-18 2. WIRING 3) Remove the TNC junction box from the RF unit and then connect the coaxial cable of the antenna cable to the BNC case. TNC junction box TNC junction box Loosen two screws. Fabricated coaxial cable 1414 1414 55 Fasten conductor with Fasten conductor with screw. screw. RF unit RF unit Folded shield* on the sheath. Fasten shield with clamp. Fasten shield with clamp.
*: For 03CA00099 cable, do not fold the shield as shown in the figure to the right. 1414 1414 55 4) Re-mount the TNC junction box to the RF unit. 9. Apply the supplied adhesive to the threads of the cable glands, and then fasten it tightly with the hook spanner. Note: Use the wrench of the correct size referring to cable gland size below. If you do not have the hook spanner, contact your dealer. Gland for the antenna cable: 50 Gland for the motor cable: 42 10. Re-mount the RF unit then reconnect the motor drive connectors (J917, J918) and the BP connector (J911) to the RF-TB Board, referring to step 2 on page 2-16. Note: When mounting the RF unit, take care not to pinch the power cable with the RF unit. The power cable can be damaged. 11. If required, reconnect the performance monitor connector (J916). 12. Check that the gasket on both covers are seated properly, then close the cov-
ers. The torque for the fixing bolts must be 28.0 Nm. 2.3 Antenna Unit for X-band, TR-DOWN Radar 2.3.1 How to fabricate the cables Three cables are connected to the Antenna Unit: the serial cable from the transceiver unit, waveguide, and de-icer power cable (option). For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. TTYCYSLA-10 (for serial cable) Clamp the armor with the cable clamp. 2-19 2. WIRING 4040 55 490490 Drain wire Drain wire 6 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Pass the heat shrink tubing (local supply) onto the drain wire. Crimp-on lug Vinyl tape
(unit: mm) DPYCY-1.5 (for the optional de-icer) Before beginning any work on the Antenna Unit, turn off the breaker for the de-icer at the mains switchboard. (Turning off the display unit has no effect.) The de-icer activates when the temperature becomes 0 C, and shuts down when the temperature reaches 5 C. Clamp the armor with the cable clamp. 4040 1010 945945 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Crimp-on lug (FV2-4), supplied Vinyl tape Flexible waveguide Spiral tubing
(unit: mm) The connector at the antenna side is pre-attached to the flexible waveguide. The bending radius shown below must be observed to prevent damage to the waveguide. Bending radius E-bend: 200 mm, H-bend: 400 mm 2.3.2 How to connect the cables for X-band radar (TR-DOWN) Some parts or wiring have been omitted from the illustrations for clarity. Also, in the procedure, mainly figures of magnetron radar are shown. 2-20 1. Loosen four bolts from the rear cover to remove the rear cover. If the de-icer is already installed, loosen two bolts inside the antenna to remove the front cover. 2. WIRING REARREAR For de-icer installation Note 1: The cable for the performance monitor is connected between the rear cover and the RF-TB Board in the Antenna Unit. Open the cover slowly to prevent damage to the cable and connector. Note 2: If the de-icer is to be installed, remove four M5 screws and spread open the right and left heater elements on the cover, then remove the front cover, being careful not to hit the elements on the radiator or chassis. Heater Heater M5 screw M5 screw
(four places)
(four places) 2. Disconnect the performance monitor connector (J807) from the RF-TB Board. J807 J807
(performance
(performance monitor) monitor) 3. Unfasten four screws to open the cable entrance cover. Cable entrance cover Cable entrance cover 2-21 2. WIRING Note: The orientation of the cable entrance can be changed. See "How to change the orientation" on page 2-11. 4. Unfasten the two screws fixing the cable clamp for the serial cable, then pass the serial cable (TTYCYSLA-10) through the cable entrance. Cable entrance Cable entrance Remove two screws to remove the cable clamp for serial cable. If applicable, unfasten the two screws fixing the cable clamp for the de-icer power cable, then pass the cables through the cable entrance. Serial cable Remove two screws to remove the cable clamp for de-icer power cable. De-icer power cable Note 1: The dummy plug is provided to insert into the unused cable slot. Insert the plug for waterproofing. Note 2: The sub monitor cable is connected to the transceiver unit. See section 2.7.2. 5. Pass the serial cable through the cable entrance and locking wire saddle. Note: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Cable entrance Cable entrance Cable entrance Locking wire saddle for serial cable. Locking wire saddle for serial cable. Locking wire saddle for serial cable. REARREAR 6. Attach the appropriate WAGO connectors (pre-attached) to the serial cable, and then connect the serial cable to the RF-TB Board as shown in the following figure. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. Note: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. Destination of serial cable Serial line: TB802 (8-pin) and TB803 (16-pin) 2-22 Shield (drain wire): Screw (A) 2. WIRING A Attach crimp-on lug Attach crimp-on lug
(pre-attached) to drain
(pre-attached) to drain wire and connect to wire and connect to chassis. chassis. TB802 TB803 REARREAR 7. For DE-ICER INSTALLATION, connect the de-icer power cable the de-icer board 03P9573 attached on the front cover. If the de-icer is not provided, go to step 8.
[TEST] button Voltage Setting switch Front cover w/de-icer, inside view DEICER Board (03P9573) TB901 1) Set a locking wire saddle (supplied) at locations (B) and (C) shown in the fol-
lowing figure. Pass the de-icer power cable through the locking wire saddles
(A) through (C) and pull it to the front side. FRONT FRONT
(B)
(C)
(A)
(B)
(C) 2) Pass the de-icer power cable through the cable band. Connect the cable to TB901 on the DE-ICER board
(03P9573), using the supplied crimp-
on lugs. 3) Set the Voltage Setting switch accord-
ing to the power source for the de-icer;
115 V or 230 V. The default setting is 230 V. 4) Apply power to the de-icer then press Cable band Cable band TB901 and hold the TEST button for about ten seconds. Check that the heater gets hot and then release the TEST button. 2-23 2. WIRING 5) Set the front cover to the Antenna Unit. Close the open heater and return to its original position.Take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. 6) Fasten the base of the heater with two M5 screws and apply the adhesive the screw heads. Also, fasten the fixing shafts for the cover bolts with two M5 screws. M5 screw M5 screw M5 screw M5 screw Fixing Fixing shaft shaft Cover bolt Cover bolt 8. Position the cables so their armors lie beneath their respective cable clamps in the cable entrance. Fasten the cable clamps. 9. Coat the hinge with the supplied adhesive for hinge waterproof then close the ca-
ble entrance cover. Fix the cable cover with four screws, then coat the screws with the supplied adhesive. Cable clamp Close Screw Adhesive Adhesive Cable entrance cover 10. Reconnect the performance monitor connector (J807) to the RF-TB Board. 11. Connect the waveguide to the antenna with either an E-bend or H-bend wave-
guide. See the supplied instruction manual (C32-01903) in Antenna Unit for de-
tails. 1) Wipe the surface of the waveguide flange with a clean, dry cloth to remove any foreign material. 2) Grease the O-ring and set it in its groove on the Antenna Unit. 2-24 2. WIRING 3) Evenly coat the waveguide flange for the Antenna Unit side with supplied ad-
hesive. Note: Apply an even coat of the supplied adhesive to the waveguide flange. It should leak out slightly when the fixing bolts are tightened. Be sure no ad-
hesive contacts the choke groove and waveguide. Flange
(Transceiver side) Flange
(Antenna unit side) O-ring Choke groove Adhesive Adhesive
(Do not apply choke groove
(Do not apply choke groove and waveguide) and waveguide) 4) Connect the waveguide flange and then fix with the bolt. Note 1: If it is necessary to open the front cover after installing the de-icer kit, remove the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle shown in the fol-
lowing figure then detach the cover slowly to prevent damage to the heater element. Remove the de-icer power cable from the locking Remove the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle to open the front cover. wire saddle to open the front cover. FRONT FRONT Note 2: For the de-icer, take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. If the heater hits something, unfasten the fixing screws for the heater to adjust the position of the heater. Then fix the heater again. 5) Wipe out the excess adhesive of the flange. 12. Check that the gasket on the front and rear covers is seated properly, then close the covers. The torque for the fixing bolts must be 10.0 Nm. 2.4 Antenna Unit for S-band, TR-UP Radar 2.4.1 How to fabricate the cables For how to connect the LAN modular plug, see "LAN cable" on page 2-6. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. 2-25 RW-00135 (Antenna cable for FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 radars) 4040 1010 Magnetron radar: 520 Magnetron radar: 520 Solid state radar: 540 Solid state radar: 540 Power line Outer sheath Armor Vinyl tape Inner sheath
(unit: mm) 6 LAN cable LAN cable Inner Shield Inner Shield Outer Shield Outer Shield RW-0013/03CA00099 (Antenna cable for FAR-2268DS radars) Outer sheath Vinyl tape 550550 200200 Power line Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Inner shield Inner shield Outer shield Outer shield Crimp-on lug FV5.5-4, supplied Fabrication of the coaxial cable 6 1414 1414 55 Folded shield
*: For 03CA00099 cable, do not fold the shield as shown in the following. 1414 1414 55 RW-9600/6895 (for retrofit) To use the existing cable (RW-9600/6895) for the retrofit, two optional kits are re-
quired. For the LAN Coaxial Converter, see section 2.10 "LAN Signal Converter" for details. LAN Signal Converter: Type: OP03-247-2 (for Magnetron radar) Type: OP03-247-1 (for solid state radar) Retrofit Cable Kit: Type: OP03-255-1 Note: The maximum antenna cable length is 100 m for RW-9600, 50 m for RW-6895. If the existing antenna cable is longer than the above maximum length, replace the antenna cable with RW-00135. For cable fabrications and wiring, see the installation manuals in the optional kits. The unused power lines are tied up and attached to the crimp-on lug FV5.5-S4 (LF), supplied locally. Connect these unused lines to the ground terminal with the shield line. See the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual for details. S03-92-15/30/40/50 (RW-00136 + connector, for a sub monitor) Note: The maximum cable length is 50 m. 2. WIRING 2-26 2. WIRING 1010 3030 L1L1 Armor Outer sheath Inner sheath Vinyl tape Radar type S-band (TR-UP, magnetron) S-band (TR-UP, solid state) L1 450 L2 310 270 L3 390 6 Crimp-on lug
(FV5.5-4(LF), local supply) 1414 1414 55 L2L2 L3L3 Shield Shield Coaxial cable Coaxial cable
(unit: mm) Folded shield DPYCY-1.5 (for the optional de-icer) Before beginning any work on the Antenna Unit, turn off the breaker for the de-icer at the mains switchboard. (Turning off the display unit has no effect.) The de-icer activates when the temperature becomes 0 C, and shuts down when the temperature reaches 5 C. Wrap the spiral tubing near the crimp-on lugs. 4040 1010 1310 1310 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Crimp-on lug (FV2-M4), supplied Vinyl tape Spiral tubing
(unit: mm) TPYCY-2.5 (Motor power cable for FAR-2268DS) 1010 5 6 200200 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Crimp-on lug FV2-4, pre-attached on TB901 2.4.2 How to connect the cables for S-band radar (TR-UP, FAR-
2x38S radars) Three cables are connected to the Antenna Unit: anttena, sub monitor* and de-icer*
power cables (*: option). The procedure shows how to connect all cables. Disregard the descriptions for the optional equipment if not applicable. Note: Apply the supplied adhesive to the unused cable glands. 2-27 2. WIRING 2-28 De-icer power cable Antenna cable Sub monitor cable Antenna motor switch REARREAR NOTICE If there is a chance of inclement weather when the RF unit is removed, cover the intakes on both covers with packing tape for waterproofing. Be sure to remove the tape after completing the installation. Intake Some parts or wiring have been omitted from the illustrations for clarity. 1. Loosen four bolts on the rear cover to remove the rear cover. If the de-icer is al-
ready installed, loosen also four bolts on the front cover to remove the front cover. If the lifting fixtures are still attached, they should be removed. For how to remove the lifting fixtures, see section . Performance Performance Monitor Monitor Lifting Fixtures
Remove REARREAR FRONT FRONT For de-icer installation Note 1: The cable for the performance monitor is connected between the rear cover and the RF-TB Board in the Antenna Unit. Open the cover slowly to prevent damage to the cable and connector. Note 2: If the de-icer is to be installed, remove two M5 screws and spread open the right and left heater elements on the cover, then remove the front cover, being careful not to hit the elements on the radiator or chassis. Heater Heater M5 screw M5 screw
(two places)
(two places) 2. WIRING 2. Disconnect the performance monitor connector (J807) and the motor drive con-
nectors (J803, J804 and J808) from the RF-TB Board.
< Magnetron radars >
RF-TB board (03P9570) J808 (motor) J808 (motor) J804 (motor) J804 (motor) J803 (motor) J803 (motor) J807 (performance monitor) J807 (performance monitor) REARREAR
< Solid state radars >
RF-TB board
(03P9570) J803 (motor) J803 (motor) J807 (performance monitor) J807 (performance monitor) J808 (motor) J808 (motor) J804 (motor) J804 (motor) REARREAR 3. Disconnect the coaxial cable and unfasten four bolts to enable removal of the RF unit. Clockwise when Clockwise when viewed from the stern viewed from the stern Handle Handle Ex) Magnetron radar Remove four bolts. Remove four bolts. 4. Remove the RF unit with the handle. Note: For magnetron radars, lay the unit on its side or on top of non-ferrous material, to prevent demagnetization. 2-29 2. WIRING 5. Unfasten the cable gland for the antenna cable and remove the gasket and three flat washers and remove the protector. Cable entry for antenna cable (Side view) Flat washers Flat washers Ex) Magnetron radar 6. Slide the cable gland, the gasket and three flat washers onto the cable. 7. Push the flat washer against the armor. 8. Trim the armor so that it does not extend past the flat washers. GlandGland Remove Remove protector. protector. Gasket Gasket Flat washers Flat washers Antenna cable Antenna cable GlandGland Gasket Gasket Push the flat washer against the armor. 9. Pass the antenna cable through the cable entrance. If applicable, unfasten the appropriate cable glands and pass the sub monitor and de-icer power cables through the cable entrance. Pass the cables through their respective locking wire saddle. 10. All other cables are connected to the RF unit and should be pulled out of the chas-
sis after passing them through their respective cable entrances. The de-icer pow-
er cable is connected to the de-icer board as shown in step 14. 11. Apply the supplied adhesive to the threads of the cable glands, and then fasten it tightly with the hook spanner. Note: Use the wrench of the correct size referring to cable gland size below. If you do not have the hook spanner, contact your dealer. Gland for the antenna cable: 42 Gland for the sub monitor cable or de-icer cable: 34 12. Re-mount the RF unit then reconnect the connectors for the motor (J803, J804 and J808), the four bolts and the coaxial cable (see step 3). The torque for fixing the coaxial cable must be 27.5 Nm. 13. Attach the appropriate WAGO connectors (pre-attached) to the appropriate ca-
bles, and then connect the antenna and sub monitor cables to the RF-TB Board shown in the following figure. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WA-
GO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnection dia-
gram at the back of this manual. Note 1: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Note 2: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. Magnetron radar Destination of Antenna cable:
Power line: TB801 through the locking wire saddle (A) 2-30 LAN cable: J821 through the locking wire saddles (B, two places) Shield of power line: Screw (C) Shield of LAN cable: Screw (D) 2. WIRING
(C) Connect shield for power line TB801 Power line
(A) REARREAR
(B)
(B) LAN cable REARREAR J821
(D) Connect shiled for LAN cable Note: For the antenna cable RW-9600/6895/4873, connect the crimp-on lug
(that binds unused wires) together with the shield of the power line. Destination of sub monitor cable Note: Remove (or Loosen) four bolts as shown in the following figure to re-
move the RF-TB Board from the RF unit. Signal line: TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A), see the figure for the
"Destination of Antenna cable:"
Coaxial cable: TB804 (B) Shield of signal line: Screw (C)
(B) TB804 Fasten conductor with screw. Fasten shield with clamp. NOTE: Do not use crimp-on lug, to prevent contact resistance from increasing. REARREAR Remove Remove
(B) Loosen Loosen TB803
(C) 2-31 2. WIRING Solid state radar Destination of Antenna cable:
Power line: TB801 through the locking wire saddle (A) LAN cable: J821 through the locking wire saddles (A and B, two places) Shield of power line: Screw (C) Shield of LAN cable: Screw (D) Power line Connect shield for power line
(C) REARREAR TB801
(A) Connect shield for LAN cable
(D) LAN cable REARREAR J821
(B) Note: For the antenna cable RW-9600/6895/4873, connect the crimp-on lug
(that binds unused wires) together with the shield of the power line. Destination of sub monitor cable Signal line: TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A), see the figure for the
"Destination of Antenna cable:"
Coaxial cable: TB804 (B) Shield of signal line: Screw (C) RF-TB board (03P9570)
(B) TB804 Fasten conductor with screw. Fasten shield with clamp.
(B) NOTE: Do not use crimp-on lug, to prevent contact resistance from increasing. REARREAR TB803
(C) 2-32
1 2 | User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 3.14 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
14. For DE-ICER INSTALLATION, connect the de-icer power cable the de-icer board 03P9573 attached on the front cover. If the de-icer is not provided, go to step 12. 2. WIRING
[TEST] button Voltage Setting switch Front cover w/de-icer, inside view DEICER Board (03P9573) TB901 1) Wrap the supplied spiral tube around the de-icer power cable, starting from the crimp-on lugs. Set a locking wire saddle (supplied) at location (6) shown in the following figure. Pass the de-icer power cable through the locking wire saddles (1) to (6) and it to the front side. REARREAR 2) Pass the de-icer power cable through the cable band. Connect the cable to TB901 on the DE-ICER board (03P9573), using the supplied crimp-on lugs. 3) Set the Voltage Setting switch according to the power source for the de-icer; 115 V or 230 V. The default setting is 230 V. 4) Apply power to the de-icer then press and hold the TEST button for about ten sec-
onds. Check that the heater gets hot and then release the TEST button. 5) Set the front cover to the Antenna Unit. Spiral tube TB901 Cable band Cable band Close the open heater and return to its original position.Take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. 6) Fasten the two heater elements to the chassis with the four bolts removed at step 1 on page 2-28. Fasten the base of the heater with two bolts coated with 2-33 2. WIRING the supplied adhesive. Fasten the installation materials to each of the cover bolts. M5 screw M5 screw
(Do not apply adhesive.)
(Do not apply adhesive.) Fixing Shaft Fixing Shaft SD Heater SD Heater Fixing Plate Fixing Plate Cover Bolt Cover Bolt M5 screw coated M5 screw coated with adhesive with adhesive Note: If it is necessary to open the front cover after installing the DE-ICER kit, re-
move the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle shown in the following figure then detach the cover slowly to prevent damage to the heater. Remove the de-icer power cable from the locking Remove the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle to open the front cover. wire saddle to open the front cover. FRONT FRONT 15. Reconnect the performance monitor connector (J807). 16. Check that the gasket on the front and rear cover is seated properly, then close the covers. The torque for the fixing bolts must be 28.0 Nm. Note: For the de-icer specifications, take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. If the heater hits something, unfasten the fixing screws for the heater to adjust the position of the heater. Then fix the heater again. 2.4.3 How to connect the cables for S-band radar (TR-UP, FAR-
2268DS radar) Some parts or wiring have been omitted from the illustrations for clarity. Antenna safety switch Antenna safety switch
(Not used)
(Not used) Gland for signal cable Gland for signal cable Gland for power cable Ground terminal 2-34 1. Remove 10 bolts from the cover, right side viewed from the cable entry side, to remove the cover. Note: The safety rope is attached to this cover to prevent falling the cover. 2. WIRING Cable entry Cable entry side side Safety rope Safety rope Cover Cover
(Right side, viewed from
(Right side, viewed from the cable entry side) the cable entry side) 2. Unfasten the cable glands for the antenna and power cables and remove the gas-
ket, three flat washers and remove the gland cap of each entrance. The gland caps may be discarded. 3. Slide the flat washers and gasket onto the cables as shown in the figure below. Flat washers onto outer sheath Flat washers onto outer sheath Cable Cable entry entry Shield lines Shield lines
(Wind once on the flat washer.)
(Wind once on the flat washer.) Flat washer Flat washer GlandGland Gasket Gasket
(Set on the outer sheath.)
(Set on the outer sheath.) Outer Sheath Outer Sheath 4. Pass the antenna and power cables through each cable glands and attach the appropriate connectors to the appropriate cables. For how to connect the cables to WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. Note: For the antenna cable, pass the coaxial cable first, and then the signal cables through the cable gland not to bend the coaxial cable as possible. Antenna cable Connect the wires of the antenna cable to the appropriate WAGO connectors
(pre-attached on the RF-TB board), according to wiring stickers. Wiring sticker Wiring sticker TB801 TB801 TB902 TB902 Wiring sticker Wiring sticker Cable entrance side
(A)
(A)
(B)
(B) TB802 TB802 TB803 TB803
(C) Shield lines
(C) Shield lines 2-35 Signal lines: TB801, TB802 and TB803, through the wire saddles
(A), (B). CAUTION CAUTIO High voltage is present at the No. 1 pin of TB801. Miswiring at this pin can damage the antenna unit. Coaxial cable: TB902 on the TNC Junction Box, through the wire saddles (A),
(B). Before connecting the coaxial cable, remove the TNC junction box. After connecting the coaxial cable referring to the figure shown below, re-mount the box to the RF unit. Loosen two screws. Fabricated coaxial cable 1414 1414 55 Fasten conductor with Fasten conductor with screw. screw. Folded shield* on the sheath. Fasten shield with clamp. Fasten shield with clamp.
*: For 03CA00099 cable, do not fold the shield as shown in the figure to the right. 1414 1414 55 Shield lines: Wing bolt (C). Motor power cable Connect the wires of the motor power cable to the Terminal board TB901, accord-
ing to wiring sticker. TB901 TB901 Wiring sticker Wiring sticker Cable entrance side 5. Apply the supplied adhesive to the threads of the cable glands, and then fasten it tightly with the hook spanner. Note: Use the wrench of the correct size referring to cable gland size below. If you do not have the hook spanner, contact your dealer. Gland for the antenna cable: 50 Gland for the motor power cable: 42 6. Check that the gasket on cover are seated properly, then close the cover. The torque for the fixing bolts must be 15.0 Nm. 7. Seal the cable glands for the power cable with putty. 2. WIRING 2-36 2. WIRING 2.5 Antenna Unit for S-band, TR-DOWN Radar 2.5.1 How to fabricate the cables For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. TTYCYSLA-10 (for serial cable) 1010 3030 390390 200200 Drain wire Drain wire 6 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Pass the heat shrink tubing (local supply) onto the drain wire. Crimp-on lug Vinyl tape
(unit: mm) DPYCY-1.5 (for the optional de-icer) Before beginning any work on the Antenna Unit, turn off the breaker for the de-icer at the mains switchboard. (Turning off the display unit has no effect.) The de-icer activates when the temperature becomes 0 C, and shuts down when the temperature reaches 5 C. Wrap the spiral tubing near the crimp-on lugs. 4040 1010 1310 1310 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Crimp-on lug (FV2-M4), supplied Vinyl tape Spiral tubing
(unit: mm) Microwave coaxial cable See the supplied instruction manual (C32-01904) in Antenna Unit for details. 2.5.2 How to connect the cables for S-band radar (TR-DOWN) Three cables are connected to the Antenna Unit: serial cable from the transceiver unit, microwave coaxial cable and de-icer power cable (option). The procedure shows how to connect all cables. Disregard the descriptions for the optional equipment if not ap-
plicable. Note: Apply the supplied adhesive to the unused cable glands. 2-37 De-icer power cable Microwave coaxial cable Serial cable from the transceiver unit Antenna motor switch REARREAR Some parts or wiring have been omitted from the illustrations for clarity. 1. Loosen four bolts on the rear cover to remove the rear cover. If the de-icer is al-
ready installed, loosen also four bolts on the front cover to remove the front cover. If the lifting fixtures are still attached, they should be removed. For how to remove the lifting fixtures, see section . Performance Performance Monitor Monitor Lifting Fixtures
Remove REARREAR FRONT FRONT For de-icer installation Note 1: The cable for the performance monitor is connected between the rear cover and the RF-TB Board in the Antenna Unit. Open the cover slowly to prevent damage to the cable and connector. Note 2: If the de-icer is to be installed, remove two M5 screws and spread open the right and left heater elements on the cover, then remove the front cover, being careful not to hit the elements on the radiator or chassis. Heater Heater M5 screw M5 screw
(two places)
(two places) 2. WIRING 2-38 2. Disconnect the performance monitor connector (J807) from the RF-TB Board. RF-TB board (03P9570) 2. WIRING J807 (performance monitor) J807 (performance monitor) REARREAR 3. Unfasten the cable gland for the serial cable (TTYCSLA-10) and remove the gas-
ket and three flat washers and remove the protector. Cable entry for serial cable (Side view) Flat washers Flat washers GlandGland Remove Remove protector protector Gasket Gasket Flat washers Flat washers Serial cable Serial cable GlandGland Gasket Gasket Push the flat washer against the armor. REARREAR 4. Slide the cable gland, the gasket and three flat washers onto the cable. 5. Push the flat washer against the armor. 6. Trim the armor so that it does not extend past the flat washers. 7. Pass the serial cable through the cable entrance. If applicable, unfasten the appropriate cable gland and pass the de-icer power ca-
ble through the cable entrance. Pass the cable through appropriate locking wire saddle. 8. Apply the supplied adhesive to the threads of the cable glands, and then fasten it tightly with the hook spanner. Note: Use the wrench of the correct size referring to cable gland size below. If you do not have the hook spanner, contact your dealer. Gland for the antenna cable: 42 Gland for the sub monitor cable or de-icer cable: 34 9. Attach the appropriate WAGO connectors to the serial cable, and then connect the serial cable to the RF-TB Board as shown in the following figure. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin ar-
rangement, see the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. Note 1: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Note 2: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. 2-39 2. WIRING Destination of serial cable:
Serial line: TB802 (8-pin) and TB803 (16-pin) through the locking wire saddle
(A) Shield of serial line: Screw (C) TB802 TB803 Attach crimp-on lug
(pre-attached) to drain wire and connect to chassis.
(C)
(A) REARREAR 10. For DE-ICER INSTALLATION, connect the de-icer power cable the de-icer board 03P9573 attached on the front cover. If the de-icer is not provided, go to step 12.
[TEST] button Voltage Setting switch Front cover w/de-icer, inside view DEICER Board (03P9573) TB901 1) Unfasten two bolts to remove the RF-TB assembly, then pass the de-icer power cable through the cable entrance. Cable entrance for de-icer poewr cable REARREAR RF-TB assembly RF-TB assembly 2) Wrap the supplied spiral tube around the de-icer power cable, starting from the crimp-on lugs. Set a locking wire saddle (supplied) at location (5) shown 2-40 in the following figure. Pass the de-icer power cable through the locking wire saddles (1) to (5) and it to the front side. 2. WIRING
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2) Spiral tube Spiral tube
(5) REARREAR 3) Pass the de-icer power cable through the cable band. Connect the cable to TB901 on the DE-ICER board (03P9573), using the supplied crimp-on lugs. 4) Set the Voltage Setting switch according to the power source for the de-icer; 115 V or 230 V. The default setting is 230 V. 5) Apply power to the de-icer then press and hold the TEST button for about ten sec-
onds. Check that the heater gets hot and then release the TEST button. 6) Set the front cover to the Antenna Unit. TB901 Cable band Cable band Close the open heater and return to its original position.Take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. 7) Fasten the two heater elements to the chassis with the four bolts removed at step 1 on page 2-38). Fasten the base of the heater with two bolts coated with the supplied adhesive. Fasten the installation materials to each of the cover bolts. M5 screw M5 screw
(Do not apply adhesive.)
(Do not apply adhesive.) Fixing Shaft Fixing Shaft SD Heater SD Heater Fixing Plate Fixing Plate Cover Bolt Cover Bolt M5 screw coated M5 screw coated with adhesive with adhesive 2-41 2. WIRING Note: If it is necessary to open the front cover after installing the DE-ICER kit, re-
move the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle shown in the following figure then detach the cover slowly to prevent damage to the heater. Remove the de-icer power cable from the locking Remove the de-icer power cable from the locking wire saddle to open the front cover. wire saddle to open the front cover. FRONT FRONT 11. Coat the O-ring in the gland for the microwave coaxial cable with silicon grease. 12. Coat the mating surface between the coaxial connector of the cable and the wave-
guide flange on the Antenna Unit with the supplied waterproofing compound. Note: Do not coat the O-ring with the waterproofing compound. 13. Fasten the coaxial connector to the waveguide flange with three sets of M620 hex bolts, M6 spring washers and M6 nuts. Coat surface of flange with waterproofing compound. Hex bolt Spring washer Nut REARREARREAR 14. Tape the cable with two or more turns of self-bonding tape then wrap with PVC tape. 5 cm Coaxial connector 15. Secure the cable with fixing bands (supplied) or the op-
tional cable clamping fixture (Type: 03-011-3228) to the mast and to the wheelhouse structure. For the optional through-deck cable gland, see the outline drawing at the back of this manual. 7 Fixing band 16. Reconnect the performance monitor connector (J807). 17. Check that the gasket on the front and rear cover is seated properly, then close the covers. The torque for the fixing bolts must be 28.0 Nm. Note: For the de-icer specifications, take care not to hit the heater elements on the chassis or radiator. If the heater hits something, unfasten the fixing screws for the heater to adjust the position of the heater. Then fix the heater again. 2-42 2. WIRING 2.6 Power Supply Unit 2.6.1 How to fabricate cables For locations of cables and cores, see the sticker on the reverse side of the top cover.
(All dimensions in millimeters) For how to connect the LAN modular plug, see "LAN cable" on page 2-6. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. RW-0013/RW-0030/03CA00099 (for Antenna cable)
<RW-0013/03CA00099>
(unit: mm) 330330 6 Outer sheath 200200 3030 Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Inner shield Inner shield Outer shield Outer shield Fabrication of the coaxial cable 1414 1414 55 Vinyl tape Inner shield Inner shield Clamp position
(Wrap the outer shield a single time.) NOTE: Do not wrap the shield more than twice. Crimp-on lug FV5.5-3, supplied
<RW-0030>
(unit: mm) 3030 360360 330330 Armor Outer sheath Inner sheath 200200 6 Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Inner shield Inner shield Outer shield Outer shield Vinyl tape Inner shield Inner shield Clamp position
(Wrap the outer shield a single time on the inner sheath.) NOTE: Do not wrap the shield more than twice. Crimp-on lug FV5.5-3, supplied Folded shield
*: For 03CA00099 cable, do not fold the shield as shown in the following. 1414 1414 55 Fabrication of the coaxial cable 1414 1414 55 Folded shield 2-43 2. WIRING TPYCY-2.5 (for Motor power cable)
(unit: mm) Sheath Sheath 3030 Armor 160160 6 Clamp position Vinyl tape DPYC-2.5 cable (for Power) Clamp the sheath with the cable clamp.
(unit: mm) Armor 5050 Sheath Sheath 200200 10 Crimp-on lug (FV2-4), supplied Vinyl tape Clamp position RW-00339 (for Processor Unit) The end of the cable RW-00339 which connects to the Power Supply Unit is prefabri-
cated. Clamp the cable at the outer shield which is wrapped on the outer sheath. RW-4864/00136 (for sub monitor) The ends of the sub monitor cable are prefabricated. Clamp the cable at the outer shield. 2.6.2 How to connect cables inside the Power Supply Unit Main switch, Fuse Ground terminal Connect the ground wire between the ground terminal on the chassis and the ships earth. Note 1: If the Processor Unit is turned on, turn it off before wiring of the Power Supply Unit. Note 2: Turn the main switch of the Processor Unit off before turning the Power Supply Unit off. How to open/close the top cover Unfasten five screws (M48) to open the top cover from the Processor Unit. After the appropriate cable connections are completed, fasten five screws to close the top cover. 2-44
1 2 | User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 5.67 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
2. WIRING Cable entrance There are two layers at the cable entrance on the front side of the Power Supply Unit, upper and lower entrances. Remove the six M4 screws of total to set the cables on the cable entrances. Upper entrance Lower entrance Cable clamps Upper entrance Cable entrance Top view Four screws on cable clamps Two screws on upper entrance The lane for each cable is as shown below, referring to the Wiring Label attached on the reverse side of the top cover. Cable from Processr Unit Antenna cable Motor power cable Power cable Power cable Cable from Control Unit Sub monitor cable Connection of Antenna cable 1. Connect the lines of the cable to the appropriate WAGO connectors (TB701, TB702 and TB703), referring to the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. 2. Set the antenna cable on the upper cable entrance as follows, then fasten the shield part of the antenna cable with the cable clamp. For the clamp position, see page 2-7 for FAR-2258 and page 2-26 for FAR-2268DS. Note: For the antenna cable 03CA00099, remove the shim plate from the cable entrance before passing the cable. For antenna cable For 03CA00099 cable Upper entrance Remove the shim plate. Remove the shim plate. 3. Connect each line of the cable to the appropriate connectors on 03P9668 board. Serial lines: TB701, TB702 and TB703, through the wiring clamp (A) 2-45 2. WIRING Shield line: Screw (C) Coaxial cable: J716 through the wiring clamp (D). Then clamp the shield part of the coaxial cable with the cable clamp (E).
(A)
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
(C) TB701 TB701 TB702 TB702 TB703 TB703
(D)
(D) J716 J716
(E)
(E) Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Antenna cable Connection of Motor power cable (From Antenna Unit) 1. Connect the lines of the cable to the appropriate WAGO connectors (TB713), re-
ferring to the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. 2. Set the motor power cable on the upper cable entrance, and fasten the armor part of the antenna cable with the cable clamp. For the clamp position, see
"TPYCY-2.5 (for Motor power cable)" on page 2-44. 3. Connect the lines of the Motor power cable as follows:
Motor power cable Upper cable entrance Upper cable entrance Serial lines: TB713. Clamp the armor part of the cable with the cable clamp. Note: Twist the motor power cable once to handle extra length. TB713 TB713 Twist the cable. Motor power cable 2-46 Connection of Power cable 1. Loosen four screws on the front plate, then unfasten two screws on the cable clamp to set the power cable. 2. WIRING Cable clamp Cable clamp Front Plate Front Plate 2. Set the power cable on the cable entrance, and fasten the sheath part of the pow-
er cable with the cable clamp. For the clamp position, see "DPYC-2.5 cable (for Power)" on page 2-44. 3. Remove the plastic cover on TB1 to pass the power cable. 4. Connect the cable to TB1 with the pre-attached crimp-on lugs, referring to the wir-
ing label near TB1. TB1TB1 Wiring label Plastic cover Plastic cover Cable entrance for power cable Cable entrance for power cable 5. Remount the plastic cover and the front cover, then clamp the power cable on the sheath. Connection of cable for Processor Unit 1. Connect the lines of the cable to the appropriate WAGO connectors (TB704), re-
ferring to the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. 2. Set the cable for Processor Unit on the upper cable entrance as shown below, and fasten the armor part of the cable with the cable clamp. Cable for Processor Unit 2-47 2. WIRING 3. Connect the lines of the cable for Processor Unit as shown below through the wir-
ing clamp (B). Serial lines: TB704 Shield line: Screw (A) LAN cable: J503
(B) TB704
(A) J503 (LAN cable) Cable for Processor Unit Connection of cable for Control Unit 1. Connect the lines of the cable to the appropriate WAGO connectors (TB711 and TB712), referring to the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual. 2. Set the heat shrinkable part of the cable for Control Unit on the appropriate lane on the lower cable entrance, as shown below. Fasten the copper part of the cable with the cable clamp. Clamp the copper part. Cable for Control Unit Set the heat shrinkable tube on the lane. 2-48 3. Connect the cable for Control Unit to the connectors (TB711 and TB712) through the appropriate wiring clamps (A) and (B). 2. WIRING TB711 TB712
(B)
(B)
(A)
(A) Cable for Control Unit Sub monitor cable (RW-4864/00136) Connection of cable for sub monitor Up to four cables (RW-00136, RW-
4864) can be uses as sub monitor ca-
bles. Set their cables on the specified cable entrance as shown in the figure to the right. Sub monitor cable (RW-4864) 1. Set the shield part of the sub monitor cables on the appropriate lanes on the up-
per/lower cable entrances as shown below. Fasten the shield part of the cable with the cable clamp. 2. Connect the sub monitor cables to the connectors. The cable for input signal of an external radar should be connected to the connector J710. RW-4864 on the upper entrances: max. two lines through the wiring clamps (A) and (B) to two of connectors J708, J709, J710 or J717. See the dashed lines in the figure below. RW-4864 on the lower entrances: max. two lines through the wiring clamps (B) to (E) to two of connectors J708, J709, J710 or J717. See the solid lines in the figure below. RW-00136 on the upper entrances: max. two lines through the wiring clamps
(C) to (E) to two of connectors J708, or J710. 2-49 2. WIRING For RW-4864 cable For RW-00136 cable (from upper entrance)
(B)
(B)
(A)
(A) J708 J709 J710*
J717 J708 J710*
(C)
(C)
(D)
(D)
(E)
(E)
(C)
(C)
(D)
(D)
(E)
(E)
*: For cable for input signal of an external radar, connect to J710. 2.7 Transceiver Unit The TR-DOWN radar requires the transceiver unit as follows:
Transceiver Unit RTR-108 for X-band radar (FAR-2328W) Transceiver Unit RTR-109 for S-band radar (FAR-2338SW) 2.7.1 How to fabricate the cables For how to connect the LAN modular plug, see "LAN cable" on page 2-6. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. TTYCYSLA-10 (for serial cable) Clamp the armor with the cable clamp. 3535 55 300300 140140 Drain wire Drain wire 6 6 Outer sheath Armor Inner sheath Pass the heat shrink tubing (local supply) onto the drain wire. Crimp-on lug
(FV1.25-3(LF) RED for X-band, FV1.25-4(LF) RED for S-band) Vinyl tape
(unit: mm) 2-50 RW-00135 L2L2 66 L1L1 Outer sheath Armor Vinyl tape 2. WIRING 6 Radar type X-band S-band L1 410
(unit: mm) L2 L4 L3 30 470 200
80
*: Not specified LAN cable LAN cable Shield Shield Power line L3L3 L1L1L1L1L4L4 150150 S03-92-15/30/40/50 (RW-00136 + connector, for a sub monitor) Note: The maximum cable length is 50 m. Clamp the armor with the cable clamp. 3535 55 L1L1 L2L2 Armor Outer sheath Vinyl tape Vinyl tape L3L3 Shield Shield Inner sheath Radar type X-band S-band L1 240 520 L3 L2 190 220 220 420
(unit: mm) Coaxial cable Coaxial cable 6 Crimp-on lug
(FV5.5-4(LF), local supply) 1414 1414 55 Folded shield 2.7.2 How to connect the cables from X-band radar antenna Antenna cable, serial cable, sub monitor cable 1. Loosen eight bolts then remove the cover of the unit. 2. Unfasten three bolts from the cable clamp. Lay the cables in respective cable slots so their armors rest in the slots. For Serial cable For Antenna cable For Sub monitor cable Loosen eight bolts. Remove three bolts. 3. Attach the appropriate WAGO connectors (pre-attached) to the appropriate ca-
bles, and then connect the antenna, sub monitor and serial cables to the RF-TB Board shown in the following figure. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnec-
tion diagram at the back of this manual. Note 1: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Note 2: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. 2-51 2. WIRING Destination of Antenna cable Power line: TB801 through the locking wire saddle (A). LAN cable: J821 through the locking wire saddles (A and B, three places.) Shield of power line: Screw (C) Shield of LAN cable: Screw (D) Side view for LAN port J821
(D)
(B)
(B)
(A) LAN cable LAN cable
(B)
(B)
(A)
(C) Antenna cable Power line Power line TB801 Destination of cable for the sub monitor Signal line: TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A). Coaxial cable: TB804 Shield of signal cable: Screw on fixing plate (C) TB803 TB804 A C Destination of Serial cable from the Antenna Unit Serial cable: TB802 and TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A). Shield of serial cable: Screw on fixing plate (C) TB803 TB802 A C 2-52 4. Bind all cables with cable ties supplied locally (two places). 2. WIRING Cable tie Cable tie 5. Check that armor of cables are lying in their respective cable slots then fasten the cable clamp. Flexible waveguide (FR-9) The RF interconnection between the Antenna Unit and the transceiver can be made with a flexible waveguide (FR-9). If the rectangular waveguide is used, observe the fol-
lowing installation guidelines. Correctly installed waveguide runs ensure the most efficient transmission of electri-
cal energy at high frequencies. Electrical losses, however, occur in the waveguide runs. To minimize them the following factors are of great importance: minimum length, airtightness and electrical continuity. Another consideration required is that of frequency disturbance. The transmitting valve, a magnetron, is the primary oscillator in the radar. This is different from the oscillation system at lower frequencies in which conventional radio valves are used. In the latter case, the primary oscillator is always protected from the effects of load impedance by a buffer stage so that frequency and waveform are left unobstructed. With a waveguide and magnetron, however, mismatch of impedance causes fre-
quency pulling. For this reason, the number of possible mismatches in a waveguide run, i.e., joins and bends, must be kept minimum. Each pair of flanges should be coupled with one O-ring, four bolts and spring wash-
ers and the choke flange must be in the upper position. The bolts and O-ring must be greased before insertion to facilitate removal if required at a later date. The transceiver unit output flange is a plain type and the Antenna Unit output flange is a choke type, and it is important to maintain this relation-
ship throughout the waveguide run. Thru-deck hole Weld here. Deck TRANSCEIVER UNIT Drain waveguide After installation of the waveguide is completed, the coupling portions must be sealed by using the adhesive supplied. In a very short time the surface of the waveguide becomes green with verdigris. Therefore, paint both the surface of the waveguide and flanges to avoid corrosion and water penetration. Paint must not be allowed to reach the inner surface of the waveguide or the mating surface of any flange. 2-53 2. WIRING 2.7.3 How to connect the cables from S-band radar antenna Antenna cable, serial cable, sub monitor 1. Loosen eight bolts then remove the cover of the unit. 2. Unfasten three bolts from the cable clamp. Lay the cables in their cable slots so their armors rest in the slots. For Serial cable For Antenna cable For Sub monitor cable Loosen eight bolts. Remove three bolts. 3. Attach the appropriate WAGO connectors (pre-attached) to the appropriate ca-
bles, and then connect the antenna, sub monitor and serial cables to the RF-TB Board shown in the following figure. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. For pin arrangement, see the interconnec-
tion diagram at the back of this manual. Note 1: Make sure to pass the cable through the specified locking wire saddle. Note 2: A terminal opener is provided on the RF-TB Board. Destination of Antenna cable Power line: TB801 through the locking wire saddle (A). LAN cable: J821 through the locking wire saddle (A) Shield of power line: Screw (C) Shield of LAN cable: Screw (D) TB801 J821
(D) LAN cable LAN cable Power line Power line
(C)
(A) Antenna cable Destination of sub monitor cable Signal line: TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A), see the figure for the
"Destination of Antenna cable:"
Coaxial cable: TB804 (B) Shield of signal line: Screw (C) TB803 TB804
(A)
(C) 2-54 Destination of Serial cable from the Antenna Unit Serial cable: TB802 and TB803 through the locking wire saddle (A). Shield of serial cable: Screw on fixing plate (D) 2. WIRING TB803 TB802
(A)
(D) 4. Bind all cables with cable ties supplied locally (two places). Cable tie Cable tie 5. Check that armor of cables are lying in their respective cable slots then fasten the cable clamp. Microwave coaxial plug Attach the microwave coaxial plug to the coaxial cable. See the applicable FURUNO technical information for the procedure. Attach the coaxial cable assembly to the transceiver unit as follows:
1. Unfasten four bolts (M610) to remove the dust cover from the output WG adapt-
er. 2. Fasten eight bolts (removed at step 1) to attach the flange to the transceiver unit. 3. Attach the coaxial cable to the converter of the flange. Circulator M610 (4 pcs.) Coaxial cable Converter
: M620 (8 pcs.) Adapter Transceiver unit, inside view Output WG adapter Flange 2-55 2. WIRING 2.8 Processor Unit 2.8.1 How to fabricate cables For locations of cables and cores, see the sticker on the reverse side of the top cover.
(All dimensions in millimeters) For how to connect the LAN modular plug, see "LAN cable" on page 2-6. For how to connect the WAGO connector, see "WAGO connector" on page 2-5. RW-00135/RW-00339 (for Antenna cable) Note: For the 1.5 m of RW-00339 cable (for FAR-2258/2268DS radar), fabrication is not required. 8080 1515 Outer sheath Armor Vinyl tape 580580 Power line 300300 100100 150150 6
(unit: mm) LAN cable LAN cable Shield Shield RW-9600/6895/4873 (for retrofit or foremast installation) The existing cable can be used for the following cases. In these cases, the optional LAN Signal Converter is required. See section 2.10 "LAN Signal Converter" for details. Cable extension for foremast installation (For X-band of FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 ra-
dars, TR-UP radar only) Retrofit (For X-band/S-band of FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 radars, TR-UP radar only) Note: The maximum antenna cable length is 100 m for RW-9600, 50 m for RW-6895/
4873. If the existing antenna cable is longer than the above maximum length, replace the antenna cable with RW-00135. The unused power lines are tied up and attached to the crimp-on lug FV5.5-S4 (LF), supplied locally. Connect these unused lines to the ground terminal with the shield line. See the interconnection diagram at the back of this manual for details. 8080 1515 Outer sheath Armor Vinyl tape Inner sheath
(unit: mm) 1414 1414 Folded shield 55 580580 Power line 100100 100100 400400 6 Crimp-on lug Inner shield Inner shield Outer shield Outer shield Coaxial cable Coaxial cable 2-56 DPYC-2.5/6 cable (for Power) Clamp the sheath with the cable clamp. For the supplied crimp-on lugs, use FV2-4 for AC power cable, FV5.5-4 for DC power cable. 2. WIRING Armor 2525 Sheath Sheath 4040 6 1010 Crimp-on lug, supplied
(unit: mm) Vinyl tape TTYCSLA series cable (for serial) 8080 Armor Sheath L 100100 5 Drain wire Drain wire
(unit: mm) Cable type (JIS) L TTYCSLA-1Q TTYCSLA-4 TTYCSLA-7 590 720 570 Pass the heat-resistant tubing (supplied) onto the drain wire. Vinyl tape 6 Crimp-on lug 2.8.2 How to connect cables inside the Processor Unit Connect the ground wire between the ground termi-
nal on the chassis and the ships earth. Ground terminal How to open/close the top cover Unfasten six screws (M48) to open the top cover from the Processor Unit. After the appropriate cable connections are com-
pleted, fasten six screws to close the top cover. 2-57 2. WIRING Connection of Antenna cable For existing antenna cable, see section 2.10 "LAN Signal Converter". 1. Remove the spacers to pass the antenna cable on the upper plate. Ground terminal Armor Cable tie Upper plate Cable tie Antenna cable 2. Fasten the cable to the post part of the plate with a cable tie (local supply). Con-
nect the inner/outer shields and the extra wires of the existing cable to the ground terminal. Note: Be sure the vinyl sheath of the cables is on the post. 3. Pass the cable to connect the WAGO connector on the TB Board 03P9648 through the locking wire saddles as shown below. Connect the shield for LAN ca-
ble to the ground terminal near the LAN connector. For RW-00135/00339 cable For retrofit cable WAGO connection of Antenna cable (J608) WAGO connection of Antenna cable (J608) Ground terminal for LAN cable LAN connection of Antenna cable BNC case Coaxial cable 2-58 2. WIRING Connection of Power cable 1. Unfasten two screws to open the power cable cover. 2. Remove the plastic cover and cable clamp to pass the power cable. 3. Connect the cable to the terminal with the pre-attached crimp-on lugs. Clamp the power cable on the sheath. Note: For DC power specifications, the Processor Unit does not have the main switch. Connect each polarity (1: +, 2: ) of the cable correctly to the terminal board. Plastic cover Clamp the sheath. Power cable cover 4. Remount the plastic cover and the power cable cover. Cable clamp Power cable Connection of cables for serial, contact signal lines and sub monitors of EC-
DIS 1. Unfasten the four bolts dashed circled below to remove the upper plate of the ca-
ble clamp. 2. Remove the spacers to pass the appropriate cables on the upper and lower plates. The recommended cable entrances are shown as below. AMS (Serial) AMS (Contact) AIS ECDIS AD-10
(Antenna Unit) Upper plate Lower plate GPS LOG HDG Control Unit RS-232C
(for brill control) Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS 2-59
1 2 | User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 4.99 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
3. Fasten the cables to the post part of the plates with cable ties (local supply). Note: Be sure the vinyl sheath on the post. Cable tie Ground termimal Ground termimal Spacer Vinyl sheath Vinyl sheath Shield Serial cable Cable tie Upper plate Cable tie Sub monitor cable Lower plate 4. Pass the cables to the TB board 03P9648 and 03P9562 through the locking wire saddles (A, B and C) in the figure shown right. For the cables on the upper plate, use locking wire saddles (A and B). For the cables on the lower plate, use locking wire saddles (A, B and C). 5. Connect the connectors to the TB Board. referring to the interconnection diagram. J508 Connect cable for USB mouse or USB keypad (local supply, max. 5 m). Note: Do not connect a USB device other than mouse. 03P9648 03P9652
(A)
(B)
(C) J620
(AD-10, GYRO) J617
(LOG) J616
(GPS) J614
(HDG) J618 (AMS serial) J615 (AIS) J619 (ECDIS) J611
(Control Unit) J613 (AMS contact) J608 (Antennna) J621
(RS-232C for brill control) J510/J511 Connect cable for sub monitors of ECDIS. J503 Connect LAN cable for antenna cable. 6. Connect the ground wires of cables to the near ground terminals on the plates. Connection of cables for Control Unit 1. Unfasten the four bolts, indicated with dashed circles below, to remove the upper plate of the cable clamp. 2. WIRING 2-60 2. Remove the appropriate spacer to pass the cable for Control Unit on the lower plate. The recommended cable entrance is shown as below. 2. WIRING Control Unit Lower plate 3. Fasten the cable to the post part of the plate with a cable tie (local supply). Note: Be sure the vinyl sheath on the post. 4. Pass the cables to the TB board 03P9648 and clamp the shield of the cable with the cable clamp (A) shown in the following figure. Then, connect to J611 and J612. Control unit cable Lower plate 03P9648 J611 (10 lines) J612 (2 lines)
(A) Clamp the shield.
Control unit cable Connection of cable of LAN, Monitor Unit, VDR Connect the cables of Intelligent HUB (HUB-3000) and Switching HUB (HUB-100) to the LAN ports in front of the Processor Unit. Connect the cables of Monitor unit or VDR to the DVI ports at the front of the Processor Unit. DVI-I port (for analog signal) DVI-D port (for digital signal) LAN1 port
(for HUB-3000) LAN2 port
(for HUB-100) 2-61 2. WIRING For VDR connection, the RGB signal can be output with using the optional DVI-BNC cable kit OP03-252 (Code No.: 001-496-900). 1. Attach the five connectors of the Cable Assembly (supplied) to the fixing plate
(supplied) with cable ties as below. 2. Establish the ground system on the fixing plate. 3. Fix the cable assembly to the appropriate location with two screw (M5). The loca-
tion must be within 200 cm of the Processor Unit. 4. Connect the VDR cables to the connectors of the cable assembly. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fixing plate Cable Assembly Grounding Fix with two M5 screws. Cable of VDR Fastening of USB connector (for C-type radars) The USB connector of the RP board should be fas-
tened as shown in the figure to the right. Use three cable ties (local supply) to secure the connector of the USB cable to the upper cable entrance of the Processor Unit. Upper plate Upper plate If there is no extra space on the cable entrance of the Processor Unit and you can not secure the ca-
ble connector, pass the USB cable next to the thin-
nest cable (cable entrance with the most room to spare), then pull the USB connector towards the front of the Processor Unit. Place the USB cable beneath the other cables to prevent water intrusion into the USB cable. Se-
cure the USB cable to the neighboring cable with the supplied cable ties. Connector of USB cable Cable tie Cable tie USB entry USB entry 2-62 2.9 Monitor Unit For the wiring of the monitor unit, see the operators manual supplied with the monitor unit. 2. WIRING Mounting considerations Standard type Connect the radar main monitor to the DVI1. Connect the sub radar monitor to the DVI2. VDR connection To connect a VDR, it is necessary to output data in analog format. To connect a VDR to the DVI-I port, use the optional DVI-BNCX5+GND-L2.0 cable to output the RGB signal from the DVI-I. See the operators manual supplied with the VDR. Ad-
justment of the output is necessary. Menu Setting The [INSTALLATION SETTING] menu appears only when the power is turned on for the first time after installation of the monitor unit. INSTALLATION SETTING Menu EXT BRILL CTRL SERIAL BAUDRATE COLOR CALIBRATION KEY LOCK RS-485 4800bps ON ON
(OFF/DVI1/DVI2/RS-232C/RS-485/USB)
(4800/9600/19200/38400)
(OFF/ON)
(OFF/ON) Menu item SAVE AND EXIT YES
(NO/YES) Adjust the settings referring to the following table. EXT BRILL CTRL DVI COLOR CALIBRATION OFF KEY LOCK ON DVI PWR SYNC*
ON
*: [DVI PWR SYNC] is the slide switch at the bottom rear of the monitor unit. Confirm that this switch is set to [ON] (default setting). See Slide switch below for details. Slide switch Set the slide switch to "ON" (default setting). This setting automatically powers the monitor unit on or off according to the DVI signal input. The power switch of the mon-
itor unit is inoperative. Note: The OFF position provides control of the monitor unit power with the power switch of the monitor unit. 2-63 2. WIRING How to open the [INSTALLATION SETTING] menu Turn off the monitor unit. While you hold the DISP key, press the BRILL key to turn on the monitor unit. Keep the DISP key pressed until the [INSTALLATION SETTING]
menu appears. Note: When the [DVI PWR SYNC] slide switch is ON, turn on the connected external equipment while you press the DISP key to turn on the monitor unit. 2.10 LAN Signal Converter The LAN Signal Converter allows the use of existing antenna cable RW-9600/6895/
4873 for TR-UP radar. If the LAN Signal Converter is not attached in the antenna and Processor Units, the LAN Signal Converter Kit (optional supply) is required. For X-band radar only, you can select a specification with the LAN Signal Converter pre-installed at the factory. LAN Signal Converter Kit (option) Radar Type Code No. X-band magnetron radar OP03-247-3 OP03-247-4 X-band solid state radar S-band magnetron radar OP03-247-2 OP03-247-1 S-band solid state radar 001-496-580 001-568-890 001-496-570 001-496-560 2.10.1 Application overview The LAN Signal Converter has two applications. Application 1: Use with existing antenna cable (retrofit) Processor Unit side Antenna Unit side Antenna cable
(Coaxial, Power) Processor Unit Power LAN Power TB LANCoax Converter*
Power Coaxial
* Installed inside respective unit. RF-TB LANCoax Converter*
Power LAN Power Antenna Unit Method 1: Using existing antenna cable (RW-9600/6895/4873) Note: Use with existing antenna cable (RW-9600/6895/4873) in case of retrofit. The maximum length of the antenna cable is 100 m for RW-9600, 50 m For RW-6895/
4873. 2-64 2. WIRING Application 2: Foremast installation (for X-band radar only) Foremast installation, where the distance between the Antenna Unit and the Proces-
sor Unit is more than 100 m (max. 460 m). In this case, two Junction Boxes RJB-001 are required (for antenna and Processor Units). See section 2.11 and the interconnec-
tion diagram for connections in the junction box. The Cable Extension Kit (Type: OP03-224-3, Code No.: 001-254-410), comprised of two junctions boxes, one LAN Signal Converters and necessary hardware, is available as an optional extra. Note: Only the RW-9600 cable can be used for foremast installation. The RW-6895/
4873 cables are not available. Processor Unit side Antenna Unit side Coaxial cable, power cable (DPYCY x3), 400 m Processor Unit Power LAN Power TB LANCoax Converter*
* Installed inside respective unit. Junc. Box Junc. Box RF-TB LANCoax Converter*
Power LAN Power Antenna Unit Antenna cable
(30 m) Antenna cable
(30 m) Method 2: Using antenna cable RW-9600 2.10.2 Wiring in the Antenna Unit with LAN Signal Converter pre-in-
stalled (X-band radar only) Note: If the Antenna Unit does not included the LAN Signal Converter, the converter kit (available as an optional extra) is required. See "LAN Signal Converter Kit
(option)" on page 2-64. Dismount the transceiver unit in the Antenna Unit. See section 2.2.2, for details. Also, in the procedure, mainly figures of magnetron radar are shown. 1. Unfasten the coaxial cable from the converter in the Antenna Unit. Remove Remove Coaxial Cable Coaxial Cable
(BNC-PP).
(BNC-PP). BNC case Rear view 2-65 2. WIRING 2. Unfasten two screws to detach the BNC case from the Antenna Unit. 3. Loosen two screws on the BNC case. Attach the coaxial cable from the Antenna Unit then close the case. Fasten shield with clamp. BNC case Loosen two screws. Fasten conductor with screw. 1414 1414 55 Folded shield
(mm) 4. Fasten the BNC case to the original position in the Antenna Unit with original two screws, referring to step 2. 5. Mount the transceiver unit to the Antenna Unit. 6. Re-connect the coaxial cable (disconnected at step 1). 2.10.3 Wiring in the Processor Unit installed the LAN Signal Convert-
er already (X-band radar only) Some parts or wiring may have been omitted from the illustrations of the Processor Unit for clarity. 1. Disconnect the connection (A) between the converter and BNC case. Unfasten two screws (B) on the BNC case assembly to remove the BNC case assembly from the Processor Unit. Converter Converter
(B)
(B)
(A)
(A) BNC case BNC case 2-66 2. Loosen two screws on the BNC case. Attach the coaxial cable from the Antenna 2. WIRING Unit. BNC case Loosen two screws. Fasten conductor with screw. Fasten shield with clamp. 1414 1414 55 Folded shield
(mm) 3. Loosen the screws (C) on the BNC case assembly, then attach the BNC case assembly to the original position in the Processor Unit.
(C)
(C) 4. After attaching, adjust the position of the BNC case, then fasten the two loose screws (C) tightly. BNC case assembly 2.10.4 How to check the installation Observe the LEDs on the converter to check for proper operation and troubleshooting. TEST M S HMC-200CE-A Master/Slave Coax/PLC LAN PWR State OFF Lighting green Flashing orange OFF Lighting green Flashing green Lighting orange Flashing orange OFF Lighting green Lighting green Lighting orange LED PWR LAN Coax/PLC Master/Slave Meaning Power OFF Power ON Test mode Link down 100 M link up 100 M active 10 M link up 10 M active Link down Link up Master mode Slave mode Note: The TEST button is for factory use. Do not operate the button. 2-67 2. WIRING 2.11 Junction Box (option) For FAR-2x18/2x28/2x38 X-band radars, the Junction boxes are required when the dis-
tance between the Antenna Unit and Proces-
sor Unit is greater than 100 meters (max. 460 meters); for example, the Antenna Unit is installed on the foremast. Use signal cable RW-9600 (2), power cable DPYCY-6 (3), and coaxial cable RG-12/UY(3). Pass each cable through its cable gland as shown to the right. Flat washer Cable gland Vinyl sheath Clamping gland Gasket Cut and trim armor. Clamp outer conductor of coaxial cables. Fix wires with cable ties. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RG12/UY RG-12/UY Connect inner conductors. DPYCY-6 RW-9600/6895/4873 M8 screw for grounding 2-68 2.12 Intelligent HUB (option) Secure the LAN cables to the cable clamps on the HUB-3000 with cable ties (sup-
plied). 2. WIRING Power Fail Power port DPYC-1.5 DPYC-1.5 Ground wire
(IV-1.25sq., supplied) LAN cable No use. LAN port To gateway network (ECDIS, radar, etc.) Attach the supplied LAN caps to unused connector holes to comply with waterproofing standard IPX2. Cable clamp 2.13 VDR Connection The Processor Unit has the DVI-I port or the LAN port for connection of a VDR. 2.13.1 DVI-I (Analog RGB) port connection Use the optional RGB cable (DVI-BNCX5+GND-L2.0) to connect the VDR. The DVI-D port and DVI-I port have their own circuits. This prevents interruption of the radar picture shown on the main monitor connected to the DVI-D port, if a fault condition occurs at the DVI-I port. The Processor Unit continuously outputs video signals from its DVI-D and DVI-I ports. The operator cannot stop the output. 2.13.2 LAN2 port connection Connect a VDR complied to IEC-61162-450 standards to the LAN2 port. If the [VDR LAN OUTPUT] setting is set to [ON], the screenshot (JPEG-format) is output every 15 seconds through LAN2 port. See [VDR LAN OUTPUT]on page 3-
23. The output image at the same resolution as the DVI-D port. The LAN2 port and DVI-D port have their own circuits. This prevents interruption of DVI-D port, if a fault condition occurs at the LAN2 port. 2-69 2. WIRING This page is intentionally left blank. 2-70 3. ADJUSTMENTS Note: After completing the settings and adjustments, copy the setting data to a SD-
card* (USB flash memory* for C-type radars), referring to the Operator's Manual. This will allow easy restoration of setting data after the MAIN Board is replaced, etc.
*: The SD card slot is in front of the Processor Unit, and the USB flash memory slot is connected to the RP board 03P9657. At the first start-up after installation, turn on the Processor Unit with the main switch. Open the protected menus to adjust the radar. Fol-
low the procedures in this chapter to complete the adjustment.
**: For DC power specifications, the Processor Unit does not have the main switch. To power on the Processor Unit for DC power specifica-
tions, turn on the ships Mains. For FAR-2258/2268DS radars, turn on the Power Supply Unit also with the main switch. Note: Turn the main switch of the Processor Unit off before turning the Power Supply Unit off. Further, both units should also be turned off at the ships main switchboard. Processor unit MAIN SW Main switch**
Power supply unit Main switch Below are the controls on the Control Unit RCU-014/015(or optional RCU-016) that are used to make the adjustments. RCU-014 Power key HL OFF key Mouse wheel Left button Right button BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN OFF ON EBL F1 F3 F2 F4 ALARM ACK STBY TX 1 HL OFF 4 OFF CENTER 7 VECTOR TIME CANCEL TRAILS 2 EBL OFFSET 5 CU/TM RESET 8 VECTOR MODE 0 BRILL 3 MODE 6 INDEX LINE 9 TARGET LIST ENTER MARK OFF ON VRM MENU ACQ
RANGE
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL MENU key Track ball 3-1 3. ADJUSTMENTS RCU-015/016 Left button Right button Mouse wheel Track ball Power key
(RCU-015 only) F1 key F1 F2 F3 F4 RCU-031 Power key HL OFF key Mouse wheel Left button Right button PUSH AUTO PUSH AUTO PUSH AUTO EBL OFF EBL ON A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN VRM OFF VRM ON STBY TX F1 F3 F2 F4 PUSH-PLOTTER
HL OFF
EBL OFFSET
MODE MENU ACQ
OFF CENTER
CU/TM RESET INDEX LINE
TRACK ON/OFF VECTOR TIME
VECTOR MODE
CURSOR ON/OFF
RANGE BRILL TRACK COLOR WPT GOTO CANCEL TRAILS MARK SELECT
ENTER MARK
TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL ALERT ACK MENU key Track ball How to Use the Menu 1. Press the Power key to turn on the unit. 2. Press the MENU key or click the [MENU] box to open the main menu. The [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu does not ap-
pear when the unit is first turned on. It appears on the main menu after displaying it by following the procedures on the section 3.1 and is displayed until the unit is turned off. 3. Operate the track ball or the mouse wheel to select a menu item then click the left button. 4. Operate the track ball or the mouse wheel to select a menu option then click the left button. To return to above layer, select [BACK] then click the left button or right button. 5. If the menu option requires entry of numeric data, rotate the mouse wheel to set the value, then click the left button. 6. Close the menu by pressing the MENU key once or click the right button few times. 3-2 3. ADJUSTMENTS 3.1 How to Open the Radar Installation Menu The [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu has various items through two pages for adjust-
ment of the radar. To show this menu;
For RCU-014: Press and hold the HL OFF key, then press the MENU key five times. For RCU-015/016: Put the cursor on the [MENU] box. Press and hold the F1 key, then right-click five times. Page 1 Page 2 Go back to page 1. Go to page 2. Tuning initialization Tuning initialization is required before setting up the radar. Open the main menu then select [ECHO]
[TUNING INITIALIZE] to start initialization.
"TUNE INIT" appears on the top of the dis-
play during the initialization. After tuning is completed, right-click twice to close the menu. Note 1: In STBY, this menu is not available. Note 2: For solid-state device radar, this menu is invalid. Tuning bar
[TUNE] button
[TUNE] button
[TUNE] button
[TUNE MAN]: Manual tuning
[TUNE MAN]: Manual tuning
[TUNE MAN]: Manual tuning
[TUNE AUTO]: Auto tuning
[TUNE AUTO]: Auto tuning
[TUNE AUTO]: Auto tuning 3.2 How to Align the Heading You have mounted the Antenna Unit facing straight ahead in the direction of the bow. Therefore, a small but conspicuous target dead ahead visually must appear on the heading line (zero degrees). Front of antenna Correct bearing
(relative to heading) a Front of antenna Apparent position of target b a Target 340 330 350 000 010 020 030 320 310 b Target 320 310 340 330 350 000 010 020 030 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 220 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 Apparent Apparent Apparent position of position of position of target target target 120 130 110 140 Antenna mounted error to port
(HDG SW advanced) 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 Picture appears deviated clockwise. 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 220 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 Correct bearing Correct bearing Correct bearing
(relative to
(relative to
(relative to heading) heading) heading) 130 120 110 140 Antenna mounted error to starboard
(HDG SW delayed) 210 200 190 180 170 150 160 Picture appears deviated counterclockwise. 3-3 3. ADJUSTMENTS In practice, you will probably observe some small bearing error on the display because of the difficulty in achieving accurate initial positioning of the Antenna Unit. The follow-
ing adjustment will compensate for this error. 1. Select a stationary target echo at a range between 0.125 and 0.25 NM, preferably near the heading line. 2. Operate the EBL control to bisect the target echo. 3. Read the target bearing. 4. Measure the bearing of the stationary target on a navigation chart and calculate the difference between the actual bearing and apparent bearing on the radar screen. 5. Show the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu. 6. Select [ECHO ADJUSTMENT] followed by [HD ALIGN]. 7. Key in the bearing difference. The setting range is 0 to 359.9 (default: 000.0). 8. Confirm that the target echo is displayed at the correct bearing on the screen. 3.3 How to Adjust the Sweep Timing Sweep timing differs with respect to the length of the signal cable between the Anten-
na Unit and the Processor Unit. Adjust sweep timing at installation to prevent the fol-
lowing symptoms:
The echo of a "straight" target (for example, pier), on the 0.25 NM range, appears on the display as being pulled inward or pushed outward. See the figure below.
(1) Correct
(2) Target pushed
(3) Target pushed inward outward The range of target echoes is incorrect. 1. Set the GAIN, A/C SEA and A/C RAIN controls shown below. GAIN: 80 A/C SEA: Fully counterclockwise (OFF) A/C RAIN: Fully counterclockwise (OFF) 2. Open the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu, then select [ECHO ADJUSTMENT]
menu. 3. Select [TIMING ADJ VALUE] to set the value for adjustment timing manually. The setting range is 0000 to 4095. The default settings for each radar are shown be-
low;
Default for magnetron radar: [325]
Default for solid state radar: [43]
4. After the adjustment is completed, set the radar to the minimum range. Confirm that no echoes are "missing" at the center of the radar screen.If echoes are miss-
ing, do step 3 again. 3-4 3.4 How to Suppress Main Bang 3. ADJUSTMENTS Main bang is the clutter at the center of the screen that you typically see on the radar display, and it may mask close-in targets. If main bang appears at the screen center, suppress it as follows. 1. Transmit the radar on a long range and then wait ten minutes. 2. Adjust the gain to show a slight amount of noise on the display. 3. Select the 0.125 NM range, and turn off the A/C SEA and A/C RAIN controls. 4. Show the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu, then select [ECHO ADJUSTMENT]. 5. Select [MBS LEVEL], then set a value that causes the main bang to faintly disap-
pear. The setting range is 0 to 255 (default: 0). 3.5 Other Settings This section describes the menu items not previously described. 3.5.1
[ECHO ADJUSTMENT] menu Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTALLATION] [ECHO ADJUSTMENT]
to open the [ECHO ADJUSTMENT] menu. Page 1 ECHO ADJUSTMENT(1/2) Page 2 ECHO ADJUSTMENT(1/2) 1 BACK 2 EAV MODE A / B Go back to page 1. 0 NEXT Go to page 2.
[VIDEO ADJUST VALUE]
Adjust the video level manually to remove noise. Preset the radar as follows:
Interference Rejector (IR): 2 Gain: 80 Echo Stretch (ES): OFF Echo Averaging (EAV): OFF Range: 24 NM Pulse Length: Long 3-5 3. ADJUSTMENTS Set the value so that noise just disappears from the screen. The setting range is -32 to +32 (default: +32). Note: The setting range is 0 to +31 (default: +12) when the [MODEL] setting is set to
[50] or [60], see "[MODEL]" on page 3-12. When using the number keys, the indication is first selected as a whole. At this time, you can toggle between plus "+" or minus "-". Press the 8 key for "-", press the 2 key for "+". If single digits are highlighted, toggle is not possible. In this case, press the CANCEL/TRAILS key to re-highlight the whole indication.
[RING SUPPRESSION]
Remove ring noise which appears with the waveguide type radars. Adjust so the rings disappear at the range of 0.125 m. The setting range is 0 to 255 (default: 1). Note: This menu is NOT available when the [MODEL] setting is set to [50] or [60] (see
"[MODEL]" on page 3-12).
[VIDEO CONTRAST]
Select [ADVANCE] to clarify the echo image difference (default: [ADVANCE]).
[VIDEO CONTRAST] set to [ADVANCE] at installation:
T S A R T N O C 44 33 22 11 LEVEL T S A R T N O C A LEVEL T S A R T N O C B LEVEL T S A R T N O C C LEVEL
[VIDEO CONTRAST] set to [LEGACY] at installation:
CONTRAST 444 33 22 11 CONTRAST C B A
[CLOSE TGT ES MODE]
The [ECHO STRETCH] menu can enlarge the whole targets of the screen (Main menu
[ECHO] [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] [ECHO STRETCH]). This [CLOSE TGT ES MODE] feature can also enlarge targets around own ship in addition to the [ECHO STRETCH] feature. This menu has three options, [ES1], [ES2] or [ES3]. Select the setting to enlarge the targets around own ship for the [ECHO STRETCH] setting ([1] to [3]).
[ES1]: Select when enlarging the targets around own ship with selected [1] at
[ECHO STRETCH].
[ES2]: Select when enlarging the targets around own ship with selected [2] at
[ECHO STRETCH].
[ES3]: Select when enlarging the targets around own ship with selected [3] at
[ECHO STRETCH]. Note: Multiple selections among [ES1], [ES2] and [ES3] are possible. 3-6 3. ADJUSTMENTS The each effect level depends on the following menu [CLOSE TGT ES LEVEL] ([OFF],
[1] to [5]).
[CLOSE TGT ES LEVEL]
Select the effect level of the echo stretch around own ship which is selected in
[CLOSE TGT ES MODE] among six enlarging patterns. The higher the number the greater the amount of stretch. To disable echo stretch, select [OFF] (default). The six enlarging patterns are shown in the table below, Distance 1 means that the distance is closer to the own ship, and Distance 3 means that the distance gets far-
ther. Distance 3 is about half of display range. Setting
(Effect level pattern)
[OFF]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 weak weak Medium Medium Strong weak weak weak weak Medium weak weak weak 3.5.2
[OWN SHIP INFO] menu Enter the length and width of the ship, and scanner, GPS antenna and conning posi-
tions, referring to the description and figure below. Note: This radar uses [CONNING POSITION] for CCRP and [SCANNER POSITION]
for ANT as reference points for measurements and calculations. The commissioning engineer should understand this point, and enter own ship information accordingly. Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTALLATION] [OWN SHIP INFO] to open the [OWN SHIP INFO] menu. Example L2 L3 L1 L4 L1: Ship length W1: Ship width L2: Conning position (from bow) W2: Conning position (from port) L3: Scanner position (from bow) W3: Scanner position (from port) L4: GPS antenna position (from bow) W4: GPS antenna position (from port) W2 W3 W4 W1
[LENGTH/WIDTH]
Enter the ships length and width (0 to 999, default: 0).
[SCANNER POSITION]
Enter the distance from the scanner to both bow and port (0 to 999, default: 0). 3-7 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[EPFS1(2) ANT POSITION]
Enter the distance from the GPS antenna to both bow and port (0 to 999, default: 0). If a 2nd GPS antenna is installed, enter its position in [EPFS2 ANT POSITION].
[CONNING POSITION]
Enter the distance from the conning position to both bow and port (0 to 999, default: 0). 3.5.3
[SCANNER] menu Open the main menu then select
[RADAR INSTALLATION]
[SCANNER] to open the [SCAN-
NER] menu. Note: [SCANNER] menu items differ depending on the software version, as shown in the figures to the right.
[SECTOR BLANK1(2)]
Set area(s) where to prevent transmission. Heading must be properly aligned (see section 3.2) before setting any blind sector. For example, set the area where an interfering object at the rear of the antenna would produce a dead sector (area where no echoes appear) on the display. To enter an area, enter start bearing relative to the heading and dead sector angle. To erase the area, enter 0 for both the [START] and [ANGLE] sections. The setting range of [START] is 0 to 359 (default: 000) and [ANGLE] is 0 to 180 (default: 000). For the radars
(software version 50.** ) For the radars
(software version 01.** ) Note 1: Turn off a stern blind sector when adjusting the PM gain, to display the echo from the performance monitor properly. Note 2: If the PM is active, these menus are NOT available on FAR-2258/2268DS ra-
dar.
[HSC]
Select [ON] for HSC only. Note: This menu is NOT available when the [MODEL] setting is set to [50] or [60] (see
"[MODEL]" on page 3-12). 3-8 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[ANTENNA ROTATION]
This menu is available when [HSC] is set to [ON]. Note 1: When this menu appears in gray, it is not available. The antenna rotation speed is fixed at 24 rpm. Note 2: For 42 rpm S-band radars, the High Speed Kit (type: OP03-248, available as an optional extra) is required. Select [LO] for 36 rpm, [HI] for 42 rpm. [AUTO] sets the normal rotation speed to 36 rpm and switches the rota-
tion speed to 42 rpm when the short pulse is selected
(default: [AUTO]).
[ANTENNA SWITCH]
Select [OFF] at [ANTENNA SWITCH] to prevent antenna rotation. For [EXT], set on/
off from an external device (default: [ON]).
[ANT STOPPED]
For qualified technician. [ANT STOPPED] prevents transmission while the antenna is stopped in STBY (default: [STBY]).
[DUAL RADAR SETTINGS]
When installing two FAR-2xx8 series radars, the im-
age from both radars (main radar and external radar) may be shown together on one radar display. Note 1: This function is NOT available between the FAR-2xx8 radar and other radars. Note 2: This function is available only for A/B type radars installed with software version 01.**. Image from main radar Image from main radar Note 3: When [COMBINE] is selected, some func-
tion are unavailable. The following table shows the available menus in the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu when [COMBINE] is selected. For menu operations, see the Operators manual
(OME-36520). The unavailable menus are displayed in gray. Image from Image from external radar external radar
[RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu
[ECHO ADJUSTMENT]
[OWN SHIP INFO]
[SCANNER]
[INSTALLATION]
[TT PRESET]
[BAUD RATE]
[ALERT I/F SETTINGS]
[INPUT PORT SETTINGS]
[NETWORK SETTINGS]
[OTHER SETTINGS]
Available menus
(All menus are not available.)
[DUAL RADAR SETTINGS] except for [EXT RADAR]
[REMOTE MAINTENANCE], [SYSTEM MONITOR] and
[ANT CABLE].
(All menus are not available.) All menus are available. All menus are available.
[VDR SETTINGS], [ RX SETTINGS]
[OVERLAY1], [OVERLAY2], [EAV W/O GYRO], [ECDIS],
[EXT BRILL CONTROL]
3-9 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[DUAL RADAR]: Select [COMBINE] to enable the dual radar display. If the radars other than FAR-2xx8 series radars are on the network, select [OFF]. Note: When the [WAVE MODE] ([ECHO][WAVE MODE]) setting is [ON], this menu is displayed in gray and not operative.
[COMBINE MODE]: Select the reference of the an-
tenna position, own radar or external radar.
[OWN]: Set own radars antenna as the reference point and set display area of own radar. The area out-
side that set here is where the image from the exter-
nal radar is displayed.
[EXT]: Set the external radars antenna as the refer-
ence point and set the display area of the external radar. The area outside that set here is where the image from own radar is displayed.
[COMBINE SECTOR]: Set the start position and angle of the sector, referring to the exam-
ple to the right.
[START]: Start point of the sector (default:
000, 000to 359)
[ANGLE]: Horizontal width of the sector (de-
fault: 001, 001to 360)
[COMBINE RANGE]: Set the vertical width of sector.
[START]: Distance from reference point to sec-
tor (default: 00.00, 00.00 to 99.99)
[LENGTH]: Vertical length of sector (default:
00.01, 00.01 to 99.99) Width of sector Width of sector ANGLE
(Example: 100) START
(Example: 130) START (Example: 01.00NM) START (Example: 01.00NM) The setting example is shown in the figure be-
low. LENGTH (Example: 02.00NM) LENGTH (Example: 02.00NM) Picture from external radar Position of external radar antenna Position of own radar antenna Picture from own radar
[COMBINE MODE]: [EXT]
[START]: 315
[ANGLE]: 90
[START]: 00.00 nm
[LENGTH]: 99.99 nm
[COMBINE MODE]: OWN
[START]: 45
[ANGLE]: 270
[START]: 00.00 nm
[LENGTH]: 99.99 nm 3-10 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[EXT RADAR]: Select the external radar for dual radar display. The available radar numbers are FAR-2xx8 series radars set on the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu are valid. Note 1: On dual radar display, this setting is not operative. To change this setting, first set [DUAL RADAR] to [OFF]. Note 2: The invalid radar numbers (Own radar, Other radars or radars not on the network) are displayed in gray. 3.5.4
[INSTALLATION] menu Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTALLATION] [INSTALLATION] to open the [INSTALLATION] menu through two pages. On the page 1, select [NEXT] to open the page 2. Page 1 Page 2 For B/C/W-type radars. Go back to page 1. 12 / 25UP / 25DOWN /
30UP / 30DOWN / S-NXT /
/60/
X-NXT 50 / 60 / X-NXT MU-201CR / OTHER(F) 9 RADAR MAIN / SUB Go to page 2. For software version 01.**
[RANGE UNIT]
For B/C/W-type radars, select the range unit, [NM], [SM], [KM] or [kyd] then push the left button. For the all other radar types, the range unit is fixed at [NM] so this menu is not shown.
[RADAR No.]
For multiple radar system using the network hub, set number (name) and antenna po-
sition for each system to easily distinguish the radar configuration.
[1] to [4]: For main radar
[5] to [8]: For sub radar
[RADAR POSITION]
Select the radar position. The choices are [FORE],[MAIN-TOP], [MAIN-2ND], [MAIN-
3RD], [AFT], [PORT], and [STARBOARD]. 3-11 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[MODEL]
Confirm the model of your radar. This menu is set automatically according to the an-
tenna other than FAR-2258/2268DS radars. For FAR-2258/2268DS radars, set the ra-
dar model properly. If this setting is different from your model, the radar will not function properly.
[12]: For FAR-2218(-BB)/2318
[25UP]: For FAR-2228(-BB)/2328
[25DOWN]: For FAR-2328W
[30UP]: For FAR-2238S(-BB)/2338S
[30DOWN]: For FAR-2338SW
[S-NXT]: For FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT
[50]: For FAR-2258
[60]: For FAR-2268DS
[X-NXT]: For FAR-2228-NXT(-BB)/2328-NXT
[TYPE]
Select the type of radar. Type
[IMO]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[R]
[W]
Contents IMO specifications Near-IMO specifications Standard fishing specifications Advanced fishing specifications Russian specifications Washington Ferry specifications Software version 50.**
01.**
(: Available, : Not available)
[ON TIME], [TX TIME]
These items show the number of hours the radar has been turned on and transmitted, respectively. Value can be changed; for example, after replacing the magnetron. [TX TIME] can be reset to 0 for the magnetron radar. The setting range is [000000.0] to
[999999.9] H (default: [000000.0]).
[PM GAIN ADJ]
Adjust the performance monitor, automatically or manually, when-
ever the magnetron is replaced. For automatic adjustment, no fur-
ther operation is required; close the menu at the completion of the adjustment. For manual do as follows to adjust the performance monitor gain. Before setup Before setup After setup After setup 8.1 NM to 10.1 NM 8.1 NM to 10.1 NM Approx. 12.1 NM (10 dB) Ex: When [ARC] is set to [5]
(The location of arcs changes with the setting of [ARC]
in [PERFORMANCE MON] in the [ECHO] menu.) 3-12 3. ADJUSTMENTS Note: This menu is NOT available when the [RADAR] setting is set to [SUB] for FAR-
2258/2268DS (see "[RADAR]" on page 3-14). Preset the radar as follows:
Range: 24 NM Pulse Length: Long A/C SEA: OFF (turn off manually) 1. Adjust the GAIN control so that a slight amount of white noise appears on the A/C RAIN: OFF (turn off manually) Echo Averaging (EAV): OFF Video Contrast: 2-B screen. Arcs for the performance monitor appear on the screen. 2. Select [PM GAIN ADJ] then spin the scrollwheel so that the outer arc faintly ap-
pears. The setting range is 0 to 255 (default: 255). Wait at least eight scans then right click to set. Note: Turn off a stern blind sector before adjusting the PM gain, to display the echo from the performance monitor properly.
[PM GRAPH RESET]
This menu is active only when the PM is connected to the Antenna Unit. Select [YES] to reset all PM graphs, after replacing the magnetron. Note 1: This menu is NOT available when the [RADAR] setting is set to [SUB] for FAR-
2258/2268DS (see "[RADAR]" on page 3-14). Note 2: After the PM graphs are reset, adjust the [PM GAIN ADJ] setting on the radar.
[MONITOR TYPE]
The monitor type is preset at factory according to the radar type. For BB type radar, [MU-190231] is set in advance. For other wide monitor, select [OTH-
ER(W)] (WUXGA) or [OTHER(F)] (Full HD). For MU-
190HD, select [MU-190231]. F Note 1: [MU-231(W)], [MU-201CR] and [OTHER(F)] are available only on the radars installed with software version 01.**
DIP switch DIP switch Note 2: Select the monitor type correctly. If this menu is set to a wide monitor ([MU-270W], [OTH-
ER(W)] or [MU-231(W)]) and no wide monitor is connected, the screen blacks out. In this case, set DIP switch SW2 to ON, in order to change the monitor type to MU-190/231. Note 3: For A/B/C/W-type radars with Radar Plot-
ter functionality, the [MU-231CR] setting is not used.
[REMOTE MAINTENANCE]
Adjust setting for remote maintenance.
[MAINTENANCE PROFILE]: Select [ON] to output the equipment profile for remote maintenance. 3-13 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[SYSTEM MONITOR]
[DISP SYSTEM MONITOR]: Shows the system monitor data through three pages. The following op-
erations are enabled:
F1 key: Goes to next page. After the last page, the system monitor window is not shown. F3 key: Saves the text data for the displayed page to an SD card. F4 key: Saves the screen shot for the displayed page to an SD card. SYSTEM MONITOR 1 BACK 2 DISP SYSTEM MONITOR 3 SAVE LOG FILE
[SAVE LOG FILE]: Saves the error logs to an SD card.
[ANT CABLE]
Select the method of connection between the radar sensor and the Processor Unit. [LAN] (LAN cable only) or [LAN+COAXIAL] (LAN and coaxial cables). Select
[LAN+COAXIAL] when the optional LAN Signal Converter is installed.
[ICE MODE SETTINGS]
For the radars installed with software version *01.**. To activate this settings, the password is required. For the password, contact your dealer.
[RADAR]
Select radar from [MAIN] or [SUB] to activate the menu setting (default: [MAIN]). Note: This menu is available only for the [MODEL] setting is set to [50] or [60] (see
"[MODEL]" on page 3-12). 3.5.5
[TT PRESET] menu Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTAL-
LATION] [ TT PRESET] to open the [TT PRESET]
menu.
[TT DATA OUTPUT]
Show the [TT DATA OUTPUT] menu. Note: Confirm the data input configuration for the equipment which will receive the TT (target tracking) sentence BEFORE setting this menu. 3-14 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[SELECT SENTENCE]: Select the sentence that is output the TT target data. (de-
fault: [TTM])
[OFF]: For no output of the TT data.
[TTM]: For connected equipment which can receive the TTM sentence.
[TTD]: For connected equipment which can receive the TTD sentence.
[TTM/TTD REFERENCE]: Set the output format for the tracked target's bearing (de-
fault: [REL]).
[REL]: Outputs bearing and speed relative to own ship (default setting).
[TRUE]: Outputs bearing to the north and speed over ground.
[MAX RANGE]
Select the maximum target tracking range, 24, 32 or 48 NM (default: [24NM]). Note: [48NM] is available only for the [MODEL] setting is set to [50] or [60] (see
"[MODEL]" on page 3-12).
[TT ECHO LEVEL]
Set the detection level of echoes. The setting range is 1 to 31 (default: 13).
[QV DISPLAY]
This function is used for diagnostic purposes.
[OFF]: Normal picture (default)
[ON]: Quantized video. Default setting is restored when the power is turned off.
[TT W/O GYRO]
Select [ON] to use TT without a gyro (default: [OFF]). If [OFF] is selected, TT can not used without gyro.
[ACQ PRESET]
Show the [ACQ PRESET] menu.
[LAND SIZE]: Set the land size in units of 100 m. The setting range is 100 to 3000 m (default: 1600 m). A target whose length is equal to or greater than the length set here is judged as a land target.
[ANT SELECT]: Set the antenna radiator type of your radar. The size of the echo changes with radia-
tor size. Select the correct radiator type to ensure proper performance. Note 1: [SN24CF] and [SN30CF] are NOT available on IMO-type radars. Note 2: [XN24AF] and [XN30AF] are available only for the [MODEL] setting is set to [50] (see "[MODEL]"
on page 3-12). [SN24AF], [SN30AFDF] and
[SN36AF] are available only for [60]. SN24AF / SN30AF DF /
SN36AF
[AUTO ACQ CORRE]: Set the correlation count of automatic acquisition. The setting range is [3] to [10] (default: [5]).
[AUTO ACQ WEED]: Set the cancel count of automatic acquisition. The setting range is 1 to 5 scans (default: [1SCAN]). 3-15 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[TT No.]: Select how to enter TT No, [LOOP] or [FILL] (default: [LOOP]). Note 1: This menu is available on the radars installed with software version 50.**. For C-type radars, this menu is selectable. For IMO-type radars, this setting is fixed at [LOOP]. Note 2: This menu is not displayed on the radars installed with software version 01.**.
[TRACK PRESET]
[GATE SIZE]: Set the gate size among [S], [M], [L] or
[LL] (default: [M])
[FILTER RESPONSE]: Set the filter response func-
tion. The setting range is 1 to 4.
[1]: Filter response is improved (default).
[4]: Filter stability is improved.
[LOST COUNT]: Set the number of scans to allow before a target is declared a lost target. The setting range is 1 to 20 scans (default: [9SCAN]).
[MAX SPEED]: Set the maximum tracking speed. The setting range is 40 to 150 kn (default: [150kn]).
[START TIME TGT VECT]: Set the number of sec-
onds or number of scans to wait before showing the vector for a newly acquired target. Select [TIME] or
[SCAN] then enter value.
[TIME]: The setting range is 0 to 100 sec (default [0sec]).
[SCAN]: The setting range is 0 to 40 scans (default [0SCAN]).
[NUMBER OF TT]: The setting [100] can not be changed.
[DEFAULT]
Select [YES] to restore the default settings for the [TT PRESET] menu. 3.5.6
[BAUD RATE] menu Set the baud rate, 4800 or 38400 (bps), for connected equipment - heading sensor, AIS transponder, GPS navigator, Log, AMS, and ECDIS. Note: For IMO-type radars, [HDG] and [AIS] is fixed to
[38400]. 3-16 3. ADJUSTMENTS 3.5.7
[ALERT I/F SETTINGS] menu Four alert contact outputs are available, [ALERT OUT1] to [ALERT OUT4].
[ALERT OUT 1] to [ALERT OUT 4]
Select the alert to output for each alert out number through four pages. To monitor for unit failure if and when it occurs, set the alert contact outputs referring to the table below. 8 LOG(BT) ALERT ON 9 LOG(WT) ALERT ON Unit Antenna Unit Transceiver Unit NO AZIMUTH SIGNAL NO HEADLINE SIGNAL NO TRIGGER SIGNAL NO VIDEO SIGNAL NO TUNE GATE SIGNAL Alert TUNE ERROR RADAR SENSOR COM ERR MTR-DRV COM ERROR RF-CONVERTER COM ERR Performance monitor PM COM ERROR Control Unit CTRL UNIT COM ERR Page 1 1 / 4 Page 2 2 / 4 Page 3 3 4 Page 4 4 4 RP COM ERROR CHART MEMORY ERROR DESTINATION LEAVE*
INTRUSION BAN*
WATER TEMP ALERT*
CURRENT RIP*
DEPTH ALERT*
TARGET ALARM*
AIS CAPACITY FULL(A)**
AIS CAPACITY FULL(C)**
NO TUNE GATE SIGNAL***
WAVE UNIT COM ERROR****
[NEXT]: Go to next page.
[BACK]: Go back to previous page. Setting alert list
*: For C-type radars only
**: For R-type radars only
***: For FAR-2258/2268DS
****: For other than C-type radar To monitor for Processor Unit failure, connect SYS_FAIL and PWR_FAIL from termi-
nal J613 in the Processor Unit to the AMS.
[ALERT OUT TYPE]: Select the alert out type.
[ALERT OUT]: Alert out when the alert occurs (default).
[ALERT ACK]: Alert out when the alert is acknowledged.
[OPERATER FITNESS]: Alert out until the alert is acknowledged by the ACK oper-
ation. 3-17 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[ALERT OUT POLARITY]: Select the alert out polarity, [NORMAL] (default) or [IN-
VERT]. Note: For category A alert, there are two types of output operations, A and C. To inform the AMS of category A alerts via contact signal, connect both A and C sig-
nals.
(A): Alert sound is output when the corresponding item is an unacknowledged alert. Output is stopped when the item is acknowledged.
(C): Alert sound is output when the corresponding item becomes an alert condition. Output is stopped when the alert condition is removed.The table below shows the operational status of the alert outputs based on the output type. Output type Normal A new alert is occurred An existing alert is acknowledge Status A C Off Off On On Off On An existing alert condition becomes non-active Off Off
[TRANSFER]: For category A alert, when the 60 seconds have passed under un-
solved or unacknowledged condition after the alert occurs, transfer the alert to con-
tact output for AMS. If the alert is removed or acknowledged, the contact output is inactive. Setting alert list: Select the alert to activate. The ac-
tivated alerts are indicated with an underline. For example shown in the right figure, [TT NEW TARGET(A)] and [TT TARGET LOST(A)] are acti-
vated. The available alerts are as follows:
TT NEW TARGET(A) TT NEW TARGET(C) TT TARGET LOST(A) TT TARGET LOST(C) TT COLLISION(A) TT COLLISION(C) TT TGT FULL(AUTO)(A) TT TGT FULL(AUTO)(C) TT TGT FULL(MAN)(A) TT TGT FULL(MAN)(C) AIS NEW TARGET(A) AIS NEW TARGET(C) AIS TARGET LOST(A) AIS TARGET LOST(C) AIS COLLISION(A) AIS COLLISION(C) ACTIVE AIS FULL(A) ACTIVE AIS FULL(C) AIS DISPLAY FULL(A) AIS DISPLAY FULL(C) NO AZIMUTH SIGNAL NO HEADLINE SIGNAL NO TRIGGER SIGNAL NO VIDEO SIGNAL CTRL UNIT COM ERROR PM COM ERROR TUNE ERROR RADAR ANT COM ERROR MTR-DRV COM ERROR RF-CONVERTER COM ERR NO GYRO SIGNAL NO LOG(BT) SIGNAL NO LOG(WT) SIGNAL NO POSITION SIGNAL NO COG/SOG SIGNAL NO UTC SIGNAL XTD LIMIT EXCEEDED ECDIS COM ERROR ARRIVED AT WPT OUT OF ANCHOR ZONE RP COM ERROR CHART MEMORY ERROR DESTINATION LEAVE*
INTRUSION BAN*
WATER TEMP ALERT*
CURRENT RIP*
DEPTH ALERT*
TARGET ALARM*
AIS CAPACITY FULL(A)**
AIS CAPACITY FULL(C)**
NO TUNE GATE SIGNAL***
WAVE UNIT COM ERROR****
*: For C-type radars **: For R-type radars ***: For FAR-2258/2268DS
****: For other than C-type radars ALERT DATA OUT Select the alert output format, [ALR] (Set Alarm State) or [ALF] (Alert Sentence, de-
fault). 3-18 3. ADJUSTMENTS AIS ALERT I/F Set the AIS alert interface.
[OFF] does not output AIS alerts (default).
[LEGACY]: For connection to FA-100, FA-150 or FA-170 where the AIS mode is [LEG-
ACY].
[IF1]: For connection to FA-150 or FA-170 where the AMS mode is [AlertIF1]. LOG(BT) ALERT Select [ON] to activate alert "NO LOG(BT) SIGNAL" for signal loss of speed over ground. LOG(WT) ALERT Select [ON] to activate alert "NO LOG(WT) SIGNAL" for signal loss of speed through water. 3.5.8
[INPUT PORT SETTINGS] menu The input signals to the ports on the Processor Unit are shown below. Default setting PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-025 HDG AIS GPS LOG AMS Heading signal AIS signal Gyrocompass
(IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder
(FA-170) EPFS data
(Position, COG/SOG) EPFS (GPS)
(GP-170) Speed signal Alarm handling signal SDME (Speed log)
(DS-60) AMS
(IEC61162 format) ECDIS Navaid data ECDIS Setting for multiple sensors 3-19 3. ADJUSTMENTS PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-025 HDG AIS GPS LOG AMS Heading signal AIS signal Gyrocompass
(IEC61162 format) AIS Transponder
(FA-170) EPFS data
(Position, COG/SOG) EPFS (GPS)
(GP-170) Speed signal Alarm handling signal SDME (Speed log)
(DS-60) AMS
(IEC61162 format) ECDIS Heading signal, EPFS data
(Position, COG/SOG, Speed signal) Satellite speed log
(GS-100) The input signal setting for each port can be set in the [INPUT PORT SETTINGS]
menu. Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTALLA-
TION] [INPUT PORT SETTINGS] to open the [IN-
PUT PORT SETTINGS] menu. How to set the port setting of each data;
1. Select the data for port setting in the [INPUT PORT SETTING] menu. 2. Select the port setting, [SERIAL] or [LAN2]. 3. For serial port connections, select the source in
[SERIAL SETTING]. Note: [AMS] is not available for IMO-type radars. 4. For LAN2 port connections, enter the connected equipment ID at [LAN2 SET-
TING] with the software keyboard. 5. To give the GLL sentence priority, set [PRIORITIZE GLL] to [ON]. Set the port setting of each data shown below according to the above procedure.
[EPFS]
The GPS navigator data has two ports to input the source data shown in the following figure. The GPS navigator is set to [EPFS1] and [EPFS2] ports in [EPFS]. For multiple signal input, set the ports as follows:
[EPFS1 SERIAL SETTINGS] [GPS]
[EPFS2 SERIAL SETTINGS] [ECDIS]
3-20 3. ADJUSTMENTS
(1/2)
(2/2) EPFS1 INPUT DTM SEL. WGS-84/TOKYO EPFS2 INPUT DTM SEL. WGS-84/TOKYO Note: Do not set the same value for port1 and port 2. For example, where [EPFS1] is set as [GPS], [EPFS2] must be set to other than [GPS].
[PRIORITIZE GLL]: Select [ON] to give priority to GLL data.
[EPFS1(2) INPUT DTM SEL.]: For C-type radars, select the datum for sensor data input.
[LOG], [HEADING]
The speed data and heading data have two ports to input the source data shown in the following figure. For speed data For heading data Speed data: [LOG1] and [LOG2] ports in [LOG]. For multiple signal input, set the ports as follows:
[LOG1 SERIAL SETTINGS] [LOG]
[LOG2 SERIAL SETTINGS] [ECDIS]
Heading data: [HDG1] and [HDG2] ports in [HEADING]
For multiple signal input, set the ports as follows:
[GYRO1 SERIAL SETTINGS] [HDG]
[GYRO2 SERIAL SETTINGS] [ECDIS]
Note: Do not set the same value for port1 and port 2. For example, where [LOG1] is set as [LOG], [LOG2] must be set to other than [LOG]. 3-21 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[AIS], [WIND], [CURRENT], [WATER TEMP], [DEPTH]
Select the input source for each data type; AIS, wind data, current data, water tem-
perature and depth data. These data have only one input port. For AIS For wind data For current data For water temperature For depth data 3.5.9
[NET WORK SETTINGS] menu Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTALLA-
TION] [NEXT] [NETWORK SETTINGS] to open the [NETWORK SETTINGS] menu. Note 1: Network settings should be done while the ra-
dar is disconnected from the LAN network, as a stand-
alone radar. Note 2: The system restarts automatically after the network settings are changed. Note 3: When you change the radar number, this equipment restarts automatically. After restarting, con-
firm the IP address in [NETWORK SETTINGS].
[LAN13 IP ADDRESS]
For multiple radar systems using the network hub, the IP address is assigned accord-
ing to the radar No (See "[RADAR No.]" on page 3-11). Set the IP address as shown in the following table. For C-type and A/B-type radars with Radar Plotter functionality, a dedicated IP address is assigned. Also, select the network type, CLASS C or B. When FAR-2xx8 radar is connected to FEA-2xx7 series (ECDIS), set CLASS B. Note: Do not set an IP address other than the address that corresponds to your radar number and class in the following table. 3-22 Radar No. No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 CLASS C LAN1 192.168.31.21
(192.168.31.121*) 192.168.31.22
(192.168.31.122*) 192.168.31.23
(192.168.31.123*) 192.168.31.24
(192.168.31.124*) 192.168.31.25
(192.168.31.125*) 192.168.31.26
(192.168.31.126*) 192.168.31.27
(192.168.31.127*) 192.168.31.28
(192.168.31.128*) LAN3 Radar No. 192.168.31.101 No.1 192.168.31.102 No.2 192.168.31.103 No.3 192.168.31.104 No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 3. ADJUSTMENTS CLASS B LAN1 LAN3 172.31.3.35
(172.31.3.43*) 172.31.3.36
(172.31.3.44*) 172.31.3.37
(172.31.3.45*) 172.31.3.38
(172.31.3.46*) 172.31.3.39
(172.31.3.47*) 172.31.3.40
(172.31.3.48*) 172.31.3.41
(172.31.3.49*) 172.31.3.42
(172.31.3.50*) 172.31.3.6 172.31.3.7 172.31.3.8 172.31.3.9
*: For C-type and A/B-type radars with Radar Plotter functionality
[LAN2 IP ADDRESS]
The IP address is assigned according to the radar No (See "[RADAR No.]" on page 3-
11). Set the IP address as shown below. This IP address can be changed as required. Radar No. No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 LAN2 172.31.16.11 172.31.17.11 172.31.16.12 172.31.17.12 172.31.16.13 172.31.17.13 172.31.16.14 172.31.17.14 SFID RA0011 RA0012 RA0013 RA0014 RA0015 RA0016 RA0017 RA0018
[MULTICAST ADDRESS]
Set the multicast address with the cursor and the keypad.
[VDR SETTINGS]
Note: This menu is NOT available for C-type radars.
[VDR LAN OUTPUT]: Select [ON] to output the VDR signal through LAN connection. For [ON], set the multicast port with the software key-
board.
[SOURCE]: Set the status and information text, max 16 characters with the software keyboard (Example:
"Xband.1").
[LOCATION]: Set the status and information text, max 32 characters with the software keyboard (Example: "No1"). 3-23 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[SFI]: Set the SFI. The talker of the device is alphanumeric, two characters followed by four numerals. The device and channel information to be transmitted to VDR are shown below. Radar No. No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 Device 75 76 77 78 Channel 1 1 1 1 Radar No. No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 Device 79 80 81 82 Channel 1 1 1 1
[RX SETTINGS]
Select [ON] to receive the following data signals:
[MISC]: Other equipment data (sensor of engine etc.)
[TGTD]: Target data
[SATD]: Satellite data
[NAVD]: Navigation data
[TIME]: Time
[PROP]: Specified data by manufacturer or user 3.5.10
[OTHER SETTINGS] menu Open the main menu then select [RADAR INSTALLATION] [NEXT][OTHER SET-
TINGS] to open the [OTHER SETTINGS] menu through two pages. On the page 1, select NEXT to open the page 2.. Page 1 OTHER SETTINGS (1/2) INSTALLATION (2/2) Page 2 Go back to page 1. 1 BACK 2 RP UPDATE 3 SHUTLE FERRY SWITCH RS-232C / AMS / ECDIS 4 ECDIS ROUTE DISPLAY NORMAL / LEGACY 1 BACK 2 DEMO ECHO OFF / EG-3000 /
TT-TEST / PC / EG-4000 IP: 192. 168. 031. 101 3 EAV W/O GYRO OFF / ON 4 ECDIS OFF / SERIAL / LAN 5 EXT BRILL CONTROL OFF / ON 6 SSD SUB OUTPUT OFF / ON 7 OVERLAY1 8 OVERLAY2 0 NEXT Go to page 2.
[DEMO ECHO]
Select the type of simulated echo to use. [EG-3000] (Echo Generator), [TT-TEST],
[PC] or [EG-4000]. Select [OFF] to deactivate this feature (default: [OFF]). 3-24
1 2 | User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 2.42 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
3. ADJUSTMENTS
[EAV W/O GYRO]
The echo averaging feature can be used without a gyrocompass. Select [ON] to use the feature without a gyrocompass (default: [OFF]).
[ECDIS]
Select the ECDIS communication method, [SERIAL] or [LAN]. Select [OFF] for no EC-
DIS connection (default: [OFF]).
[EXT BRILL CONTROL]
Select [ON] to adjust the brilliance of the monitor unit from external equipment.
[SSD SUB OUTPUT]
Note: Not used with magnetron radars. For solid state radars, select [ON] to output the analog signals from TB803 #11 to 16 and TB804 in the antenna unit (default; [OFF]).
[OVERLAY1 (2)]
Note: This menu is NOT available for C-type radars. When an ECDIS is connected, the radar picture can be overlaid on the ECDIS. Set the items on this menu to correctly overlay the radar picture on ECDIS. Note: The overlay output is less accurate than the sub monitor output from the Antenna Unit, especially in the areas mentioned below. Therefore, only use the overlay with an ECDIS. Distance accuracy/resolution Bearing accuracy/resolution Sweep Echo picture Range When the echo image is NOT used with ECDIS, use the signal from the Antenna Unit.
[RP UPDATE]
For C-type and A/B/W radars with Radar Plotter functionality, conduct updates for the RP board (CC6).
[APPLICATION]: Update the RP board (CC6) soft-
ware.
[OS]: Update the RP board (CC6) OS (operating sys-
RP UPDATE APPLICATION OS CHART SYMBOL REMOVE USB MEMORY tem).
[CHART SYMBOL]: Update the RP board (CC6) chart symbols.
[REMOVE USB MEMORY]: Remove a USB flash memory from the RP board
(CC6). 3-25 3. ADJUSTMENTS
[SHUTTLE FERRY SWITCH]
Note: This menu is NOT available for C-type radars. Select a port to detect a navigation direction of a shuttle ferry (default: [RS-232C]).
[ECDIS ROUTE DISPLAY]
Note: This menu is NOT available for C-type radars. Select [NORMAL] to show the routes with a straight lines, [LEGACY] to show the routes with a curve lines.
[NORMAL]
Straight line
[LEGACY]
Curve line 3.6 How to Control Charts This section shows you how to install or update charts for C-type and A/B/W radars with Radar Plotter functionality. 3.6.1 How to install charts Note: Save the chart data to a USB flash memory first. You do not need to create a folder. 1. Connect the USB flash memory with chart data to the USB drive from the RP board. 2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu. 3. Select [INITIAL SETTINGS]. 4. Select [UPDATE CHART]. The following message appears. OTHER FUNCTIONS WILL STOP DURING THE CHART UPDATE. ARE YOU SURE?
5. Select [RUN]. The message "PROCESS-
ING. PLEASE WAIT." appears, then the
[CHART ADMINISTRATION] menu ap-
pears. 6. Select [COPY CHART FROM USB DEVICE] to display the list for data in the USB flash memory. 3-26 3. ADJUSTMENTS 7. Select the chart data to copy. 8. Select [SELECT CHART TO COPY]. The confirmation message appears. 9. Select [RUN] to copy the chart data. 10. Click the left button. 11. Do one of the following methods to unlock the chart data. How to unlock the chart data automatically Note: Save the unlock code to the USB flash memory first. The file extension is uc. 1) Select [LOAD CHART UNLOCK CODE] in the [CHART ADMINISTRATION]
menu to display the list for data in the USB flash memory. 2) Select the file for the unlock code. The confirmation message appears. 3) Select [RUN]. The message "UNLOCK CODE VERIFIED." appears. 4) Click the left button. How to unlock the chart data manually 1) Select [1. DISPLAY CHART LIST] in the [CHART ADMINISTRATION] menu to display the chart list. 2) Select the locked chart data (displayed with yellow letters), then click the left button to display the character entry window. 3) Set the unlock code as described below. Operate the trackball or the wheel to select a character, then click the left but-
ton to confirm selection. Repeat this step to select all other characters. Select
[ENTER] then click the left button. The message "UNLOCK CODE VERIFIED." appears. 4) Click the left button. 12. When unlocking the chart data automatically, select [5. REMOVE USB DEVICE]. The message "USB DEVICE CAN BE SAFELY REMOVED." appears. Click the left button then remove the USB device. 13. Select [CLOSE]. The confirmation message appears. 14. Select [RUN]. The system restarts. 3-27 3. ADJUSTMENTS 3.6.2 How to update charts Note 1: Save the chart data to a USB flash memory first. You do not need to create a folder. Note 2: Before updating charts, delete the old chart data. If needed, take backups for an unlock code. 1. Connect the USB flash memory with chart data on it in the USB drive from the RP board. 2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu. 3. Select [INITIAL SETTINGS]. 4. Select [UPDATE CHART]. The following message appears. OTHER FUNCTIONS WILL STOP DURING THE CHART UPDATE. ARE YOU SURE?
5. Select [RUN]. The message "PROCESS-
ING. PLEASE WAIT." appears, then the
[CHART ADMINISTRATION] menu ap-
pears. After restarting, the unlock code is saved in the USM flash memory. The file name is 20 characters of this system ID, file extension:
uc. 6. Select [DISPLAY CHART LIST] to display the chart list. 7. Select the chart data to delete then press the F1 key. 8. Select [RUN]. The message "CHART DELETION COMPLETE" appears. 9. Click the left button. 10. Follow steps 6 to 14 in paragraph 3.6.1. 3-28 4. INPUT/OUTPUT DATA NOTICE IMO-type radar(s) must be interconnected to the following type approved sensors. For other radar types, it is recommended to connect the following type approved sensors:
EPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
Gyrocompass (or equivalent devices) meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution A.424(XI).
SDME meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72). The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing units having approved LAN ports. 4.1 Processor Unit Input and output data are shown in the table below. Note: This radar accepts position data fixed by WGS-84 geodetic datum only. Set the datum to WGS-84 on the EPFS (GPS, etc.) connected to this radar. If other type of datum is input, the error message "DATUM" appears and the AIS feature is inopera-
tive. Specification Contents External AD-100 Remarks AD-10 and IEC 61162 are switched by menu setting. Position, course, speed, waypoint, route, time, wind data, current data, depth, temperature, roll, pitch For IMO-type, IEC-
61162-1 Edition 5 is re-
quired. ACK, ACM, HBT Input from bridge alert management system
(BAMS) Input from BAMS ACK and ACM are switched by menu setting. Input Data Heading signal Speed signal Navaid data Alarm handling signal AIS signal Consort signal**
GPS buoy signal**
AD-10 format IEC 61162-2*, IEC 61162-450 IEC 61162-1, IEC 61162-450 IEC 61162-1 IEC 61162-450 Contact closure IEC 61162-1, IEC 61924-2 IEC 61162-2, IEC 61162-450 NMEA0183 NMEA0183
*: Data input cycle must be more than 40 Hz (high speed craft) or 20 Hz (conventional ships).
**: For C-type radars only 4-1 4. INPUT/OUTPUT DATA Output Data Radar system data TT data**
Alert handling signal Sub monitor signal External LCD monitor signal VDR Alert signal Specification IEC 61162-1, RS-232C, IEC 61162-450 IEC 61162-1, IEC 61162-450 IEC 61162-1, IEC 61924-2, IEC 61162-450 HD, BP Trig-
ger, Video DVI Contents Remarks RSD, OSD, TLL For ECDIS, PC plotter TTD, TTM, TLB For ECDIS ALR, ALF, ALC, ARC, HBT, EVE For BAMS ALR and ALF are switched by menu setting. 1 port for radar 2 ports for ECDIS 2 systems in total 1 port 4 systems, Output contents are selected by menu. Same as main display unit Same as main display unit R, G, B, H, V, IEC 61162-450 Contact closure Output to alarm system by using photo-relay
**: These sentences are output in order of targets close to the own ship. The output sentence and mode can be set at the [TT PRESET] menu (See section 3.5.5). The baudrate can be set at the [BAUD RATE] menu (See section 3.5.6). IEC 61162 input sentence and priority Contents Sentence and priority Heading (True)*1 Heading (Magnetic)*5 Magnetic deviation*5 AIS target message, alert Date, Time Position*3 THS>HDT*1*2>VHW*4>HDG*5 HDG*5>HDM*5>VHW*4 HDG*5>RMC VDM, VDO, VSD, ABK, ALR ZDA GNS>GGA>RMC>GLL or GLL>GNS>GGA>RMC DTM Datum Course over the ground VTG>RMC Speed over the ground (SOG)(GPS) VTG>RMC Speed over the ground (LOG (BT)) Speed through the water (STW) Alert handling Waypoint Route Wind Speed and angle
(Theoretical, True) Wind Speed and angle (relative) VBW VBW>VHW ACK, ACN, HBT RMB>BWR>BWC WPL, RTE MWV>VWT*2 MWV>VWR*2 DPT >DBT>DBS*2>DBK*2 MTW VDR, CUR ROT DDC, RAQ Depth Water Temperature Current Rate of turn Monitor Setting 4-2 4. INPUT/OUTPUT DATA
*1: THS and HDT are IEC 61162-2. All other sentences are IEC 61162-1 ed5.
*2: For retrofit.
*3: To priority of GLL data, see "[PRIORITIZE GLL]" on page 3-21.
*4: This is NOT available for IMO-type radars installed with software version 01.**.
*5: For C-type radars. IEC 61162 output sentence Sentence and priority Contents Target L/L TLL*6 RSD OSD TTD, TLB, TTM ALR, ALF, ALC, ARC, HBT EVE ABM, BBM, ACK, VSD DDC Radar system data Own ship data TT target data Alert handling Activity information AIS target message, alert Monitor Setting
*6: This is NOT available for IMO/A/R-type radars installed with software version 01.**. 4.2 Sub Monitor The specifications and timing of sub monitor signals are shown below. Signal Name OP_HD_ OUT OP_BP_ OUT Specification Signal and timing Voltage (V): 0 to 12 V Impedance: 110 Pulse width (PW):
216 to 432 ms 0.625 s (24 rpm, ECDIS overlay) 0.357 s (42 rpm, ECDIS overlay) 12V V 0V PW PI Pulse interval (PI):
2.5 s (24 rpm) 1.4 s (42 rpm) Logic: Negative Voltage (V): 0 to 12 V Impedance: 110 Interval (t):
6.9 ms (24 rpm) 4.0 ms (42 rpm) t
12V 0V 4-3 Specification Signal and timing Voltage (V): 0 to 12 V Impedance: 110 Pulse width (PW):
5 to 15 s (magnetron radar) 8 s (solid state radar) 5 s (ECDIS overlay) PW 0 NM0 NM 12V OP TRIG OUT
0V 0V OP VIDEO OUT Video
-4V Video: Video signal
(75 ohm terminated) 4. INPUT/OUTPUT DATA Signal Name OP_TRIG_ OUT OP_VIDEO _OUT Video: 4 Vp-p/100 dB Impedance: 75 4-4 APPENDIX 1 JIS CABLE GUIDE Cables listed in the manual are usually shown as Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS). Use the following guide to locate an equivalent cable locally. JIS cable names may have up to 6 alphabetical characters, followed by a dash and a numerical value (example:
DPYC-2.5). For core types D and T, the numerical designation indicates the cross-sectional Area (mm2) of the core wire(s) in the cable. For core types M and TT, the numerical designation indicates the number of core wires in the cable. 1. Core Type D: Double core power line T: Triple core power line M: Multi core TT: Twisted pair communications 2. Insulation Type P: Ethylene Propylene Rubber 3. Sheath Type Y: PVC (Vinyl)
(1Q=quad cable) 4. Armor Type C: Steel 5. Sheath Type Y: Anticorrosive vinyl sheath 6. Shielding Type SLA: All cores in one shield, plastic tape w/aluminum tape
-SLA: Individually shielded cores, plastic tape w/aluminum tape DPYCY TPYCY MPYC-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 EX: TTYCYSLA - 4 MPYC - 4 Designation type
# of twisted pairs Designation type
# of cores TTYCSLA-4 The following reference table lists gives the measurements of JIS cables commonly used with Furuno products:
Type Area Diameter Core Cable Diameter Type Area Diameter Core Cable Diameter TTYCSLA-1 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCSLA-1T 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCSLA-1Q 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCSLA-4 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCY-1 TTYCY-1T TTYCY-1Q TTYCY-4 0.75mm2 1.11mm 0.75mm2 1.11mm 0.75mm2 1.11mm 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCY-4SLA 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCYSLA-1 0.75mm2 1.11mm TTYCYSLA-4 0.75mm2 1.11mm 9.4mm 10.1mm 10.8mm 15.7mm 11.0mm 11.7mm 12.6mm 17.7mm 19.5mm 11.2mm 17.9mm DPYC-1.5 DPYC-2.5 DPYC-4 DPYC-6 DPYC-10 DPYCY-1.5 DPYCY-2.5 DPYCY-4 MPYC-2 MPYC-4 MPYC-7 MPYC-12 TPYC-1.5 TPYC-2.5 TPYC-4 TPYCY-1.5 TPYCY-2.5 TPYCY-4 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 4.0mm2 6.0mm2 1.56mm 2.01mm 2.55mm 3.12mm 10.0mm2 4.05mm 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 4.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 4.0mm2 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 4.0mm2 1.56mm 2.01mm 2.55mm 1.29mm 1.29mm 1.29mm 1.29mm 1.56mm 2.01mm 2.55mm 1.56mm 2.01mm 2.55mm 11.7mm 12.8mm 13.9mm 15.2mm 17.1mm 13.7mm 14.8mm 15.9mm 10.0mm 11.2mm 13.2mm 16.8mm 12.5mm 13.5mm 14.7mm 14.5mm 15.5mm 16.9mm AP-1 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE Digital Interface Input sentence ABK, ACK, ACN, ALR, BWC, BWR, CUR, DBK*1, DBS*1, DBT, DDC, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HBT, HDG*2, HDM*2, HDT*1, MTW, MWV, OSD, RAQ, RMB, RMC, ROT, RTE, THS, TLL*3, TTM*2, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, VWR*1, VWT*1, WPL, ZDA Output sentences ABM, ACK, AIQ, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, DDC, EVE, HBT, OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL*3, TTD, TTM, VSD
*1: For retrofit.
*2: For C-type radars.
*3: NOT for IMO/A-type radars installed with software version 01.**. Data reception Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in IEC 61162-2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.5. The following parameters are used:
Baud rate: 38,400 bps (HDT, THS, !AIVDM, !AIVDO, !AIABK, $AIALR). The baud rate of all other sentences is 4800 bps Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Start bit Data bits Stop bit Data Sentences Input sentences ABK - AIS addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement
$**ABK,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,x,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit (No use) 2. AIS channel of reception (No use) 3. Message ID (No use) 4. Message sequence number (No use) 5. Type of acknowledgement (See below.) 0 = Message (6 or 12) sucessfully received by the addressed AIS unit 1 = Message (6 or 12) was broadcast, but no acknowledgement by the addressed AIS unit 2 = Message could not be broadcast (i.e. quantity of encapsulated data exceeds five slots) 3 = Requested broadcast of message (8, 14, or 15) has been successfully completed. 4 = Late reception of a message 7 or 13 acknowledgement that was addressed to this AIS unit (own-ship) and referenced a valid transaction. 5 = Message has been read and acknowledged on a display unit. AP-2 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE ACK - Acknowledge alarm
$**ACK,xxx,*hh<CR><LF>
1 1. Unique alarm number (identifier) at alarm source (000 to 999) ACN - Alert command
$**ACN,hhmmss.ss,aaa,x.x,x.x,c,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Time (No use) 2. Manufacturer mnemonic code (3 digit alphanumeric code, null) 3. Alert identifier (0 to 999999) 4. Alert instance (1 to 999999, null) 5. Alert command (A=Acknowledge, Q=Request /Repeat information, O=Responsibility transfer, S=Silence) 6. Sentence status flag (C) ALR - Set alarm state
$**ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,cc,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC (No use) 2. Unique alarm number (identifier) at alarm source (000 to 999, null) 3. Alarm condition (A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded) 4. Alarm acknowledge state (A=acknowledged, V=not acknowledged) 5. Alarm description text (alphanumeric) BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint Great circle
$ **BWC,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll, a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,c--c,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. UTC of observation (No use) 2. Waypoint latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 3. N/S 4. Waypoint longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 5. E/W 6. Bearing, degrees true (No use) 7. Unit, True (No use) 8. Bearing, degrees magnetic (No use) 9. Unit, Magnetic (No use) 10. Distance, nautical miles (No use) 11. Unit, N (No use) 12. Waypoint ID (Max. 15 characters) 13. Mode Indicator (A=Autonomous, D=Differential, null*)
*: For IMO-type or R-type radar, null is invalid. AP-3 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint Rhumb line
$ **BWR,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a.x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,c--c,a,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. UTC of observation (No use) 2. Waypoint latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 3. N/S 4. Waypoint longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 5. E/W 6. Bearing, degrees true (No use) 7. Unit, True (No use) 8. Bearing, degrees magnetic (No use) 9. Unit, Magnetic (No use) 10. Distance, nautical miles (No use) 11. Unit, N (No use) 12. Waypoint ID (Max. 15 characters) 13. Mode Indicator (A=Autonomous, D=Differential, null*)
*: For IMO-type or R-type radar, null is invalid. CUR - Water current layer Multi-layer water current data
$**CUR,A,x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1. Validity of data (A=Valid) 2. Data set number (No use) 3. Layer number (1 to 5) 4. Current depth in meters (No use) 5. Current direction in degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 6. Direction reference in use (true or relative) 7. Current speed in knots (0.0 to 99.9) 8. Reference layer depth in meters (No use) 9. Heading (No use) 10. Heading reference in use (No use) 11. Speed reference (No use) DBK - Depth below keel
$**DBK,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 2. feet 3. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 4. Meters 5. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 6. Fathom DBS - Depth below surface
$**DBS,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 2. feet 3. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 4. Meters 5. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 6. Fathom AP-4 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE DBT - Depth below transducer
$**DBT,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 2. feet 3. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 4. Meters 5. Water depth (0.00 to 99999.99) 6. Fathoms DDC - Display dimming control
$**DDC,a,xx,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 1. Display dimming preset (D=Daytime, K=Dusk, N=Nightime, null) 2. Brightness percentage (00 to 99, null) 3. Color palette (No use) 4. Sentences status flag (C) DPT - Depth
$**DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 1. Water depth relative to the transducer, meters (0.00 to 99999.99) 2. Offset from transducer, meters (-99.99 to 99.99) 3. Minimum range scale in use (No use) DTM - Datum reference
$**DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Local datum (W84=WGS84, W72=WGS72, S85=SGS85, P90=PE90, three characters) 2. Local datum subdivision code (No use) 3. Lat offset, min (No use) 4. N/S (No use) 5. Lon offset, min (No use) 6. E/W (No use) 7. Altitude offset, meters (No use) 8. Reference datum (No use) GGA - Global positioning system fix data
$**GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1. UTC of position (No use) 2. Latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 3. N/S 4. Longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 5. E/W 6. GPS quality indicator (1 to 8) 7. Number of satllite in use (No use) 8. Horizontal dilution of precision (0.00 to 999.99) 9. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel (No use) 10. Unit, m (No use) 11. Geoidal separation (No use) 12. Unit, m (No use) 13. Age of differential GPS data (0 to 999, null) 14. Differential reference station ID (No use) AP-5 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude
$**GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. Latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 2. N/S 3. Longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 4. E/W 5. UTC of position (No use) 6. Status (A=data valid, V=data not valid) 7. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous, D=Differential, E=Estimated, M=Manual input, S=Simulator) GLL - Future position
$**GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,x.x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. Future Latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 2. N/S 3. Future Longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 4. E/W 5. UTC of Future position (No use) 6. Display Status (A=Display, V=Hide) 7. Future Heading (0.0 to 360.0) GNS - GNSS fix data
$**GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. UTC of position (No use) 2. Latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 3. N/S 4. Longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 5. E/W 6. Mode indicator (A, D, E, F, M, N, P, R, S) A=Autonomous, D=Differential, E=Estimated Mode, F=Float RTK, M=Manual Input Mode, N=No fix, P=Precise, R=Real Time Kinematic, S=Simulator Mode 7. Total number of satellites in use (No use) 8. HDOP (0.00 - 999.99) 9. Antenna altitude, meters (No use) 10. Geoidal separation, meters (No use) 11. Age of differential data (0 to 999, null) 12. Differential reference station ID (No use) 13. Naivgational status indicator (S=Safe, C=Caution, U=Unsafe, V=Not valid, null) HBT - Heartbeat supervision sentence
$**HBT,x.x,A,x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 1. Configured repeat interval (1 to 999(s)) 2. Equipment status (No use) 3. Sequential sequence identifier (0 to 9) HDG - Heading, Deviation and Variation
$--HDG,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Magnetic sensor heading, degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 2. Magnetic deviation, degrees (0.00 to 180.00) 3. E/W 4. Magnetic variation, degrees (0.00 to 180.00) 5. E/W AP-6 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE HDM - Heading, Magnetic
$--HDM,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 1. Heading, degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 2. Magnetic (M) HDT - Heading, true
$**HDT, x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 1. Heading, degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 2. True (T) MTW - Water temperature
$**MTW,x.x,C<CR><LF>
1 2 1. Water temperature (-9.99 to 99.99) 2. Degrees C MWV - Wind speed and angle
$**MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Wind angle, degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 2. Reference (R/T) 3. Wind speed (0.0 to 999.9) 4. Wind speed units (K=km/h, M=m/s, N=knots, S=SM/h) 5. Status (A) OSD - Own ship data
$**OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Heading, degrees true (No use) 2. Heading status (No use) 3. Vessel course, degrees true (0.0 to 359.9) 4. Course reference (B=Bottom tracking log, M=Manually entered, W=Water referenced, P=Positioning system ground reference) 5. Vessel speed (0.0 to 999.9) 6. Speed reference (B=Bottom tracking log, W=Water referenced, P=Positioning system ground reference) 7. Vessel set, degrees true, manually entered (No use) 8. Vessel drift (speed), manually entered (No use) 9. Speed units (K=km/h, N=knots, S=statute mile/h) RAQ - Query sentence
$**RAQ,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
1 1. Request sentence (DDC) AP-7 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information.
$**RMB,A,x.x,a,CCCC,CCCC,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,A,a*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121314 1. Data status (A=Data valid) 2. Cross track error (NM) (No use) 3. Direction to steer (No use) 4. Origin waypoint ID (No use) 5. Destination waypoint ID (Max. 15 characters) 6. Destination waypoint latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 7. N/S 8. Destination waypoint longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 9. E/W 10. Range to destination, nautical miles (No use) 11. Bearing to destination, degrees true (No use) 12. Destination closing velocity, knots (No use) 13. Arrival status (No use) 14. Mode indicator (A= Autonomous, D= Differential mode, E=Estimated (dead reckoning mode), M=Manual input mode, S= Simulator) RMC - Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
$**RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1. UTC of position fix (No use) 2. Status (A=data valid) 3. Latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 4. N/S 5. Longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 6. E/W 7. Speed over ground, knots (0.0 to 999.9) 8. Course over ground, degrees true (0.0 to 359.9) 9. Date (No use) 10. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W (No use) 11. E/W (No use) 12. Mode indicator (A= Autonomous mode, D= Differential mode, E=Estimated (DR), F=Float RTK, M=Manual, P=Precise, R=Real time kinematic, S= Simulator) 13. Navigational status indication (S=Safe, C=Caution, U=Unsafe, V=Navigational status not valid, null) ROT- Rate of turn
$**ROT,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 1. Rate of turn, deg/min, "-"=bow turns to port (No use) 2. Status (No use) RTE - Routes
$**RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c, ,c--c*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 n 1. Total number of sentences being transmitted (1 to 50, null) 2. Sentence number (1 to 50, null) 3. Sentence mode (c:complete route, all waypoints, w:working route, first listed waypoint is "FROM", second is "TO" and remaining are rest of route) 4. Route identifier (Max. 15 characters, null) 5. Waypoint n identifier (Max. 15 characters, null) Additional waypoint indentifiers AP-8 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE THS - True heading and status
$**THS,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 1. Heading, degrees True (0.0 to 359.9) 2. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous, E=Estimated (dead reckoning)) TLL - Target Latitude and Longitude
$**TLL,x.x,llll,ll,a,yyyy.yy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Target number (No use) 2. Target latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 3. N/S 4. Target longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 5. E/W 6. Target name (No use) 7. UTC of data (No use) 8. Target status (No use) 9. Reference target (No use) TTM - Tracked Target Message
$**TTM,xx,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15 1. Target number (00 to 99) 2. Target distance from own ship (0.000 to 99.999) 3. Bearing from own ship,degrees true/relative (0.0 to 359.9) 4. True or Relative (T, R) 5. Target speed (0.00 to 102.00, null) 6. Target course, degrees true/relative (0.0 to 359.9, null) 7. T=True or R=Relative 8. Distance of closest point of approach (0.00 to 99.99) 9. Time to CPA, min., "-" increasing (-99.99 to 99.99, null) 10. Speed/distance units (K=km, km/h, N=NM, kn, S= SM, mph) 11. Target name (other than null) 12. Target status (L=Lost, tracked target has been lost , Q=Query, target in the process of acquisition, T=Tracking) 13. Reference target (No use) 14. UTC of data (numeric in six digits, null) 15. Type of acquisition (other than null) VBW - Dual ground/water speed
$**VBW,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. Longitudinal water speed, knots (-999.9 to 999.9) 2. Transverse water speed, knots (-999.9 to 999.9, null) 3. Status: water speed (A=data valid) 4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots (-999.9 to 999.9) 5. Transverse ground speed, knots (-999.9 to 999.9, null is invalid for IMO/R-Type radars) 6. Status: ground speed (A=data valid) 7. Stern transverse water speed, knots (No use) 8. Status: stern water speed (No use) 9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots (No use) 10. Status: stern ground speed (No use) AP-9 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE VDM - AIS VHF data-link message
!**VDM,x,x,x,a,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9) 2. Sentence number (1 to 9) 3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9, null) 4. AIS channel Number (A, B, null) 5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message (1 to 63 bytes) 6. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5) VDO - AIS VHF data-link own-vessel report
!**VDO,x,x,x,a,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9) 2. Sentence number (1 to 9) 3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9, null) 4. AIS channel Number (A, B, C, D, null) 5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message (1 to 63 bytes) 6. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5) VDR - Set and drift
$**VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Direction, degrees (0.0 to 359.9, null) 2. T=True (fixed) 3. Direction, degrees (No use) 4. M=Magnetic (No use) 5. Current speed (0.0 to 99.9) 6. N=Knots (fixed) VHW - Water speed and heading
$**VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Heading, degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 2. T=True (fixed, No use) 3. Heading, degrees (No use) 4. M=Magnetic (fixed, No use) 5. Speed, knots (-999.9 to 999.9) 6. N=Knots (fixed) 7. Speed, km/hr (-999.9 to 999.9) 8. K=km/hr (fixed) VSD - AIS voyage static data
$**VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Type of ship and cargo category (No use) 2. Maximum present static draught (No use) 3. Persons on-board (0 to 8191) 4. Destination (No use) 5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination (No use) 6. Estimated day of arrival at destination (No use) 7. Estimated month of arrival at destination (No use) 8. Navigational status (No use) 9. Regional application flags (No use) AP-10 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE VTG - Course over ground and ground speed
$**VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a,*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Course over ground, degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 2. T=True (fixed) 3. Course over ground, degrees (No use) 4. M=Magnetic (No Use) 5. Speed over ground, knots (0.0 to 999.9) 6. N=Knots (fixed) 7. Speed over ground (0.0 to 999.9) 8. K=km/h (fixed) 9. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous, D=Differential, E=Estimated (dead reckoning), M=Manual input, P=Precision, S=Simulator ) VWR - Wind relative Bearing and Velocity
$**VWR,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Measured wind angle relative to the vessel, degrees (0.0 to 180.0) 2. L=Left semicircle, R=Right semicircle 3. Velocity, knots (0.0 to 999.9) 4. Unit (N, fixed) 5. Velocity (0.0 to 999.9) 6. Unit (M, fixed) 7. Velocity, km/h (0.0 to 999.9) 8. Unit (K, fixed) VWT - True wind speed and angle
$**VWT,xxx,a,xx.x,N,xx.x,M,xxx.x,K<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Calculated wind angle, degrees (0.0 to 180.0) 2. L=Left semicircle, R=Right semicircle 3. Calculated with speed, knots (0.0 to 999.9) 4. Unit (N, fixed) 5. Wind speed (0.0 to 999.9) 6. Unit (M, fixed) 7. Wind speed, km/h (0.0 to 999.9) 8. Unit (K, fixed) WPL - Waypoint location
$**WPL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Waypoint latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 2. N/S 3. Waypoint longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 4. E/W 5. Waypoint identifier (Max. 15 characters) ZDA - Time and date
$**ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 1. UTC (000000.00 to 235959.99, 235960.00 to 235960.99, 240000.00 to 240000.99, 240001.00 to 240001.99) 2. Day (01 to 31) 3. Month (01 to12) 4. Year (UTC) (0000 to 9999) 5. Local zone, hours (No use) 6. Loca zone, minutes (No use) AP-11 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE Output sentences ABM - AIS addressed binary and safety related message
!**ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,xx,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9) 2. Message sentence number (1 to 9) 3. Message sequence identifier (0 to 3) 4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message (9 digits, null) 5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message (0 to 3, null) 6. VDL message number (6 or 12, null), see ITU-R M.1371 7. Encapsulated data (1 to 63 bytes) 8. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5) ACK - Acknowledge alarm
$**ACK,xxx,*hh<CR><LF>
1 1. Unique alarm number (identifier) at alarm source (000 to 999) AIQ - Query sentence
$**AIQ,ccc,*hh<CR><LF>
1 1. Requested sentence (VSD) ALC - Cyclic alert list
$**ALC,xx,xx,xx,xx,aaa,x.x,x.x,x.x,,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Total number of sentences this message (01 to 16) 2. Sentence number (01 to 16) 3. Sequential message identifier (00 to 99) 4. Number of alert entries (0 to 3) 5. Manufacturer mnemonic code (FEC, null) 6. Alert identifier (0 to 999999) 7. Alert instance (1 to 999999, null) 8. Revision counter (1 to 99) 9. Additional alert entries (see Note) Alert entry 1 See Note Note: Alert entry 0 - n: Each alert entry consists of
- Manufacturer Identifier (see ALF Manufactuer)
- Alert Identifier (see ALF Alert identifier)
- Alert instance (see ALF instance)
- Revision counter (see ALF revision counter) Each entry identifies a certain alert with a certain state. It is not allowed that an alert entry is split between two ALC sentences. AP-12 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE ALF - Alert sentence
$**ALF,x,x,x,hhmmss.ss,a,a,a,aaa,x.x,x.x,x.x,x,c--c,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. Total number of ALF sentences this message (1, 2) 2. Sentence number (1, 2) 3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9) 4. Time of last change (000000.00 to 235959.99, 235960.00 to 235960.99, 240000.00 to 240000.99, 240001.00 to 240001.99, null) 5. Alert category (A=Alert category A, B=Alert category B, null) 6. Alert priority (A=Alarm, W=Warning, C=Caution, null) 7. Alert state (A=active-acknowledged or active, S=active-silenced, O=active-responsibility transferred, U=rectified-unacknowledged, V=active-unacknowledged, N=normal, null) 8. Manufacturer mnemonic code (FEC, null) 9. Alert identifier (0 to 999999) 10. Alert instance (1 to 999999, null) 11. Revision counter (1 to 99) 12. Escalation counter (0 to 9) 13. Alert text (max. 16 characters) ALR - Set alarm state
$**ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,cc,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC (000000.00 to 235959.99, 235960.00 to 235960.99, 240000.00 to 240000.99, 240001.00 to 240001.99, null) 2. Unique alarm number (identifier) at alarm source (000 to 999, null) 3. Alarm condition (A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded) 4. Alarm acknowledge state (A=acknowledged, V=not acknowledged) 5. Alarm description text (alphanumeric) ARC - Alert command refused
$**ARC,hhmmss.ss,aaa,x.x,x.x,c*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Release time of the alert command refused (000000.00 to 235959.99, 235960.00 to 235960.99, 240000.00 to 240000.99, 240001.00 to 240001.99, null) 2. Used for proprietary alerts, defined by the manufacturer (FEC, null) 3. The alert identifier (0 to 999999) 4. The alert instance (1 to 999999, null) 5. Refused alert command (A=acknowledge, O=responsibility transfer) BBM - AIS broadcast binary message
$**BBM,x,x,x,x,xx,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
12 3 4 5 6 7 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9) 2. Sentence number (1 to 9) 3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9) 4. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message (0 to 3, null) 5. VDL message number, see ITU-R M.1371 (8 or 14, null) 6. Encapsulated data (1 to 63 bytes) 7. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5) DDC - Display dimming control
$**DDC,a,xx,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 1. Display dimming preset (D=Daytime, K=Dusk, N=Nightime) 2. Brightness percentage (00 to 99) 3. Color palette preset (null) 4. Sentences status flag (R) AP-13 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE EVE - General event message
$ **EVE,hhmmss.ss,c--c,c--c*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 1. Event time (000000.00 to 235959.99, 235960.00 to 235960.99, 240000.00 to 240000.99, 240001.00 to 240001.99, null) 2. Tag code used for identification of source of event (six alphanumeric characters, two English characters, four digits) 3. Event description (OPERATION) HBT - Heartbeat supervision sentence
$**HBT,x.x,A,x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 1. Configured repeat interval (60.0(s)) 2. Equipment status (A=Normal) 3. Sequential sequence identifier (0 to 9) OSD- Own ship data
$**OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Heading, degrees true (0.0 to 359.9, null) 2. Heading status (A:data valid, V:data invalid) 3. Vessel course, degrees true (0.0 to 359.9, null) 4. Course reference (B=Bottom tracking log, M=Manually entered, W=Water referenced, R=Radar tracking (of fixed target), P=Positioning system ground reference, null) 5. Vessel speed (0.0 to 99.9, null) 6. Speed reference (B=Bottom tracking log, M=Manually entered, W=Water referenced, R=Radar tracking (of fixed target), P=Positioning system ground reference, null) 7. Vessel set, degrees true, manually entered (0.0 to 359.9, null) 8. Vessel drift (speed), manually entered (0.0 to 19.9, null) 9. Speed units (K=km/h, N=knots, S=statute mile/h, null) RSD - Radar system data
$**RSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 1. Origin 1 range, from own ship (0.000 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9, 1000 to 9999, null)
(see note) 2. Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 (0.0 to 359.9, null) (see note) 3. Variable range marker 1(VRM1), range (0.000 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9, null) 4. Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0 (0.0 to 359.9, null) 5. Origin 2 range (0.000 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9, 1000 to 9999, null) (see note) 6. Origin 2 bearing (0.0 to 359.9, null) (see note) 7. VRM2,.9 range (0.000 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9, null) 8. EBL2, degrees (0.0 to 359.9, null) 9. Cursor range, from own ship (0.000 to 9.999, 10.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9, null) 10. Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0 (0.0 to 359.9, null) 11. Range scale in use (0.125 to 120.0) 12. Range units (K=km, N=NM, S=statute miles, null) 13. Display rotation (C, H, N, null) C=Course-up, course-over-ground up, degrees true H=Head-up, ship's heading(center-line) 0 up N=North-up, true north is 0 up NOTE: Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away from own ship position. AP-14 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE TLB - Target label
$**TLB,x.x,c--c,x.x,c--c,,x.x,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 3 1. Target number n reported by the device (1 to 1023) 2. Label assigned to target n (TT=000 to 999, AIS= 000000001 to 999999999) 3. Additional label pairs TLL - Target latitude and longitude
$**TLL,xx,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Target number (null) 2. Target Latitude (0000.0000 to 9000.0000) 3. Target N/S (N/S) 4. Target Longitude (00000.0000 to 18000.0000) 5. Target E/W (E/W) 6. Target name (null) 7. UTC of data (000000.00 to 235959.99, 235960.00 to 235960.99, 240000.00 to 240000.99, 240001.00 to 240001.99, null) 8. Target status (null) 9. Reference target (null) TTD - Tracked target data
!**TTD,hh,hh,x,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 1. Total hex number of sentences need to transfer the message (h01) 2. Hex sentence number (h01) 3. Sequential message identifier (null) 4. Encapsulated trancked target data (6 bit binary-converted data) 5. Number of fill bits (0 to 5) TTM - Tracked target message
$**TTM,xxx,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15 1. Target number (000 to 999) 2. Target distance from own ship (0.000 to 99.999) 3. Bearing from own ship,degrees (0.0 to 359.9) 4. True or Relative (T) 5. Target speed (0.00 to 999.99, null) 6. Target course, degrees (0.0 to 359.9, null) 7. T=True or R=Relative 8. Distance of closest point of approach (0.00 to 99.99, null) 9. Time to CPA, min., "-" increasing (-99.99 to 99.99, null) 10. Speed/distance units (N=NM, kn) 11. Target name (null) 12. Target status (L: Lost, tracked target has been lost, Q: Query, target in the process of acquisition, T: Tracking) 13. Reference target (R, null) 14. UTC of data (null) 15. Type of acquisition (A=Automatic, M=Manual ) AP-15 APPENDIX 2 DIGITAL INTERFACE VSD - AIS voyage static data
$**VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Type of ship and cargo category (null) 2. Maximum present static draught (0 to 25.5 meters, null) 3. Persons on-board (0 to 8191, null) 4. Destination (1 to 20 characters, null) 5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination (000000.00 to 235959.99, 246000.00, null) 6. Estimated day of arrival at destination (UTC) (00 to 31, null) 7. Estimated month of arrival at destination (UTC) (00 to 12, null) 8. Navigational status (0 to 15, null) 9. Regional application flags (null) AP-16
A-1
A-2
C3616-Z01-B
A-3 03FS-X-9856 -0 1/1 A-4
O U T L I N E DESCRIPTION/CODE Q'TY XN24AF N A M E UNIT ANTENNA ANTENNA INSTALLATION MATERIALS INSTALLATION MATERIALS XN24AF 008-487-120 CP03-19101 008-487-130 1 1
DIMENSIONS IN DRAWING FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
1 2 | User Manual 9 | Users Manual | 4.60 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
P RRSB-131N A C K I N G L I S T
A-17 P RRSB-131I A C K I N G L I S T
A-18
DIMENSIONS IN DRAWING FOR REFERENCE ONLY. DIMENSIONS IN DRAWING FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
03ID-X-9851 -1 1/1
RSB-139-122/-N/-HK A-19
A-20 N A M E O U T L I N E DESCRIPTION/CODE Q'TY UNIT
INSTALLATION MATERIALS SCANNER UNIT INSTALLATION MATERIALS INSTALLATION MATERIALS INSTALLATION MATERIALS DOCUMENT ANTENNA HOIST INSTRUCTIONS RSB-139-122*
000-036-616-00 CP03-38700
CP03-38701 001-548-440-00 CP03-38702 001-548-450-00 CP03-38703 001-548-460-00 C32-01805-*
000-196-329-1*
1 1 1 1 1
CODE NUMBER ENDING WITH "**" INDICATES THE CODE NUMBER OF REPRESENTATIVE MATERIAL. DIMENSIONS IN DRAWING FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
A-21
A-22
A-23
A-24
A-25
A-26
A-27
A-28
A-30
A-32
03ID-X-9853 -1 1/1 RCU-031-J/-E A-29 N A M E O U T L I N E DESCRIPTION/CODE Q'TY UNIT CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION MATERIALS KB KB FIXTURE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION MATERIALS RCU-031-*
000-036-588-00
CP10-09601 001-537-900-00 CP03-33202 001-115-510-00 1 1 1
CODE NUMBER ENDING WITH "**" INDICATES THE CODE NUMBER OF REPRESENTATIVE MATERIAL. DIMENSIONS IN DRAWING FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
A-31
A-34
A-33
A-36
A-35
A-37
A-38
A-39
A-40
A-41
A-42
A-43
A-44
A-45
A-46
A-47
A-48
A-49
A-50
A-51
A-52
A-53
A-54
A-55
A-56
A-57
A-58
A-59
A-60
A-61
A-62
A-63
A-64
A-65
A-66
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9
1 2 | Internal Photos 1 | Internal Photos | 2.19 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
1 2 | Internal Photos 2 | Internal Photos | 2.99 MiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
1 2 | External Photos | External Photos | 939.06 KiB | May 21 2021 / November 15 2021 | delayed release |
1 2 | Label | ID Label/Location Info | 232.26 KiB | May 21 2021 / May 24 2021 |
Labotech International Document number: LIC 01-20-056 Date of issue: 26 February 2021 Identification of Equipment for MARINE RADAR ANTENNA UNIT, Transceiver RTR-129
(FCC Rule, 2.925) 1 ID Label FCC ID: ADB9ZWRTR129 The following nameplate is permanently fixed on the corresponding equipment unit. Material of Nameplate: PET50S+PET25-O-F1, 75 m thick 2 ID Label Location ID Label End of text ID Label is affixed to the rear cover. Form: Q053/01
- Page 1 of 1 -
1 2 | C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 82.44 KiB | June 26 2023 |
16, June 2023 Dear Sir or Madam, I, Bill Haynes of Furuno USA Inc, hereby request to add Part 90 authorization to FCC IDs:
1. ADB9ZWRTR100, 2. ADB9ZWRTR101, 3. ADB9ZWRTR105, 4. ADB9ZWRTR106, 5. ADB9ZWRTR107, 6. ADB9ZWRTR115, 7. ADB9ZWRTR119, 8. ADB9ZWRTR122, 9. ADB9ZWRTR125, 10. ADB9ZWRTR126, 11. ADB9ZWRTR129, which are currently approved under Part 80 and we apply permission change to add Part 90. Sincerely, Company Officer: Bill Haynes Tel.: 360-833-5047 Email: bhaynes@furuno.coml:
1 2 | Covered Equipment Attestation | Attestation Statements | 161.68 KiB | June 26 2023 |
Date: 06-16-2023 To: Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Ref: Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(5)(i) and Part 2.911(d)(5)(ii) Filing Re. KDB 986446 D01 FCC IDs:
1. (ADB9ZWRTR100, 2. ADB9ZWRTR101, 3. ADB9ZWRTR105, 4. ADB9ZWRTR106, 5. ADB9ZWRTR107, 6. ADB9ZWRTR115, 7. ADB9ZWRTR119, 8. ADB9ZWRTR122, 9. ADB9ZWRTR125, 10. ADB9ZWRTR126, 11. ADB9ZWRTR129, Dear Sir or Madam, Furuno USA Inc certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. We also certify that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. If you have any questions, please contact us. Sincerely, Contact name: William Haynes Company name: Furuno USA Inc Address: 4400 NW Pacific Rim Blvd. Camas, WA 98607 E-mail: bhaynes@furuno.com Tel: 360-833-5047
1 2 | US Agent of Process Attestation | Attestation Statements | 154.39 KiB | June 26 2023 |
To: Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: 06-16-2023 Ref: Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(7) Filing FCC ID:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. ADB9ZWRTR100, ADB9ZWRTR101, ADB9ZWRTR105, ADB9ZWRTR106, ADB9ZWRTR107, ADB9ZWRTR115, ADB9ZWRTR119, ADB9ZWRTR122, ADB9ZWRTR125, ADB9ZWRTR126, ADB9ZWRTR129, Furuno USA Inc certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, Furuno USA Inc is our designated U.S. agent for service of process for the above referenced FCC ID. Furuno USA Inc accepts to maintain an agent for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Furuno USA Inc accepts, as of the date of the filing of the application, the obligation of the designated U.S. agent for service of process for the above referenced FCC IDs. Designated U.S. Agent Information:
Name: Furuno USA Inc Address: 4400 NW Pacific Rim Blvd. Contact Person: William Haynes Tel.: 360-833-5047 Email: bhaynes@furuno.com FRN: 0005903604 Sincerely,
[Insert U.S. agent company name]
(U.S. agent company name printed name) Rev 1/26/2023 Furuno USA Inc Furuno USA Inc
(U.S. agent company name signature)
[Insert applicant name]
(Applicant printed name)
(Applicant signature) Furuno USA Inc William Haynes Rev 1/26/2023
1 2 | Agents Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 147.64 KiB | May 21 2021 / May 24 2021 |
4400 N.W. Pacific Rim Boulevard, Camas, Washington 98607-9408, U.S.A. Phone: +1 360-834-9300 Fax: +1 360-834-9400 www.furunousa.com 26, April 2021 TUV SUD BABT TCB/FCB Octagon House, Segensworth Road, Fareham, Hampshire, PO15 5RL Dear Sir or Madam, I, Shane Ryan of Furuno USA Inc , hereby authorize Akira Yamamoto and Hiroyasu Nakagawa of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd to act as our agent in all matters relating to applications for equipment authorization, including the signing of all documents relating to these matters. This authorization expires on 26 April 2023. Sincerely, Company Officer:
Shane Ryan Telephone Number:
(360) 834-9300 X5060 Email:
sryan@furuno.com
1 2 | Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 29.83 KiB | May 21 2021 / May 24 2021 |
9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, Japan www.furuno.com 26 February 2021 TUV SUD BABT TCB Octagon House, Segensworth Road, Fareham, Hampshire, PO15 5RL Confidentiality Request FCC ID: ADB9ZWRTR129 Internal Photos External Photos User Manual Test Set-up Photographs Pursuant to Sections 0.457(d)(1)(ii) and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, Furuno USA Inc hereby requests permanent confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
Schematics Bill of Materials/Parts List Block Diagrams Theory of Operation (Description of Circuitry and Devices) Furuno USA Inc also hereby requests short-term confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below for a period of 180 days:
The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457(d)(1)(ii), disclosure of this Application and all accompanying materials will not be made before the date of the Grant for this Application. Yours sincerely, Company Officer: Akira Yamamoto Telephone Number: +81(0)798-63-1216 Email: akira.yamamoto@furuno.co.jp
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2023-06-26 | 3020 ~ 3080 | MRD - Marine Radar | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2021-05-24 | 3020 ~ 3080 | MRD - Marine Radar | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2023-06-26
|
||||
1 2 |
2021-05-24
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Furuno USA Inc
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005903604
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
4400 NW Pacific Rim Blvd.
|
||||
1 2 |
Camas, Washington 98607
|
|||||
1 2 |
Camas, WA
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
j******@tuvsud.com
|
||||
1 2 |
a******@tuvsud.com
|
|||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
B3: Maritime & Aviation Radio Services equipment in 47 CFR parts 80 & 87
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
ADB
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
9ZWRTR129
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
B******** H********
|
||||
1 2 |
S****** R****
|
|||||
1 2 | Title |
Deep Sea Product Manager
|
||||
1 2 |
Type Acceptance / Commerical Service
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
888-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
888-8******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
360-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
b******@furuno.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
s******@furuno.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 | Yes | |||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 | Yes | |||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 11/15/2021 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | MRD - Marine Radar | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Transceiver unit for the radar sensor | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power listed is Peak Rated Output Power. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s) including antenna co-location requirements of Section 1.1307(b)(3). C2PC to add Rule Part 90. | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is Peak Rated Output Power. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s) including antenna co-location requirements of Section 1.1307(b)(3). | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Labotech International Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
F**** U******
|
||||
1 2 |
Y******** H********
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+81 7********
|
||||
1 2 |
f******@labotech-intl.co.jp
|
|||||
1 2 |
y******@labotech-intl.co.jp
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 80,9 | 3020 | 3080 | 60000 | 0.15 % | 55M8P0N | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 80,9 | 3020 | 3080 | 60000 | 0.15 % | 56M7P0N | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 8 | 3020 | 3080 | 60000 | 0.15 % | 55M8P0N | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 8 | 3020 | 3080 | 60000 | 0.15 % | 56M7P0N |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC